CONTRACT NO. IH-17-013 PWP NO. CL-2018-210
BID DOCUMENT
VOLUME TWO OF TWO
T1-BRIDGE/ROTUNDA HVAC AHU REPLACEMENT
McCARRAN INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT LAS VEGAS, NEVADA
MAY 21, 2018
McCARRAN INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT DEPARTMENT OF AVIATION CLARK COUNTY, NEVADA McCARRAN INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT CLARK COUNTY, NEVADA
T1-BRIDGE/ROTUNDA HVAC AHU REPLACEMENT
McCARRAN INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT LAS VEGAS, NEVADA
EXHIBIT “E” - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - TABLE OF CONTENTS
ITEM DESCRIPTION
DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL
DIVISION 15050 – BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 15051 – MOTORS AND VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES DIVISION 15055 – MOTORS DIVISION 15060 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS DIVISION 15065 – ENGINEERED EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SUPPORTS DIVISION 15072 – VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT DIVISION 15073 – VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT DIVISION 15074 – VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT DIVISION 15075 – MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION DIVISION 15080 – MECHANICAL INSULATION DIVISION 15083 – HVAC INSULATION DIVISION 15110 – VALVES DIVISION 15124 – EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING DIVISION 15127 – METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING DIVISION 15181 – HYDRONIC PIPING DIVISION 15189 – HVAC WATER TREATMENT DIVISION 15410 – PLUMBING FIXTURES DIVISION 15741 – MULTI-ZONE PACKAGED INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS DIVISION 15763 – FAN COIL UNITS DIVISION 15790 – AIR COILS DIVISION 15815 – METAL DUCTS DIVISION 15820 – DUCT ACCESSORIES DIVISION 15838 – POWER VENTILATORS DIVISION 15855 – DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES DIVISION 15861 – AIR FILTERS DIVISION 15890 – AIR DUCT CLEANING DIVISION 15950 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING DIVISION 15995 – COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 16010 – BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 16047 – ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION DIVISION 16051 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL DIVISION 16073 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DIVISION 16075 – ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION DIVISION 16120 – CONDUCTORS AND CABLES DIVISION 16130 – RACEWAYS AND BOXES DIVISION 16410 – ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS DIVISION 16443 – MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
Contract No. IH-17-013 Table of Contents Bid Document Exhibit “E” - Technical Specifications May 21, 2018 Page 1 of 1 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 08310 – Access Doors and Frames 2. Section 09900 – Painting 3. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Grout. 8. Mechanical demolition. 9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 10. Painting and finishing. 11. Concrete bases. 12. Supports and anchorages.
1.3 CODES
A. Regulatory compliance: All work performed under this Division shall comply with the latest currently adopted editions of all Codes and Regulations.
B. Minimum requirements: The requirements of these Specifications are the minimum that will be allowed, unless such requirements are exceeded by applicable Codes and Regulations, in which case the Code and Regulation requirement shall govern.
C. Code Changes: Should Codes change between time of proposal and date of permit issue, hold the Owner free from additional expenses resulting from such Code changes when the delays in acquiring the permits are not caused by Owner.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 1 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.4 PERMITS, LICENSES AND INSPECTIONS
A. Permits: Pay for all permits required by work under this Division.
B. Inspections: All work shall be regularly inspected by the authority having jurisdiction. Certificates of approval shall be delivered to the Owner's Representative. Be responsible for notifying the authority having jurisdiction when work is ready for inspection.
1.5 REFERENCES
A. References made herein, or in any of the other Mechanical Sections to Standards, Codes, Specifications or recommendations of various technical societies trade organizations, or governmental agencies are to the edition in effect at the time of the proposal, including all addenda.
1.6 ABBREVIATIONS
A. AABC Associated Air Balance Council ADC American Distribution Council AFI Air Filter Institute AGI American Gas Association AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association ANSI American National Standards Institute ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society of Testing Materials AWS American Welding Society CTI Cooling Tower Institute FM Factory Mutual IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers MSS Manufacturer's Standardization Society NEC National Electric Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors National Association UBC Uniform Building Code UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 2 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
UL Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. USDA United States Department of Agriculture
1.7 DEFINITIONS
Terms used herein and in the individual Mechanical Sections of the Specifications are defined as follows:
A. This Division: The Mechanical Division of the Specifications; a portion of the Specifications that includes all the Sections of Division 15.
B. Individual Mechanical Section: Any one of the Sections of the Specifications listed under Division 15.
C. Other Divisions: The portion of the Specifications that does not include the various Sections of Division 15.
D. Concealed: Hidden from sight as in trenches, chases, hollow construction or above furred spaces, or exposed to view in tunnels, attics, shafts or crawl spaces that are used solely for maintenance and repair.
E. Exposed: Not concealed as defined above.
F. Riser: A vertical pipe or duct having a vertical length greater than one story height.
G. Drop: A vertical pipe or duct that does not penetrate a floor.
H. Up-feed Connection: A vertical pipe or duct that penetrates a floor, but has vertical length of less than one story height.
I. Header: A pipe or duct of constant size that serves a battery of closely spaced inlet or outlet connections.
J. Piping: Includes pipe or tubing, fittings, valves, hangers, insulation, and all devices that make up a system.
K. Unfinished Space:
1. A room or space that is ordinarily accessible only to building maintenance personnel. 2. A room that has exposed and unpainted construction for walls, floor and ceiling. 3. A room specifically mentioned as "unfinished" in the program.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 3 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, make submittals in accordance with Contract requirements.
B. Substitute Products and Equipment shall not be submitted unless they are pre-approved, in accordance with Contract requirements. Such submittals will be rejected and the Contractor will be required to submit on products and equipment specified and scheduled on the drawings. Additionally, Contractor will be held responsible for any delays to the completion of the project due to his failure to secure timely approval of submittals.
C. Submittals related to one section in this Division of the Specifications shall be bound together and submitted simultaneously; partial submittals covering less than one section will not be checked, except partial submittals of shop drawings may be made. Furnish index and name tabs.
D. Include performance curves on all pumps and fans rated over 3 HP and curves or tables for smaller units. For fans and pumps operating in parallel, system curves with equipment operation in stages shall be included. Any deviations from specified equipment shall be clearly noted in green or black, and such deviations shall be noted in the Contractor's transmittal letter.
E. The Contractor shall cross-check shop drawings of ductwork, piping and equipment against each other and against the contract drawings to avoid interferences and coordinate the work.
F. Two additional copies of HVAC systems final corrected shop drawings and product data submission shall be furnished one labeled "For the Test and Balance Agency", and the second labeled "For OWNER Use".
G. Prepare shop drawings showing the location and size of all pipe and duct penetrations through beams, joists or floors if any will be required in order to install the piping and ductwork in the spaces shown on the contract drawings, check these against the structural drawing; submit drawings to the Owner.
H. Sleeve and Insert Layout Drawing: Prepare and check drawings to show the size and locations of sleeves and openings for piping and ducts and the location of concrete inserts for support of piping, ducts and mechanical equipment, except for any sleeves that penetrate shear walls, beams or joints. Submittals are not required.
I. Product data submittals shall be made on the following items specified under Division 15:
1. All items with the manufacturers specified.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 4 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
2. All items with motors or electrical equipment or burners or automatic controls. 3. Valves and stops. 4. Pipe and fittings. 5. Plumbing fixtures, fittings and trim; plumbing equipment.
1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Refer to Applicable Contract requirements.
B. In addition to Contract requirements, comply with the following. In the event of conflict between Contract requirements and the requirements in this Section, this Section governs.
C. Products and Equipment specified/scheduled on the drawings with the manufacturer’s names and models identified constitutes the basis of design, including performance, acoustical characteristics, fit in the allocated space, service and maintenance clearances, equipment replacement access space, and availability of reliable service at project location. Substitution of products and equipment scheduled on the drawings with products and equipment of another manufacturer, requires prior approval by the Owner.
D. In all cases, substitution requests shall include manufacturers catalog cuts and data sheets, all of the pertinent data specific to this project in the form of a matrix, with a complete comparison of proposed substitute product or equipment to that scheduled on the drawings. It shall also include all of the information which proves the substitute to be equal to or better than the scheduled product or equipment including availability of reliable service at project location. Additionally, any substitution requests for equipment shall include 1/4"1'-0" scale layouts of the proposed substitute equipment in plan, elevation and end view complete with piping and ductwork hookups as applicable, to prove equipment fit in allocated spaces, service and maintenance clearances and equipment replacement access spaces.
E. Failure to comply with these requirements will result in immediate rejection of substitution request.
F. All substitution requests will be reviewed by the Owner. Owner’s rejection of a substitution request shall be final and the Contractor shall be required to furnish the products and equipment scheduled on the drawings.
1.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. As-builts: At completion of work, submit reproducible drawings of all Mechanical systems showing installed locations of piping, ductwork and equipment; shall be mylars of contract drawings, modified as-built conditions.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 5 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
B. Mark the actual installed depths (invert elevations) of all buried piping and show the measured horizontal distances from permanent features such as building walls on record drawings; mark all changes in the location of piping, ducts and equipment in accordance with Section - "Project Record Documents".
1.11 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Provide manuals as required by General Conditions. Use multiple binders if a single binder would exceed 2-1/2 inches in thickness; arrange the data in the same sequence as the specification sections; delete or mark through extraneous data. Furnish 5 copies of manuals for work in Division 15.
B. Provide tab pages with metal or plastic reinforced holes to separate each major item or closely related group of items with typed item names on the tabs. All data shall be indexed as per the index of the technical specifications. Supply a table of contents at the beginning of each volume listing all items, the manufacturers and the name, address and phone number of the nearest authorized service representative.
C. Manuals shall include the following, in addition to operation, maintenance and lubrication instructions and parts lists:
1. Valve lists for the various piping systems. 2. Equipment performance curves and tables the same as furnished with submittal data. 3. Control diagrams of factory wired equipment. 4. Temperature control system product data and shop drawings. 5. Warranties and guarantees that extend more than 1 year from the date of Substantial Completion bound in Copy 1.
1.12 DRAWINGS
A. The mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and do not show every fitting and detail; all piping systems, duct systems and equipment are intended to be complete; the Contractor shall include in his bid and provide all necessary offsets, connections, supports, fittings, details, materials and labor to complete the work as specified.
1.13 INSTRUCTION OF PERSONNEL
A. The Contractor shall furnish qualified instructors to review the operation and maintenance manuals with the Owner's representatives and instruct them in the operation of maintenance of all mechanical systems. Instructor manhours furnished shall be not less than listed below, plus additional time specified in other sections.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 6 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Plumbing System 8 hours Temperature Control System As specified with controls. HVAC Systems 40 hours. Equipment As specified in specification section.
1.14 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES
A. In addition to the requirements for CORRECTIONS FOR WORK under the GENERAL CONDITIONS, the following requirements apply:
1. Replacement of lost refrigerant and refrigeration compressor oil for one (1) year after the date of substantial completion shall be made by the Contractor without additional charge for equipment supplied under Division 15. 2. Refrigeration motor compressor units smaller than 50 HP shall have 4 year extended warranties effective for the period beginning one year from the date of Substantial Completion. These warranties shall be supplied by the manufacturer, shall not be prorated, and shall provide for the no cost replacement of failed motor compressor units upon delivery to the manufacturer's exchange/replacement distributor. Contractor shall deliver the 4-year extended warranties, properly filled in, with the maintenance manuals.
1.15 SPARE PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS
A. Deliver spare parts to the Owner and obtain receipts at the time operating instructions given to the Owner's personnel.
B. Include the following:
1. V-belts: One complete set of each size. 2. Fuses: Each type used on the project. Quantity 10%, but not less than two. 3. Pilot Light Lamps: Each type used on the project. Quantity of 10%, but not less than two. 4. Special Tools: Furnish special tools required for assembly, adjustment, setting or maintenance of equipment if such tool is not readily available on the commercial tool market. 5. Maintenance Paint: Furnish one can of touch-up paint for each different factory finish which is to be the final finished surface of the product.
1.16 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Vibration criteria.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 7 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1. The maximum vibration of the rotating equipment furnished under these Specifications shall not exceed the following:
RPM Peak-to-Peak Displacement Fans and Motors Mils (0.001 in.) 600 3.0 900 2.0 1200 1.5 1800 1.0 2400 0.5 3600 0.3
2. No amplitude measurement at driving (motor) and driven (such as fan) speeds shall exceed specified values, taking into consideration reduced valves for equipment installed on inertial blocks.
3. No axial vibration shall exceed maximum radial (perpendicular to shaft) vibration at any bearing or measuring location. a. The Contractor shall correct excessive vibration at no cost to Owner.
B. Ductwork and piping shall be provided with seismic restraints in accordance with the "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems", and in accordance with local codes. Equipment shall be secured to the concrete floors with anchor bolts or cinch anchors. Suspended equipment shall have a minimum of two diagonal braces. Submit shop drawings of proposed restraints, anchors and braces for approval prior to fabrication.
1.17 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Welding: Before any pipe welding is performed, the Contractor shall submit a copy of his Welding Procedure Specification together with the Procedure Qualification Record as required by the American Welding Society Standard AWS D10.9-80 Specification for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing, or Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
1. Acceptance Requirements AR-3 level shall apply to: a. Hot water heating piping operating below 240°F and 160 psi. b. Chilled water and cooling water piping. c. Gas piping below 5 psig.
B. Inspection, examination and testing of welds:
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 8 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Unless more stringent requirements are specified in other sections of the specifications all welds in piping specified to be in accordance with the ASME code for Building Services Piping, ANSI/ASME B31.9 shall be inspected, examined and tested as specified in Chapter VI of that code, which requires visual examination of welds.
C. Brazing: Brazing of copper tubing shall be done in accordance with the standards of the American Welding Society or the Copper Development Association. Copper Tube Handbook Instruction on Brazing.
D. Soldering: Soldering of copper tubing shall be done in accordance with the Copper Development Association Copper Tube Handbook instruction on Joining and Forming Copper Tube, Soldered Joints.
1.18 VOLTAGE VERIFICATION
A. Before furnishing electric motors, heaters and other equipment that includes electrically operated components, the Contractor shall verify that the voltage, phase and Hertz ratings conform to the electrical characteristics of the circuits shown for the equipment on the Electrical Drawings.
1.19 OUTLET LOCATION CHANGES
A. The Owner reserves the right to change the location of any outlet, pipe, drain, fixture, or diffuser as much as ten (10) feet from the location shown on the Drawings without additional cost to the Owner, provided the change is made before the roughing work has been installed. In case location changes are required, the Owner will provide the Contractor with written instructions.
1.20 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE FOR EQUIPMENT START-UP
A. The Contractor shall arrange to have the manufacturers of all major items of equipment perform start-up and check-out service and shall provide a letter from each manufacturer. The letters shall be on the manufacturer's letterhead, shall list the equipment, shall certify that the equipment has been examined, that it has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions, started up, adjusted and checked out in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and is operating properly. The letter(s) shall be addressed to the Owner and shall be signed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer(s). The equipment checked and certified shall be all items in the following list or specified in other sections to have manufacturer's start-up service:
1. Fans 2. Air Handling Units 3. All other major equipment
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 9 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.21 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Sleeves and Inserts: Provide all sleeves, inserts and openings necessary for the installation of the Division 15 work.
B. Openings:
1. Special forming, recesses, chases and curbs, as necessary for the proper reception and installation of the mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings will be provided in the structure under other Divisions. 2. The Contractor shall examine all drawings to ascertain that proper provisions have been made for the work. If such provisions are not made in time, the Contractor shall bear all extra costs incurred in later cutting and patching to accommodate this work.
1.22 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
C. Equipment, piping and ductwork shall be stored at least six inches off the ground and/or floor on blocking racks and kept clean.
1.23 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 10 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers listed with the product descriptions.
2.2 REDUCERS
A. Provide reducing fittings at all points where pipe changes size. In vertical lines standard concentric reducing fittings or couplings shall be used. Horizontal water lines shall have eccentric fittings or couplings installed so that the top side of the pipe shall continue in the same plane.
2.3 BUSHINGS AND REDUCING COUPLINGS
A. Bushings and reducing couplings are prohibited. Reducing fittings must be used.
2.4 PIPE SLEEVES
A. All pipes passing through non load bearing masonry construction which is not core drilled shall be fitted with sleeves. Each sleeve shall extend through its respective floor, wall or partition and shall be cut flush with each surface unless otherwise required. Sleeves shall be two pipe sizes larger than the pipe when the pipe is uninsulated and of sufficient size to allow for the covering without binding when the pipe is insulated.
B. Sleeves in masonry walls, floors and partitions and in air handling unit walls shall be 10 gage galvanized steel pipe finished with smooth edges.
1. Two wall plates (1/4-inch steel) shall be provided for each air handling unit penetration; one plate shall be welded to the sleeve; the second plate shall be bolted to the first "sandwiching" the siding.
C. For other than masonry partitions in which openings were not core drilled, and through suspended ceilings, and for concealed vertical piping, sleeves shall be 22-gauge galvanized steel, flush with ceiling or partition.
D. All sleeves shall be securely anchored.
1. Annular space between floor and wall sleeves and pipes shall be sealed with Dow Corning 3 6548 silicone RTV foam, 3M fire barrier caulk, packed mineral wool, a "Link Seal", or approved equal. 2. Floor sleeves shall extend 1 inch above the finished floor. 3. Where pipes pass through sleeves and framed openings in water-proofed floors and walls, they shall be flashed and made watertight.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 11 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
4. Sleeves through exterior walls below grade and through air handling unit walls shall be fitted with a "link seal" between the pipe and the sleeve forming a watertight and airtight installation. 5. For sleeves through acoustical walls, floors or ceilings, the annular space shall be packed with sealing material furnished under "Vibration Control" Section. 6. When holes through existing concrete floors are core bored, sleeves will not be required except in rooms having floor drains. 7. Insulation on piping passing through pipe sleeves or guides shall be protected by galvanized sheet metal shields around circumference of insulation. Insulation on pipe passing through fire or smoke barriers shall stop at the barrier and the void space shall be filled with an approved material to maintain fire rating. Refer to Division 7 "Fire Stopping" Section for installation instructions.
2.5 LINK SEALS
A. Provide a sealing element made of synthetic rubber material, compounded to resist aging, ozone, sunlight, water and chemical action and having a low temperature flexibility and resistance to high temperature environments. Elements shall be suitable for temperature ranges of minus 100 deg. F to 600 deg. F.
B. Bolts and metal parts shall be made of carbon steel and zinc phosphate plated to resist corrosion. Pressure plates shall be cathodic-type made of plastic.
C. The seal shall be constructed so as to be air tight in aboveground installation, and to provide watertight sealing in below grade installation.
D. Seals shall be manufactured by Thunderline Corporation or approved equal.
2.6 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING PLATES
A. Where pipes pass into a finished space or through a suspended ceiling, provide chrome plated, brass, iron or steel escutcheon plates. Where necessary to cover beads of fittings, special deep escutcheons shall be provided. Where pipe sleeves extend above a finished floor, a floor plate having a deep recess shall be used. Where pipes are insulated, plate shall be large enough for insulation to pass through the plate.
B. Escutcheon plates for piping 2 inches and smaller shall be one piece, held to the pipe by round head set screws or fastened securely to the building construction. Spring clips on wall and ceiling plates will not be acceptable.
C. Escutcheon plates for piping between 2 1/2 inches and 6 inches shall be 2-piece split ring type chrome plated floor or ceiling covers which shall be securely fastened to the building structure.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 12 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
D. Escutcheon plates for piping over 6 inches shall be heavy gauge stainless (painted) steel with edges bent to form a chamfered appearance and pipe openings cut. Escutcheons shall be rectangular in shape with no larger than a 3-inch border between the edge of the pipe (covering) and the edge of the plate. The escutcheon plate may be built for more than one pipe opening if required. The escutcheon plate shall be securely fastened to the building structure.
2.7 STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. Provide all materials, equipment, supplies and labor necessary to construct all structural steel required for supporting piping, ductwork and equipment and miscellaneous steel work shown on the Drawings; as herein specified, or as may be required for installation of the HVAC system.
B. All structural steel is not shown on the Drawings. Whether structural steel is shown or not shown on the drawings, it shall be provided. The Contractor shall confirm all structural steel sizes which are not shown on the drawings.
C. Structural steel shall be provided in the following locations:
1. Where loadings in excess of those shown in "Inserts and Fasteners" article in this Section are encountered. 2. For all air handling units with steam coils which should be mounted a minimum of 30 inches above the finished floor. Refer to details on the drawings. 3. For all ceiling mounted air handling units. 4. For all ceiling mounted fan coil units and cabinet heaters. 5. For all piping and ductwork mounted below a roof with metal deck construction. 6. For all piping and ductwork mounted under a floor with cellular metal deck construction. 7. For all pipe supports for piping 8 inches in diameter and larger. 8. At the bottom of all pipe risers 6 inches in diameter and larger. 9. For all pipe anchors and pipe guides. 10. For all pipe racks. 11. For all pipe hangers which are not listed or shown in reputable pipe hanger manufacturer catalogues or shown in the latest issue of MSS SP69. 12. For all catwalks and platforms.
D. All structural steel shall be designed to attach to the main building structure in such a manner as to not over stress this structure. Reinforcement of the building structure may be required in work areas located in existing buildings; reinforcement of the existing structure under the base contract will not be required unless specifically called for on the drawings. In areas where the Contractor has relocated ductwork, piping, and equipment
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 13 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
to areas other than is shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall bear all costs of additional reinforcement which may be required. Refer to the "Inserts and Fasteners" article in this Section for further requirements.
E. Structural design shall be provided through the Contractor by a Civil or Structural Engineer who is registered in the State of Nevada. Refer to "Engineered Equipment and Piping Supports" Section for further requirements.
F. Details of all structural steel shall be provided in shop drawing format. All structural steel shop drawings shall be stamped by the Contractor's design Engineer prior to submittal.
G. The design, materials, fabrication and erection shall conform to "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" of the American Institute of Steel Construction, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges", of the American Institute of Steel Construction, and also, when applicable, shall conform to the "Code for Welding Building Construction" of the American Welding Society. H. The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting and patching the existing fireproofing when connecting new miscellaneous steel to the building structure.
2.8 INSERTS AND FASTENERS
A. This article establishes the minimum standards for the work; where field conditions differ from given standards, use the method best suited to the condition, subject to the approval of the Owner. In general, inserts and fasteners shall comply with MSS SP69, ASHRAE or SMACNA requirements. The Contractor is responsible for the inserts and fasteners needed for the installation of his work.
B. Inserts and fasteners are required for hangers, supports, anchors, guides, braces, angle clips, brackets, platforms, catwalk, controls, operators, and for electrical devices, boxes, cabinets, equipment and fixtures.
C. Threaded, horizontally adjustable inserts for new cast in place concrete floor slabs and walls shall be malleable iron or galvanized steel. Inserts shall be accurately located before floor or wall is poured. Use the type of insert best suited to the item to be supported, and in number and size needed to carry the load. Size inserts on the basis of the manufacturer's published working load. Where multiple inserts are needed, space inserts on 12-inch minimum centers, and connect with steel angles and locking bolts.
D. For masonry walls and concrete walls, provide galvanized J bolts set during wall construction.
E. Use J hook fasteners in steel stud partitions and fit with lock washers and nuts. Hook fastener to a stud flange abutting the supported item or where a flange is not available,
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 14 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
hook fastener to a steel brace welded or bolted to the studs. Toggle bolts will not be permitted.
F. In wood stud partitions, lag screw fasteners to backing boards attached to the studs. Locate lag screws near center of backing board span. Light weight items may be attached with wood screws. Do not attach any item directly to the wood studs.
G. Where roof deck material (for example, metal decking) is not suitable for anchoring supports, provide additional structural steel to span between roof structural members.
H. Use lead shield, cadmium plated expansion bolts for supports or fasteners in all in place concrete. Inserts shall be placed during construction, but when inadvertently omitted or when required in existing construction, the following provisions shall apply. Do not load expansion bolts more than 20% of their ultimate design capacity, or more than 200 pounds per bolt, whichever is less. For loads between 200 and 400 pounds, connect expansion bolts, spaced not less than 12-inch centers, with steel angles and locking bolts.
I. Anchor bolts for connection of brackets to existing brick or clay tile walls shall be Hilti HIT Renovation Anchor System or approved equal using a two-part polyester resin adhesive in conjunction with galvanized metal screens and all-thread rods. Provide rods of the sizes shown on the plans. Install rods in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Allow proper curing times prior to loading the bolts.
J. Anchor bolts for equipment anchor bolts in concrete (where used) shall be Hilti HIT Renovation Anchor System or approved equal using a two-part polyester resin adhesive in conjunction with pre-drilled anchor bolt holes and all-thread rods. Provide rods of the sizes required by the equipment. Install rods in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Allow proper curing times prior to loading the bolts.
K. When shown on the plans, use "bolt and bearing plate support". A bolt shall extend through the slab and shall be welded to a bearing plate. In finished areas, bearing plates shall be set flush with the concrete slab. Do not use bolt and bearing plate method unless approved by the Owner.
L. The Contractor is cautioned that he is to apply extreme care in placement of inserts in cellular decks. DAMAGE TO WIREWAYS THROUGH MISPLACEMENT OF INSERTS WILL NOT BE TOLERATED. The Contractor shall be responsible for repairing wireway including removal of burrs inside wireway and for replacement of all wire laid within if damage occurs. It would therefore be prudent for the Contractor to install as many inserts as possible prior to the installation of concrete on the floor slab and prior to the floor fireproofing or to use tabs provided on cellular deck. Provide structural steel to span wireway portion of deck when inserts are omitted.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 15 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
M. When installing inserts and fasteners into the floor structure above, limit loads to 250 pounds per flute in the metal decking between supporting floor joists. Loads in excess of this amount must be supported by miscellaneous structural steel. For example, in order to meet this criteria, unsupported pipe spans for 6" pipes carrying water must be reduced to 12 feet to limit loading to 400 pounds (using two flutes).
N. Limit loads on bar joists shall be provided by a structural engineer licensed in the State of Nevada, contracted by the Contractor. Do not apply loads to more than two adjacent joists. Attach miscellaneous steel to the joists mechanically. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT WELD ON BAR JOISTS.
O. Limit floor loadings to 250 pounds per location and not more than 20 pounds per square foot as determined by a radius around the load point, i.e., (2) 250-pound hangers could only be located as close as 4 feet apart.
P. Do not attach fasteners to the metal roof decking material; provide miscellaneous steel.
Q. When loads in excess of these amounts are encountered, connect loads to the main structure of the building if possible or to miscellaneous steel which is attached to the building structure. R. Fasteners to the building structure shall be connected by bolting. Bolt holes shall be drilled or bored and not burned. No welding or burning shall be permitted on existing structural steel which is to remain in place.
S. Fasteners to the building structure shall be connected by welding. The Contractor shall submit details for approval of all proposed attachments to the underside of beams and to other tension members which are not shown on the Drawings.
T. When connecting to the existing building's steel structure, the Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting and patching of the existing fireproofing protecting the structure.
U. Refer to Section 15060 "Hangers and Supports" for further requirements.
2.9 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. Pipe connections to all pumps, chillers, air handling units, and to the other equipment as shown on the Drawings shall be made with flexible pipe connections.
B. Flexible pipe connectors are furnished under Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" and are to be installed under this Section of the Specification.
2.10 PIPE FLASHING
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 16 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Pipe openings for individual small-bore pipes in roof shall be flashed and counter flashed watertight. Flashing shall be sheet copper. Counter flashing (20 ounces) copper shall be secured to the vent pipe.
B. Pipe openings for large bore pipes and for multiple small-bore pipes shall be provided with pipe portals; refer to Roof Curbs, Pipe Portals and Equipment Rails Article in this section for further requirements.
2.11 ROOF CURBS, PIPE PORTALS, AND EQUIPMENT RAILS
A. The Contractor shall provide prefabricated roof curbs at all duct openings. Curbs shall be of box section design, 18 gauge galvanized steel with continuous welded corner seams, factory installed wood nailer and insulated with 1 1/2 inch, 3 pound density rigid fiberglass board. Height of curb to be determined in field (15" minimum); curb shall be Roof Products Systems (RPS) Type RC 2A or approved equal by Pate, ThyCurb, Custom Curb or Confab.
B. The Contractor shall provide pipe portals where piping penetrates a roof. Pipe portal cover shall be a laminated acrylic coated ABS plastic with pre-punched mounting holes and molded sealing ring on 8 inch collared opening and an EPDM compression molded rubber cap; portals shall be RPS, Type N28 or approved equal by Pate, ThyCurb, Custom Curb or Confab.
C. The Contractor shall provide all roof mounted equipment items such as air handling units and roof exhaust fans with factory built roof curbs which are furnished by the respective equipment manufacturers. Retrofit curbs used for adapting a new unit to an existing opening shall be ThyCurb Retro-Mate, Custom Curb Adapta-Curb, or approved equal. Refer to Division 15 for curbs requiring vibration isolators.
D. The Contractor shall provide equipment rails to support roof mounted equipment items which are not furnished with factory built curbs. The rails shall be 18 gauge galvanized steel, monolithic construction, with integral base plate, continuous welded corners, wood nailer with 18 gauge galvanized steel counter flashing. All equipment rails shall be designed and rated for the loads which will be applied to them. Height of curb to be determined in field (15" minimum). Equipment rails shall be RPS, Type ER2A or approved equal by Pate, ThyCurb, Custom Curb or Confab.
E. Openings will generally be provided in the General Construction work by the appropriate trades. If such openings are not shown on the drawings or are not provided due to lack of coordination on the Contractor's part, these openings shall be provided at the Contractor’s expense. Refer to the "Openings and Chases" article in this Section for further requirements.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 17 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
G. Grillage beams for cooling towers and for roof-mounted air handling units shall be furnished under the General Construction section.
2.12 PITCH POCKETS
A. Provide pitch pockets for all piping, except vent piping and piping in roof portals as indicated on drawings.
B. Pitch pockets shall be constructed of 22-gauge steel and attached to roof deck. Pitch pockets shall project 8 inches above the finished roof surface. Pocket shall be packed with shredded oakum and the top 3 inches filled to overflowing with hot asphalt.
2.13 ELECTROLYSIS CONTROL
A. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
B. In all cases where pipe connections are made to piping or any items of equipment of dissimilar metal, provide a brass nipple, minimum 6” long and brass coupling with isolation brass ball valve upstream.
2.14 SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT DRAINS A. A valve type drain shall be installed at the base of each riser, at system low points including down feed branch piping, and where structural conditions make it necessary to create water traps.
B. Piping and system drains shall be a Conbraco, heavy pattern, No. 31 200 or approved equal hose bibb or 1/2 inch ball as specified for the service valve with ½-inch hose nipple. Provide each drain with cap and safety chain.
C. All terminal equipment devices and coils installed shall be properly equipped with drain off valves. Drain off valves shall be 300 psig WOG working pressure, ¼-inch NPT male outlet, brass drain cock or ball valve. Drain off valve discharge piping shall extend to a coil condensate drain pan or to a convenient location for easy collection of the water in a bucket or suitable receptacle.
2.15 COIL CONDENSATE DRAINS
A. All coil condensate drains shall drain by gravity to a floor sink or drain, janitors closet slop sink, or safe waste receptacle.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 18 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
B. Coil condensate drains for air handling units shall include a deep seal trap. The depth of the trap shall be as follows:
1. For blow through coils, the discharge from the trap shall be at the same elevation as the inlet to the trap or lower. The depth of the trap as measured from the bottom of the trap to the discharge shall be equal to or greater than the static pressure of the supply fan plus 2 inches. 2. For draw through coils, the discharge from the trap shall be a minimum of 6 inches lower than the inlet. The depth of the trap shall be a minimum of 3.5 inches below the trap discharge.
C. Each deep seal trap shall be provided with a tee and a vertical cleanout with plug at its inlet.
D. Each air handling unit or terminal equipment device mounted on vibration isolators shall be provided with a 12-inch long nylon or rubber hose connection between the unit and the stationary piping. Hose shall be secured on each end with a stainless-steel draw band.
E. Each air handling unit shall have a minimum of two (2) coil condensate drain connections with deep seal traps.
F. All coil condensate drains shall be constructed of Type L hard copper ASTM Specification B88 with lead free solder joints made up using non-corrosive flux. Fittings shall be solder type wrought or cast copper DWV fittings. Provide cleanouts every 50 feet, at the base of all risers, and at each location where the piping becomes inaccessible.
2.16 DUCT CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING
A. Duct condensate drain piping shall be constructed similarly to coil condensate drain piping.
2.17 IN LINE AIR PURGER
A. Provide In-Line Air Purger as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Purgers shall be designed for in line installation and shall be complete with air vent tapping and drain tapping. Units shall be suitable for a maximum working pressure of 160 psig and constructed of cast iron or steel in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Purgers shall be by Armstrong.
2.18 SYSTEM FILL CONTROL VALVES
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 19 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide an automatic fill water pressure regulating valve for each closed loop hydraulic piping system. Valve size shall be bronze and shall be equal to city water line size or 3/4 inch minimum. Pressure setting for valve shall be adjustable 25 to 75 psig and shall be field adjusted to the static head of the system plus 5 psig or as scheduled on the drawings under expansion tanks.
B. Valve shall be Watts Regulator Company Model U5 standard capacity water regulating valve with integral strainer or approved equal by Cashco, TACO, Bell and Gossett or Armstrong.
2.19 TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES (HYDRONIC)
A. All convertors, water heaters or unfired pressure vessels whose contents are subject to pressure and/or temperature increase shall be provided with temperature and pressure relief valves.
B. The temperature and pressure relief valve shall be ASME approved, set to provide protection at a safe working pressure for the equipment. The discharge of all valves shall be extended to adjacent floor drain or service sink. Relief valves shall be set for the maximum working pressure of the device being protected or 125 psig maximum unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
C. Temperature and pressure relief valves shall be furnished by the manufacturer of the device which is being protected. Temperature and pressure relief valves for the hydronic systems, in general, shall be furnished by the Contractor. Valves shall be as manufactured by Watts Regulator Company or approved equal by Cashco, TACO, Bell and, Gossett or Armstrong.
D. All loose temperature and pressure relief valves shall be installed by the Contractor.
2.20 BALANCING VALVES
A. Provide balancing valves where indicated on the details, where indicated on the plans, and where scheduled on the drawings.
B. Balancing valves shall generally be plug valves except where required on terminal equipment. Balancing valves on terminal equipment shall be combination balancing/shut off valves.
C. Balancing valves for each of the various systems shall be provided in accordance with the following: Service Valve Type Hydronic Coils in Air Handling Units Plug Valve
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 20 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Hydronic Branch Take off Plug Valve Chiller Evaporator Plug Valve Chiller Condenser Plug Valve Cooling Tower Outlet Butterfly Valve with memory stops Chilled Water System Terminal Equipment Automatic Flow Control Valve Hot Water System Terminal Equipment Automatic Flow Control Valve Condenser Water System Terminal Equipment Automatic Flow Control Valve
D. Balancing valves shall generally be installed in the return piping from the terminal device or branch piping circuit.
E. Plug valves, butterfly valves, and ball valves used for balancing service shall be provided with a memory stop.
2.21 COMBINATION BALANCING/SHUT OFF VALVES
A. Combination balancing/shut off valves (Circuit Setters) shall be provided for each terminal device requiring this type of balancing valve.
B. Combination balancing/shut off valves shall be all brass construction, suitable for 125 psig working pressure (non shock), 250 deg. F maximum water temperature and shall be rated for tight shut off.
C. Valves shall include a calibrated bronze balancing device with provisions for connecting a portable differential pressure meter. Where flow characteristics influence the calibration of the device, a method shall be provided to register degree of valve opening. Where required, the setter shall be constructed with internal seat to prevent leakage around the rotating element. Valve shall be provided with a memory stop.
D. The differential pressure meter connections shall be constructed with a built-in check valve and shall include a safety cap. The connection shall be a Schrader fitting for pressure only application or a pressure/temperature test station when P/T plugs are detailed.
E. Valves shall be provided with insulated covers.
F. Valves shall be Bell and Gossett "Circuit Setter Plus" or approved equal by TACO, Armstrong, Tour and Andersson, or Flowset.
2.22 HYDRONIC COMBINATION ASSEMBLIES
A. The use of hydronic combination assemblies which accomplish the same task as specified through the use of individual items specified, in an effort to save installation cost, is encouraged but not required.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 21 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
B. These combination assemblies include the following:
1. Flowset combination venturi/ball valves 2. Handi Ball hook up assemblies which combine unions, strainers, drain valves, manual air vents, test stations etc. into a single assembly. 3. HCi terminators 4. Combination ball valve/unions 5. Combination ball valve with stop and drain service.
C. These do not include the following:
1. Grooved end butterfly valves 2. Victaulic triple duty valve combinations 3. Victaulic tee strainers 4. Victaulic flanges
2.23 SAFETY OR PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
A. Safety or pressure relief valves shall be provided at where indicated on drawings. Valve pressure settings shall be for maximum system setting or as otherwise indicated on the drawings.
B. Safety or pressure relief valves shall be of such size that with a blow off pressure set 6 percent above the normal or 5 psig whichever is greater, pressure valves shall be wide open, and shall relieve the full inlet flow to the valve. Provide valves sized on the actual residual pressure which will exist when the valve discharges. Valves shall bear an ASME label indicating the operational pressure.
2.24 REFRIGERATION VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Anaconda VE/51 Vibration Eliminators constructed of seamless tin bronze or stainless steel hose with copper tube ends. Vibration eliminator shall be rated for 300 psig working pressure. Install isolators in pairs with installation of one unit perpendicular to the second unit.
2.25 SENSING DEVICES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall install all thermometer wells and pressure sensing taps required by the Control Contractor under this section of the Specification. Refer to Division 15, Section "HVAC Controls" for quantities and locations.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 22 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
B. For temperature sensing devices, the Control Contractor will furnish the appropriate thermometer wells required for his equipment. The Contractor will provide the threadolet and install the well.
C. For pressure sensing devices, the Control Contractor will furnish and install the pressure sensing device. Under the direction of the Control Contractor the Contractor will provide the required threadolet pressure tap in the appropriate location. The Contractor will then provide a local isolation valve, ball valve, or gauge cock and any other accessories required and shall connect the sensing port to the sensing device using copper or steel tubing.
2.26 MISCELLANEOUS WORK FOR WATER TREATMENT
A. The Contractor shall provide all sample ports and shall install all chemical treatment equipment which will be required.
B. Each sample port shall consist of a threadolet welded to the pipe, a 1/4 inch pipe nipple, a 1/4 inch gate valve or ball valve and a 1/4 inch discharge line routed to a convenient location where the sample can be collected.
C. The Contractor shall provide all additional isolation valves and piping incidental to the work. Refer to Division 15, Chemical Water Treatment" Section for further requirements.
2.27 STRAINERS
A. Provide "Y" pattern strainers suitable for service pressures and temperatures indicated in the Piping Material Specifications listed at the end of this Section equipped with baskets of perforated brass or 304 stainless steel. Strainer basket area shall have a ratio of free area to pipe size not less than 4 to 1 for pipe sizes up to and including 2-inch and 2-1/2 to 1 ratio for pipe sizes 2-1/2 inch and larger.
1. Strainer manufacturer and figure numbers listed in the Piping Material Specifications are to indicate material and quality required; strainers shall be as manufactured by Leslie, Mueller, Armstrong or Sarco. All strainers over 12 inches in size shall be Mueller. 2. Grooved style Y-pattern strainers by Victaulic or Gustin-Bacon may also be substituted, provided equal pressure ratings and similar materials of construction are used.
B. Provide basket strainers where indicated on Drawings. Basket strainers shall be constructed of cast iron suitable for pressure up to 125 psig and equipped with removable 304 stainless steel basket. Each basket shall be provided with handle; each strainer shall be provided with removable basket cover (with lifting lug for over 75 pounds) and drain plug. Strainer shall be hydrostatically tested for 2.0 times design pressure. Basket shall
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 23 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
have a minimum ratio of free area to pipe size of 8.0 to 1.0 for pipe sizes to 4 inches and 5.0 to 1.0 for pipe sizes 6 inches and over. Strainer shall be equal to Zurn Series 520 or 510.
C. Basket material opening sizes shall be as follows:
Water Service
Pipe Size Opening Size Up to 2" 20 mesh 2-1/2" & 3” 0.045" perforated 4" & 8" 0.125" perforated 10" & over 0.188" perforated
2.28 VALVES – GENERAL
A. Refer to Section 15110 for valve requirements.
2.29 CONTROL VALVES AND AUTOMATED FLOW MEASURING STATIONS
A. All control valves and automated flow measuring stations shall be provided under Division 15, Section "HVAC Controls".
B. All control valves and automated flow measuring stations shall be installed under this section.
C. The Contractor shall provide all pipe flanges as required for the installation of these devices.
D. The location of each automated flow measuring station shall be coordinated with the Control Contractor. Refer to15900 for further requirements.
E. Water systems which use butterfly or ball type control valves do not require strainers upstream of the control valves.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 24 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. 3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. 7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.
3.2 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Equipment, piping and ductwork shall be stored at least six inches off the ground on blocking racks and kept clean.
B. Provide adequate protection for all finished work against physical damage from whatever cause during the progress of the work and until final completion. During construction, properly cap all ducts, pipes and equipment to prevent the entrance of sand and dirt. Protect equipment against moisture, plaster, cement, paint or other hazards by covering with polyethylene sheets. Refer to individual specification sections for fan, pump and motor bearing protection.
C. After installation is complete, clean all systems as follows:
1. Ductwork, Piping and Equipment to be Insulated: Clean exterior thoroughly to remove rust, plaster, cement and dirt before insulation is applied. 2. Ductwork, Piping and Equipment not Insulated: Clean exterior to be exposed in completed structure. Remove rust, plaster, cement and dirt by wire brushing.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 25 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Remove grease, oil and other foreign materials by wiping with clean rags and suitable non-toxic solvents. 3. Chrome or Nickel Plated Work: Thoroughly polish. 4. Factory Finished Items: Remove grease and oil and leave surfaces clean and polished.
D. All code stamps and nameplates shall be protected from damage and must be clean and legible before final inspection.
E. All piping shall be flushed out or blown out after pressure testing is complete and before being put into use. All strainer screens shall be removed and cleaned.
F. After start-up and testing, strainer screens shall again be removed and cleaned.
3.3 PAINTING
A. Touch-up or repaint any factory finished mechanical equipment on which the finish is damaged with colored-paint to match the original.
B. Paint the surface of ducts visible through supply, return, exhaust or transfer openings flat black.
C. Other job painting is specified under Division 9 of these Specifications.
3.4 TRENCHES FOR UNDERGROUND PIPE
A. The applicable provisions of the Earthwork and Site Grading Section shall apply to the excavation and backfill for pipe trenches with the following additional requirements.
B. Excavation for underground piping shall be made to the line and grade, and the pipe barrels laid full length on firm beddings; provide recesses for the bells and couplings. If the trench bottom is rock or contains old masonry or other hard materials, it shall be excavated at least 4" deeper than the bottom of the pipe and filled back to the line of grade with firmly compacted bedding material.
C. Material for pipe bedding and backfill up to 12" above the top of the pipe shall be sand, gravel or stone aggregate with maximum size being 3/4", or concrete.
D. Install backfill evenly in layers not over 6" deep on both sides of the pipe, work the material under both sides of the pipe, compact each layer where sand backfill is used with hand held tampers up to 12" above the top of the pipe.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 26 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
E. Install sufficient backfill along the pipe barrels to prevent displacement during pressure testing, leaving the joints uncovered until the pipe has been inspected and authorized to be covered.
F. Backfill material from 12" above the pipe up to grade shall be sand, gravel or stone aggregate, or other approved fill material specified in the Earthwork Section except the top 18" under lawn and planted areas shall be approved earth as specified in the Earthwork Section.
G. Backfill inside buildings and in paved areas shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor density.
H. Heavy compaction equipment that would displace or damage the pipe shall not be used.
I. Any subsequent settlement of backfill shall be refilled and the surface brought to grade.
J. All earth work required under this Division shall be provided under the work of Division 2.
3.5 CONCRETE BACKFILL
A. Concrete shall be used as bedding and backfill in the portions of the pipe trenches which cross under load bearing wall footings or extend into areas below a 45 ° line out from the bottom of any load bearing footing and where noted.
3.6 BACKFILL INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. The testing laboratory shall make compaction tests, where backfill is specified to be compacted to 95% Standard Proctor density, a minimum of one test for each one hundred linear feet or fraction thereof of backfill as follows:
1. Initial backfill to the height of the pipe. 2. Backfill to a height 12" above the top of the pipe. 3. Backfill a minimum of one test for each 30" lift above 1 foot over the pipe.
3.7 EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
A. Where new pipe lines parallel or cross existing utility lines, the Contractor shall take precautions to insure that such existing pipe lines are not disturbed. Any damage done to existing pipe lines shall be promptly repaired.
3.8 CONCRETE PADS AND PIPE ANCHORS
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 27 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide 16" diameter x 5" thick concrete pads flush with the finished grade to protect outside surface cleanouts and valve boxes.
B. Anchor all underground pipe that operates under pressure and has push-on or mechanical joints using anchor rods and/or thrust blocks as required in NFPA 24, 1977, for anchoring fire mains, except where UL listed restrained type joints are installed.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND VALVES
A. The interior of pipe, fittings and valves shall be kept clean during construction. All pipe ends and branch openings in piping systems under construction shall be kept closed with watertight plugs or caps at all times except at the times and locations connections are being made, except for vent and relief openings and working drains. Do not use rags or paper to plug pipe ends. Protect drains and vents from the entrance of materials that would cause stoppage.
B. Pipe ends shall be cut off square, reamed and filed to remove burrs; before assembly pipe shall be cleaned of dirt, scale, chips and oil. Nipples shall be of the same material as thee piping unless noted otherwise. Threads shall be ANSI Standard B21.1, clean, and shall be made up with commercial grade pipe joint compound or Teflon tape on the threads of the pipe only. Install unions at connections to equipment.
C. Copper tubing joints shall be made using couplings, reducers, ells and tees. Mechanically extracted collars and notched and dimpled tube ends brazed together to form tee joints, and expanded tube end brazed joints are prohibited.
D. All piping offsets above ground shall be made with fittings or bends and not by deflecting joints.
E. Risers shall be truly vertical and where exposed shall be located as close as possible to a wall or column, except maintain 1" minimum clearance between finished wall and surface of pipe covering or bare pipe, unless otherwise noted.
F. All piping must be installed straight, without sags or pockets, except scale pockets shall be provided where required. All water piping systems in the HVAC work shall be provided with air chambers and air vents at high points where the pipe turns down in the direction of flow. Provide drains at low points of water piping. Water piping shall be run level except concealed piping may grade up in the direction of flow. Provide drains at low points of water piping complete with drain valve, hose end coupling and plug.
G. Piping shall be located so as to be readily concealed, to provide space for insulation and/or escutcheons, to avoid conflict with the other work, avoid interference with access to
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 28 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
equipment and to provide clearance at stairs, ladders, doors and windows. Do not route piping above electrical equipment, switchgear or panels.
H. Valves shall be installed with the stems in the horizontal position wherever possible. Where horizontal position is not possible due to inadequate access for operation and service butterfly, ball and plug valve stems may be vertical or at 45 ° in any quadrant; gate and globe valve stems may be 45 ° or 90 ° upright, but not below horizontal.
I. Piping shall be installed so that it does not leak. The Contractor shall examine all piping materials and shall not install any that are defective.
J. Install piping supports, anchors and guides arranged to prevent damage due to thrusts caused by internal pressures and thermal expansion and contraction of piping.
K. Provide underground warning piping markers. Install 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe.
3.10 ACCESSIBILITY
A. The installation of valves, dampers, thermometers, gauges, traps, cleanouts, control devices or other specialties requiring reading, adjustment, inspection, repairs, removal or replacement shall be conveniently and accessibly located with reference to the finished building.
B. Coordinate the work of the various Sections of this Division to group valves, traps, dampers, etc., to minimize the number of access doors.
C. If items are concealed, provide access doors of size required for each access to the items. Furnish access doors of types specified in section 08310 - Access Doors and Frames.
3.11 CLOSING IN OF UNINSPECTED WORK
A. Do not allow or cause any work to be covered up or enclosed until inspected, tested or approved.
3.12 LUBRICATION AND ROTATION A. Before operational tests and turning systems over to the Owner, clean and lubricate all bearings except sealed and permanently lubricated bearings.
B. Lubricate in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Maintain lubrication until the work of this Division is accepted.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 29 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
C. Rotation of bolt drive equipment.
1. All belt drive equipment shall be rotated manually each week until finally placed in operation.
3.13 EMERGENCY REPAIRS
A. The Owner reserves the right to make temporary repairs as necessary to keep equipment in operating condition without voiding the guarantee bond nor relieving the Design/Builder of his responsibility during the bonding period.
3.14 TESTS FOR LEAKS
A. The Contractor shall leak test all pipe joints, correct all leaks and retest until all joints are proved tight. Leaks shall be corrected by replacement of defective materials; threaded joints shall be tightened, not caulked; caulking, welding or doping of defects will not be accepted. Joints shall not be concealed until authorized by the Owner or Owner Representative. Pressure piping shall be tested hydrostatically at 1.5 times the maximum operating pressure unless otherwise specified.
B. Test pressures shall be maintained with the supply pipe disconnected for a minimum of one hour with zero loss unless otherwise specified. Additional test requirements are specified in other Sections.
C. Piping and vessels to be tested hydrostatically shall be filled with water without any trapped air pockets; provide valved outlets at all high points and dead ends and demonstrate that no air remains in the system before starting any test.
D. The Contractor shall provide expansion control during all testing operations.
3.15 COMMISSIONING AND PRELIMINARY OPERATIONAL TESTS
A. Prior to inspection to determine substantial completion, the Contractor shall put all mechanical systems into service and check that work required for that purpose has been done, including but not limited to the following condensed check list:
1. Correct rotation of motors and ratings of overload heaters are verified. 2. Specified filters are installed and spares are on hand when specified. 3. All equipment has been started, checked, lubricated and adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. All manufacturer's certificates of start-up specified have been delivered to the Owner. 5. All equipment has been cleaned, and damaged painted finishes touched-up.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 30 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
6. Damaged fins on heat exchangers have been combed out. Missing or damaged parts have been replaced. 7. Flushing and chemical treatment of piping systems has been done and water treatment equipment, where specified, is in operation. 8. Equipment labels, pipe marker labels, ceiling markers and valve tags are installed. 9. Valve tag schedules, corrected control diagrams, sequence of operation lists and start-stop instructions have been posted. 10. Test and balance work is complete. 11. Maintenance manuals have been delivered and instructions to the operating personnel have been made.
B. Prior to the inspection to determine substantial completion, the Contractor shall operate all mechanical systems as required to demonstrate that the installation and performance of these systems conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents.
C. Before handing over the system to Owner, replace temporary filters with complete new set of filters. 3.16 REVIEW OF CONTRACTOR'S TESTS
A. All tests made by the Contractor or manufacturer's representatives are subject to observation and review by the Owner’s Representative; the Contractor shall provide timely notices.
3.17 TEST LOGS
A. The Contractor shall maintain test logs listing the tests on all mechanical systems showing dates, items tested, inspector's names, remarks on success or failure of the tests.
3.18 CLEANING UP AND REMOVAL OF SCRAP
A. For work under all Mechanical Sections, trash and scrap shall be cleaned up and removed from the site as the work progresses.
3.19 DAMAGE RESPONSIBILITY
A. Be responsible for damage to the grounds, buildings or equipment, and the loss of refrigerants, fuels or gases, caused by leaks or breaks in pipes for equipment furnished or installed under this Division.
3.20 PRELIMINARY OPERATION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 31 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Owner reserves the right to operate portions of the mechanical system on a preliminary basis without voiding the guarantee.
3.21 OPERATIONAL TESTS
A. Before operational tests are performed, demonstrate that all systems and components are complete and fully charged with operating fluid and lubricants.
B. Systems shall be operable and capable of maintaining continuous uninterrupted operation during the operating and demonstration period. After all systems have been completely installed, connections made, and tests completed, operate the systems continuously for a period of five working days during the hours of a normal working day. C. Control systems shall be completely operable with settings properly calibrated and adjusted.
D. Rotating equipment shall be in dynamic balance and alignment.
E. If the system fails to operate continuously during the test period, the deficiencies shall be corrected and the entire test repeated.
3.22 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide the services of an experienced Engineer to instruct the Owner in the operation of the entire installation. Instructional period shall be during the hours of a normal working day. This instructional period may be simultaneous with the operational tests.
3.23 COMPLIANCE TESTS
A. Conduct such tests of all portions of the installation as may be required by the various Sections of this Division. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Owner.
B. Provide all instruments, equipment, labor and materials to complete the tests. These tests may be required at any time between the installation of the work and the end of the warranty period. Should these tests expose any defective materials, poor workmanship or variance with requirements, make any changes necessary and remedy any defects at cost to the Owner.
3.24 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee in writing all mechanical work for a period of one year following date of certificate of substantial completion.
B. All apparatus shall be built and installed so as to deliver its full rated capacity at the efficiency for which it was designed.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 32 of 33 SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
C. The entire mechanical and electrical apparatus shall operate at full capacity without objectionable noise or vibration.
D. The mechanical systems shall provide the performance required at standard operating conditions.
E. Where a manufacturer's guarantee exceeds one year, the longer guarantee shall govern.
3.25 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Page 33 of 33 SECTION 15051
MOTORS AND VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related Sections: 1. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Requirements. 2. Section 15051 - Motors. 3. Section 15185 - Hydronic Pumps. 4. Section 15625 - Centrifugal Water Chillers. 5. Section 15641 - Open Circuit Mechanical Draft Cooling Towers. 6. Section 15741 - Multizone Packaged Indoor Central Station Air Handling Units. 7. Section 15732 - Packaged Outdoor Central Station Air Handling Units. 8. Section 15736 - Rooftop Replacement Air Units. 9. Section 15750 - Rooftop Evaporative Cooling Units. 10. Section 15763 - Fan Coil Units. 11. Section 16441 - Switchboards. 12. Section 16442 - Panelboards.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes three phase electric motors and variable frequency drives.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
B. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
C. ANSI/IEEE 112 - Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.
D. ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
E. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
F. IEEE Std. 519-1981 - Guide for Harmonic Controls and Reactive Compensation of Static Power Converters.
G. ANSI/UL Std. 508 - Testing by Independent Laboratories.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Motors and Variable Frequency Drives 15051 Page 1 of 8 SECTION 15051
MOTORS AND VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Requirements: Submittals and Contract requirements. B. Submit factory test results verifying nominal efficiency and power factor for three phase motors larger than 20 horsepower.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of General Conditions Sections.
1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of General Conditions and Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Requirements and Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
B. Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of electric motors and variable frequency drives for HVAC use, and their accessories, with minimum three years documented product development, testing, and manufacturing experience.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable electrical code.
B. Conform to local energy code.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect motors and controllers stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately.
1.9 WARRANTY
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Motors and Variable Frequency Drives 15051 Page 2 of 8 SECTION 15051
MOTORS AND VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
A. Provide one-year manufacturer's on-site labor and material warranty.
B. Warranty: Include coverage for motors and variable frequency drives.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Motors: U.S. Motors, Reliance, Baldor, or Marathon.
B. Adjustable Frequency Controllers: Danfoss, VLT 4000, No Substitutions.
2.2 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors: Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment, and for temperature rise in accordance with ANSI/NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, Service Factor, and motor enclosure type.
B. Design variable frequency drives for operation with the actual motor and driven pumps or fans.
C. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, Service Factor, Power Factor.
D. Electrical Connection: Conduit connection boxes, threaded for conduit. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide conduit connection in end frame.
2.3 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS
A. Starting Torque: Between one and one and one-half times full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Six times full load current.
C. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pullout Torque: NEMA Design B characteristics.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Motors and Variable Frequency Drives 15051 Page 3 of 8 SECTION 15051
MOTORS AND VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
D. Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to ANSI/NEMA MG 1 for Design B motors.
E. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better.
F. Testing Procedure: In accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112, Test Method B. Load test motors to determine freedom from electrical or mechanical defects and compliance with performance data.
G. Motor Frames: NEMA standard T-frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts. H. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum AFBMA 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate.
I. Sound Power Levels: To ANSI/NEMA MG 1.
J. Nominal Efficiency: Meet or exceed values in Schedules at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112.
K. Nominal Power Factor: Meet or exceed values in Schedules at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112.
L. Motors shall deliver full nameplate horsepower without de-rating due to thermal considerations when on variable frequency power.
2.4 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD)
A. Variable Frequency Drive Systems shall be Danfoss VLT 4000 with Adaptable Package Unit. Variable Frequency Drive Systems shall be compatible with any standard NEMA B design 3phase induction motor. Variable Frequency Drive Systems shall be sized to insure the motor full load amps do not exceed the controller continuous RMS amps.
B. The adjustable frequency drive shall convert three-phase, 60 Hz utility power to adjustable voltage and frequency, three-phase, AC power for motor speed motor control from 10% to 100% of the motor's 60 Hz speed. Input voltage shall be as specified on the drawings schedules. The input section of the drive shall include line filters, line reactors or isolation
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Motors and Variable Frequency Drives 15051 Page 4 of 8 SECTION 15051
MOTORS AND VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
transformers as required to meet IEEE 519 for distortion levels of 3% or less. The variable frequency drives shall not interfere with sensitive electronic equipment that is fed from the same power distribution system.
C. The output wave form shall be sine coded pulse width modulated. To eliminate acoustical noise, PWM drives shall have a minimum of 2500 pulses per sine. The VFD's input power factor shall be .95 or better at all operating speeds. Efficiency shall be 96% minimum from 0100% load. To eliminate RFI and EMI, the drive shall comply with FCC rules and regulations, part 15, subpart "J".
D. Solid State Ground Fault Protection shall be standard. Those manufacturers that cannot provide this as a standard feature must supply an external protector. Adaptive electronic motor overload protection shall be provided which shall protect both the motor and drive at all frequencies. Electronic thermal overload circuits which properly protect the motor only at full speed shall not be acceptable. The VFD shall sense the load and speed and shall recalibrate the thermal trip curve to insure low speed motor protection. The initial trip point shall be adjustable from at least 40-100% of the VFD amperage rating.
E. Isolated control inputs shall be provided. The motor speed shall be directly proportional to 010 volt, 4-20 mA, and variable resistance signals. Fire alarm signal for control override to maximum speed at smoke control fans.
F. Drive operation options shall be switch selectable and shall include at a minimum the following functions: 1. Automatic speed holding if control signal is lost at 80% of last speed command. 2. The VFD shall provide the following operational features: a. Speed search transfer. The VFD shall be able to start from bypass or fault trip into a spinning load without stopping the motor or creating a fault condition. The VFD shall match the motor's speed and then drive the motor to its proper speed. b. Adjustable current limit threshold. c. Multiple restart upon fault trip. d. Minimum 10:1 speed ratio. e. Individually adjustable acceleration and deceleration patterns, adjustable from 0.1-1800 seconds.
G. The VFD shall be suitable for installation and use under the following environmental conditions: 20 to 104ºF, 0-95% RH, non-condensing.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Motors and Variable Frequency Drives 15051 Page 5 of 8 SECTION 15051
MOTORS AND VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
H. Fault Indication and Operation 1. The following fault conditions shall cause the VFD to shut-off (trip) and shall be annunciated by LED indicators on the control board. FU: Fuse Blown, OC: Instantaneous Overcurrent, OV: Overvoltage, UV: Undervoltage, OH: Overheat, EB: External Failure, CPF: Control Function Error, CFP-SEL: Control Function Selection Error, OL: Overload.
2. The VFD shall attempt to restart a minimum of 5 times after tripping on a fault. A dry contact on the VFD shall close after the fifth unsuccessful restart attempt. 3. The VFD shall be set by the manufacturer to prevent the possibility of overamperage on the motor in the associated drive. This feature shall be coordinated with the ATC Contractor and the Mechanical Contractor for the project.
I. The VFD shall be equipped with a digital operator interface which shall allow the following functions: 1. Digital frequency indication on an LCD display. 2. Digital fault indication on the LCD display. Digital fault reset. Storage and operator initiated recall of the fault conditions in the sequence of occurrence. 3. Auto/Manual operation switch. 4. Digital speed control in 0.1 Hz increments. 5. Tracking of fault/failure history. 6. Display of frequency or RPM. 7. Self-diagnostics.
J. Where indicated, manual bypass shall provide all the circuitry necessary to safely transfer the motor from the VFD to the power line, or from the line to the controller while the motor is at zero speed. Three motor contactors, electrically interlocked, shall be utilized. Motor protection is to be provided in both the "controller" mode and the "bypass" mode by a motor overload relay. The 115 VAC relay control logic, allowing common start-stop commands in the "controller" mode and the "bypass" mode shall also be included within this enclosure. The bypass shall include a door-interlocked, main power input disconnect circuit breaker providing positive shutdown of all input power to both the bypass circuitry and the VFD. The bypass circuit shall include a second door interlocked input disconnect circuit breaker installed in the VFD. This disconnect shall provide the ability to safely troubleshoot and test the controller, both energized, while operating in the "bypass" mode and shall mount within the controller enclosure.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Motors and Variable Frequency Drives 15051 Page 6 of 8 SECTION 15051
MOTORS AND VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
K. The VFD manufacturer shall maintain and staff nationwide service centers. Service engineers shall be employed by the manufacturer and provide start up service including physical inspection of drive and connected wiring and final adjustments to meet specified performance requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Single Phase Motors need not conform to these specifications.
B. Motors shall be open drip-proof type, except where specifically noted otherwise.
C. Motors shall be energy efficient type.
D. Motors located in exterior locations shall be totally enclosed type.
E. Adjustable frequency controllers shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
F. VFD manufacturer shall provide start-up service for all drives provided. The manufacturer’s local representative shall participate in adjusting and balancing operations as stipulated in the specification Division 15, Commissioning of Mechanical Systems.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Motors and Variable Frequency Drives 15051 Page 7 of 8 SECTION 15051
MOTORS AND VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
3.2 PERFORMANCE SCHEDULE: THREE PHASE - Motors shall be tested to IEEE-112, Method B. Minimum efficiencies and power factors are:
HP NEMA PERCENT Efficiency Power Factor 1 82.1 63.3 1-1/2 83.5 83.8 2 84.6 84.4
3 86.3 88.7
5 87.4 88.0 7-1/2 89.0 84.0 20 91.1 87.2 25 91.8 80.3 30 92.2 81.8 40 92.8 80.0 50 93.1 80.0 60 93.6 80.0 75 93.9 80.0 END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Motors and Variable Frequency Drives 15051 Page 8 of 8 SECTION 15055
MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15050 “Basic Mechanical Requirements”. 2. Section 15051 “Motors”. 3. Section 15185 “Hydronic Pumps”. 4. Section 15625 “Centrifugal Water Chillers”. 5. Section 15641 “Open Circuit Mechanical Draft Cooling Towers”. 6. Section 15741 “Multizone Packaged Indoor Central Station Air Handling Units 7. Section 15732 “Packaged Outdoor Central Station Air Handling Units”. 8. Section 15736 “Rooftop Replacement Air Units”. 9. Section 15750 “Rooftop Evaporative Cooling Units”. 10. Section 15763 “Fan Coil Units”. 11. Section 16441 “Switchboards”. 12. Section 16442 “Panelboards”.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed and field-installed motors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting arrangements; size and location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding lug; and coatings.
B. Factory Test Reports: For specified tests.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Motors 15055 Page 1 of 10
SECTION 15055
MOTORS
B. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
C. ANSI/IEEE 112 - Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.
D. ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
E. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
F. ANSI/UL Std. 508 - Testing by Independent Laboratories.
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide motors specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. Terms "Listed and Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Requirements: Submittals and Contract requirements.
B. Submit factory test results verifying nominal efficiency and power factor for three phase motors larger than 20 horsepower.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of General Conditions Sections.
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of General Conditions and Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Requirements and Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
B. Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Motors 15055 Page 2 of 10
SECTION 15055
MOTORS
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of electric motors for HVAC use, and their accessories, with minimum three years documented product development, testing, and manufacturing experience.
1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable electrical code.
B. Conform to local energy code.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year manufacturer's on-site labor and material warranty.
B. Warranty: Include coverage for motors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Motors: U.S. Motors, Reliance, Baldor, or Marathon.
2.2 BASIC MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. All motors shall be selected so operational characteristics do not operate into the service factor.
B. Motors Smaller than 1/2 HP: Single phase.
C. Motors 1/2 HP TO 200 HP: Polyphase.
D. Large Motors, 250 HP and larger: Polyphase
E. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Motors 15055 Page 3 of 10
SECTION 15055
MOTORS
F. Voltage Rating: Determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is connected.
G. Speed: Motors shall be ball-bearing single speed, 1800 RPM motors unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 1. Two-speed motors shall be single-winding design unless speed ratios other than 2:1 (1,800/900) are required 2. Two-speed, two winding motors shall be provided when speed ratios other than 2:1 are required. For example, 1,800 rpm/1,200 rpm.
H. Enclosure: Unless otherwise noted, the following motor enclosures shall be provided: 1. All motor enclosures for indoor applications such as for pumps, fans and air compressors shall be open drip proof type. 2. Motor enclosures for arrangement 4 vane axial (and tube axial) fans (and some cooling towers) shall be totally enclosed air over type. 3. Motor enclosures on roof exhaust fans which are 10 horsepower or smaller and are provided with a ventilated weather guard shall be open drip-proof type. 4. Motor enclosures for cooling towers and other outdoor applications shall be totally enclosed fan cooled type. 5. Motor enclosures for cooling towers where the motor is located in the effluent air stream shall be provided with single-phase heating elements to minimize condensation.
I. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Rated for continuous duty and sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, in indicated environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
2.2 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, general purpose medium induction motor. 1. Design Characteristics: NEMA MG 1, Design B, unless otherwise indicated. Normal-starting torque, normal-starting current, low slip starting motors. 2. Energy-Efficient Design: Where indicated. Electrical Characteristics: 460 (200) volts, 3-phase, 60 hertz, alternating current, unless otherwise noted on the drawings or in the specifications. 4. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Bearings: Double-shielded, pre-lubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. 7. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Motors 15055 Page 4 of 10
SECTION 15055
MOTORS
8. Insulation: NEMA Class H, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for indicated controller, with required motor leads brought to motor terminal box to suit control method.
C. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. 1. Critical vibration frequencies are not within operating range of controller output. 2. Temperature Rise: Match rating for Class B insulation. 3. Insulation: Class H. 4. Thermal Protection: Where indicated, conform to NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors.
D. Rugged-Duty Motors: Where indicated, motors are totally enclosed with 1.25 minimum service factor, greased bearings, integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents. Windings are insulated with non-hygroscopic material. External finish is chemical-resistant paint over corrosion-resistant primer.
E. Source Quality Control: Perform the following routine tests according to NEMA MG 1: 1. Measurement of winding resistance. 2. No-load readings of current and speed at rated voltage and frequency. 3. Locked rotor current at rated frequency. 4. High-potential test. 5. Alignment.
2.3 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Type: As indicated or selected by manufacturer from one of the following, to suit starting torque and other requirements of specific motor application. 1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split-phase start, capacitor run. 3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Shaded-Pole Motors: Do not use, unless motors are smaller than 1/20 HP.
C. Thermal Protection: Where indicated or required, internal protection automatically opens power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal protection device automatically resets when motor temperature returns to normal range, unless otherwise indicated.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Motors 15055 Page 5 of 10
SECTION 15055
MOTORS
D. Bearings: Ball-bearing type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor shaft. Sealed, pre-lubricated sleeve bearings for other single-phase motors.
2.4 LARGER MOTORS
A. All large electric motor driven HVAC equipment with motors 250 horsepower and larger shall be large, three-phase, AC, squirrel cage, induction motors for industrial service. The motor torque-speed characteristics shall be matched to the driven-load inertia and torque speed requirements. Maximum locked-rotor current shall not exceed 650 percent of the full-load current.
B. Motors shall be adequately braced for full-voltage starting. Motor nominal voltage shall be 460 volt (2,300 or 4,000 volt), three-phase, 60-hertz electrical supply. Unless noted otherwise, the motors shall operate at constant speed.
C. Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with a 1.15 service factor. Motor winding insulation shall be rated for motor-temperature rise within NEMA limits, 80 deg. C rise by resistance method at 1.0 times the rated horsepower load, Class F, in a 0 deg. C to 40 deg. C ambient environment. Windings and leads shall be copper. (Rotors shall be copper bar.) D. Horizontally direct-connected motors rated 1,000 horsepower and larger at 3,600 RPM, 2,250 horsepower and larger at 1,800 RPM, or 3,500 horsepower and larger at 1,200 RPM and slower shall have sleeve bearings. Belted motors and other direct-connected motors shall have anti-friction bearings. Sleeve bearings shall be provided with sight gauge and Bull's eye on the sleeve bearing to afford quick verification of proper lubrication.
E. Vertical motors shall be equipped with oil-lubricated thrust bearings. Hollow-shaft motors shall be equipped with steady bushings.
F. Enclosures shall be drip-proof-guarded (DPG) unless otherwise indicated.
G. Enclosures shall be totally-enclosed fan-cooled (TEFC) where noted.
H. Enclosures for the following applications shall be totally-enclosed-water-air-cooled (TEWAC): (Generally for chillers and other large equipment located in enclosed spaces and where a source of cooling water is available; these types of motors should only be considered for applications 350 HP and larger) 1. The water-to-air heat exchanger for the motor shall be mounted on top of the motor. The heat exchanger shall be the motor manufacturer's standard design which is used to cool the motor using maximum 85 deg. F entering water at maximum 50 psig (100 psig available) pressure and shall have a maximum flow rate of 0.04 GPM per horsepower and a nominal fouling factor of 0.0005.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Motors 15055 Page 6 of 10
SECTION 15055
MOTORS
I. All motor supporting elements including stator housing, bearing brackets, end bells, and mounting feet shall be cast iron. For motors 1,000 horsepower and larger and for forced ventilated motors indicated, fabricated steel support elements can be substituted. Cooling fans shall be positively engaged and clamped to the motor shaft; press-fits for fans are not acceptable.
J. Motors shall have a grounding pad located on the same side as the main conduit box.
K. Motors shall be provided with an over-sized conduit box for connection of the motor leads to the motor.
L. All motors shall be built in accordance with the latest NEMA and IEEE standards. Motors shall be classified as "energy efficient" and shall have a guaranteed nominal full-load efficiency equal to or greater than the values tabulated in Table 12-6C of the NEMA Standard MG1-12.55A, Efficiency Levels of Energy Efficient Polyphase Squirrel-Cage Induction Motors. The nominal full-load efficiency shall have been determined in accordance with MG1-12.54.1 and ANSI/IEEE 112 test method B or F and shall be identified on the nameplate in accordance with MG1.54.2.
M. Motors shall be provided with the following accessories: 1. Air temperature switch for TEWAC motors 2. Moisture indicator or water leakage indicator for TEWAC motors 3. Water flow indicator with alarm contacts for indicating GPM for TEWAC motors 4. Thermostatically controlled cooling water regulating valve 5. Solenoid operated control valve for cooling water supply line 6. Vibration sensor attachments - one per bearing and one for axial thrust 7. RTD type motor bearing temperature sensors
2.5 ELECTIC MOTOR STARTER, CONTROL, AND DISCONNECT SWITCH WIRING
A. Work under Division 16, by the Electrical Contractor, will include running all electrical power wiring and making final connections to motors, electric heating coils, electric heat trace, and to all other such equipment requiring electrical service. Work under the HVAC Sections of the Specification shall include all electrical work in connection with the control wiring between motor starters and controlling devices. For DDC systems, work by the Contractor shall also include having the Control Contractor provide all power wiring and conduit, including terminations, to all apparatus control panels (ACP's), digital control panels (DCP's), and data terminal cabinets (DTC's).
B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide manual motor starters and/or circuit protection for all 120 volt devices furnished under the HVAC Sections. The Contractor shall provide all line voltage control devices for these devices.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Motors 15055 Page 7 of 10
SECTION 15055
MOTORS
C. The Contractor shall furnish all combination magnetic starters for all 3 phase motors for installation under Division 16 of this Specification. 1. The Contractor shall also furnish all motor overload elements. Overloads shall be selected to match the full load amps as indicated on each motor nameplate. 2. The Electrical Contractor shall install all the motor overload elements furnished by the Contractor.
D. The Electrical Contractor shall install all the motor overload elements furnished by the Contractor.
E. The Contractor shall provide all single-phase unit heaters, fan coil units and cabinet unit heaters with an integral disconnect switch. The Contractor shall provide all roof exhaust fans with a unit mounted disconnect switch factory wired to the fan motor.
F. The Electrical Contractor shall provide disconnect switches at all three phase motors when the motors are located away from the combination starters. Unless otherwise noted, the Electrical Contractor shall provide disconnect switches for all three-phase equipment with integral control.
G. The Electrical Contractor shall complete all power wiring for single phase equipment, through the disconnect switch and/or the thermal cutouts and local control stations to the equipment as required, except when noted otherwise.
H. The Electrical Contractor shall complete all electrical connections, through the disconnect switch, starter and motor terminals of all three-phase equipment. He shall be responsible for final connections and shall be responsible for proper rotation of three phase equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Single Phase Motors need not conform to these specifications.
B. Motors shall be open drip-proof type, except where specifically noted otherwise.
C. Motors shall be energy efficient type.
D. Motors located in exterior locations shall be totally enclosed type.
E. Adjustable frequency controllers shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Motors 15055 Page 8 of 10
SECTION 15055
MOTORS
F. VFD manufacturer shall provide start-up service for all drives provided. The manufacturer’s local representative shall participate in adjusting and balancing operations as stipulated in the specification Division 15, Commissioning of Mechanical Systems.
3.2 PERFORMANCE SCHEDULE: THREE-PHASE - Motors shall be tested to IEEE-112, Method B. Minimum efficiencies and power factors are:
HP NEMA PERCENT Efficiency Power Factor
1 82.1 63.3 1-1/2 83.5 83.8 2 84.6 84.4 3 86.3 88.7 5 87.4 88.0 7-1/2 89.0 84.0 10 89.5 85.2 15 90.5 82.9 20 91.1 87.2 25 91.8 80.3 30 92.2 81.8 40 92.8 80.0 50 93.1 80.0 60 93.6 80.0 75 93.9 80.0
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Use adjustable motor mounting bases for belt-driven motors. B. Align pulleys and install belts.
C. Tension according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Dynamic Motor Balancing - for motors 50 HP and larger. 1. The Contactor shall provide the services of a vibration analyst to perform dynamic vibration testing of all motors, 50 horsepower and larger, after installation and startup of the motor in the field. Constant speed motor applications shall be tested with the motors at full speed. Variable speed motor applications shall be tested with the motors at all speeds between minimum and maximum. Testing shall be
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Motors 15055 Page 9 of 10
SECTION 15055
MOTORS
conducted in each of the five locations: vertical and horizontal (sideways) at each bearing and axial. 2. The analyst shall provide certified test reports for each of the motors outlining his findings. Constant speed test reports shall outline the results at full speed. Variable speed test reports shall be at minimum, maximum, and one intermediate speed; specific speeds which appear to be a problem shall be reported also. 3. Motors or motor-apparatus with self-exciting vibration velocities in excess of 0.157 (0.06) or lower if recommended by the equipment manufacturer, shall be corrected by the equipment manufacturer who furnished the motor at no additional cost to the contract.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Motors 15055 Page 10 of 10
SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for placement of concrete housekeeping pads specified by this section. 2. Section 13930 “Wet Pipe Fire Suppression System”. 3. Section 15150 “Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping”. 5. Section 15160 “Storm Drainage Piping”. 6. Section 15181 “Hydronic Piping”. 7. Section 09900 “Painting”. 8. Section 15083 “HVAC Insulation”. 9. Section 15815 “Metal Ducts”.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes pipe and equipment supports, hangers, anchors, bases sleeves and the sealing of work to adjacent construction.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASME B31.1 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Power Piping
B. ASME B31.5 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Refrigeration Piping
C. ASME B31.9 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Building Services Piping
D. ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.
E. MSS SP58 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.
F. MSS SP69 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hangers and Supports 15060 Page 1 of 11
SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
G. MSS SP89 (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.
H. NFPA 13 (National Fire Protection Association) - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
I. NFPA 14 (National Fire Protection Association) - Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology used in this Section is defined in MSS SP-90.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Supports shall secure pipes in place, shall prevent swaying and vibration, and maintain required pitch by proper adjustment and provide free expansion and contraction. Design supports to suit loading and service and to not over stress building construction.
B. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports, for piping and equipment.
C. Design and obtain approval from authority with jurisdiction over seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of hanger and support. Provide load capacities.
C. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's Figure No., size, location, and features for each required pipe hanger and support.
D. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Control" Article.
E. Shop drawings for each type of hanger and support, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of component assembly.
F. Licensed Engineer's hanger and support drawings specified in the "Quality Control" Article.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hangers and Supports 15060 Page 2 of 11
SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
G. Licensed Engineer's hanger and support installation report specified in the "Field Quality Control" Article.
1.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Hangers and supports shall conform to the latest issue of MSS-SP69.
B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
C. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 13 for hangers and supports used as components of fire protection systems.
E. Listing and Labeling: Provide hangers and supports that are listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
1. UL and FM Compliance: Hangers, supports, and components include listing and labeling by UL and FM where used for fire protection piping systems. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
F. Licensed Operators: Use operators that are licensed by powder-operated tool manufacturers to operate their tools and fasteners.
G. Licensed Engineer: Prepare hanger and support design drawings, and calculations for seismic restraint of piping and equipment. Include seal and signature of Registered Engineer, licensed in the State of Nevada, certifying compliance with specifications.
H. Perform Work in accordance with applicable authority code for piping support.
I. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hangers and Supports 15060 Page 3 of 11
SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
B. Contractor: Company and company field staff specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five (5) years experience.
1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section.
1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Provide one (1) year manufacturer warranty for pipe hangers and supports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT'S AND HANGERS
A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Malleable iron, Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.
B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches: and Cold Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast iron roll and stand for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and over.
D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
F. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
G. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches and All Cold Pipe Sizes: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hangers and Supports 15060 Page 4 of 11
SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
H. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.
I. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
J. Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller: 18 gage galvanized steel shield over insulation in 180-degree segments, minimum 12 inches long at pipe support.
K. Shield for Insulated Piping Larger than 2 Inches: 16 gage galvanized steel shield over insulation in 180-degree segments, minimum and 16 inches long at pipe support.
L. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead.
M. Hanger rods shall be cadmium plated or galvanized standard or all threaded steel rods. All hangers, rollers, and supports which are not plated shall be factory painted with red oxide primer and black enamel finish.
N. All supports and hangers for piping 2 1/2 inches and larger shall be provided with a means to provide vertical adjustment. All turnbuckles shall be provided with one lock nut. All rod connections to hangers and attachment devices shall be provided with two (2) nuts.
2.2 INSERTS
A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
2.3 FLASHING
A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage galvanized steel.
B. Lead Flashing: 5 lb./sq. ft. sheet lead for waterproofing; one lb./sq. ft. sheet lead for soundproofing.
C. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing.
D. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.
2.4 EQUIPMENT CURBS
A. Fabricate curbs as indicated on the drawings and schedules.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hangers and Supports 15060 Page 5 of 11
SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
2.5 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Floors: Schedule 10 galvanized steel pipe.
B. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Schedule 10 galvanized steel pipe.
C. Sleeves for Pipes through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fireproofing: UL listed materials. Refer to Section 07840.
D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.
E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel.
F. For Soil, Waste and Storm Drain Piping through Concrete Floor Slabs on Grade: 2-inch thick closed cell foam insulation.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous 12” insulation wrapping for hydronic and domestic water piping.
B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe.
C. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
2.7 FINISH
A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in pipe shafts and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.
B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex-head, track bolts and nuts.
C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink, nonmetallic.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hangers and Supports 15060 Page 6 of 11
SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
1. Characteristics include post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic cement type grout that is non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous and is recommended for both interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Water: Potable. 4. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSERTS
A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.
C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.
D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface.
E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION – GENERAL
A. General: Comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.
B. Do not hang one pipe from another. Do not use perforated band iron, wire or chain as hangers.
C. Support piping as close as practical to heavy load concentrations such as vertical runs, branch connections, valves, and minor vessels such as air separators or strainers.
1. Locate supports adjacent to both sides of control valves or pipe sections shown to be removable. 2. Locate supports adjacent to branch shut off valves to permit removal of branch piping without the installation of temporary supports. 3. Support piping on at least one side and adjacent to each change in direction.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hangers and Supports 15060 Page 7 of 11
SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
4. Provide additional supports as specified where grooved pipe construction is employed. Refer to Grooved Steel Pipe Installation Requirements Article in this Section for further requirements. 5. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each elbow.
D. Hangers for all pipe shall be sized to clear the outside diameter of the insulation.
3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION (For Piping 6 inches and smaller)
A. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel at same level, provide trapeze hangers of Unistrut suspended by means of rods. Brace trapeze hangers to prevent motion due to expansion and contraction of pipe. Support individual pipes by hangers or rollers.
B. Support spacings listed hereafter are maximum normal spacings and does not reduce the need for additional hangers and supports as otherwise specified.
1. Support uninsulated and insulated horizontal steel piping as follows:
Minimum Maximum Spacing Pipe Size Rod Diameter Liquid Service Gas Service Up to 1 1/4" 3/8" 7' 0" 9' 0" 1 1/2" 3/8" 9' 0" 12' 0" 2" 3/8" 10' 0" 13' 0" 2 1/2" 1/2" 11' 0" 14' 0" 3" 1/2" 12' 0" 15' 0" 4" 5/8" 14' 0" 17' 0" 6" 3/4" 17' 0" 21' 0"
2. Support uninsulated and insulated copper piping as follows:
Minimum Maximum Spacing Pipe Size Rod Diameter Liquid Service Gas Service Up to 3/4" 3/8" 5' 0" 6' 0" 1" 3/8" 6' 0" 8' 0" 1 1/4" 3/8" 7' 0" 9' 0" 1 1/2" 3/8" 8' 0" 10' 0" 2" 3/8" 8' 0" 11' 0" 2 1/2" 1/2" 9' 0" 13' 0" 3" 1/2" 10' 0" 14' 0" 4" 1/2" 12' 0" 16' 0"
3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION (For Piping 8 inches and Larger)
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hangers and Supports 15060 Page 8 of 11
SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Pipe hangers, guides, and anchors shown on the Drawings are PARTIALLY complete and are shown to establish the basic hanger criteria for type, size, and layout. The Contractor shall provide all additional hangers, supports, anchors and guides required to complete the work at no additional cost to Owner.
1. Generally, piping 8 inches and larger shall not be connected to floor slabs or bar joists; these pipes shall be supported directly from the building's steel structure or from miscellaneous structural steel provided by the Contractor. 2. Refer to articles concerning "Inserts and Fasteners" and "Structural Steel" in Section 15010 for information concerning the anchoring of the hangers, supports, guides, and anchors.
B. Provide the services of a Mechanical Engineer who is registered in the State of Nevada to perform a dead load analysis and a stress analysis on all piping systems where piping is 8 inches or larger in diameter. Refer to "Engineered Equipment and Piping Supports" Section for further requirements.
C. Once final pipe layouts have been established and coordinated with the other disciplines, a set of these Drawings will be forwarded to the Mechanical Engineer who shall in turn complete his pipe load and stress analysis and shall select and design all the hangers, supports, and guides. Shop drawings shall then be prepared. All shop drawings must be stamped by the Mechanical Engineer with his registration seal prior to submission for approval.
D. All pipe supports located as indicated on drawings shall be provided with spring vibration isolator hangers. Refer to "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" Section in Division 15 for further requirements.
3.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.
B. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
C. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.
D. Anchor equipment to floors and/or walls to prevent horizontal movement.
3.6 METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe and equipment supports.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hangers and Supports 15060 Page 9 of 11
SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing, and so that contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
3.8 FLASHING
A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.
B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and calk, metal counter flash and seal.
C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device.
D. Seal floor drains watertight to adjacent materials.
3.9 SLEEVES
A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
B. Extend sleeves through floors one inch above finished floor level. Calk sleeves full depth and provide floor plate.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hangers and Supports 15060 Page 10 of 11
SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
C. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and calk air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.
D. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
E. For pipes penetrating wall and floor slabs below grade, provide Link Seals in pipe sleeves.
F. Sleeve diameter to allow for insulation for hydronic and domestic water piping.
3.10 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas immediately after erection of hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Licensed Engineer's Report: Prepare hanger and support installation report. Include seal and signature of Registered Engineer, licensed in the State of Nevada, certifying compliance with specifications.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hangers and Supports 15060 Page 11 of 11
SECTION 15065
ENGINEERED EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching hangers and supports to building structure. 2. Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for vibration-isolation hangers and supports. 3. Section 15181 “Hydronic Piping” for piping material specifications and for piping supports and hanger specification. 4. Section 15815 “Metal Ducts” for ductwork requirements.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes engineered equipment and piping supports.
1.3 QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of both Mechanical and Civil/Structural Engineering - Consultants to assist him in the installation of the work. 1. The engineering consultants employed by the Contractor shall be professional engineers registered in the jurisdiction where project is located.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WORK BY OTHERS
A. The Owner shall provide one set of reproducibles of the available structural drawings to the Contractor for his engineers' use in designing all support structures. 1. For new construction, these Drawings are a part of the bidding documents. 2. For existing construction, these Drawings will be available at the office of Architect and prospective Bidders may obtain this information by applying to Architect. The accuracy or completeness of the information is not guaranteed by Architect or by the Owner, however, the information shall represent the best available information. Bidders will be required to sign a standard form of receipt for this information and such bidders shall accept such information in accord with the provisions of this paragraph.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Engineering Equipment and Piping Supports 15065 Page 1 of 3 SECTION 15065
ENGINEERED EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SUPPORTS
3.2 WORK BY THE CONTRACTOR A. The Contractor shall prepare 1/4" or larger scale drawings of all piping 6" and larger on the project. (Piping drawing shall show all grooved pipe couplings where these couplings are to be employed).
B. The Drawings shall be forwarded to the Contractor's Engineering Consultants for the design of all piping supports.
C. The Contractor shall forward all equipment shop drawings for equipment weighing more than 500 pounds to his Civil/Structural Engineering Consultant.
D. The Contractor shall submit all 1/4" and larger scale piping drawings complete with the Mechanical and Civil/Structural Engineer's seal in shop drawing format prior to actual construction of the project. Refer to Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Article "Interference Drawings", for further requirements.
E. The Contractor shall submit all pipe hanger, equipment support and miscellaneous steel sketches along with related calculations complete with the Mechanical and Civil/Structural Engineer's seal in shop drawing format prior to actual construction of the project.
3.3 WORK BY THE ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
A. The work by the Mechanical Engineering Consultant shall include the following: 1. Review 1/4" and larger scale piping drawings provided by the Contractor. 2. For chilled water and condenser water piping 6" and larger, provide a dead load piping analysis to determine the loads imposed at each hanger location by the piping when filled with water; this analysis may be either a manual or a computer analysis. 3. For hot water, steam, and steam condensate piping 6" and larger, provide a computer stress analysis equal to "Caesar II". The results of the stress analysis shall provide the following: a. Verification that operating stresses for all piping systems are within the criteria set forth in ASME/ANSI B31.9 (latest edition) Code for Building Services Piping. (Note, no credit for cold springing of pipe will be permitted) b. Calculation estimates of all loads being imparted to the building including thrust loads imparted at anchors and guides and dead loads for pipe supports. c. Calculation estimates of all piping displacements so that proper spring hangers and guides can be selected. 4. Coordinate all pipe support and anchor loads with the civil/structural engineer. 5. Tag all pipe supports on the Contractor's Drawings. Select and provide Bill of Material for all hangers and supports. Provide sketches of attachment methods
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Engineering Equipment and Piping Supports 15065 Page 2 of 3 SECTION 15065
ENGINEERED EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SUPPORTS
for the hangers and supports required for attaching hangers to the building structure or to the miscellaneous steel structures. 6. Submit all calculations and computer results along with schematics or isometric diagrams showing nodes. 7. Stamp piping drawings with his seal certifying that all piping hangers have been properly selected and that the piping system as designed will work. B. The work by the Civil/Structural Engineering Consultant shall include the following: 1. Review all equipment shop drawings for HVAC equipment furnished on the project which weighs more than 500 pounds and which will be supported from the structure above. 2. Review all equipment shop drawings for HVAC equipment furnished on the project which weights more than 500 pounds and which requires a floor stand. 3. Review all 1/4" piping drawings and pipe support drawings for piping 6" and larger provided by the Contractor and his Mechanical Engineering Consultant. 4. Visit the site to ascertain the existing floor loading conditions in relationship to the existing building structure. 5. Examine the available structural drawings and make recommendations for attachment method between pipe hangers and the structure and between equipment hangers and the structure. 6. Provide designs and sketches of all miscellaneous steel structures required to support the work. Include attachment methods for attaching miscellaneous steel to the building structure. 7. Examine each building member (beam) being connected to; make recommendations for reinforcement of the existing building structure where such reinforcement is not called for on the drawings. 8. Coordinate all work with the Contractor's Mechanical Engineer and with the Contractor. 9. Submit all calculations to verify recommendations and designs. 10. Stamp all sketches and piping drawings certifying that all piping hangers and all equipment structures have been properly designed.
3.4 WORK NOT REQUIRED
A. This work is not required on the following: 1. On piping 4" and smaller. 2. On ductwork. 3. On equipment weighing less than 500 pounds.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Engineering Equipment and Piping Supports 15065 Page 3 of 3 SECTION 15072
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 13915 “Fire Suppression Piping”. 2. Section 13967 “Clean Agent Extinguishing Systems”.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: 1. Isolation pads. 2. Isolation mounts. 3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 4. Restraining braces.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. IBC: International Building Code.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device. 2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used. a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators, seismic restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15072 Page 1 of 7 SECTION 15072
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2. Seismic-Restraint Details: a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacing. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices. c. Pre-approval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).
C. Welding certificates. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of hangers including attachment points.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC and NFPA 13.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage pre-approval by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If pre-approved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control. 3. Mason Industries. 4. M.W. Sausse Co.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15072 Page 2 of 7 SECTION 15072
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
B. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a non-slip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene or hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass.
C. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant, hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. 1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil-resistant neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. 2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
D. Restrained Mounts: All-directional mountings with seismic restraint. 1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil-resistant neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. 2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Kinetics Noise Control. 5. Mason Industries. 6. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC. 7. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 8. M.W. Sausse Co.
B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15072 Page 3 of 7 SECTION 15072
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.
C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
D. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.
E. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.
F. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.
G. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.
H. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.
I. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
2.3 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping. 1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanized metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15072 Page 4 of 7 SECTION 15072
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate capacity range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.
C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.
3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Restraints: 1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). 2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.
B. Piping Restraints: 1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127 and NFPA 13. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet (12 m) o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet (24 m) o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet (3.7 m).
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15072 Page 5 of 7 SECTION 15072
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
D. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.
E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
F. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.
G. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
H. Drilled-in Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid pre-stressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy- duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive. 5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications.
3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping" for piping flexible connections.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15072 Page 6 of 7 SECTION 15072
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
3.5 EXISTING WORK
A. Ensure access to existing piping and other installations which remain active and which require access. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.
B. Extend existing piping installations using materials and methods as specified.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15072 Page 7 of 7 SECTION 15073
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15060 “Hangars and Supports”. 2. Section 15140 “Domestic Water Piping”. 3. Section 15150 “Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping”. 4. Section 15156 “Drainage Piping Specialties”. 5. Section 15160 “Storm Drainage Piping”. 6. Section 15211 “General Service Compressed Air Piping”. 7. Section 15251 “General Service Air Compressors and Receivers”. 8. Section 15461 “Electric Water Heaters”. 9. Section 15467 “Water Softeners”. 10. Other Division 15 specifications as applicable.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: 1. Isolation pads. 2. Isolation mounts. 3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 4. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators. 5. Housed spring mounts. 6. Elastomeric hangers. 7. Spring hangers. 8. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops. 9. Pipe riser resilient supports. 10. Resilient pipe guides. 11. Seismic snubbers. 12. Restraining braces and cables. 13. Steel and inertia, vibration isolation equipment bases.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. IBC: International Building Code.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15073 Page 1 of 12 SECTION 15073
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide vibration isolation on motor driven equipment where indicated on the drawings.
B. Provide minimum static deflection of isolators for equipment as indicated on the drawings.
C. Seismic-Restraint Loading: 1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D. 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: II. a. Component Importance Factor: 1.0 b. Component Response Modification Factor: 2.5 c. Typical Piping Amplification Factor: 1.0 d. Gas Piping Amplification Factor: 2.5 e. Typical Equipment Amplification Factor: 1.0 f. Pressure Vessel Amplification Factor: 2.5 g. Vibration Isolated Equipment Amplification Factor: 2.5 3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): 0641. 4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1-Second Period: 0.192.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device. 2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used. a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements. 3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators, seismic restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases. 2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15073 Page 2 of 12 SECTION 15073
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loads. 4. Seismic-Restraint Details: a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacing. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices. c. Pre-approval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).
C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for plumbing piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Manufacturer’s field reports.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of hangers including attachment points.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage pre-approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If pre-approved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15073 Page 3 of 12 SECTION 15073
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control. 3. Mason Industries. 4. M.W. Sausse Co.
B. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a non-slip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene or hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass.
C. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant, hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. 1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. 2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
D. Restrained Mounts: All-directional mountings with seismic restraint. 1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil-resistant neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. 2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
E. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators. 1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15073 Page 4 of 12 SECTION 15073
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm- ) thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447 kPa). 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.
F. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit stop restraint. 1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 2. Restraint: Seismic or limit-stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.
G. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers. 1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint. 2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure. 3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm) travel up or down before contacting a resilient collar.
H. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
I. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15073 Page 5 of 12 SECTION 15073
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel washer reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil.
J. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded rod. 8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil.
K. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig (3.45 MPa) and for equal resistance in all directions.
L. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.
2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15073 Page 6 of 12 SECTION 15073
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control. 3. Mason Industries. 4. M.W. Sausse
B. Steel Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails. 1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch (25mm) clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps. 2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment. 3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.
C. Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for placement of cast-in-place concrete. 1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch (25mm) clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps. 2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment. 3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support. 4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from supported equipment manufacturer.
2.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Kinetics Noise Control. 5. Mason Industries. 6. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC. 7. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15073 Page 7 of 12 SECTION 15073
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
8. M.W. Sausse
B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.
C. Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings. 1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud- wedge or female-wedge type. 2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene. 3. Maximum 1/4-inch (6-mm) air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick resilient cushion.
D. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
E. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
F. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.
G. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.
H. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.
I. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.
J. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15073 Page 8 of 12 SECTION 15073
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
K. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
2.4 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping. 1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate capacity range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15073 Page 9 of 12 SECTION 15073
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.
3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Restraints: 1. Install seismic snubbers on plumbing equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure. 2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inches (3.2 mm). 3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.
B. Piping Restraints: 1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet (12 m) o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet (24 m) o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet (3.7 m).
C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
D. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.
E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
F. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.
G. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
H. Drilled-in Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid pre-stressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15073 Page 10 of 12 SECTION 15073
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy- duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive. 5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless steel anchors for exterior applications.
3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for piping flexible connections.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.
C. Adjust active height of sprint isolators.
D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
3.6 EXISTING WORK
A. Ensure access to existing piping and other installations which remain active and which require access. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.
B. Extend existing piping installations using materials and methods as specified.
3.7 VERIFICATION BY OWNER
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15073 Page 11 of 12 SECTION 15073
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide services of testing agency to take noise measurement per Owner’s request for two (2) eight (8) hour days (non-concurrent) as scheduled with Owner’s designated representative. Use meters meeting requirements of ASA 47 (ANSI S1.4).
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15073 Page 12 of 12 SECTION 15074
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15060 “Hangers and Supports”. 2. Section 15124 “Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping” 3. Section 15181 “Hydronic Piping” 4. Section 15183 “Refrigerant Piping” 5. Section 15185 “Hydronic Pumps” 6. Section 15192 “Facility Fuel-Oil Piping” 7. Section 15195 “Facility Natural Gas Piping” 8. Section 15211 “General Service Compressed Air Piping” 9. Section 15251 “General Service Air Compressors and Receivers” 10. Section 15487 “Heat Exchangers” 11. Section 15512 “Cast Iron Boilers” 12. Section 15515 “Water Tube Boilers” 13. Section 15550 “Breechings, Chimneys and Stacks” 14. Section 15625 “Centrifugal Water Chillers” 15. Section 15626 “Rotary Screw Water Chillers” 16. Section 15627 “Reciprocating Water Chillers” 17. Section 15642 “Field Erected Induced Draft Cooling Towers” 18. Section 15671 “Condensing Units” 19. Section 15672 “Air Cooled Condensers” 20. Section 15741 “Multizone Packaged Indoor Central Station Air Handling Units” 21. Section 15734 “Computer Room Air Conditioning Systems” 22. Section 15736 “Rooftop Replacement Air Units” 23. Section 15750 “Rooftop Evaporative Cooling Units” 24. Section 15763 “Fan Coil Units” 25. Section 15815 “Metal Ducts” 26. Section 15825 “Duct Sound Attenuators” 27. Section 15835 “Unit Heaters” 28. Section 15836 “Axial Fans” 29. Section 15837 “Centrifugal Fans” 30. Section 15838 “Power Ventilators” 31. Section 15840 “Air Terminal Units”
1.2 SUMMARY
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15074 Page 1 of 14 SECTION 15074
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. This Section includes the following: 1. Isolation pads. 2. Isolation mounts. 3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 4. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators. 5. Housed spring mounts. 6. Elastomeric hangers. 7. Spring hangers. 8. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops. 9. Pipe riser resilient supports. 10. Resilient pipe guides. 11. Restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails. 12. Seismic snubbers. 13. Restraining braces and cables. 14. Steel and inertia, vibration isolation equipment bases.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. IBC: International Building Code.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide vibration isolation on motor driven equipment where indicated on the drawings.
B. Provide minimum static deflection of isolators for equipment as indicated on the drawings.
C. Wind-Restraint Loading: 1. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph. 2. Building Classification Category: II. 3. Minimum 10 lb./sq. ft. (48.8 kg/sq. m) multiplied by the maximum area of the HVAC component projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either side of normal. D. Seismic-Restraint Loading: 1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D. 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: II. a. Typical Component Importance Factor: 1.0 b. Smoke Control Component Importance Factor: 1.5 c. Component Response Modification Factor: 2.5 d. Piping Amplification Factor: 1.0 e. Typical Equipment Amplification Factor: 1.0
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15074 Page 2 of 14 SECTION 15074
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
f. Pressure Vessel Amplification Factor: 2.5 g. Vibration Isolation Equipment Amplification Factor: 2.5 3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): 0.641. 4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1-Second Period: 0.192. 5. All Vibration and Seismic Controls shall be UV and corrosion resistant materials where exposed to ambient conditions.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device. 2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used. a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements. 3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators, seismic restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases. a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 15 Sections for equipment mounted outdoors. 2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loads. 4. Seismic-Restraint Details: a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15074 Page 3 of 14 SECTION 15074
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices. c. Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind- restraint details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 15 Sections for equipment mounted outdoors. d. Pre-approval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).
C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for HVAC piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-mounting systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
F. Manufacturer’s field reports.
G. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of hangers including attachment points.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage pre-approval by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If pre-approved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15074 Page 4 of 14 SECTION 15074
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control. 3. Mason Industries. 4. M.W. Sausse Co.
B. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a non-slip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene or hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass.
C. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. 1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. 2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
D. Restrained Mounts: All-directional mountings with seismic restraint. 1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. 2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
E. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators. 1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15074 Page 5 of 14 SECTION 15074
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm- ) thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447 kPa). 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.
F. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit stop restraint. 1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 2. Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.
G. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers. 1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint. 2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure. 3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm) travel up or down before contacting a resilient collar.
H. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
I. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15074 Page 6 of 14 SECTION 15074
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel washer reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil.
J. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded rod. 8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil.
K. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig (3.45 MPa) and for equal resistance in all directions.
L. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and re-insertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.
2.2 RESTRAINED VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF-CURB RAILS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control. 3. Mason Industries.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15074 Page 7 of 14 SECTION 15074
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
4. M.W. Sausse
B. General Requirements for Restrained Vibration Isolation Roof-Curb Rails: Factory assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb rail designed to resiliently support equipment and to withstand seismic forces.
C. Lower Support Assembly: Formed sheet-metal section containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support upper frame. Upper frame shall provide continuous support for equipment and shall be captive to resiliently resist seismic forces. Lower support assembly shall have a means for attaching to building structure and a wood nailer for attaching roof materials, and shall be insulated with a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of rigid, glass-fiber insulation on inside of assembly.
D. Spring Isolators: Adjustable, restrained spring isolators shall be mounted on 1/4-inch- (6mm) thick, elastomeric vibration isolation pads and shall have access ports, for level adjustment, with removable waterproof covers at all isolator locations. Isolators shall be located so they are accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of the installation without interfering with the integrity of the roof. 1. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint. a. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt. b. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. c. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. d. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. e. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 2. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a non-slip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. a. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant standard neoprene or hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass.
E. Snubber Bushings: All-directional, elastomeric snubber bushings at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick.
F. Water Seal: Galvanized sheet metal with EPDM seals at corners, attached to upper support frame, extending down past wood nailer of lower support assembly, and counter flashed over roof materials.
2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15074 Page 8 of 14 SECTION 15074
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control. 3. Mason Industries. 4. M.W. Sausse
B. Steel Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails. 1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch (25-mm) clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps. 2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment. 3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.
C. Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for placement of cast-in-place concrete. 1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch (25mm) clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps. 2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment. 3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support. 4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from supported equipment manufacturer.
2.4 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Kinetics Noise Control. 5. Mason Industries. 6. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15074 Page 9 of 14 SECTION 15074
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
7. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.80. 8. M.W. Sausse
B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected. C. Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings. 1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud wedge or female-wedge type. 2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene. 3. Maximum 1/4-inch (6-mm) air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick resilient cushion.
D. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
E. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
F. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.
G. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.
H. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.
I. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.
J. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15074 Page 10 of 14 SECTION 15074
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
K. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
2.5 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping. 1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanized metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate capacity range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15074 Page 11 of 14 SECTION 15074
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.
3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
B. Equipment Restraints: 1. Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure. 2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). 3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.
C. Piping Restraints: 1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet (12 m) o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet (24 m) o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet (3.7 m).
D. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.
F. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
G. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.
H. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
I. Drilled-in Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15074 Page 12 of 14 SECTION 15074
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid pre-stressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy- duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive. 5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications.
3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Section 15181 "Hydronic Piping" for piping flexible connections.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.
C. Adjust air-spring leveling mechanism.
D. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
E. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15074 Page 13 of 14 SECTION 15074
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-mounting systems. Refer to Section "Demonstration and Training."
3.7 EXISTING WORK
A. Ensure access to existing piping and ductwork and other installations which remain active and which require access. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.
B. Extend existing piping and ductwork installations using materials and methods as specified.
3.8 OWNER’S FIELD VERIFICATION
A. Provide services of testing agency to take noise measurement per Owner’s request for two (2) eight (8) hour days (non-concurrent) as scheduled with Owner’s designated representative. Use meters meeting requirements of ASA 47 (ANSI S1.4).
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Vibrations and Seismic Controls.15074 Page 14 of 14 SECTION 15075
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15050 “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods”. 2. Other Division 15 specifications as applicable.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes mechanical identification materials and devices.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For identification materials and devices.
B. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.
C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Reproduce on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation as shown on tag, room or space location of valve, and variations for identification. Mark valves intended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. Besides mounted and laminated copies, furnish copies for maintenance manuals.
D. Equipment Nameplates: List of equipment and nameplate text.
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Mechanical Identification 15075 Page 1 of 7 SECTION 15075
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS
A. General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than single type is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option.
B. Equipment Nameplates: Plastic-laminate permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or stamped. 1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data. 2. Location: Accessible and visible. 3. Nameplates shall be provided for air handling units, fans, compressors, pumps, boilers, chillers, condensing units, motors, motor controls, safety switches, starters, controllers, panelboards, remote control pushbuttons, and alarms. Nameplates shall also be provided special or separate items of temperature control, but not room thermostats.
C. Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared with letter sizes conforming to recommendations of ASME A13.1. Minimum letter height is 1-1/4 inches for ducts, and 3/4 inch for access door signs and similar operational instructions. 1. Material: Fiberboard. 2. Material: Brass. 3. Stencil Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd gloss black enamel, unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. 4. Identification Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Snap-On Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semi rigid, snap-on type. Include color-coding according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color-coded, pressure-sensitive, vinyl type with permanent adhesive.
F. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.
G. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, at least 3 times letter height and of length required for label.
H. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Mechanical Identification 15075 Page 2 of 7 SECTION 15075
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering, to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit, on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
I. Plastic Duct Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following color codes: 1. Green: Cold-air supply. 2. Yellow: Hot-air supply. 3. Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air. 4. Hazardous Material Exhausts: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1. 5. Terminology: Include direction of airflow; duct service such as supply, return, and exhaust; duct origin, duct destination, and design flow.
J. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, vinyl tape, at least 3 mils thick. 1. Width: 1-1/2 inches on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 6 inches; 21/2 inches for larger pipes. 2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
K. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch sequenced numbers. Include 5/32-inch hole for fastener. 1. Material: 18 gauge polished brass. 2. Size: 1-1/2-inches diameter, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Shape: Round. 4. Letter Color: Black 5. Terminology: Each valve shall have an identifying letter designating the system and an identifying number designating the unit. Identifying letter for various systems shall be, for example: HWS, HWR, CWS, CWR, CDWS, CDWR, D (drain), etc.
L. Access Panel Markers: 1/16-inch- thick, engraved plastic-laminate markers, with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Provide 1/8-inch center hole for attachment.
M. Valve Charts and Diagrams: Drawings, listing and showing all valves shall be provided in duplicate. Diagrams shall be floor plans with valve locations shown and valve identification numbers identified. The chart shall designate the location and service of each valve.
N. Valve Diagram Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls for each page of valve charts and diagrams. Include screws. 1. Frame: Finished hardwood.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Mechanical Identification 15075 Page 3 of 7 SECTION 15075
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
2. Frame: Extruded aluminum. 3. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing quality B, 2.5-mm, single thickness glass.
O. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine sub-core, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening. 1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment identification. 2. Thickness: 1/16 inch, for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8 inches in length, and 1/8 inch (3 mm) for larger units. 3. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws or rivets.
P. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following color codes: 1. Green: Cooling equipment and components. 2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components. 3. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components. 4. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above. 5. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1. 6. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following: a. Name and plan number. b. Equipment service. c. Design capacity. d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and speed. 7. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for equipment.
Q. Plasticized Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with mat finish suitable for writing. 1. Size: 3-1/4 by 5-5/8 inches. 2. Fasteners: Brass grommets and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, or DO NOT OPERATE.
R. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in mechanical identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters, and terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. 1. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple systems of same name are indicated. Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Mechanical Identification 15075 Page 4 of 7 SECTION 15075
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow.
B. Marker Type: Stenciled markers with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles.
C. Marker Type: Stenciled markers complying with ASME A13.1.
D. Marker Type: Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot, non-insulated pipes.
E. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes smaller than 6 inches OD by one of following methods: 1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned, semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. 2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. 3. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe or insulation. 4. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4 inch wide, lapped a minimum of 1-1/2 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.
F. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes 6 inches in diameter and larger by one of following methods: 1. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe or insulation. 2. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 11/2 inches wide, lapped a minimum of 3 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe. 3. Strapped to pipe or insulation with manufacturer's standard stainless-steel bands.
G. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior non-concealed locations according to the following: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or non-accessible enclosures. 4. At each pipe passage to underground. 5. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 6. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Mechanical Identification 15075 Page 5 of 7 SECTION 15075
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
7. Spaced at a maximum of 50-foot intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 8. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings.
3.2 VALVE TAGS
A. Install on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture supply stops, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in valve schedule.
B. Install mounted valve diagrams and charts in each major equipment room.
C. Provide second diagram and chart laminated between 15 mil plastic sheets. Two (2) holes to be furnished at top, with each hole reinforced.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SIGNS AND MARKERS
A. Install engraved plastic-laminate signs or equipment markers on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment: 1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. 2. Fire department hose valves and hose stations. 3. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units. 4. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption units. 5. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units. 6. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar equipment. 7. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes. 8. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units. 9. Tanks and pressure vessels. 10. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.
B. Optional Sign Types: Stenciled signs may be provided instead of engraved plastic, at Installer's option, where lettering larger than 1-inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification. 1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 2. Terms on Signs: Distinguish between multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units. Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Mechanical Identification 15075 Page 6 of 7 SECTION 15075
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
C. Plasticized Tags: Install within concealed space, to reduce amount of text in exposed sign outside concealment, if equipment to be identified is concealed above acoustical ceiling or similar concealment. 1. Identify operational valves and similar minor equipment items located in unoccupied spaces, including machine rooms, by installing plasticized tags.
D. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with duct markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows showing service and direction of flow. 1. Location: Locate signs near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions.
B. Clean faces of identification devices and glass frames of valve charts.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Mechanical Identification 15075 Page 7 of 7 SECTION 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07840 “Through Penetration Firestop Systems” 2. Section 09900 “Paints and Coatings” 3. Section 15060 “Hangers and Supports” 4. Section 15075 “Mechanical Identification” 5. Section 15051 “Motors and Variable Frequency Drives” 6. Section 15160 “Storm Drainage Piping” 7. Section 15181 “Hydronic Piping” 8. Section 15840 “Air Terminal Units” 9. Section 15815 “Metal Ducts”
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes ductwork insulation, duct liner, insulation jackets, thermal insulation for piping systems including vapor retarders, jackets and accessories.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]).
B. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus.
C. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
D. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.
E. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
F. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Mechanical Insulation 15080 Page 1 of 13 SECTION 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION
Insulation.
G. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.
H. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation.
I. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.
J. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.
K. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
L. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct Lining Material).
M. ASTM C1136 B Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeate Vapor Retardants for Thermal Insulation.
N. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
O. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
P. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
Q. ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.
R. NAIMA (North American Insulation Manufacturers Association) - National Insulation Standards.
S. SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Hot Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures of 100 deg F or higher.
B. Dual-Temperature Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures that vary from hot to cold.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Mechanical Insulation 15080 Page 2 of 13 SECTION 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION
C. Cold Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures less than 75 deg F.
D. Thermal resistivity is designated by an R-value that represents the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-value). Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick. Thermal resistivity (R-value) is expressed by the temperature difference in degrees Fahrenheit between the two exposed faces required to cause 1 BTU per hour (1 Watt) to flow through 1 square foot at mean temperatures indicated. E. Thermal Conductivity (k-value): Measure of heat flow through a material at a given temperature difference; conductivity is expressed in units of Btu x inch/h x sq. ft. x deg F.
F. Density: Is expressed in pcf.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 15050 “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods”, submittal requirements.
B. No insulation shall be obtained or delivered to the job site until receipt of approved shop drawings from the Owner.
C. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
1. A complete tabular insulation schedule of all the insulation being provided under this project. 2. Schedule headings shall include type of equipment (including Tag No.), Pipe (service, type), Ductwork (service, type), Insulation Type, Insulation Manufacturer, Insulation Thickness, Insulation K-value, Jacketing or Protective Covering. 3. Manufacturer's highlighted material data sheets, these should include published composite flame spread, smoke developed hazard ratings for insulation and jacketing and K-factors for insulation. 4. Provide published manufacturer's insulation application recommendations. Highlight application procedures being used on this Contract and note any deviations planned. 5. Provide when requested by the Owner samples of the insulation being proposed.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Conform to the following characteristics for insulation including facings, cements, and adhesives, when tested according to ASTM E 84, by UL or other testing or inspecting organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Label insulation with appropriate markings of testing laboratory.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Mechanical Insulation 15080 Page 3 of 13 SECTION 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION
1. Interior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less. 2. Exterior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 75 or less and a smoke developed rating of 150 or less.
B. All of the insulation products or their shipping cartons shall bear a label indicating that flame and smoke ratings do not exceed above requirements.
C. Field-Constructed Mock-Up: Before installation, erect mock-up of size and at locations indicated to demonstrate workmanship quality. Include method of attachment and finishing for each.
1. Interior and exterior equipment. 2. Interior and exterior duct systems. 3. Interior and exterior piping systems. 4. Retain and protect mock-ups during construction as a standard for judging completed unit of Work. 5. Remove mock-ups from Project site when directed. 6. Accepted mock-ups may become part of completed unit of Work.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Insulation shall not be installed or applied until the equipment and associated piping and ductwork has been pressure tested and the building is weatherproof.
B. Schedule insulation application after installation and testing of heat trace tape.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
B. Contractor: Company and company field staff specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five years commercial experience.
1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Mechanical Insulation 15080 Page 4 of 13 SECTION 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION
B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.
C. Contractor to replace any insulating materials damaged due to water, dirt, chemicals, etc. at no charge to Owner.
1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install insulation outside ambient conditions required by manufacturer of each product.
1.12 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.13 WARRANTY
A. Provide one-year manufacturer warranty for man-made fiber.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MAN MADE MINERAL FIBER Insulation for piping
A. Manufacturers: 1. Owens - Corning 2. Manville 3. Certain Teed 4. Knauf
B. Provide materials in accordance with Municipality of Las Vegas standards.
C. Insulation: Type A. ASTM C547 Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation, Type I 850, K-factor of 0.24 at 75°F, flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less.
D. Vapor Retarder Jacket: 1. ASTM C921, White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm-inches.
E. Self-Sealing Cap: As provided by manufacturer.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Mechanical Insulation 15080 Page 5 of 13 SECTION 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION
2.2 POLYISOCYANURATE FOAM Insulation for piping
A. Manufacturer:
1. Hi Therm 2. Dow Corning B. Insulation: Type B. ASTM E-84, HT-300 rigid closed cell pipe insulation having K-factor of 0.165 (aged 180 days at 75°F) meeting flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less.
C. Vapor Retarder Jacket:
1. ASTM C921, white Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminum film, or as otherwise recommended by insulation manufacturer. 2. Meet flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less, in accordance with ASTM E-84.
D. Insulation: Thickness for foam having K-factor of 0.165 may be reduced from that indicated for mineral fiber insulation having a K-factor of 0.24, as long as the equivalent thermal resistance is maintained.
2.3 MINERAL FIBER, FLEXIBLE Insulation for the exterior of sheet metal ducts
A. Manufacturers:
1. Owens - Corning 2. Manville 3. Certain Teed 4. Knauf
B. Insulation: Type A. ASTM C553 Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications, Type II.
C. Vapor Retardant Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film 0.0032 inch vinyl. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02, .3 perm. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape and tie wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Mechanical Insulation 15080 Page 6 of 13 SECTION 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION
D. Vapor Retardant Tape
1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.
2.4 MINERAL FIBER, RIGID Insulation for the exterior of sheet metal ducts.
A. Manufacturers:
1. Owens - Corning 2. Manville 3. Certain Teed 4. Knauf
B. Insulation: Type B. ASTM C612 Mineral Fiber Block and Board Insulation, Type IA C. Vapor Retardant Jacket:
1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.04 perm. 3. Secure with two coats of vapor barrier mastic and glass tape.
D. Vapor Retardant Tape
1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.
2.5 INSULATION JACKET
A. Pipe Jacket: ASTM D1784, One-piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off- white color. 1. Thickness: 20 mil. 2. Connections: Pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.
B. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209
1. Thickness: 0.016 inch thick sheet. 2. Finish: Embossed. 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Mechanical Insulation 15080 Page 7 of 13 SECTION 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION
4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
2.6 GLASS FIBER DUCT LINER, FLEXIBLE Insulation for the Interior of sheet metal ducts.
A. Manufacturers:
1. Owens - Corning 2. Manville 3. Certain Teed 4. Knauf
B. Insulation: Type C ASTM C1071 Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct Lining Material), Type I
C. Adhesive:
1. Waterproof, ASTM E162 fire-retardant type.
D. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel impact applied or welded with press-on head.
2.7 CALCIUM SILICATE
A. Manufacturers:
1. Owens-Corning 2. Manville 3. Certain Tead 4. Knauf
B. Insulation: Type 1 ASTM C533, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate, non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement, incombustible.
C. Form: Preformed pipe sections.
D. Thermal Conductivity: 0.60 at 500 degrees F.
E. Dry Density: 15.0 pcf maximum.
F. Compressive Strength: 100 psi minimum at 5 percent deformation.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Mechanical Insulation 15080 Page 8 of 13 SECTION 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION
2.8 IMS 22, KITCHEN EXHAUST DUCT INSULATION
A. The kitchen exhaust ductwork shall be insulated in a three-layer process. The first two layers shall consist of two 2" thick blankets of ceramic fiber insulation impaled over weld pins. The third layer shall consist of a 1" thick layer of Fiberglas blanket insulation impaled over the same stick pins and installed in accordance with IMS 11.
B. Material (First Two Layers): Two 2" thick layers of ceramic fiber blanket insulation with K- value of 0.31 at 400 deg. F, 6 PCF average density; Fiberfrax Durablanket or approved equal by Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that piping, equipment and ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
C. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints.
D. Man-made mineral fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1. Provide factory-applied or field-applied vapor retardant jackets. Secure factory applied jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Secure field-applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and seal all staple penetrations with vapor retardant mastic. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor retardant adhesive or PVC fitting covers. 3. Furnish calcium silicate inserts at piping supports.
E. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F insulate flanges and unions at equipment.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Mechanical Insulation 15080 Page 9 of 13 SECTION 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION
F. Man-made mineral fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
1. Provide factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples or the pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory-applied jacket and butt strips or both. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
G. Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Piping or Equipment 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range and service.
H. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having a fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. Section 07840 for penetrations of assemblies with a fire resistance rating greater than one hour.
I. Pipe Exposed in Finished Spaces: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.
J. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor retardant jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor retardant cement. Cover with aluminum fitting covers and aluminum jacket with seams located at the 3 or 9 o’clock position on the side of horizontal piping with the overlap facing down to shed water or on the bottom side of horizontal equipment.
K. Buried Piping: Insulate only where the manufacturer of a specific insulation recommends that their product may be installed either in a trench, tunnel or direct buried. Provide factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose service jacket with self-sealing lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with 1 mil thick aluminum foil sandwiched between three layers of bituminous compound; outer surface faced with a polyester film.
L. Heat Traced Piping: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material, thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Provide a size large enough to enclose pipe and
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Mechanical Insulation 15080 Page 10 of 13 SECTION 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION
heat tracer. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at the 3 or 9 o’clock position on the side of horizontal piping with the overlap facing down to shed water.
M. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.
N. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
O. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over.
P. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature:
1. Provide insulation with jackets. 2. Finish with tape and jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints.
Q. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature:
1. Provide insulation with jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints- where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation.
R. Ductwork Exposed in Finished Spaces- finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.
S. Exterior Applications: Provide insulation with vapor retardant jacket. Cover with caulked aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal duct section.
T. External Duct Insulation Application:
1. Secure insulation with vapor retardant with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor retardant adhesive or tape to match jacket. 2. Secure insulation without vapor retardant with staples, tape, or wires. Secure jacketed insulation with wire ties at 12 inch on center and tape joints 3 inch on center at fittings. 3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. 4. Seal vapor retardant penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor retardant adhesive. 5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Mechanical Insulation 15080 Page 11 of 13 SECTION 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION
U. Duct Liner Application: 1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage. 2. Secure insulation with tack-weld or impact fastened galvanized mechanical liner fasteners. SMACNA Standards for spacing. 3. Seal and smooth joints- seal and coat transverse joints. 4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive. 5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for airflow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness.
3.3 SCHEDULES INSULATION
PIPING TYPE PIPE SIZE THICKNESS Inch (mm) Inch (mm)
Domestic Cold Water Supply Hot Water Supply and Hot Water A or B Up to 2” 0.75” Recirculating 2½” and larger 1"
Hot Water Piping Exposed B Up to 2” 1½” To Freezing (Outdoors) 2½” and larger 2"
Chilled Water Piping Exposed B Up to 2” 1” To Freezing (Outdoors) 2½” and larger 1½"
Heating Hot Water Supply and Return A or B Up to 2” 1½” 2½” and larger 2"
Chilled Water Supply and Return B Up to 2” 1” 2½” and larger 1½"
Condensate Drains Exposed to B All 1” Outdoor Conditions
Storm Drains (Horizontal Runs Only) A All 1”
Notes: Fiberglass insulation shall not be used for chilled water supply and return piping.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Mechanical Insulation 15080 Page 12 of 13 SECTION 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION
DUCTWORK TYPE INSULATION DENSITY THICKNEESS Concealed Supply Ducts A 1-1/2” 3/4" Supply Ducts in Vertical A 1-1/2” 3/4" Shaft Concealed Return Ducts A 1-1/2” 3/4” in Unconditioned Space Outside Air Ducts A 1-1/2” Exposed Ducts in Fan B 1-1/2” 1-1/2” Rooms or Unconditioned Spaces Ducts, Where Noted C 1-1/2” 1-1/2”
Note: External insulation is not required where internal duct liner (Type C) has been furnished.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Mechanical Insulation 15080 Page 13 of 13 SECTION 15083
HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07840 “Through Penetration Firestop Systems” 2. Section 09900 “Paints and Coatings” 3. Section 15060 “Hangers and Supports” 4. Section 15075 “Mechanical Identification” 5. Section 15051 “Motors and Variable Frequency Drives” 6. Section 15160 “Storm Drainage Piping” 7. Section 15181 “Hydronic Piping” 8. Section 15840 “Air Terminal Units” 9. Section 15815 “Metal Ducts”
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes ductwork insulation, duct liner, insulation jackets, thermal insulation for piping systems including vapor retarders, jackets and accessories.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]).
B. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus.
C. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
D. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.
E. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
F. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Insulation 15083 Page 1 of 12
SECTION 15083
HVAC INSULATION
G. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.
H. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation.
I. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.
J. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.
K. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
L. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct Lining Material).
M. ASTM C1136 B Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeate Vapor Retardants for Thermal Insulation.
N. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
O. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
P. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
Q. ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.
R. NAIMA (North American Insulation Manufacturers Association) - National Insulation Standards.
S. SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Hot Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures of 100 deg. F or higher.
B. Dual-Temperature Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures that vary from hot to cold.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Insulation 15083 Page 2 of 12
SECTION 15083
HVAC INSULATION
C. Cold Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures less than 75 deg. F.
D. Thermal resistivity is designated by an R-value that represents the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-value). Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick. Thermal resistivity (R-value) is expressed by the temperature difference in degrees Fahrenheit between the two exposed faces required to cause 1 BTU per hour (1 Watt) to flow through 1 square foot at mean temperatures indicated.
E. Thermal Conductivity (k-value): Measure of heat flow through a material at a given temperature difference;
F. Density: Is expressed in pcf. 1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 15050 “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods”, submittal requirements.
B. No insulation shall be obtained or delivered to the job site until receipt of approved shop drawings from the Owner.
C. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. A complete tabular insulation schedule of all the insulation being provided under this project. 2. Schedule headings shall include type of equipment (including Tag No.), Pipe (service, type), Ductwork (service, type), Insulation Type, Insulation Manufacturer, Insulation Thickness, Insulation K-value, Jacketing or Protective Covering. 3. Manufacturer's highlighted material data sheets, these should include published composite flame spread, smoke developed hazard ratings for insulation and jacketing and K-factors for insulation. 4. Provide published manufacturer's insulation application recommendations. Highlight application procedures being used on this Contract and note any deviations planned. 5. Provide when requested by the Owner samples of the insulation being proposed.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Conform to the following characteristics for insulation including facings, cements, and adhesives, when tested according to ASTM E 84, by UL or other testing or inspecting organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Label insulation with appropriate markings of testing laboratory. 1. Interior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Insulation 15083 Page 3 of 12
SECTION 15083
HVAC INSULATION
2. Exterior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 75 or less and a smoke developed rating of 150 or less.
B. All of the insulation products or their shipping cartons shall bear a label indicating that flame and smoke ratings do not exceed above requirements.
C. Field-Constructed Mock-Up: Before installation, erect mock-up of size and at locations indicated to demonstrate workmanship quality. Include method of attachment and finishing for each. 1. Interior and exterior equipment. 2. Interior and exterior duct systems. 3. Interior and exterior piping systems. 4. Retain and protect mock-ups during construction as a standard for judging completed unit of Work. 5. Remove mock-ups from Project site when directed. 6. Accepted mock-ups may become part of completed unit of Work.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Insulation shall not be installed or applied until the equipment and associated piping and ductwork has been pressure tested and the building is weatherproof.
B. Schedule insulation application after installation and testing of heat trace tape.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
B. Contractor: Company and company field staff specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five years commercial experience.
1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.
B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Insulation 15083 Page 4 of 12
SECTION 15083
HVAC INSULATION
C. Contractor to replace any insulating materials damaged due to water, dirt, chemicals, etc. at no charge to Owner.
1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install insulation outside ambient conditions required by manufacturer of each product.
1.12 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year manufacturer warranty for man-made fiber. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MAN MADE MINERAL FIBER Insulation for piping
A. Manufacturers: 1. Owens - Corning 2. Manville 3. Certain Teed 4. Knauf
B. Provide materials in accordance with Municipality of Las Vegas standards.
C. Insulation: Type A. ASTM C547 Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation, Type I 850, K-factor of 0.24 at 75°F, flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less.
D. Vapor Retarder Jacket: 1. ASTM C921, White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm-inches.
E. Self-Sealing Cap: As provided by manufacturer.
2.2 POLYISOCYANURATE FOAM Insulation for piping
A. Manufacturer: 1. Hi Therm 2. Dow Corning
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Insulation 15083 Page 5 of 12
SECTION 15083
HVAC INSULATION
B. Insulation: Type B. ASTM E-84, HT-300 rigid closed cell pipe insulation having K-factor of 0.165 (aged 180 days at 75°F) meeting flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less.
C. Vapor Retarder Jacket: 1. ASTM C921, white Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminum film, or as otherwise recommended by insulation manufacturer. 2. Meet flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less, in accordance with ASTM E-84.
D. Insulation: Thickness for foam having K-factor of 0.165 may be reduced from that indicated for mineral fiber insulation having a K-factor of 0.24, as long as the equivalent thermal resistance is maintained.
2.3 MINERAL FIBER, FLEXIBLE Insulation for the exterior of sheet metal ducts
A. Manufacturers: 1. Owens - Corning 2. Manville 3. Certain Teed 4. Knauf
B. Insulation: Type A. ASTM C553 Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications, Type II.
C. Vapor Retardant Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film 0.0032 inch vinyl. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02, .3 perm. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape and tie wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
D. Vapor Retardant Tape 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.
2.4 MINERAL FIBER, RIGID Insulation for the exterior of sheet metal ducts.
A. Manufacturers: 1. Owens - Corning 2. Manville 3. Certain Teed 4. Knauf
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Insulation 15083 Page 6 of 12
SECTION 15083
HVAC INSULATION
B. Insulation: Type B. ASTM C612 Mineral Fiber Block and Board Insulation, Type IA
C. Vapor Retardant Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.04 perm. 3. Secure with two coats of vapor barrier mastic and glass tape.
D. Vapor Retardant Tape 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.
2.5 INSULATION JACKET
A. Pipe Jacket: ASTM D1784, One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off- white color. 1. Thickness: 20 mil. 2. Connections: Pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.
B. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 1. Thickness: 0.016 inch thick sheet. 2. Finish: Embossed. 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. 4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
2.6 GLASS FIBER DUCT LINER, FLEXIBLE Insulation for the Interior of sheet metal ducts.
A. Manufacturers: 1. Owens - Corning 2. Manville 3. Certain Teed 4. Knauf
B. Insulation: Type C ASTM C1071 Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct Lining Material), Type I
C. Adhesive: 1. Waterproof, ASTM E162 fire-retardant type.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Insulation 15083 Page 7 of 12
SECTION 15083
HVAC INSULATION
D. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel impact applied or welded with press-on head.
2.7 CALCIUM SILICATE
A. Manufacturers: 1. Owens-Corning 2. Manville 3. Certain Teed 4. Knauf
B. Insulation: Type 1 ASTM C533, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate, non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement, incombustible.
C. Form: Preformed pipe sections.
D. Thermal Conductivity: 0.60 at 500 degrees F.
E. Dry Density: 15.0 pcf maximum.
F. Compressive Strength: 100 psi minimum at 5 percent deformation.
2.8 IMS 22, KITCHEN EXHAUST DUCT INSULATION A. The kitchen exhaust ductwork shall be insulated in a three-layer process. The first two layers shall consist of two 2" thick blankets of ceramic fiber insulation impaled over weld pins. The third layer shall consist of a 1" thick layer of Fiberglas blanket insulation impaled over the same stick pins and installed in accordance with IMS 11.
B. Material (First Two Layers): Two 2" thick layers of ceramic fiber blanket insulation with K- value of 0.31 at 400 deg. F, 6 PCF average density; Fiberfrax Durablanket or approved equal by Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that piping, equipment and ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Insulation 15083 Page 8 of 12
SECTION 15083
HVAC INSULATION
A. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
C. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints.
D. Man-made mineral fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide factory-applied or field-applied vapor retardant jackets. Secure factory applied jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Secure field-applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and seal all staple penetrations with vapor retardant mastic. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor retardant adhesive or PVC fitting covers. 3. Furnish calcium silicate inserts at piping supports.
E. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F insulate flanges and unions at equipment.
F. Man-made mineral fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples or the pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory-applied jacket and butt strips or both. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
G. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping or Equipment 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range and service.
H. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having a fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. Section 07840 for penetrations of assemblies with a fire resistance rating greater than one hour.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Insulation 15083 Page 9 of 12
SECTION 15083
HVAC INSULATION
I. Pipe Exposed in Finished Spaces: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.
J. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor retardant jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor retardant cement. Cover with aluminum fitting covers and aluminum jacket with seams located at the 3 or 9 o’clock position on the side of horizontal piping with the overlap facing down to shed water or on the bottom side of horizontal equipment.
K. Buried Piping: Insulate only where the manufacturer of a specific insulation recommends that their product may be installed either in a trench, tunnel or direct buried. Provide factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose service jacket with self-sealing lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with 1 mil thick aluminum foil sandwiched between three layers of bituminous compound; outer surface faced with a polyester film.
L. Heat Traced Piping: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material, thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Provide a size large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at the 3 or 9 o’clock position on the side of horizontal piping with the overlap facing down to shed water.
M. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.
N. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
O. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over.
P. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with jackets. 2. Finish with tape and jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints.
Q. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints- where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation.
R. Ductwork Exposed in Finished Spaces- finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.
S. Exterior Applications: Provide insulation with vapor retardant jacket. Cover with caulked aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal duct section.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Insulation 15083 Page 10 of 12
SECTION 15083
HVAC INSULATION
T. External Duct Insulation Application: 1. Secure insulation with vapor retardant with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor retardant adhesive or tape to match jacket. 2. Secure insulation without vapor retardant with staples, tape, or wires. Secure jacketed insulation with wire ties at 12 inch on center and tape joints 3 inch on center at fittings. 3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. 4. Seal vapor retardant penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor retardant adhesive. 5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping.
U. Duct Liner Application: 1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage. 2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. SMACNA Standards for spacing. 3. Seal and smooth joints- seal and coat transverse joints. 4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive. 5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for airflow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness.
3.3 SCHEDULES INSULATION
PIPING TYPE PIPE SIZE THICKNESS Inch (mm) Inch (mm)
Domestic Cold Water Supply Hot Water Supply and Hot Water A or B Up to 2” 0.75” Recirculating 2½” and larger 1"
Hot Water Piping Exposed B Up to 2” 1½” To Freezing (Outdoors) 2½” and larger 2"
Chilled Water Piping Exposed B Up to 2” 1” To Freezing (Outdoors) 2½” and larger 1½"
Heating Hot Water Supply and Return A or B Up to 2” 1½”
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Insulation 15083 Page 11 of 12
SECTION 15083
HVAC INSULATION
2½” and larger 2"
Chilled Water Supply and Return B Up to 2” 1” 2½” and larger 1½"
Condensate Drains Exposed to B All 1” Outdoor Conditions
Storm Drains (Horizontal Runs Only) A All 1”
Notes: Fiberglass insulation shall not be used for chilled water supply and return piping.
DUCTWORK TYPE INSULATION DENSITY (#/C.F.) THICKNESS Concealed Supply Ducts A 1-1/2" 3/4 Supply Ducts in Vertical Shaft A 1-1/2" 3/4
Concealed Return Ducts in Unconditioned A 1-1/2” 3/4 Space Outside Air Ducts A 1-1/2” 3/4
Exposed Ducts In Fan Rooms or B 1-1/2” 1-1/2 Unconditioned Spaces Ducts, Where Noted C 1-1/2" 1-1/2
Note: External insulation is not required where internal duct liner (Type C) has been furnished.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Insulation 15083 Page 12 of 12
SECTION 15110
VALVES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Special purpose valves are specified in Sections: a. 15050 “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” b. 15140 “Domestic Water Piping” c. 15150 “Sanitary and Waste Vent Piping”. d. 15155 “Domestic Water and Drainage Piping Specialties” e. 15181 “Hydronic Piping” f. 15183 “Refrigerant Piping” g. 15192 “Facility Fuel – Oil Piping” h. 15195 “Facility Natural - Gas Piping” i. 15211 “General – Service Compressed – Air Piping” j. Other Division 15 Boiler Sections as applicable to Project. 2. Valve tags and charts are specified in Section 15075 "Mechanical Identification."
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical piping systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list indicating valve and its application.
C. Flow characteristics and capacities at rated pressure drops or "Cv" values as appropriate.
D. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing, disassembling, and repairing.
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Valves 15110 Page 1 of 11 SECTION 15110
VALVES
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Section "Materials and Equipment," under "Source Limitations" Paragraph.
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1 for power piping.
C. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, and weld ends. 3. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
C. Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Gate Valves: a. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. b. NIBCO Inc. c. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Valves 15110 Page 2 of 11 SECTION 15110
VALVES
2. Ball Valves: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Division. b. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. c. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. d. Watts Regulator 3. Plug Valves: a. Grinnell Corp. b. NIBCO Inc. c. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. 4. Globe Valves: a. NIBCO Inc. b. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. 5. Butterfly Valves: a. Center Line, Mark Controls Corporation. b. General Signal; DeZurik Unit. c. Keystone Valve USA, Inc. d. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. e. NIBCO Inc. f. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. 6. High Performance Butterfly Valves a. Flow Seal HPBV b. Jamesbury 8100 c. Keystone Valve USA, Inc. 7. Swing Check Valves: a. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division. b. Grinnell, CPV Company c. Hammond Valve Corporation. d. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. e. NIBCO Inc. f. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. 8. Lift Check Valves: a. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. b. NIBCO Inc. c. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
2.2 BASIC, COMMON FEATURES
A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified below. 1. Non-rising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of rising stems.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Valves 15110 Page 3 of 11 SECTION 15110
VALVES
B. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application Schedule" of Part 3 of this Section and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.
C. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special operator features: 1. Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn. 2. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves 6 inches and smaller, except for plug valves, which shall have square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10 plug valves. 3. Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves 4 inches and larger, installed 84 inches or higher above finished floor elevation. Chain shall extend down to 72 inches above finished floor. 4. Gear-Drive Operators: For quarter-turn valves 8 inches and larger. Geared actuators shall include a gasketed cover plate
E. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to receive insulation.
F. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.
G. Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
H. Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.
I. Solder Joint: ASME B16.18. 1. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point below 840 deg F for gate, globe, and check valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.
J. Package for Valve Stems: 1. Provide suitable packing compatible with fluid medium used in piping.
2.3 GATE VALVES
A. Gate Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 150, 300-psi CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and bonnet, solid-bronze wedge, copper-silicon alloy rising stem, Teflon- impregnated packing with bronze packing nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Valves 15110 Page 4 of 11 SECTION 15110
VALVES
B. Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 150, 300-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, solid cast-iron wedge, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, teflon-impregnated packing with 2-piece packing gland assembly, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.
2.4 BALL VALVES
A. Ball Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 600-psi CWP, ASTM B 584 bronze body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass ball, standard port for 1/2-inch valves and smaller and conventional port for 3/4-inch valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; teflon seats and seals; threaded or soldered end connections: 1. Operator: Steel handwheel. 2. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle. 3. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel tee handle. 4. Operator: Lever operators with lock. 5. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping. 6. Memory Stop: For operator handles, where valves are being provided as balancing valves and balancing valves are indicated on the drawings.
2.5 PLUG VALVES
A. Plug Valves: MSS SP-78, 175-psi (150 psig over 12") CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, cast-iron plug, Buna N, Viton, or teflon packing, flanged or grooved end connections: 1. Operator: Lever. 2. Operator: Square head with 1 wrench for every 10 valves. 3. Operator: Worm and gear with handwheel, sizes 6 inches and larger. 4. Operator: Worm and gear with chain wheel, sizes 6 inches and larger, 96 inches or higher above floor. 5. Memory Stop: For operable handles.
2.6 GLOBE VALVES
A. Globe Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi CWP, or Class 150, 300-psi CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and screwed bonnet, rubber, bronze, or teflon disc, silicon bronze-alloy stem, teflon-impregnated packing with bronze nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
B. Globe Valves, 3 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable bronze seat and disc,
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Valves 15110 Page 5 of 11 SECTION 15110
VALVES
brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, teflon-impregnated packing with cast-iron follower, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.
2.7 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, 200-psi CWP, 150-psi maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 ductile-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals, or lug style: 1. Disc Type: Nickel-plated ductile iron. 2. Disc Type: Aluminum bronze. 3. Disc Type: Elastomer-coated ductile iron. 4. Disc Type: Epoxy-coated ductile iron. 5. Operator for Sizes 2 Inches to 6 Inches: Standard lever handle. 6. Operator for Sizes 2 Inches to 6 Inches: Standard lever handle with memory stop. 7. Operator for Sizes 2 Inches to 6 Inches: Lever handle with latch lock. 8. Operator for Sizes 8 Inches to 24 Inches: Gear operator with position indicator. 9. Operator for Sizes 8 Inches to 24 Inches: Gear operator with position indicator and chain wheel. 10. Operator for Sizes 8 Inches and Larger, 96 Inches or Higher above Floor: Chain- wheel operator.
2.8 CHECK VALVES
A. Provide a pump check valve in pump discharge piping for each pump assembly.
B. When replacing check valves in existing piping systems, a spool¬ piece shall be provided with each pump check valve. For iron body pump check valves, the spool piece shall have flat faced steel flanges and a steel pipe nipple welded between the flanges. For steel body pump check valves, the spool piece shall have standard raised face steel flanges and a steel pipe nipple welded between the flanges.
C. All chilled water, heating hot water and other pumped systems with pipe size 2" and under shall have a standard check valve rated for the maximum operating pressure at the pump discharge for each pump assembly.
D. The check valve body, seat and trim materials shall match the associated systems requirements.
E. Medium pressure chilled water and heating hot water systems with 2 1/2" through 12" pipe size shall have an ANSI Class 150 silent check valve rated for 285 psig at 100 deg. F, with
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Valves 15110 Page 6 of 11 SECTION 15110
VALVES
wafer style cast steel globe pattern body, stainless steel trim and spring, Buna N seal and flanged end connections. Pump check valves design basis: CPV Company Catalog No. 110D R.
F. Medium pressure chilled water and heating hot water systems with 14" to 24" pipe size shall have an ANSI Class 250 silent check valve rated for 300 psig at 150 deg. F, with cast iron globe pattern body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, Buna N seal and flanged end connections. Pump check valves design basis: CPV Company Catalog No. 21D R.
G. Other pumped systems shall have an ANSI Class silent check valve rated to match the associated systems operating pressure and temperature. Contractor shall provide submittals for all check valves. Pump check valve shall have cast iron globe pattern body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, Buna N seal and flanged end connections. Pump check valves design basis: CPV Company Catalog No. 20D R.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.
C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operation.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Valves 15110 Page 7 of 11 SECTION 15110
VALVES
B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.
F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
G. For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 72 inches above finished floor elevation.
H. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. 3. Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb.
3.3 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS
A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.
B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a bright finish. Clean valve socket.
C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.
D. Open gate and globe valves to fully open position.
E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.
F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.
G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact. Feed solder until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.
3.4 THREADED CONNECTIONS
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Valves 15110 Page 8 of 11 SECTION 15110
VALVES
A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.
B. Align threads at point of assembly.
C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry seal threading is specified.
D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded.
3.5 FLANGED CONNECTIONS
A. Align flange surfaces parallel.
B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.
C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for proper shutoff and retention.
3.6 VALVE END SELECTION
A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections: 1. Copper Tube Size, 2 Inches and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends for heating hot water service. 2. Steel Pipe Sizes, 2 Inches and Smaller: Threaded end. 3. Steel Pipe Sizes, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Flanged end.
3.7 APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe, ball, and butterfly for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve applications and arrangements.
B. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Systems: Use the following valve types: 1. Gate Valves: Class 150, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system. 2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi CWP, with stem extension. 3. Plug Valves: Neoprene-faced plug, Buna N packing.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Valves 15110 Page 9 of 11 SECTION 15110
VALVES
4. Globe Valves: Class 150, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and bronze or Teflon disc. 5. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or elastomer-coated ductile iron disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals. 6. Bronze Swing Check: Class 150, with BUNA seat. 7. Check Valves: Class 150, swing or wafer type as indicated.
C. Heating Water Systems: Use the following valve types: 1. Gate Valves: Class 150 or Class 300 as required, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system. 2. Ball Valves: Class 150 or Class 300 as required, 350-psi CWP, with stem extension and memory stop where indicated on the drawings. 3. Plug Valves: BUNA. 4. Globe Valves: Class 150, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and bronze disc. 5. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or EPDM encapsulated ductile iron disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals. 6. Bronze Swing Check: Class 150 or Class 300 as required, with BUNA. 7. Check Valves: Iron swing, wafer, or lift type, as indicated. Swing check shall be Class 150 with bronze seat ring.
D. Chilled-Water Systems: Use the following valve types: 1. Gate Valves: Class 150 or Class 300 as required, bronze body. 2. Ball Valves: Class 150 or Class 300 as required, 600-psi CWP, with stem extension and memory stop. 3. Plug Valves: Buna N packing. 4. Globe Valves: Class 150 or Class 300 as required, bronze body with bronze or teflon disc. 5. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or EPDM encapsulated ductile iron disc; EPDM sleeve and stem seals. Stainless steel stem. 6. Check Valves: Class 150 or Class 300 as required ductile iron body wafer check, Class 150 bronze body swing check with BUNA seat.
E. Condenser Water Systems: Use the following valve types: 1. Gate Valves: Class 150 or Class 300 as required, bronze body. 2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi CWP, with memory stop. 3. Plug Valves: Buna N packing. 4. Globe Valves: Class 150 or Class 300 as required, bronze body with bronze or Teflon disc. 5. Butterfly Valves: Aluminum bronze, epoxy-coated ductile iron disc; EPDM sleeve and stem seals.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Valves 15110 Page 10 of 11 SECTION 15110
VALVES
6. Check Valves: Class 150 or Class 300 as required, bronze body swing check with BUNA seat.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Valves 15110 Page 11 of 11 SECTION 15124
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pipe expansion joints, guides, and anchors for mechanical piping systems.
B. ASME/ANSI Pressure Piping Code B31.9, Building Services Piping.
C. Related Sections: 1. Section 15181 “Hydronic Piping” 2. Section 15185 “Hydronic Pumps”
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide expansion loops, flexible grooved couplings (where permitted), or expansion joints to accommodate expansion. In addition to expansion devices, make provisions in the piping and connections to eliminate stress on equipment connections.
B. Provide pipe anchors and pipe alignment guides as required for proper distribution of expansion forces. Anchors shall be attached to the structure with brackets fastened to piping.
C. Each expansion loop, or expansion joint shall be provided with pipe guides on each side of the loop, or joint. Swing arrangements in piping to equipment shall also be properly guided to control the force of expansion.
D. Fabricate and install expansion and anchor system capable of sustaining forces generated by gravity, thermal movement, and seismic events.
E. Design and obtain approval from authority with jurisdiction, seismic restraints for pipe expansion joints and pipe anchor system.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract Specification Sections.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Expansion Fittings and Loops 15124 Page 1 of 7 SECTION 15124
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
B. Product data for each type of pipe expansion joint and pipe alignment guide specified.
C. Pipe expansion joint schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required expansion joint.
D. Assembly-type shop drawings for each type of pipe expansion joint, pipe alignment guide, and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of component assembly.
E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Control" Article.
F. Maintenance data for each type pipe expansion joint specified to include in the "Operating and Maintenance Manuals" specified in the Section "Project Closeout."
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
C. Licensed Engineer's Design Drawings and Calculations: Design and prepare drawings and calculations for seismic restraint of pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment guides, and pipe anchors. Include seal and signature of Registered Engineer, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, certifying compliance with specifications.
D. All anchoring methods between the pipe and the anchor shall conform to the requirements of Pipe Fabrication Institute (PFI) Standard ES 26.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Expansion Fittings and Loops 15124 Page 2 of 7 SECTION 15124
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
1. Expansion Joints: a. Adsco Manufacturing Corp. b. Advanced Thermal c. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. d. Senior Flexonics Inc., Expansion Joint Div. 2. Pipe Alignment Guides: a. Adsco Manufacturing Corp. b. Fee and Mason c. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
2.2 PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS, GENERAL
A. Provide expansion joints of the same size as the pipe in which they are installed. Refer to drawings for amount of expansion which must be absorbed.
B. Refer to "Pipe Expansion Joint Schedule" for criteria of individual pipe expansion joints.
2.3 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Expansion joints 2 1/2 inches and smaller shall be constructed of multi ply laminated corrugated Series 300 stainless steel bellows enclosed in a floating brass shroud, pipe ends shall be all bronze construction having threaded or sweat ends to suit the piping in which it is installed. Design Basis: ADSCO Model STCA or SSCA.
B. Expansion joints 3 inches and larger shall have semi steel bodies constructed for 150 psig hydronic working pressure. Units shall be of the packless type, controlled flexing, and shall have multiple bellows of stainless steel and cast iron equalizing rings. Joint shall also be provided with internal sleeve. Joint ends shall be flanged. Provide sheet metal shrouds for each unit. Design Basis: ADSCO Corroflex Packless Equal¬izing Expansion Joints.
C. Expansion joints 3 inches and larger shall have semi steel bodies constructed for 150 psig hydronic working pressure, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Units shall be of the externally pressurized packless type and shall have multiple bellows of stainless steel. Joint ends shall be flanged. Outer casing shall be provided with an anchor and a drain plug. Design Basis: ADSCO Pressure Master externally pressurized guided expansion joint.
D. Expansion joints 2 1/2 inches and larger shall be internally and externally guided, packed type expansion joints suitable for 150 psig hydronic working pressure, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. The internal cylinder shall be machined from heavy wall ASTM A 53 Grade B seamless steel pipe and coated with a 2 mil thick coating of hard chrome; internal cylinder shall be provided with a limit stop. Joint stuffing box shall be packed with asbestos free self-lubricating braided sealing ring packing and provided with packing Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Expansion Fittings and Loops 15124 Page 3 of 7 SECTION 15124
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
cylinders/plungers for addition of semi plastic self-lubricating injection packing. Traverse chamber (outer casing) shall be provided with an anchor and a drain plug. The joint shall have flanged ends. Design Basis: Advanced Thermal Model TP2.
2.4 EXPANSION LOOPS
A. Expansion Loops shall be field or shop fabricated to meet the piping systems expansion based on temperature of service and field installed parameters.
B. Expansion Loops shall be designed to meet the amount of expansion based on expansion rate and linear footage.
C. Design shall meet ASTM-A53, GR.B seamless pipe based on Code for Pressure Piping.
D. Expansion Loop stress levels shall be at or below 22,500 PSI. Contractor shall submit Expansion Loop shop drawings for submittal approval (with stress analysis calculations by an engineer licensed in the State of Nevada).
E. Expansion Loops shall only be allowed when suitable rooms is available and the Owner has approved of the installation.
2.5 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A. Guides shall be constructed of steel having a split housing and split cast steel segmented spider, sized to the O.D. of pipe, free to move axially in the segmented steel cylinder. The spider shall be clamped to the pipe and the guiding cylinder securely fixed to the supporting structure. The guides shall be so designed to provide clearance for complete insulation through the guides. Design Basis: Fee and Mason Figure 120 Spider Guide.
B. At the Contractor's option, guides shall be T shaped sliding supports with restraining side guide lugs. Length of sliding supports shall be as required to accommodate movement and 12 inches minimum. In addition to the sliding support, a baseplate shall be provided for welding to the guide support structure. Each plate (guide and baseplate) shall be provided with a minimum 3/32 inch thick Teflon (graphite) wearing surface bonded to a 10gauge plate. The size of the web on the guide shall be selected to match the required insulation thickness. Design Basis: Fee and Mason Figure 144 sliding support guide. 1. Refer to Pipe Fabrication Institute (PFI) Standard ES 26 for requirements concerning welding guides onto piping materials.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Expansion Fittings and Loops 15124 Page 4 of 7 SECTION 15124
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex-head, track bolts and nuts.
C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
D. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
E. Concrete: Portland-cement mix, 3000 psi. 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable.
F. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink, nonmetallic. 1. Characteristics include post-hardening volume-adjusting dry hydraulic-cement type grout that is non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous and is recommended for both interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Water: Potable. 4. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment guides, and pipe anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PIPE EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe expansion joints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Align expansion joints to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.
3.3 FABRICATED-TYPE PIPE EXPANSION COMPENSATION INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe expansion loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to absorb 50 percent of total compression or tension that will be produced during anticipated change in temperature.
B. Connect risers to mains with at least 5 pipe fittings including tee in main.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Expansion Fittings and Loops 15124 Page 5 of 7 SECTION 15124
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
C. Connect risers to terminal units with at least 4 pipe fittings including tee in riser.
3.4 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDE INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins pipe expansion joints.
B. Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins pipe expansion loops.
C. Install pipe alignment guides on piping elsewhere as indicated.
D. Secure pipe alignment guides to building substrate.
3.5 PIPE ANCHOR INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
B. Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and with AWS D1.1.
C. Construct concrete pipe anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated.
D. Where pipe expansion joints are indicated, install pipe anchors according to expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions to control movement to compensators.
E. Pipe Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install pipe anchors at ends of principal pipe runs, at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Preset anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping.
F. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment guides, and pipe anchors that are installed on or in concrete.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint and paint, exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Expansion Fittings and Loops 15124 Page 6 of 7 SECTION 15124
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Licensed Engineer's Installation Report: Prepare report covering installation of pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment guides, and pipe anchors. Include seal and signature of Registered Engineer, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, certifying compliance with specifications.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Expansion Fittings and Loops 15124 Page 7 of 7 SECTION 15127
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes meters and gages used in mechanical systems.
B. Related Sections: Division 15 piping Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2. Meters and gages furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as part of the equipment assembly in other Division 15 Sections. 3. Section 13921, "Electric Drive Centrifugal Fire Pumps" for flow meters for testing fire pumps. 4. Section 15140 “Domestic Water Piping”. 5. Section 15145 “Domestic water Piping Specialties”
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of meter, gage, and fitting specified. Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves, certified where indicated. Submit a meter and gage schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, scale range, location, and accessories for each meter and gage.
C. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of meters and gages certifying accuracies under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified requirements.
D. Maintenance data to include in the "Operating and Maintenance Manuals" specified in Section "Project Closeout." Include data for the following: 1. Test plugs. 2. Flow measuring systems. 3. Flow meters. 4. Btu meters.
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Meters and Gages for HVAC 15127 Page 1 of 9 SECTION 15127
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
A. Comply with applicable portions of American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) and Instrument Society of America (ISA) standards pertaining to construction and installation of meters and gages.
B. Design Criteria: The Drawings indicate types, sizes, capacities, ranges, profiles, connections, and dimensional requirements of meters and gages and are based on the specific manufacturer types and models indicated. Meters and gages having equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered, provided that deviations do not change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof for equality of meters and gages is on the proposer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers: a. Marsh Instrument Co. b. H.O. Trerice Co. c. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 2. Pressure Gages: a. Marsh Instrument Co. b. H.O. Trerice Co. c. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 3. Test Plugs: a. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. b. Sisco Co., Spedco, Inc. c. H.O. Trerice Co. 4. Venturi-Type Flow Elements: a. Barco Div., Marison Industries. b. Flowset c. Victaulic Company of America. 5. Pitot-Tube-Type Flow Elements: a. Dieterich Standard Co., Dover Industries. b. Flowset c. Preso Industries
2.2 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Meters and Gages for HVAC 15127 Page 2 of 9 SECTION 15127
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
A. Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed as follows: 1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 240 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions. 2. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions. 3. Hot Water: 30 to 300 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions. 4. Condenser Water: 0 to 160 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions. 5. Chilled Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
B. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.
2.3 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Description: ASTM E 1, liquid-in-glass thermometer.
B. Case: Die-cast and aluminum-finished in baked-epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured, 9 inches long.
C. Adjustable Joint: Finished to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
D. Tube: Red-reading mercury-filled with magnifying lens.
E. Scale: Satin-faced non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.
F. Stem: Copper-plated, steel, aluminum, or brass for a separable socket of length to suit installation.
2.4 THERMOMETER WELLS
A. Description: Brass or stainless-steel thermometer well, separable.
B. Pressure Rating: Not less than piping system design pressure.
C. Stem Length: To extend into pipe 30 to 50% of inside diameter of piping.
D. Extension for Insulated Piping: 2 inches nominal, but not less than thickness of insulation.
2.5 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Description: ASME B40.1, Grade A phosphor-bronze Bourdon-tube pressure gage, with bottom connection.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Meters and Gages for HVAC 15127 Page 3 of 9 SECTION 15127
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
B. Case: Drawn aluminum with 4-1/2-inch-diameter glass lens.
C. Connector: Brass, 1/4-inch.
D. Scale: White-coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings.
E. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span.
F. Range: Conform to the following: 1. Range such that operating pressure falls in the middle 1/3 of the selected scale. 2. Vacuum: 30 inches Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure. 3. Fluids Under Pressure: 2 times operating pressure.
2.6 PRESSURE-GAGE ACCESSORIES
A. Syphons (Steam Service Only): 1/4-inch straight coil of brass tubing with threads on each end.
B. Snubbers: 1/4-inch brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous-metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
C. Needle valve.
2.7 TEST PLUGS - PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE
A. Description: Solid brass-body test plug in 1/4-inch NPT fitting.
B. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation.
C. Pressure Rating: Zero leakage from vacuum to 1,000 psig.
D. Core Inserts: 2 self-sealing valve types, suitable for inserting a 1/8-inch outside-diameter probe from a dial thermometer or pressure gage.
E. Core Material: According to the following for fluid and temperature range: 1. Air, Water, Oil, and Gas: 20 to 200 deg F, neoprene rubber. 2. Air and Water: Minus 30 deg to 275 deg F, ethylene-propylene-diene-terpolymer (EPDM) rubber.
F. Test-Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain.
G. Test Kit: Provide test kit consisting of one (1) 2-1/2" pressure gage and gage adapter with 1/8" O.D. probe, two (2) 5" stem bimetal dial thermometers and a carrying case. Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Meters and Gages for HVAC 15127 Page 4 of 9 SECTION 15127
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
H. Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately 2 times systems operating conditions.
2.8 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Flow-measuring systems include calibrated flow element, separate meter, hoses or tubing, valves, fittings, and conversion chart that is compatible with flow element, meter, and system fluid.
B. Flow range of flow-measuring element and meter covers operating range of equipment or system where used.
2.9 VENTURI FLOW MEASURING STATIONS
A. Provide Venturi Flow Measuring Stations where indicated on the details, where indicated on the plans and where scheduled on the Drawings.
B. Each Venturi flow measuring element shall be selected from manufacturer's engineering data to permit prescribed flow at a minimum of head loss. The beta ratio shall be selected to allow for a differential pressure compatible with the portable meter furnished. This accuracy must be obtained with as little as five pipe diameters of straight pipe upstream and two diameters downstream from the Venturi. Each Venturi shall have two built in sensing taps, nipples, 1/4 inch SAE flare shutoff valves, and quick-connect couplings.
C. Venturis shall be complete with an identification tag on chain giving pipe size, Venturi series, flow station or equipment device identification and meter reading at specified flow rate and flow vs. differential curves.
D. Venturi stations shall be one-piece bronze threaded 1/2 inch through 2 inches. Sizes 2 1/2 inches through 8 inches shall consist of one-piece cadmium plated cast steel Venturi with flanged or grooved ends. Sizes 10 inches and larger shall be fabricated steel, with flanged or grooved ends.
E. Venturi sizes and beta ratios shall be selected so that design flow rates shall read between 20% and 80% of the full-scale range on a linear meter, e.g. between 10 inches and 40 inches on a 0 50 inch meter, with permanent pressure loss of not more than 25% of indicated flow rate differential pressure.
2.10 PITOT TUBE FLOW MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
A. Provide Averaging Pitot Type Flow Measuring Stations where indicated on the details, where indicated on the plans, and where scheduled on the drawings. Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Meters and Gages for HVAC 15127 Page 5 of 9 SECTION 15127
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
B. The flow measurement sensing elements shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. Permanent pressure loss to the system shall not exceed 5 inches water (0.42 ft.) of head on sizes over 1 1/2 inches. The flow sensor shall consist of three basic flow sensing chambers an upstream high-pressure chamber, high pressure interpolating tube, and single downstream low pressure tube located on the pipe centerline 1. For 2 inches through 5 inches pipe sizes, the impact port size will be 0.125 inch I.D. minimum. 2. For 4 inches and larger pipe sizes, impact port size will be 0.281 inch I.D. minimum.
C. Accuracy of the flow measuring element shall be plus or minus 2% of value and plus or minus 0.2% repeatability as verified by certified laboratory tests.
D. Flow sensors for installation in pressurized pipes (hot tap assembly), all steam installations, water installations above 120 deg. F, all installations in pipes above 50 psig, shall be provided with a mechanically operated insertion device and a shutoff valve.
E. Flow sensors for installation in low pressure (under 50 psig) and low temperature (below 100 deg. F) installation shall be provided with a packing gland, a shut off valve, and safety chains.
F. Each flow element shall be complete with 1/4 inch SAE flare safety shut off instrument valves and a permanent metal tag showing design flow rates, meter readings for design flow rates, metered fluid, line size and tag number, station or location number.
G. Sensors shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to insure accurate reading. The installation shall include the proper lengths of straight piping upstream and downstream from the device and flow straightening vanes if necessary.
2.11 FLOW-MEASURING METERS
A. Provide one portable differential pressure meter for the project.
B. Differential pressure indicating meters for venturi flow stations, for pitot tube flow stations, and for combination balancing/shut off valves shall be portable. Meter shall be the dual rupture proof liquid filled bellows type with integral temperature compensation. Meter shall have over range protection in either direction equal to the working pressure equivalent of the instrument housing (250 psig @ 250 deg. F). The accuracy of the meter shall be no less than 0.5% full scale. The meter case shall be waterproof. Meter shall have external zero and range adjusting screws and life-long lubrication. Scale shall be calibrated uniformly in differential pressure (0 50", 0 100", 1 300") or if noted directly in GPM.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Meters and Gages for HVAC 15127 Page 6 of 9 SECTION 15127
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
C. Portable Master Meters shall be mounted in a durable metal reinforced plastic carrying case with the following accessories: 1. Two 10' lengths of connection hose, each with color coded quick-connect couplings compatible with the couplings on the flow measuring device. 2. Two brass blow down valves with Buna N Seals. 3. Blow down hoses. 4. Instruction book with Flow vs. Differential curves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 METER AND GAGE APPLICATIONS
A. General: Where indicated, install meters and gages of types, sizes, capacities, and with features indicated.
3.2 METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions for applications where used.
3.3 THERMOMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B. Install in the following locations and elsewhere as indicated: 1. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone. 2. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller. 3. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central systems. 4. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger. 5. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat recovery unit. 6. At inlet and outlet of each thermal storage tank.
C. Remote-Reading Dial Thermometers: Install in control panels with tubing connecting panel and thermometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.
D. Thermometer Wells: Install in vertical position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated. 1. Install wells with stem extending minimum of 2 inches into fluid. 2. Install wells with stem extending to center of pipe. 3. Fill wells with oil or graphite and secure caps.
3.4 PRESSURE GAGE INSTALLATION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Meters and Gages for HVAC 15127 Page 7 of 9 SECTION 15127
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
A. Install pressure gages in piping tee with pressure gage valve located on pipe at most readable position.
B. Install in the following locations and elsewhere as indicated: 1. At suction and discharge of each pump. 2. At discharge of each pressure-reducing valve. 3. At building water service entrance. 4. At chilled water and condenser water inlets and outlets of chillers.
C. Pressure Gage Needle Valves: Install in piping tee with snubber. Install syphon instead of snubber for steam pressure gages.
3.5 TEST PLUG INSTALLATION
A. Install test plugs in piping tees where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap.
3.6 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEM, FLOW ELEMENT AND METER INSTALLATION
A. General: Install flow meters for piping systems located in accessible locations at most readable position.
B. Locations: Install flow measuring elements and meters at discharge of each pump, at inlet of each hydronic coil in built-up central systems, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Differential-Pressure-Type Flow Elements: Install minimum straight lengths of pipe upstream and downstream from element as prescribed by the manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Class 125 pipe flanges, ASME B16.1, cast iron for ferrous piping or ASME B16.24, bronze, for copper tubing.
E. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable flow meters in readily accessible locations.
F. Permanently Mounted Meters for Flow Elements: Install meters on walls or brackets in accessible locations.
G. Install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow elements and meters as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7 FLOW METER INSTALLATION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Meters and Gages for HVAC 15127 Page 8 of 9 SECTION 15127
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
A. Variable-Area Flow Meters: Install in vertical upward position with impact tube mounted in bushing centered on pipe. Include 10 pipe diameters upstream and 5 pipe diameters downstream of straight unrestricted piping for 1-1/4-inch and smaller pipe. Include 20 pipe diameters upstream and 10 pipe diameters downstream for 1-1/2-inch and larger pipe.
3.8 THERMAL FLOW METER INSTALLATION
A. Thermal Flow Meters: Install where indicated in hydronic supply piping. Install thermal well in return line for remote sensor. Mount meter on wall if accessible; if not, provide bracket to support meter.
3.9 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow servicing and maintenance.
C. Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters.
D. Connect flow-meter transmitters to meters.
E. Connect Btu-meter transmitters to meters.
F. Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated meters and devices.
3.10 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation.
B. Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
C. Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gages and factory-finished surfaces. Replace cracked and broken windows and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer's touchup paint.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Meters and Gages for HVAC 15127 Page 9 of 9 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2. Section 08305 “Access Doors and Panels”: Product requirements for access doors for placement by this section. 3. Section 09900 “Painting”: Product requirements Painting for placement by this section. 4. Section 15060 “Hanger and Supports”: Product and execution requirements for placement of pipe support. 5. Section 15074 “Vibration, and Seismic Control for HVAC Piping: Product requirements for Vibration Isolation for placement by this section. 6. Section 15075 “Mechanical Identification”. 7. Section 15083 “HVAC Insulation”: Product requirements for Piping Insulation for placement by this section. 8. Section 15110 “Valves”: Product requirements for valves.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes pipe and pipe fittings for: heating water, condenser water, chilled water, and other mechanical systems piping.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes, SEC IX - Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators.
B. ASME B16.22 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
C. ASME B31.9 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Building Services Piping.
D. ASME SEC VIII-D (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code, Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels.
E. ASME B16.3 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 50 and 300.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 1 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
F. ASME B16.18 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
G. ASME B16.22 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
H. ASME B31.9 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) - Building Services Piping.
I. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
J. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
K. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
L. AWS A5.8 (American Welding Society) - Brazing Filler Metal.
M. AWS D1.1 (American Welding Society) - Structural Welding Code.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Hydronic systems are low water temperature, forced, recirculating systems and include 2-pipe and 4-pipe, hot water, and chilled water systems, and condenser water systems.
B. Four-Pipe System: The 4-pipe system includes independent chilled water and hot water supply and return piping mains in a closed loop, connecting chillers and boilers to terminal heat transfer units by means of primary and secondary piping loops. Circulation is accomplished by parallel, constant volume, primary pumps; and independent secondary pumps. Design flow rates and water temperatures are specified in the various equipment specifications and schedules. Control sequences and temperature-reset schedules are specified in temperature control specifications.
C. Condenser Water System: This system is an open piping loop connecting a chiller’s condensing barrel to an associated cooling tower. Circulation is accomplished by parallel, constant volume pumps. Design flow rates and water temperatures are specified in the various equipment specifications and schedules. Control sequences and temperature-reset schedules are specified in temperature-control specifications.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract Specification Sections.
B. Product Data including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and installation instructions for each hydronic specialty and special-duty valve specified.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 2 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
1. Submit flow and pressure drop curves for diverting fittings and calibrated plug valves, based on manufacturer's testing.
C. Shop Drawings detailing pipe anchors, special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
D. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with performance requirements specified in Part 3 of this Section.
E. Maintenance data for hydronic specialties and special-duty valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for installation and changing components, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Contractor: Company staff specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
B. Fabricator or Installer: Company and company field staff specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five years experience.
1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
1. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.
2. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system Protect
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 3 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year manufacturer warranty for valves excluding packing.
1.13 INTERFERENCE DRAWINGS
A. Interference drawings shall be prepared as a combined effort of all disciplines on the project. Each discipline shall proceed with their own set of drawings on mylar backgrounds prepared by the HVAC trade who shall start their drawings immediately upon award of contract. Drawings shall be at 1/4" = 1'0" scale based on sheet size and plan location and orientation as shown on the architectural drawings. All interference drawings shall be capable of being overlaid to coordinate interferences and for printing. All congested areas and mechanical room plans shall be drawn at 3/8" = 1'0" scale (both elevation and plan views shall be provided).
1. Interference drawings shall be carefully coordinated with existing conditions at the job site. The existing conditions include servicing clearances for existing major equipment.
B. After the HVAC trade has finished, two reproducibles will be forwarded to the plumbing trade who will show and coordinate the plumbing work with the other trades. After the plumbing trade has finished, two reproducibles will be forwarded to the electrical discipline who will show and coordinate their work on the combined plans.
C. Interference plans and elevations shall show in detail the location of the following items which require coordination because of size and proximity to other equipment and systems. Drawings shall show in order of installation priority within the allotted space the following:
1. Ductwork and mechanical equipment exposed or in ceiling plenums. 2. Gravity drains for condensate, waste, vent or storm systems. 3. Sprinkler piping. 4. Electrical conduits 2 inches and larger and electrical equipment. 5. Mechanical and electrical work in equipment rooms.
D. Each discipline shall prepare overlay prints showing all of the items simultaneously, paying particular attention to crossovers. Each discipline shall be responsible for coordinating their work with other trades.
E. Reproducible copies of the finished interference drawings shall be submitted to the Owner for record before actual installation work begins. Each discipline shall make completed interference drawings available to their craft for installation of the work.
F. Individual trade interference drawings may be used as shop drawings and/or as record drawings at the completion of the project. CADD drawings with level structure may be optioned provided each discipline has the ability, as well as agrees, to provide such a drawing, coordinate the level structure and CADD version.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 4 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
1.14 QUALITY CONTROL
A. ASME Compliance: Comply with the following provisions:
1. ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. 2. Fabricate and stamp air separators and compression tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII. 3. Welding Standards: Qualify welding processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1.15 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of piping with equipment and with other installations.
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installation for foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
E. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into pad. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections.
F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies.
1.16 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Maintenance Stock: Furnish a sufficient quantity of chemicals for initial system startup and for preventive maintenance for one year from Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 5 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
1. Calibrated Plug Valves: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Taco, Inc. 2. Pressure-Reducing Valves: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. ITT Hoffman; ITT Fluid Handling Div. 3. Safety Relief Valves: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT McDonnell & Miller. 4. Automatic Flow-Control Valves: a. Griswold Controls. b. Nexus 5. Compression Tanks: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Cemline c. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett. d. Taco, Inc. e. Wendland 6. Diaphragm-Type Compression Tanks: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett. d. Taco, Inc. 7. Air Separators: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett. 8. Pressure Reducing Valve a. Fisher b. Leslie c. Spence 9. Safety or Pressure Relief Valves a. Kunkle b. Lonergan
2.2 CONDENSER WATER PIPE - ABOVEGROUND
Pressure Up to 175 psig design
Temperature 35 to 100 deg. F
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 6 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
Construction 2" and under: Threaded connections.
2-1/2" and over: Butt welded with welded flanges.
Expansion Control Provide all necessary expansion loops or expansion joints as scheduled, indicated on the drawings, or as required to control expansion in the distribution system. Additional loops and expansion devices shall be added to control thermal and pressure conditions as a result of system requirements due to unseen conditions.
Pipe 2" and under: ERW or Seamless, Schedule 80, ASTM A-53 or A-106, Grades A or B with ends threaded and coupled.
2-1/2" and over: ERW or Seamless, standard weight, ASTM A-53 or A-106, Grades A or B with ends beveled for welding.
Fittings 2" and under: Cast iron, screwed fittings, ASTM A-126, 125 lb., banded.
2-1/2" and over: Standard weight butt weld fittings, ASTM A-234 WPB. Use long radius (R = 1.5D) elbows unless space confines require short radius. The Owner shall be notified of all exceptions.
Unions 2" and under: Malleable iron, screwed, ground joint, brass to iron seat, ASTM A-197, Class 150, Stockham Figure 694, rated 300 psig NSC-WOG.
Flanges 2" and under: Forged steel, screwed, ASTM A-181 Class 250 or better to match mating flange.
2-1/2" and over: Forged steel, weld neck or slip-on, ASTM A-181, Class 250 or better to match mating flange.
Branch Connections Main line sizes 2" and under: Use fittings
Main line sizes lar ger than 2" and branch size 2" and under: Use standard weight threadolet welded directly to main.
Main line sizes larger than 2" and branch size equal to main: Use butt weld tee. Main line sizes larger than 2-1/2" and branch size one or two sizes smaller than main: Weld standard weight weldolet directly to main or use reinforced fabricated steel welding saddle.
Main line sizes larger than 6 and branch sizes three or more sizes smaller than main: Weld branch pipe directly to main. Provide reinforcing in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.1
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 7 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
Refer to article "Fabricated Branch Connections for Steel Piping" in Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for further requirements.
Gaskets 1/16" minimum thickness, full face for f lat face flanges and ring type for raised face flanges, Garlock, Flexitallic, or Gortex.
Bolts & Nuts Square head carbon steel bolts per ASTM A-307 Grade B with hex head carbon steel nuts per ASTM A-563 Grade A.
Bolt Lubricant "NO-OX-ID" grease or approved equal.
Thread Dope Teflon tape on male threads only.
Gate Valves 2" and under: Nibco Figure T-111, ANSI Class 150, 200 psig NSC-WOG. Bronze gate with solid wedge, rising stem, screwed in bonnet and threaded end connections.
2-1/2" and over (to 24"): Nibco Figure F-617, ANSI Class 150 psi, 200 psig NSC-WOG. Iron body gate with solid wedge, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, bolted bonnet and flanged end connections.
Plug Valves 1/2" through 2": DeZurik 118-S, 1, RS16 (180 deg. F), ALG, ANSI Class 150, 175 psig NSC-WOG. Valve shall be eccentric, resilient plugs with cast iron body and screwed end connections. Valve shall be provided with Buna packing and non-lubricated stainless steel bearings.
Valves shall be suitable for bi-directional flow but shall be installed with flow to back of seat. Valves shall include a lever handle with memory stop.
2-1/2" and over: DeZurik 128-F, 1 (or 6), RS16 (or RS17), ALG (or AGGXH6), ANSI Class 150 NSC-WOG. Valves shall be same as smaller valves except with flanged ends and provided with nickel seats.
Valves 16" and over and located at pump discharges shall have gauge tapping on downstream side of valve.
Valves 4" and over and located in branch lines without a flow measuring station shall have two gauge tappings.
Valves 10" and larger shall be provided with a geared handwheel actuator and memory stop. All geared actuators shall include a gasketed cover plate.
Ball Valves 2" and under: Nibco Figure T-585-70, rated 600 psig NSC-WOG and 150 psig SWP. Bronze two-piece body with chromium plated ball, Teflon seats and stuffing box, blowout proof stem design, lever operator and threaded end connections. Memory stops shall be provided where valves are being provided as balancing valves and balancing valves are indicated on the Drawings. Lug-Style Butterfly
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 8 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
Valves 2-1/2" and over: Nibco LD-2000-3 (or -5), LD-3010-3 (or -5), 175 psig NSC-WOG. Valves shall have ductile iron lug body with aluminum bronze (or ductile iron with nickel edge) disc and minimum of three copper alloy bushings. Valves shall be equipped with stainless steel stem and molded in EDPM liner and seats rated for 200 deg. F minimum. Valves shall be suitable for bubble -tight dead end service at rated pressure.
Valves 8" and under shall be equipped with a 10 -position lever operator unless otherwise noted. Valves 10" and over shall be equipped with a gear operator. All gear operators shall include a gasketed cover plate.
Va lves used as balancing valves shall be provided with infinitely positionable valve operator and a memory stop.
Check Valve 2" and under: Nibco Figure T-413, ANSI Class 150, 200 psig NSC-WOG. Bronze, threaded, regrinding type, renewable disc, Y-pattern horizontal swing and Buna seat.
2-1/2" and over: Techno Style 5050. ANSI Class 150 NSC-WOG. Valves shall be wafer style split disc check with cast iron bodies, aluminum-bronze valve plates, EPDM (or Buna) seals, and 316 stainless steel spring and trim.
Strainers 2" and under: Sarco Figure BT, rated 400 psig NSC-WOG. Bronze Y-pattern threaded body.
2-1/2" and over: Sarco Figure IF-125 rated 200 psig (150 psig over 12") NSC-WOG. Cast iron Y-pattern body with Class 250 flanged ends.
Pump Connectors (for axial movement) 1-1/2" and over (to 12"): Mason Industries Heavy Duty Super-Flex MFNC, rated 285 psig minimum at 100 deg. F. Multi-layered nylon tire cord fabric reinforcement with EDPM cover and liner. Ends shall be reinforced with steel wire bead rings. Connectors shall be furnished with Class 250 or better flanged ends and control rods. Units shall be suitable for minimum 1/2" minimum axial motion.
Heat Exchanger Installations All condenser water piping shall be insulated when a heat exchanger is used for “Free Cooling” in conjunction with the Central Plane System. Insulation shall be the same materials as those used for the chilled water piping.
2.3 NON-POTABLE WATER PIPE - UNDERGROUND
Pressure Up to 175 psig - design; (weak links - gate valves 14" and larger 150 psi. Up to 230 psig actual.
Temperature 35 to 100 deg. F
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 9 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
Construction 2" and under: Socket welded or butt welded.
2-1/2" and over: Butt welded connections. Expansion Control Provide all necessary expansion loops or expansion joints as scheduled, indicated on the drawings, or as required to control expansion in the distribution system. Additional loops and expansion devices shall be added to control thermal and pressure conditions as a result of system requirements due to unseen conditions. Carrier Pipe 2" and under: ERW or Seamless, Schedule 80, ASTM A-53 or A-106, Grades A or B with square ends.
2-1/2" and over: ERW or Seamless, standard weight, ASTM A-53 or A-106, Grades A or B with ends beveled for welding.
Insulation Polyurethane foam as specified in Section 15083 ”HVAC Insulation". Insulation shall completely fill the annular space between the carrier pipe and jacketing. Insulation shall be a nominal 2" thick.
Special Note Insulation is not required on non-potable piping, 14-inch pipe size and larger. However, tape coating is required in accordance with Specification Section "Tape Coating System for Buried Steel Pipe".
Jacketing Material High density polyethylene or as specified in Section 15083 "HVAC Insulation".
Insulation of Joints All straight joints shall be insulated using polyurethane foam and covered with the same material as the pipe jacketing.
Fittings 2" and under: Forged steel, socket weld fittings, ASTM A-105, 2000 lb. or standard heavy weight butt weld fittings, ASTM A -234 WPB.
2-1/2" and over: Standard weight butt weld fittings, ASTM A-234 WPB. Use long radius (R = 1.5D) elbows wherever possible.
Unions Not permitted.
Flanges 2" and under: Forged steel, socket weld, weld neck, or slip-on ASTM A-181 Class 150 or better to match mating flange.
2-1/2" and over: Forged steel, weld neck or slip-on, ASTM A-181, Class 150 or better to match mating flange.
Branch Connections Main line sizes 2" and under: Use fittings
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 10 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
Main line sizes larger than 2" and branch size 2" and under: Use standard weight weldo-let or sock-o-let welded directly to main.
Main line sizes larger than 2" and branch size equal to main: Use butt weld tee.
Main line sizes larger than 2-1/2" and branch size one or two sizes smaller than main: Weld standard weight weldolet directly to main or use fabricated steel welding saddle.
Main line sizes larger than 6 and branch sizes three or more sizes smaller than main: Weld branch pipe directly to main; provide reinforcing in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.1.
Refer to article "Fabricated Branch Connections in Steel Piping" in "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" Section for further requirements.
Gaskets 1/16" minimum thickness, full face for flat face flanges and ring type for raised face flanges, Garlock, Flexitallic, or Gortex.
Bolts & Nuts Square head carbon steel bolts per ASTM A-307 G rade B with hex head carbon steel nuts per ASTM A-563 Grade A.
All bolts shall be painted with bituminous paint and buried in tar following installation and tightening.
Bolt Lubricant "NO-OX-ID" grease or approved equal.
Backfill Shall be tamped compactly in place so as to assume a stable surface. No rock shall be used in the first foot of backfill. A minimum of 24" of fill meeting H-20 highway loading shall be used between top of pipe and grade.
2.4 HIGH PRESSURE CHILLED WATER PIPE ABOVEGROUND
Pressure Up to 285 psig (non shock)
Temperature 35 to 100 deg. F
Construction 2" and under: Socket weld wrought steel, butt weld connections. 2 1/2" and over: Butt welded connections with welded flanges.
Pipe 2" and under: ERW or Seamless, Schedule 40, ASTM A 53 or A 106, Grades A or B with ends plain or beveled for welding. Exception: Where screwed end connections are required for unions or valves use Schedule 80 pipe nipples; limit nipple lengths to 12".
2 1/2" and over: ERW or Seamless, standard weight, ASTM A 53 or A 106, Grades A or B with ends beveled for welding.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 11 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
Fittings 2" and under: Forged steel, socket weld fittings, ASTM A 105, 2000 lb., standard weight butt weld fittings, ASTM A 234 WPB.
2 1/2" and over: Standard weight butt weld fittings, ASTM A 234 WPB. Use long radius (R = 1.5D) elbows wherever possible.
Unions 2" and under: Malleable iron, screwed, ground joint, brass to iron seat, ASTM A 197, Class 150, Stockham 694 or approved, rated 300 psig NSC WOG.
Flanges 2" and under: Forged steel, socket weld, ASTM A 105 or A 181, Class 150 or better to match mating flange.
2 1/2" and over: Forged steel, weld neck or slip on, ASTM A 105 or A 181, Class 150 or better to match mating flange.
Bolts & Nuts Square head carbon steel bolts per ASTM A 307 Grade B with hex head carbon steel nuts per ASTM A 563 Grade A.
Bolt Lubricant "NO OX ID" grease or approved equal.
Thread Dope Teflon tape on male threads only.
Branch Connections Branch size equal to main: Use socket weld or butt weld tee. 2" and under: Use socket weld reducing tee, or use standard weight sockolet welded directly to main.
2 1/2" and over: Use butt weld reducing tee, or use standard weight weldolet welded directly to main or use reinforced fabricated branch connections. Provide reinforcing in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.1.
Refer to article "Fabricated Branch Connections for Steel Piping" in "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" Section for further requirements.
Gaskets 1/16" thickness, ring type, red rubber, Garlock or approved equal.
Gate Valves 2" and under: Nibco Figure T 134, ANSI Class 150, 300 psig NSC WOG. Bronze block pattern gate with solid wedge, rising stem, union bonnet and threaded end connections.
2 1/2" and over: Nibco Figure CS 102 U, ANSI Class 150, 285 psig NSC WOG. Cast steel gate with flexible wedge, universal trim, outside screw and yoke, bolted bonnet and flanged end connections.
Valves 6" to 12" shall be provided with 1" ball valve bypass; valves 14" and over shall be provided with 2" ball valve bypass.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 12 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
Plug Valves 1/2" through 2": DeZurik 128 S, 1, RS16 (180 deg. F), AGG3H6, Fig. 603. ANSI Class 150, 285 psig NSC WOG. Valves shall be eccentric, resilient plugs with carbon steel body and screwed end connections. Valves shall be provided with Buna packing and stainless steel non-lubricated bearings.
Valves shall be suitable for bi directional flow but shall be installed with flow to back of seat. Valves shall include a geared handwheel actuator and memory stop. All geared actuators shall include a gasketed cover plate.
2 1/2" and over: DeZurik 128 F, 1 (or 6), RS16 (or RS17), AGG_H_, Fig. 603 (or 604). ANSI Class 150, 285 psig NSC WOG. Valves shall be same as smaller valves except with flanged end connections and provided with welded nickel seats.
Valves 14" and over and located at pump discharges shall have gauge tapping on downstream side of valve; valves 4" and over and located in branch lines without a flow measuring station shall have two-gauge tappings.
Ball Valves 2" and under: Nibco Figure T 585 70, rated 600 psig NSC WOG and 150 psig SWP. Bronze two-piece body with chromium plated ball, Teflon seats and stuffing box, blowout proof stem design, 1 1/4" extended lever operator and threaded end connections. Memory stops shall be provided only where indicated on the Drawings.
Lug-Style Lug-Style Butterfly Valves 2-1/2" and over: DeZurik BHP, L1, CS, TC, CSN, S2, FT, TT, ANSI Class 150 with Class VI shutoff, 285 psig NSC-WOG. Valves shall have carbon steel lug body with nickel plated carbon steel disc and two PTFE lined 317 stainless steel bearings. Valves shall be equipped with a 316 stainless steel shaft, pinned tangentially, and PTFE seats with titanium ring. Shaft seals shall be PTFE V-flex suitable for service up to 300 deg. F.
Valves 6" and under shall be equipped with a 10-position level operator unless otherwise noted. Valves 8" and over shall be equipped with a gear operator. All gear operators shall include a gasketed cover plate.
Valves used as balancing valves shall be provided with infinitely positionable valve operator and memory stop.
Valves 6" to 12" shall be provided with an externally piped 1" ball valve bypass; valves 14" and over shall be provided with an externally piped 2" ball valve bypass.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 13 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
Butterfly Valves 2 1/2" and over: DeZurik BHP, L1, CS, TC, CSN, S2, FT, TT, ANSI Class 150 with Class VI shutoff, 285 psig NSC WOG. Valves shall have carbon steel lug body with nickel plated carbon steel disc and two PTFE lined 317 stainless steel bearings. Valves shall be equipped with a 316 stainless steel shaft, pinned tangentially, and PTFE seats with titanium ring. Shaft seals shall be PTFE V flex suitable for service up to 300 deg. F. Valves 6" and under shall be equipped with a 10 position level operator unless otherwise noted.
Valves 8" and over shall be equipped with a gear operator. All gear operators shall include a gasketed cover plate.
Valves used as balancing valves shall be provided with infinitely positionable valve operator and memory stop.
Valves 6" to 12" shall be provided with an externally piped 1" ball valve bypass; valves 14" and over shall be provided with an externally piped 2" ball valve bypass.
Check Valves 2" and under: Nibco Figure T 433, ANSI Class 150, 300 psig NSC WOG designed for horizontal or vertical flow configurations. Bronze, regrinding type, renewable disc, Y pattern horizontal swing and Buna seat and threaded end connections.
2 1/2" and over: Techno Style 5051. ANSI Class 150, 285 psig NSC WOG. Valves shall be wafer style split disc check with carbon steel or ductile iron bodies and valve plates, Buna N seals, and 316 stainless steel spring and trim.
Strainers 2" and under: Sarco Figure BT, rated 400 psig NSC WOG. Bronze Y pattern threaded body.
2 1/2" and over: Sarco Figure 34 rated 285 psig NSC WOG. Cast steel or ductile iron Y pattern body with Class 150 flanged end connections.
Pump Connectors (for axial movement) 1 1/2" and over (to 12"): Mason Industries Heavy Duty Super Flex MFNC, rated 285 psig minimum at 100 deg. F. Multi layered nylon tire cord fabric reinforcement with EDPM cover and liner. Ends shall be reinforced with steel wire bead rings. Connectors shall be furnished with Class 150 or better flanged ends and control rods. Units shall be suitable for minimum 1/2" minimum axial motion.
2.5 CHILLED WATER AND HEATING HOT WATER PIPING (ALTERNATE) - ABOVEGROUND
Pressure Up to 300 psig - design; up to (220) psig actual (Weak links valves and flanges).
Temperature 35 deg. F to 200 deg. F
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 14 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
Construction 2" and under: Soldered connections, 95-5 solder with non-corrosive flux.
2-1/2" through 4": Soldered connections, 95-5 solder with non-corrosive flux; use solder or flanged connections at valves.
Expansion Control Provide all necessary expansion loops or expansion joints as scheduled, indicated on the drawings, or as required to control expansion in the distribution system. Additional loops and expansion devices shall be added to control thermal and pressure conditions as a result of system requirements due to unseen conditions.
Pipe 4" and under: Type "L" hard drawn copper conforming to ASTM B-88.
Fittings 4" and under: Solder type, wrought or cast bronze pressure fittings conform ing to ASTM B61, B-62 or B-75.
Unions 3" and under: Solder type, cast bronze pressure type, or better, Nibco Figure 733 or approved, rated 300 psig NSC-WOG.
4" size: Use companion flanges.
Flanges 4" and under: Solder type, cast bronze pressure type, Class 150, Nibco Figure 771 or approved, rated 225 psig NSG-WOG.
Branch Connections 4" and under: Use solder type, wrought or cast bronze pressure tees, reducing tees, or crosses conforming to ASTM B-61, B-62, or B-75 or use T-drilled piping with brazed joints.
Refer to article "Fabricated Connections in Copper Piping (T-Drill)" in "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" Section for further requirements.
Gaskets 1/16" minimum thickness, full face for flat face flanges and r ing type for raised face flanges, Garlock, Flexitallic, or Gortex.
Bolts & Nuts Square head bronze bolts with bronze hex nuts.
Bolt Lubricant "NO-OX-ID" grease or approved equal.
Threaded Dope Teflon tape on male threads only.
Valves Same as specified except with solder ends. Do not use iron body valves .
2.6 CHILLED WATER - STEEL PIPE - UNDERGROUND
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 15 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
Pressure Up to 285 psig (non-shock)
Temperature 35 to 100 deg. F
Construction Welded construction. Exception: flanges will be permitted only at valves.
Expansion Control Provide all necessary expansion loops or expansion joints as scheduled, indicated on the drawings, or as required to control expansion in the distribution system. Additional loops and expansion devices shall be added to control thermal and pressure conditions as a result of system requirements due to unseen conditions.
Carrier Pipe ERW or seamless, standard weight steel ASTM A-53 or A-106, Grades A or B with ends beveled for welding.
Insulation Polyurethane foam as specified in Section 15083 "HVAC Insulation". Insulation shall completely fill the annular space between the carrier pipe and jacketing. Insulation shall be a nominal 2" thick.
Jacketing Material As specified in Section 15083 "HVAC Insulation".
Insulation of Joints All straight joints shall be insulated using polyurethane foam and covered with the same material as the pipe jacketing.
Fittings Standard weight butt weld fittings, ASTM A-234 WPB. Use long radius (R=1.5D) elbows unless space confines require short radius. The Owner and Engineer shall be notified of all exceptions. Field insulated and jacketed with same material as straight pipe using manufacturer's standard fitting insulation.
Flanges Forged steel, weld neck or slip-on, ASTM A-105 or A-181, Class 150 or better to match mating flange.
Gaskets 1/16" minimum thickness, full face for flat face flanges and ring type for raised face flanges, Garlock, Flexitallic, or Gortex.
Bolts Square head carbon steel bolts per ASTM A-307 Grade B with hex head nuts per ASTM A563 Grade A.
All bolts shall be painted with bituminous paint and buried in tar following installation and tightening.
Bolt Lubricant "NO-OX-ID" grease or approved equal.
Backfill Shall be tamped compactly in place so as to assume a stable surface. No rock shall be used in the first foot of backfill. A minimum of 24" of fill meeting H-20 highway loading shall be used between top of pipe and grade.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 16 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
2.7 HEATING SERVICE HOT WATER PIPE - ABOVEGROUND
Pressure Up to 200 psig - design; up to (250) psig actual. (NOTE: Design pressure to 175 psig with copper limited to 2" and under)
Temperature 35 to 250 deg. F
Special Note Due to economics, the Contractor can select the break-off size between copper and steel piping.
Construction 4" and under: Soldered connections, 95-5 solder with non-corrosive flux. 2-1/2" and over: Butt welded with welded flanges.
Expansion Control Provide all necessary expansion loops or expansion joints as scheduled, indicated on the drawings, or as required to control expansion in the distribution system. Additional loops and expansion devices shall be added to control thermal and pressure conditions as a result of system requirements due to unseen conditions.
Pipe 4" and under: Type "L" hard drawn copper conforming to ASTM B88.
2-1/2" and over: ERW or Seamless, standard weight, ASTM A-53 or A-106, Grades A or B with ends beveled for welding.
Fittings 4" and under: Solder type, wrought or cast bronze pressure fittings conforming to ASTM B- 61, B-62, or B-75.
2-1/2" and over: Standard weight butt weld fittings, ASTM A-234 WPB. Use long radius (R = 1.5D) elbows unless space confines require short radius. The Owner and Engineer shall be notified of all exceptions.
Unions 3" and under: Solder type, cast bronze pressure type, Nibco Figure 733 or approved, rated 150 psig WOG non-shock at 250 deg. F.
4" size: Use companion flanges.
Flanges 4" and under: Solder type, cast bronze pressure type, Class 150 or better, Nibco Figure 741 or approved, rated 190 psig WOG non-shock at 250 deg. F.
2-1/2" and over: Forged steel, weld neck or slip-on, ASTM A-181, Class 1 50 or better to match mating flange.
Branch Connections Main line sizes 4" and under: Use solder type, wrought or cast bronze pressure tees, reducing tees, or crosses conforming to ASTM B-61, B-62.
Steel main line sizes larger than 2" and branch size equal to main: Use butt weld tee.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 17 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
Steel main line sizes larger than 2-1/2" and steel branch size one or two sizes smaller than main: Weld standard weight weldolet or threadolet directly to main or use reinforced fabricated steel welding saddle.
Main line sizes larger than 6 and steel branch sizes three or more sizes smaller than main: Weld branch pipe directly to main. Provide reinforcing in accordance to ANSI/ASME B31.1.
Refer to "Fabricated Branch Connections in Steel Piping" article in "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" Section for further requirements.
Gaskets 1/16" minimum thickness, full face for flat face flanges and ring type for raised face flanges, Garlock, Flexitallic, or Gortex.
Bolts & Nuts For Bronze Flanges: Square head bronze bolts with bronze hex nuts.
For Steel Flanges: Square head carbon steel bolts per ASTM A-307 Grade B with hex head carbon steel nuts per ASTM A-563 Grade A.
Bolt Lubricant "NO-OX-ID" grease or approved equal.
Thread Dope Teflon tape on male threads only.
Gate Valves 3" and under: Nibco Figure S-111, ANSI Class 125, 170 psig WOG non-shock at 250 deg. F. Bronze gate with solid wedge, rising stem, screwed in bonnet and solder end connections.
2-1/2" and over (to 24"): Nibco Figure F-617, ANSI Class 125, 175 psig (125 psi over 12" size) WOG non-shock at 250 deg. F. Iron body gate with solid wedge, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, bolted bonnet and flanged end connections.
Plug Valves 1/2" through 2": DeZurik 118-S, 1, RS55 (250 deg. F), ALG, ANSI Class 125, 175 psig WOG non-shock at 250 deg F. Valve shall be eccentric, resilient plugs with cast iron body and threaded end connections. Valve shall be provided with Buna packing and nonlubricated stainless steel bearings.
Valves shall be suitable for bi-directional flow but shall be installed with flow to back of seat. Valves shall include a lever handle with memory stop.
2-1/2" and over: DeZurik 128-F, 1 (or 6), RS55 or RS56, ALG (or AGGXH6), ANSI Class 125, 175 psig (125 psig over 12") WOG non-shock at 250 deg. F. Valves shall be same as smaller valves except with flanged ends and provided with nickel seats.
Valves 16" and over and located at pump discharges shall have gauge tappin g on downstream side of valve.
Valves 4" and over and located in branch lines without a flow measuring station shall have two gauge tappings.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 18 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
Valves 10" and larger shall be provided with a geared handwheel actuator and memory stop. All geared actuators shall include a gasketed cover plate.
Ball Valves 2" and under: Nibco Figure S-585-70, rated 350 psig WOG non-shock at 250 deg. F and 150 psig SWP. Bronze two-piece body with chromium plated ball, Teflon seats and stuffing box, blowout proof stem design, 1-1/4" extended lever operator and solder end connections. Memory stops shall be provided only where indicated on the Drawings.
Lug-Style Butterfly Valves 2-1/2" and over: Nibco LD-2000-3 (or -5), LD-3010-3 (or -5), 175 psig NSC-WOG. Valves shall have ductile iron lug body with aluminum bronze (or ductile iron with nickel edge) disc and minimum of three copper alloy bushings. Valves shall be equipped with stainless steel stem and molded in EDPM liner and seats rated for 200 deg. F minimum. Valves shall be suitable for bubble -tight dead-end service at rated pressure.
Valves 6" and under shall be equipped with a 10 -position lever operator unless otherwise noted. Valves 8" and over shall be equipped with a gear operator. All gear operators shall include a gasketed cover plate.
Valves used as balancing valves shall be provided with infinitely positionable valve operator and memory stop.
Butterfly Valve 2-1/2" (thru 12" and over): Nibco GD-3765-3 (or -5), 300 psig NSC-WOG. Valves shall have ductile iron epoxy coated grooved and body with EDPM encapsulated ductile iron disc and three PTFE bronze sintered steel bushings. Valves shall be equipped with stainless steel stem. EDPM liner shall be rated for 200 deg. F minimum. Valves shall be suitable for bubble tight dead end service at rated pressure.
Valves 6" and under shall be equipped with a 10-position level operator unless otherwise noted. Valves 8" and over shall be equipped with a gear operator. All gear operators shall include a gasketed cover plate.
Valves used as balancing valves shall be provided with infinitely positionable valve operator and memory stop.
Check Valves 3" and under: Nibco Figure S-413, ANSI Class 125, 175 psig WOG non-shock at 250 deg F. Bronze, regrinding type, renewable disc, Y-pattern horizontal swing, and Buna seat with solder end connections.
2-1/2" and over: Techno Style 5050, ANSI Class 125, 175 psig (125 psig over 14") WOG non-shock at 250 deg. F (or Gustin-Bacon Series 350 check valve with grooved end connections). Valves shall be wafer style split disc check with cast iron bodies, aluminum-bronze valve plates, EPDM (or Buna) seals, and 316 stainless steel spring and trim.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 19 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
Strainers 2" and under: Sarco Figure BT, rated 350 psig WOG non-shock at 250 deg. F. Bronze Ypattern threaded body.
2-1/2" and over: Sarco Figure IF-125 rated 175 psig (125 psig over 12") WOG non-shock at 250 deg. F. Cast iron Y-pattern body with Class 125 flanged end connections.
Pump Connectors (for axial movement) 1-1/2" and over (to 12"): Mason Industries Heavy Duty Super-Flex MFNC, rated 245 psig minimum at 250 deg. F. constructed of multi-layered nylon tire cord fabric reinforcement with EDPM cover and liner. Ends sha ll be reinforced with steel wire bead rings. Connectors shall be furnished with Class 150 or better flanged ends and control rods. Units shall be suitable for minimum 1/2" minimum axial motion.
2.8 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
A. Manual Air Vent: Cast iron body with stainless steel internal parts; 250-psig working pressure, 300 deg F operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; with 1/8inch NPS discharge connection and 1/2-inch NPS inlet connection.
B. Automatic Air Vent: Hoffman Specialty No. 792 high pressure air vent. Designed to vent automatically with float principle; high tensile cast iron body with stainless still internal parts; 250psig working pressure, 300 deg F operating temperature; with 1/2-inch NPS discharge connection and 3/4-inch NPS inlet connection.
C. Diaphragm Type Expansion Tank 1. Provide pressurized diaphragm type expansion tanks as scheduled on the Drawings. 2. Units shall be pre-charged to pressure scheduled as the initial fill pressure of the system. Units shall be suitable for a maximum working pressure of 150 psig and shall be furnished with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code stamp and certification. Units shall have a sealed in elastomer diaphragm suitable for an operating temperature of 240 deg. F. 3. Tanks to be furnished with saddles for horizontal installation or furnished with base mount for vertical installation as required. 4. Design Basis: Amtrol Ex-Trol Model AX or Ex-Trol Series "L", ASME rated for 250 psig WP.
E. Plain Steel Expansion Tank 1. Provide plain steel expansion tanks as scheduled on the Drawings. 2. Tank shall be constructed of carbon steel and shall be supplied with all required taps. Tank shall be constructed in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and stamped for 300 psig design pressure. 3. Tanks on hot water systems over 100 deg. F shall be fitted with an Airtrol Tank fitting to restrict thermal circulation of water between the tank and the system. 4. All tanks shall be fitted with a gauge glass, a drain, and a means for venting air. 5. Provide temporary expansion tanks for testing of all piping systems.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 20 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
F. Air Separators 1. Provide air separator with integral strainer as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Separator shall have cast iron body with flanged or threaded tangential inlet and outlet nozzles suitable for in-line connection. Unit shall have an internal perforated stainless steel air collector tube designed to direct released air to the top of the separator. Unit shall also have a start-up strainer and a removable galvanized steel permanent strainer. Contractor shall remove and clean strainer after 24-hours operations and after 39-days operation. 3. Separator shall be constructed in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and stamped for system design pressure. Unit shall be supplied with a valved blowdown connection to facilitate routine cleaning.
4. Each air separator shall be furnished with a high capacity air vent. Air vent design basis is Bell & Gossett Model 107. 5. Design Basis: ITT Bell & Gossett "Rolairtrol".
G. Automatic Flow Control Valves
1. Automatic pressure compensating flow control valves shall be provided for each terminal device requiring this type of balancing valve. Capacities shall be computed from the terminal unit schedule or as indicated. 2. Valves shall be factory set and shall automatically limit the rate of flow to required engineered capacity within plus or minus 5 percent accuracy over an operating pressure differential of 3 to 40 psig required for control. 3. The control mechanism of the valve shall consist of a self-contained, open-chamber cartridge assembly with stainless steel spring and unobstructed flow passages that eliminate accumulation of particles and debris. All internal working parts shall be stainless steel or nickel plated brass. 4. The cartridge assembly shall consist of a spring-loaded cup. The cup shall be guided and shall utilize the full available differential pressure across the valve to actuate the cup and thereby reduce friction and hysterisis and eliminate binding. The cartridge assembly must be removable. 5. Valve bodies shall be provided with inlet and outlet tappings suitable for connection of instruments for verification of flow rates. Valve bodies shall be rated for use at not less than 150 percent of system designed operating pressures at 250 deg. F. 6. The differential pressure meter connections shall be constructed with a built-in check valve and shall include a safety cap. The connection shall be a Schrader fitting for pressure only application or a pressure/temperature test station when P/T plugs are detailed. 7. Certified performance data for the flow control valve, based on independent laboratory tests, supervised and witnessed by a registered professional engineer, shall be available. 8. The Flow Control Valves shall include a five year from date of purchase warranty between Owner and the Valve Manufacturer. 9. Sizes 1/2-inch through 2-inches shall be a combination flow control and shut off ball valve, and shall include union connections to provide easy access and removal of the flow control assembly from the pipeline. Valve bodies shall be marked to show direction of flow. 10. Provide a metal identification tag, with wire, for each installed valve. The tag shall be metal stamped with zone or terminal device identification, valve model number, rated flow in GPM and differential pressure range.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 21 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
11. Provide a strainer upstream of each flow control valve. Strainers shall be as specified in Article entitled Strainers in this Section except for strainers sizes 1-1/2-inch and smaller. Strainers 1-1/2-inch and smaller shall be in-line strainers with removable 316 stainless steel (20 mesh) basket; bronze union body, blowdown valve, P/T plug and ball valve. 12. Flow control valves (and strainers) shall have bodies threaded, sweat, or flanged for the installation.
G. Chemical Feeder: Bypass-type chemical feeders of 5-gal. capacity, welded steel construction; 150-psig working pressure; complete with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.
1. Chemicals: Specially formulated to prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping system and connected equipment, and based on a water analysis of makeup water.
H. Diverting Fittings: 150-psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature; cast iron body with threaded ends, or wrought copper with soldered ends. Indicate flow direction on fitting.
I. Y-Pattern Strainers: 150-psig working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged ends for 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger, threaded connections for 2-inch NPS and smaller, bolted cover, perforated Type 304 stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection.
J. Basket Strainers: 150-psig working pressure; high-tensile cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged end connections, bolted cover, perforated Type 304 stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection.
K. T-Pattern Strainers: 750-psig working pressure; ductile-iron or malleable-iron body, grooved end connections, Type 304 stainless-steel strainer basket with 57 percent free area; removable access coupling and end cap for strainer maintenance.
2.9 SAFETY OR PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
A. Safety or pressure relief valves shall be provided at pressure reducing stations, pump discharge manifolds, unfired pressure vessels, for testing operations, and where indicated on drawings. Valve pressure settings shall be for maximum system setting or as otherwise indicated on the drawings.
B. Safety or pressure relief valves shall be of such size that with a blow-off pressure set 6 percent above the normal or 5 psig - whichever is greater, pressure valves shall be wide open, and shall relieve the full inlet flow to the valve. Provide valves sized on the actual residual pressure which will exist when the valve discharges. Valves shall bear an ASME label indicating the operational pressure.
C. Safety or pressure relief valve shall be selected and furnished by the equipment supplier whose equipment device is being protected by the device.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 22 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve types:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves. 2. Throttling Duty: Use globe, ball, and butterfly valves with memory stops.
B. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install throttling-duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
D. Install calibrated plug valves on the outlet of each heating or cooling element and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing.
E. Install drain valves at low points in mains, risers, branch lines, and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
F. Install check valves on each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.
G. Install safety relief valves on hot water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code with the pipe discharge to the floor level without valves. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII for installation requirements.
H. Install pressure-reducing valves on hot water generators and elsewhere as required to regulate system pressure.
I. Provide valve stem extensions for all insulated piping.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Install piping according to Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods", and ASME B 31.9, Building Services Piping, No Exceptions .
B. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.
C. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4-inch NPS ball valve, and short 3/4-inch NPS threaded nipple and cap.
D. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 23 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
E. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
F. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main with takeoff out bottom of main, except for up-feed risers with takeoff out top of main line.
G. Install unions in pipes 2-inch NPS and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections of each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required at flanged connections.
H. Install flanges on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger connections.
I. Install flexible connectors at inlet and discharge connections to pumps (except in-line pumps) and other vibration-producing equipment.
J. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-regulating valve, solenoid valve, in- line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install 3/4-inch NPS nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers 2-inch NPS and larger.
K. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction.
L. Provide dielectric connections at all points of connection between dissimilar metals where electrolysis can take place. Provide a brass nipple in a coupling arrangement, minimum 3” in length for hydronic piping that is 2 inch and under in size. All piping 2-½ inch and over shall be provided with a manufactured insulating isolation type flange with appropriate gaskets and bolts, as well as all necessary amenities designed for the specific application. Install all flange type dielectric fittings per the manufacturers recommended installation practices.
3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Mechanical Joints: Assemble joints according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Air Vents 1. Air vents shall be installed at the ends of mains, all high points, and where water flow turns downward including branches to down-feed terminal units longer than 10 feet. Where structural conditions do not permit installation of piping as specified and it is necessary to create air pockets or water traps, air vents and drains shall be provided to enable satisfactory and safe operation of the system so that proper circulation and drainage is assured. Provide air pockets of same size as the line being vented at all vent points. 2. Generally, manual vents shall be installed on all concealed piping. Manual vents shall consist of 1/2-inch type "L" copper tubing with a dielectric connection from high point of line to a vent valve installed in an accessible location, such as in radiation covers, in storage rooms, in janitor's closet, above accessible lay-in ceilings, or in walls behind access doors. Terminate the discharge of all manual air vents using soft copper tubing in such a manner
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 24 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
as to easily collect the water discharged in a bucket or suitable receptacle. All remote manual vent valves shall be tagged. a. Manual air vent valves shall be minimum 3/4-inch ball valves as specified for the service unless otherwise noted. 3. Automatic vents shall be installed on piping in Mechanical Equipment Room on and all exposed piping in storage rooms, janitor's closets, etc. Outlets from automatic vents shall be piped to waste point or floor drain. Provide a 3/4-inch ball valve to isolate the air vent for repair; ball valve shall be as specified for the service. a. Automatic air vents for the hot and chilled water and glycol solution systems shall be of the float type with threaded pipe connections. Vents shall be built for 250 psig minimum operating pressure and shall be complete with brass or cast-iron body, copper or stainless steel floats and stainless steel valve parts.
B. Install dip-tube fittings in boiler outlet. Run piping to compression tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Connect boiler-outlet piping.
C. Install in-line air separators in pump suction lines. Run piping to compression tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank and install drain valve on units 2-inch NPS and larger.
D. Install combination air separator and strainer in pump suction lines. Run piping to compression tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install blow-down piping with gate valve; extend to nearest drain.
E. Install shot-type chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated; in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above floor. Install feeder in bypass line, off main using globe valves on each side of feeder and in the main between bypass connections. Pipe drain, with ball valve, to nearest equipment drain or floor sink.
F. Install compression tanks above air separator. Install gage glass and cocks on end of tank. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank. 1. Support tank as detailed on Drawings. In the absence of details, provide support from floor or structure above sufficient for weight of tank, piping connections, and fittings, plus weight of a full tank of water. Do not overload building components and structural members.
G. Install diaphragm-type compression tanks on floor as indicated. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and charge tank with proper air charge to suit system design requirements.
H. Install temporary testing expansion tanks to isolate respective section of the piping system. Run piping to compression tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank and install drain valve on units 2-inch NPS and larger.
3.5 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Piping size for supply and return shall be same size as equipment connections.
B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to equipment.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 25 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. Where multiple or parallel control valves are installed only one bypass is required.
D. Install pressure gage at coil inlet connections.
E. Where new equipment is provided by the manufacturer with only grooved type piping connections, the Contractor shall make connection and immediately change to a flanged or threaded connection.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Preparation: Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9, see Section 15189 “HVAC Water Treatment” specification. Perform the following as a minimum:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. 4. Isolate equipment that is not subjected to test pressure from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Flanged joints where blinds are inserted to isolate equipment need not be tested. 5. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
B. Testing: Test hydronic piping as indicated in Section 15950 “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing”. Perform the following as a minimum:
1. Use ambient temperature water as testing medium, except where there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid may be used if it is safe for workers and compatible with piping system components. 2. Use vents installed at the high points of system to release trapped air while filling system. Use drains installed at low points for complete removal of liquid. 3. Examine system to see that equipment, anchor points, gaskets, seals, and parts that cannot withstand test pressures are properly isolated. Examine test equipment to ensure that it is tight and that low-pressure filling lines are disconnected. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Check to verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, Code for Pressure Piping, "Building Services Piping". 5. Provide temporary expansion tanks connected to the system high point and sized to handle the estimated acceptance volume of the portion of system tested. Submit all information to the Owner for approval prior to testing. 6. Provide temporary safety relief valves for the duration of testing period.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 26 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
7. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 8. Prepare written report of testing and turn over to Owner.
B. Expansion Joint preset: Install all expansion control devices with the proper preset to control expansion and contraction in the piping system. Provide the Owner with the information provided to the Contractor, from the expansion joint manufacturer’s sales representative for all installation temperatures.
3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions. See Section 15189 “HVAC Water Treatment” specification.
B. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping system, but before balancing, remove disposable finemesh strainers in pump suction diffusers. See Section 15189 “HVAC Water Treatment” specification.
C. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.
D. Chemical Treatment: See Section 15189 “HVAC Water Treatment” specification. Provide a water analysis prepared by chemical treatment supplier to determine type and level of chemicals required to prevent scale and corrosion. Perform initial treatment after completing system testing.
E. Provide appropriate expansion control during cleaning operations.
3.8 COMMISSIONING
A. Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment. See Section 15189 “HVAC Water Treatment” specification and Section 15995 “Commissioning of Mechanical Systems”.
B. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that associated system is completely full of water.
C. Perform these steps before operating the system: 1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves. 2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation. 3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure. 4. Insure that all system components and seals are capable of withstanding the system pressures indicated on the schedules and fluids used. 5. Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type) or bleed air completely (manual type).
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 27 of 28 SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
6. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 7. Check operation of automatic bypass valves. 8. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to design requirements. 9. Lubricate motors and bearings. 10. Insure that expansion control is properly positioned to control piping pressure and forces.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hydronic Piping 15181 Page 28 of 28 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Section 15050 “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” 2. Section 15055 “Motors” 3. Section 15074 “Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment” 4. Section 15075 “Mechanical Identification” 5. Section 15110 “Valves” 6. Section 15124 “Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping” 7. Section 15127 “Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping” 8. Section 15140 “Domestic Water Piping” 9. Section 15150 “Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping” 10. Section 15181 “Hydronic Piping” 11. Section 15185 “Hydronic Pumps” 12. Section 15900 ”HVAC Instrumentation and Controls” 13. Section 15995 ”Commissioning of Mechanical Systems”
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The work covered by this Section of the Specifications consists of providing all labor, material and equipment for cleaning and flushing piping systems and providing water treatment chemicals and miscellaneous equipment for the closed and open piping systems.
B. The Contractor shall provide the work which is to be performed by an independent water treatment company. The Contractor shall perform all other work required for the installation but which is not specifically outlined to be performed by the independent water treatment company.
C. The independent water treatment company shall provide the following services, equipment and chemicals.
1.3 WATER TREATMENT – GENERAL
A. The following general description of the work is included as a convenience to the Seller. The Seller shall verify all quantities shown to ensure that the scope of work is fully understood. The complete definition of the work is as shown on the Contract Drawings and as contained in these Specifications.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 1 of 22 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
B. The work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to furnishing and installing the following: 1. Obtain water samples at job site to determine required treatment. Provide thermal and hydrodynamic review of the proposed treatment system, and investigate piping, routing and equipment characteristics, to preclude thermal degradation of materials, excessive chemical feed pump discharge or suction pressure and siphoning of chemicals. Provide report outlining water analysis with shop drawing submission. 2. Furnish all automated chemical feeding, water softeners, timers, water meters, one shot chemical pot feeders, corrosion coupon racks, blowdown valves, sample coolers, solution mix tanks and pumps, test equipment, test cabinets and accessories. 3. Make recommendations for injection locations for each chemical, for corrosion coupon rack locations, and for sampling ports used on the project. 4. Provide all chemicals, corrosion coupons and testing equipment, as described in the following paragraphs. 5. Provide all chemicals required for cleaning and flushing the systems affected by the construction, for initially filling these systems, and for maintaining these systems at proper concentration levels required for effective, efficient, corrosion free operation of the mechanical equipment for a period of one year after the acceptance of the project by the Owner. Fouling factors shall be maintained at 0.00025 on all heat exchange surfaces and algae shall be maintained at levels of no appreciative build up. 6. Provide installation details and instruct the Contractor on installation of feeding equipment, water softeners, water meters, blowdown valves, sample coolers, solution mix tanks and pumps, injection locations for chemicals, corrosion coupon racks and sample ports. 7. Provide services by an experienced water treatment technician to direct flushing, cleaning and/or disinfection, pretreatment, metal passivation, startup and debugging operations and to direct and perform chemical control tests during construction period. 8. Provide services by an electronics control and instrumentation technician to direct calibration, startup and adjustment of the control systems. All final adjustments shall be recorded and bound into all copies of the "Operation and Maintenance Manuals". 9. Provide the Owner with three (3) sets of complete written instructions in shop manual format for chemical feeding, blowdown, sampling and test procedures. 10. Provide instructions to the Owner as herein described. Demonstrate to the Owner's personnel the proper application of the written instructions. 11. Obtain samples from all systems, examine corrosion coupons at least once every two months for the first six months (three samples) and at least once every 3 months for the next 6 months (fourth and fifth sample), analyze these samples and furnish written report and recommendations to the Owner.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 2 of 22 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
12. Provide the Owner and plant operator with the Material Safety Data Sheet information required by OSHA Hazard Communication Standard 29CFR 1910.1200 for all chemicals in active use in the facility.
C. Work by the Contractor generally includes the following: 1. Receive and install all automated chemical feeding and blowdown control equipment, water softeners, timers, water meters, one shot chemical pot feeders, corrosion coupon racks, solution mix tanks and pumps, test equipment, test cabinets, and accessories. 2. Provide chemical injection ports and sample ports as recommended by the independent water treatment company. Coordinate with various equipment suppliers where injection ports are required in pressure vessels. 3. Provide portable recirculation pumps and temporary piping to provide circulation of water and chemicals through the piping systems during the initial cleaning and flushing operation. 4. Provide all piping incidental to the chemical treatment systems. 5. Provide under Section 15900 “HVAC Instrumentation and Controls” wiring and conduit between water chemical feeding, chemical feed pumps, and water meters. 6. Provide other work required for a complete installation.
D. Work by the Electrical Contractor generally includes the following: 1. Provide power wiring and junction boxes to locations indicated on the drawings and local to each chemical treatment system to power the equipment. 2. Provide power outlet near the chemical treatment test cabinets. 3. Install manual motor starters for fractional horsepower fill pumps and tank agitators with manual or automatic control.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Water quality for HVAC systems shall minimize corrosion, scale buildup, and biological growth for optimum efficiency of HVAC equipment without creating a hazard to operating personnel or the environment.
B. Base HVAC water treatment on quality of water available at Project site, HVAC system equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Closed hydronic systems, including hot-water heating and chilled water, shall have the following water qualities: 1. pH: Maintain a value within 9.0 to 10.5. 2. "P" Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 500 ppm. 3. TDS: Maintain a maximum value of 10 ppm. 4. Microbiological Limits:
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 3 of 22 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 organisms/ml. b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml. c. Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml. d. Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml. e. Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml.
D. Open hydronic systems, including condenser water, shall have the following water qualities: 1. pH: Maintain a value within 8.0 to 9.1. 2. "P" Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm. 3. Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm. 4. Soluble Copper: Maintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm. 5. TDS: Maintain a maximum value of 10 ppm. 6. Microbiological Limits: a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 10,000 organisms/ml. b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 organisms/ml. c. Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml. d. Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml. e. Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. No equipment shall be fabricated, delivered, or installed until receipt of approved shop drawings from the Owner.
B. Submittals shall include the following: 1. Report outlining water chemistry analysis of hardness, pH, total dissolved solids, silica, and other characteristics pertinent to the water treatment system required. 2. Provide a letter from the water chemical treatment company recommending specifically all chemicals (by product number) and at what concentrations they should be applied for fulfilling the requirements of this section of the specification. Methods of applying the chemical products should also be discussed where appropriate. The letter shall reference this project specifically, shall be dated and shall be signed by a person of responsibility employed by the water treatment company. 3. Piping schematics of the proposed hydronic or steam systems with all chemical feed equipment, sample ports, chemical injection ports, and water meters. 4. Provide an itemized list of recommended sample ports, chemical injection ports, and water meters. Provide installation details for each.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 4 of 22 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
5. Catalog data of all electronic chemical monitoring and control equipment and on water softeners along with field wiring diagrams. 6. Catalog data on all one shot chemical pot feeders, chemical feed pumps, tanks, fill pumps, corrosion coupon racks, water meters, chemical injection devices and all accessories to be provided on the project. 7. Bill of Material indicating projected use (quantities) of each chemical to be used on the project for the first year. Catalog data on all initial flushing and cleaning chemicals and on chemicals in long term use including glycol, zeolite, salts, inhibitors, sulfites, phosphates, amines, algaecides and biocides. 8. Operation and Maintenance Manuals in shop manual format including all approved shop drawing information and all Material Safety Data Sheets.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized chemical water treatment supplier with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity and that is or employs an experienced consultant, available at reasonable times during the course of the Work to consult with all associated disciplines and professionals on the project about water treatment. Refer to Section 15995 “Commissioning of Mechanical Systems” for responsibilities.
B. The water treatment company shall have at least one officer or official holding a college or university degree in chemistry, chemical engineering or sanitary engineering. He should have at least ten years experience in treating the water in systems of similar size and capacity and he shall be in active responsible charge of all treatment work.
C. The company's laboratory shall be equipped to analyze samples in accordance with the standard methods of the American Water Works Association and the American Society for Testing Materials.
D. Chemical Standards: Meet state and local pollution-control regulations.
E. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
F. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
1.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Service Period: Provide chemicals and service program for period of one year from startup date of equipment, including the following: 1. Initial water analysis and recommendations.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 5 of 22 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
2. Startup assistance. 3. Training of operating personnel. 4. Periodic field service and consultation. 5. Customer report charts and log sheets. 6. Laboratory technical assistance.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish the following extra materials, matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and with identification labels clearly describing contents.
B. Chemicals: Furnish quantity equal to 50 percent of amount initially installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Chemical Water Treatment Products: a. Nalco Chemical Co.
2.2 TESTING EQUIPMENT
A. Provide individual test cabinets in appropriate locations for the following systems: 1. Condenser water system. 2. Chilled water and hot water systems in one cabinet.
B. Testing equipment shall be provided which shall include the following: 1. Reagents and apparatus for determination of hardness, pH, and alkalinity levels. 2. Reagents and apparatus for determination of treatment levels. 3. Any special equipment required for proper control of chemical treatment. 4. All glassware required. 5. Test procedure manuals and test result plates. C. The test cabinets shall be minimum 30" x 30" x 10" deep with fluorescent light and shall have shelves suitable for storing test reagents, apparatus, equipment and manuals. Cabinet shall be lockable type, minimum 16 gauge epoxy coated steel and shall be suitable for wall mounting. A typewritten sheet outlining all normal chemical levels, test results and calibration and alarm setpoint adjustments shall be permanently attached to the backside of the cabinet door.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 6 of 22 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
2.3 WATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT CONDENSER WATER SYSTEM
A. Provide a complete electronic cooling tower open loop monitoring and control system package complete with feed pumps, water meters, blowdown valve, wiring, piping, and accessories. Also provide a (two (2) or five (5)) gallon one shot chemical pot feeder for slug feeding biocides and for initial fill and provide a corrosion coupon rack with a minimum of two coupon holders.
B. System shall be a packaged self-contained, factory assembled, fully automatic, chemical feed system with an integrated electric/electronic monitoring and control system to continuously monitor, control and alarm system variables within specified limits. All controllers, timers, and pumps shall be mounted on a single frame or structure for installation. System shall be equal to Morr Control System N-1 with Option 09 alternating biocide feed. 1. Only one 115 Volt AC power supply shall be furnished to this system as part of the work by the Electrical Contractor, all other electrical work necessary to a functioning system shall be provided as part of the work under this section, except as otherwise indicated for external to unit remote functions; this work shall be provided under Section 15900 “HVAC Instrumentation and Controls”. All work shall conform to the provisions outlined in Division 16. 2. Control unit shall be factory tested and pre-calibrated to assure reliability of operation. Unit shall be of modular construction for easy troubleshooting and repair. 3. Control unit shall have a back plate of formed aluminum or steel, epoxy painted; NEMA 1 or better enclosure. Power source (1) shall be 120 Volt AC, single phase, 30 amp. 4. Sample line shall be Schedule 80 CPVC complete with conductivity sensor and flow switch and may be located locally or remotely from the control panel.
C. Monitoring and Control System Operation Description 1. The system shall continuously monitor and control inhibitor chemical feed, algaecide/biocide additions, and conductivity. 2. Conductivity: On off control of blowdown valve. Purged high total dissolved solids (TDS) water will be blown down and replaced with low TDS make up water by tower level control. 3. Inhibitor/dispersant level: Proportional to make up by a water meter activating a counter timer. 4. Biocide Levels: Add algaecides in a predisposed timed manner at levels recommended by the water treatment company. Add alternate biocide. 5. Alarms: Audible and visual alarm with manual alarm silence. Also provide auxiliary relay contact for remote alarm. Alarm shall be activated by both high conductivity levels and low conductivity levels.
D. Electrical Electronic Components
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 7 of 22 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
1. The controller circuitry shall be individually housed in a NEMA 1 or better enclosure with a key locked, windowed door. The electrode signal from the sensor assembly shall be conditioned and linearly displayed on an analog meter. The analyzer electronics shall be mounted on plug in printed circuit boards. A run test switch shall be provided for the electrode signal to isolate the electrode during trouble shooting and to simulate readings during control adjustments. 2. All blow-down and feed control functions shall have a manual OFF and ON as well as automatic operating mode. All control lights shall be long life neon to minimize bulb failure. 3. The conductivity analyzer shall have one (1) control set point, adjustable 100% across the range with a variable hysteresis, as well as one HI and one LO alarm, each also adjustable 100% across the range. Powered control contacts shall be provided for on/off control of chemical treatment feed, blowdown, and an alarm including an alarm contact for remote readout and an audible alarm. All control relays shall be suitable for a minimum of 10 ampere resistive to permit the direct connection of the blowdown valve and fractional horsepower feed pumps. 4. The timer counter shall be provided with a continuous time adjustment between 0 and 60 seconds. The counter included in the timer circuit shall have an adjustment range of 1 15 counts per timer cycle. 5. The conductivity analyzer and timer counter shall meet the following operating requirements:
Conductivity Analyzer
Sensitivity: 0.1% of full scale Stability: 0.2% of full scale/day Scale: 0 6000 microhms/cm
Timer Counter
Span: 0 90 seconds Counter Span: 1 15 counts Minimum Count Contact Time: 0 25 seconds
6. The conductivity cell electrodes shall be manufactured from inert titanium palladium alloy, never requiring replaninization. All conductivity signals shall be automatically temperature compensated. The conductivity electrode shall be made leakproof by casting the probe body so its components are completely encapsulated, eliminating the need of O ring seals, air pressure or other sealing devices.
E. Algaecide/Biocide Feed 1. An algaecide/biocide timer shall be mounted on the pre-assembled control panel to automatically add biocide per the water treatment company's instructions and
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 8 of 22 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
shall have the capability of automatically alternating formulations. The timer shall be minimum 7-day programmable type capable of starting chemical feed pumps at 15 minute intervals of the day. Programs shall be easily adjusted by hand without tools to obtain or to change the desired programmed schedule. The unit shall be powered by a 120 Volt AC source. 2. The switch mechanism shall be self-contained unit rated at not less than 15 amps, 120 Volts AC, single pole, double throw, and shall be readily replaceable in the field. 3. An omitting device shall be furnished as an integral part of the time switch, to enable switching operation to be skipped for any pre-selected day or days of the week.
F. Fail safe Control (Flow Switch) 1. A flow switch shall be provided in the sample stream to lock out chemical feed in a "no flow" condition. Flow switch cleaning shall require no tools.
G. Contacting Water Meter 1. The water treatment company shall furnish and the Contractor shall install a contacting water meter in the make-up water line. The meter shall be contacting type (100 gallons per contact) water meter capable of handling maximum continuous flows based on tons of cooling tower capacity at 15,000 Btu/h per ton. 2. Refer to contacting water meter article near the end of this section for further requirements.
H. Blow-down Valve 1. The water treatment company shall furnish and the Contractor install a motorized ball type blowdown valve capable of blowing down sufficient condenser water to maintain recommended concentrations at scheduled tons. The valve body shall be as specified in "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" Section. The valve shall operate from the normally closed position and a maximum pressure of 125 psid. The valve shall have a 120 Volt AC continuous duty motor rated for NEMA 4 weatherproof operation.
I. Chemical Feed Pumps, One Shot Chemical Pot Feeder and Corrosion Coupon Rack 1. Refer to articles near the end of this section for further requirements on these devices.
J. Piping (for prefabricated manifold system) 1. Rigid 1 1/2" IPS, Schedule 80 CPVC pipe valves and fittings shall be provided for both sample and injected chemical stream. Refer to "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" Section.
2.4 WATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT CHILLED WATER SYSTEM
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 9 of 22 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
A. Provide a (two (2) or five (5)) gallon one shot chemical pot feeder, a makeup water meter, and a corrosion coupon rack with two (2) (four (4)) corrosion coupon holders, for the new chilled water system. Refer to articles near the end of this section for further requirements on these devices
B. Provide a five (5) gallon one shot chemical pot feeder, a corrosion coupon rack with two (2) (four (4)) (six (6)) corrosion coupon holders, two contacting water meters, 100 (50) gallon solution mix tank with mixer, a chemical feed pump, and an inhibitor feed timer for the new chilled water system.
C. One Shot Chemical Pot Feeder and Corrosion Coupon Rack 1. Refer to one shot chemical pot feeder and corrosion coupon rack articles at the end of this section for further requirements on these devices.
D. Contacting Water Meters 1. The small meter shall be contacting type, oscillating piston water meter capable of handling the required flows with 5 psig pressure drop. 2. The large meter shall be similar to the one specified for the condenser water system except with one pulser.
E. Chemical Feed Pump 1. The chemical feed pump shall be similar to those specified for the condenser water system. Refer to chemical feed pump article near the end of this section.
F. Solution Mix Tank Assembly 1. Refer to solution mix tank assembly article near the end of this section for further requirements.
G. Inhibitor Feed Timer 1. An inhibitor timer shall be mounted on the pre-assembled control panel to automatically add inhibitor per the water treatment company's instructions and in proportion to the makeup water use. The timer shall be electronic pulse activated type capable of starting chemical feed pumps when a pulse is received from the makeup water meter. Programs shall be easily adjusted by hand tools to obtain or to change the desired programmed feeding schedule. The unit shall be powered by a 120 Volt AC source. 2. The switch mechanism shall be fused and self-contained within the unit, shall be rated at not less than 15 amps, 120 Volts AC, single pole, double throw, and shall be readily replaceable in the field. 3. A test pushbutton and an indicating light shall be provided as an integral part of the time switch.
2.5 WATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT HOT WATER SYSTEM
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 10 of 22 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
A. Provide a (two (2) or five (5)) gallon one shot chemical pot feeder, a make-up water meter, and a corrosion coupon rack with four (4) corrosion coupon holders for each hot water system within the facility. Refer to articles near the end of this section for further requirements.
2.6 ONE SHOT CHEMICAL POT FEEDER
A. Provide one shot chemical pot feeders for treatment of the various piping systems as outlined previously in this section.
B. The pot feeder shall be constructed of steel with inlet and discharge ports and a screw on self-locking cap. Vessel shall be suitable for working pressures up to 150 psig. Feeder shall be provided with legs. Feeder shall also be manufactured as a filter with fittings designed to filter approximately 5% of the total volume of closed system water at all times. Two (2) gallon feeders shall be Neptune Model VTF-2 or DBF-2 with FBK-2 filter bag. Five (5) gallon feeders shall be Neptune Model VTF-5 or DBF-5 with FBK 5 filter bag.
C. Each pot feeder shall be provided with an inlet balancing valve, a discharge isolation valve, a drain valve and a propeller sight flow indicator.
2.7 CORROSION COUPON RACKS
A. Provide corrosion coupon racks on the various piping systems as outlined previously in this section.
B. Provide racks with a minimum of two (2) coupon holders in all steel piping system including condenser water, and chilled water systems.
C. Provide racks with a minimum of four (4) coupon holders in steel and copper piping systems including (chilled water and) hot water.
D. Provide racks with a minimum of six (6) coupon holders in district chilled water systems which contain steel, copper, and iron pipe.
E. Racks shall be installed in wetted parts of the various piping systems to simulate the corrosion of that piping system. Final locations shall be as recommended by the water treatment company.
F. Racks for hot service piping shall be constructed with steel piping. G. Racks for cold water systems such as chilled water and condenser water may be constructed of Schedule 80 PVC or CPVC piping. Racks shall be Morr Control Model CRR . H. Each rack shall be provided with inlet balancing valve, discharge isolation valve, and strainer.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 11 of 22 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
2.8 WATER METERS A. Water meters, 2" and under, shall be multijet impeller driven or oscillating piston type contacting meter constructed with bronze body with threaded ends and shall be suitable for working pressures up to 150 psig. B. Water meters, 3" and over, shall be turbine or impeller driven contacting type constructed with cast iron body with ANSI Class 125 flanged ends and shall be suitable for working pressures up to 150 psig. C. Meters requiring contacting outputs shall be provided with hermetically sealed direct reading register and two (2) magnetically driven micro switches which provide contact closures at predetermined intervals (normally one contact per 100 gallons). One contact closure will be used for the water treatment system and one for the BDDC System. D. Meters for closed loop piping systems not requiring contacting outputs shall be provided with hermetically sealed direct reading register only.
GALLONS METER NORMAL MINIMUM PER SIZES GPM GPM CONTACT
3/4 15 3 10 1 25 5 100 1-1/2 50 10 100 2 80 16 100 3 360 5 100 4 600 11 100 6 880 130 1000
2.9 CHEMICAL FEED PUMPS
A. All chemical feed pumps shall be the same or provided in groups to minimize spare parts. 1. Groups of pumps shall be broken out due to chemical attack, temperature or pressure considerations. 2. Proportional timers shall be provided where required to limit feed rates below minimum outputs recommended by the pump manufacturer.
B. The chemical metering pumps for inhibitor/pH control, biocide, algaecide shall be positive displacement, liquifram type pumps. Output volume shall be adjustable from 0.15 to 14.4 gallons/day. To eliminate need for pressure relief valves, liquifram shall automatically stop pulsating when discharge pressure exceeds pump pressure rating by no more than 35%. The pump shall be capable of injecting chemicals against pressures up to 80 psig. Pumps shall be Liquid Metronics "A" series.
C. The chemical metering pumps for boilers shall be provided for each boiler and for the deaerator. Each chemical metering pump shall be a positive displacement type with capacity adjustable through 100% of range by means of an easily accessible control. The
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 12 of 22 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
pump shall be adjustable while running; and the pumped fluid shall not contact any metals of the drive assembly. Pump head shall be constructed of cast iron, with valve fittings and checks of stainless steel. Discharge and suction fittings shall be removable for service without disturbing piping. Pump motor shall be not less than 1/4 horsepower, 115 Volt AC. The minimum capacity of each pump shall be 7 GPH
D. Each pump serving chemical drums shall be provided the following: 1. Sufficient lengths of 3/8" and 1/2" hose for connecting drum suction wand to feed pumps, for connecting feed pump to the chemical feed piping and for connecting the chemical feed piping with the removable injection quills. Hose should be connected to the piping system using polypropylene compression type threaded adapter fittings. 2. Drum suction wands with bung plugs, foot valve, and suction strainer of appropriate size equal to Nalco #P6042. 3. Each pump distributing strong dosages of corrosive chemicals directly into main circulating lines shall be provided with a 304 stainless steel injector quill of the appropriate length with ball check equal to Nalco #P4610 or #P4612.
E. Each pump shall be provided with relief, back pressure and anti-syphon valves as required by the conditions of the installation of the proposed equipment.
2.10 SOLUTION MIX TANK ASSEMBLIES
A. The solution mix tank assembly (for low temperature and liquid chemicals) shall consist of a 50 or 100-gallon polyethylene tank with one-piece hinged cover, steel stand, electronic level probe and calibrated gauge glass. Assembly shall be complete with direct drive agitator mixer mounted from the stand and a feed pump. Agitator shall be complete with TEFC motor and shall operate on 115 Volt AC power. Fifty-gallon solution mix tank assembly shall be Neptune 50-PT-300 with L-1-300 agitator. One-hundred gallon solution mix tank assembly shall be Neptune 100-PT-300 with A-1-301 agitator.
B. The solution mix tank assembly (for high temperature and dry chemical mixing) shall consist of a 50-gallon 304 stainless steel tank with one-piece hinged cover, dry chemical dissolving basket, steel stand, electronic level probe and calibrated gauge glass. Assembly shall be complete with direct drive agitator mixer mounted from the stand and a feed pump. Agitator shall be complete with 1/4 horsepower motor and shall operate on 115 Volt AC, 1 phase power. The solution mix tank assembly shall be Neptune 50SST304 with A316 agitator. 1. Mix tank assemblies used for feeding filming amines shall also be provided with an electric tank heater suitable for maintaining the solution temperature at 150 deg. F. Heater shall be suitable for 120 Volts AC, 1 phase power. A line voltage temperature sensing aquastat with thermometer well shall be provided to control the heater.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 13 of 22 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
2. All mix tank assemblies used for mixing dry chemicals into solution shall be provided with a portable minimum 2 step ladder for attaining easy access to the tank top for inserting chemicals.
C. Refer to chemical feed pump specifications previously in this section for other chemical feed applications.
D. All mix tank assemblies shall be clearly labeled with laminated plastic nameplates as to their normal chemical solution contents and the systems which they serve. Refer to "Mechanical Identification" Section for further requirements.
E. Control Enclosure 1. Control enclosure shall be 115 volt, NEMA 1 or better, with all controls, switches, and lites mounted on the front. 2. A Low Tank Level Interlock Alarm circuit shall be provided to prevent the chemical pump(s) from running dry. The circuit shall include pump lockout, tank level detector, and visual alarm. The interlock circuit shall automatically reset when the tank is refilled.
F. One Automatic Shutoff timer shall be provided to allow the operator to prepare or replenish a tank of chemical, start the agitator by pushbutton, allow it to mix for up to one hour, and shut off unattended. The timer shall be adjustable 0 to 60 minutes type with cycle progress indication.
G. Provide manual motor starters with overload heaters, electric cords and plugs for each feed pump and for each agitator. Coordinate plug types with the Electrical Contractor.
2.11 CORPORATION STOPS AND INJECTION QUILLS
A. Corporation stops for chemical injection shall be used in lines which are used year-round. Corporation stops shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel and shall be complete with valve and safety chain. Minimum size shall be 1/2". Neptune CS-75-315.
B. Injection quills for chemical injection shall be used in lines which can be shut down periodically for maintenance. Injection quills shall be constructed of 315 stainless steel and shall be minimum 1/2". Neptune Q-316-50.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install treatment equipment level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, rough-in drawings, the original design, and referenced standards.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 14 of 22 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow servicing and maintenance. 2. Heating Hot Water Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Section 15181 "Hydronic Piping."
B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 16 Sections for connecting electrical equipment. 1. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.
3.3 INITIAL CLEAN OUT SPECIFICATION CONDENSER WATER SYSTEM
A. Initial Flushing 1. Fill cooling tower with a volume of water sufficient to flush main lines, and branch lines. Provide expansion control during cleaning and flushing operations. A safety relief device shall be incorporated into this section or system of piping to protect against over-pressurization during cleaning and flushing operations. 2. All condensers should be blocked in so that flush water and construction debris are not permitted to enter. 3. The flush water should be dosed with manufacturer's recommended amount of non-foaming chemical detergent equal to Nalco NALPREP III based on the total flush water volume. 4. Once flushing is complete, drain the tower and clean out the basin and pipeline strainers of all debris. 5. Fill, circulate and drain each open piping system for three (3) six hour cycles, minimum. Cycle time may be extended by the Contractor to ensure complete cleaning. In addition to specified drains provide a single main drain to allow full flow, size equal to largest system pipe or six (6) inches minimum, at the system low point. 6. At the conclusion of each cycle, drain each system at maximum flow rates provided by the main drain to a location approved by the Owner’s representative. 7. Where new systems connect to existing systems, provide temporary circulating pumps suitable for maintaining the specified operational flow required by such new systems. Pumps shall be engine-driven if Owner approved electrical power source is not available. Minimum main drain size shall be equal to the largest size required by the system. Where such size is not available at the lowest point of the system, provide a source of 10 psi oil-free compressed air to assist in the drainage. Isolation valves connecting existing systems shall remain closed until the completion of the final cycle.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 15 of 22 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
8. Final acceptance of the flushing/cleaning work shall be obtained in writing from the Owner’s representative. At no additional cost to the Owner, additional cycles may be required to obtain this acceptance.
B. Metal Passivation 1. Refill the basin with water to a level sufficient to fill piping, heat exchangers, and provide sufficient head to the recirculating pumps. 2. Begin circulating the water to the main lines only, and adjust the pH within a range of 6.5 to 7.5. 3. Once the system has been pH adjusted, start adding non-foaming chemical detergent equal to Nalco NALPREP III until recommended level is reached. 4. Chemical detergent shall be type required to establish a protective corrosion resistant film on all metal surfaces until regular water treatment program is started. 5. Open all exchangers to the system and circulate the solution for 48 hours. 6. After the proper circulation time, begin tower blowdown. When total inorganic phosphate level reaches 10 to 20 ppm, stop blowdown. 7. Add the normal high level of the non-chromate corrosion inhibitor program to the system. 8. Clean out all strainers.
C. Provide certification by the water treatment company representative that system is properly cleaned and ready for startup.
3.4 INITIAL CLEANOUT SPECIFICATION CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS
A. This service shall be performed on the entire (on the new) chilled water distribution system.
B. In addition, the independent water treatment company shall perform tests to determine the volume and chemical level of all the existing individual building systems which will be connected and shall provide a report to the Owner on these conditions. If these individual systems require cleaning and treatment, then this service will be performed as an extra to the Contract.
C. Cleaning and Flushing 1. Be sure all screens/strainers are in place and chemical feed system is installed. Provide expansion control during cleaning and flushing operations. A safety relief valve 2. Fill system with water and simultaneously add manufacturer's non-foaming chemical detergent equal to Nalco 2567 to recommended dosage based on total system capacity through the chemical feed system. 3. Fill, circulate and drain each closed piping system for three (3) six hour cycles, minimum. Cycle time may be extended by the Contractor to ensure complete cleaning. In addition to specified drains provide a single main drain to allow full
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 16 of 22 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
flow, size equal to largest system pipe or six (6) inches minimum, at the system low point. 4. Immediately after recirculation, so that removed and suspended foulants will not resettle, drain or purge system. 5. At the conclusion of each cycle, drain each system at maximum flow rates provided by the main drain to a location approved by the Owner’s representative. 6. Where new systems connect to existing systems, provide temporary circulating pumps suitable for maintaining the specified operational flow required by such new systems. Pumps shall be engine-driven if Owner approved electrical power source is not available. Minimum main drain size shall be equal to the largest size required by the system. Where such size is not available at the lowest point of the system, provide a source of 10 psi oil-free compressed air to assist in the drainage. Isolation valves connecting existing systems shall remain closed until the completion of the final cycle. 7. Remove, clean, and replace all strainers. 8. Immediately after steps 4 and 5 above, so as to prevent corrosion from taking place on empty piping and equipment, refill the system adding 1/4 the theoretical dosage of the selected treatment, recirculate for a minimum of 4 hours, maximum of 24 hours. Then drain or purge system. 9. Immediately after step 6, refill system while adding total required dosage of selected treatment equal to Nalco 2536. Continue to recirculate for a minimum of 24 hours to allow total film formation.
D. Provide certification by the water treatment company representative that system is properly cleaned and ready for startup.
E. Final acceptance of the flushing/cleaning work shall be obtained in writing from the Owner’s representative. At no additional cost to the Owner, additional cycles may be required to obtain this acceptance.
3.5 INITIAL CLEANOUT SPECIFICATION HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEMS
A. Boiler Boil out 1. Immediately after the hydrostatic testing has been completed, each boiler shall be drained, flushed with clean water, and refilled with clean water to which the appropriate alkaline cleaning boil out compound has been added to remove pipe dope, fabrication lubrications, oils, welding slag, loose mil scale, and other extraneous materials. Chemicals which are used shall be thoroughly dissolved prior to injection. 2. The boiler shall then be boiled out in accordance with the boiler manufacturer's instructions. The boiler shall then be cooled slowly and flushed with clean water. 3. Once the boiler is clean, it shall immediately be filled with clean water to which appropriate scale and corrosion inhibitors have been added.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 17 of 22 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
B. Cleaning and Flushing 1. Be sure all screens/strainers are in place and chemical feed system is installed. Provide expansion control during cleaning and flushing operations. A safety relief valve shall be incorporated into the section or system piping to protect against over-pressurization during cleaning and flushing operations. 2. Fill system with water and simultaneously add manufacturer's non-foaming chemical detergent equal to Nalco 2567 to recommended dosage based on total system capacity through chemical feed system. 3. Fill, circulate and drain each open and closed piping system for three (3) six hour cycles, minimum. Cycle time may be extended by the Contractor to ensure complete cleaning. In addition to specified drains provide a single main drain to allow full flow, size equal to largest system pipe or six (6) inches minimum, at the system low point. 4. Immediately after recirculation, so that removed and suspended foulants will not resettle, drain or purge system. 5. At the conclusion of each cycle, drain each system at maximum flow rates provided by the main drain to a location approved by the Owner’s representative. 6. Where new systems connect to existing systems, provide temporary circulating pumps suitable for maintaining the specified operational flow required by such new systems. Pumps shall be engine-driven if Owner approved electrical power source is not available. Minimum main drain size shall be equal to the largest size required by the system. Where such size is not available at the lowest point of the system, provide a source of 10 psi oil-free compressed air to assist in the drainage. Isolation valves connecting existing systems shall remain closed until the completion of the final cycle. 7. Remove, clean, and replace all strainers. 8. Immediately after steps 4 and 5 above, so as to prevent corrosion from taking place on empty piping and equipment, fill the system adding 1/4 the theoretical dosage of the selected treatment, recirculate for a minimum of 4 hours, maximum of 24 hours. Then drain or purge system. 9. Immediately after step 6, refill system while adding total required dosage of selected treatment equal to Nalco 2536. Continue to recirculate for a minimum of 24 hours to allow total film formation.
C. Provide certification by the water treatment company representative that system is properly cleaned and ready for startup.
D. Final acceptance of the flushing/cleaning work shall be obtained in writing from the Owner’s representative. At no additional cost to the Owner, additional cycles may be required to obtain this acceptance.
3.6 INSTRUCTIONS TO THE OWNER
A. Following initial cleanout of all systems and commencement of each water treatment program, the water treatment company representative shall provide instructions to
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 18 of 22 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
demonstrate the proper application of the written instructions. As a minimum, the water treatment company shall provide the following: 1. One (1) hour of instruction discussing the "Right to Know" laws, OSHA Hazard Communications Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200), the chemicals being used on the project, and their associated Material Safety Data Sheets. 2. Two (2) hours of instruction to demonstrate the sampling, testing, and replenishing of chemicals in closed loop systems. 3. One (1) hour of additional instruction to demonstrate the sampling, testing, and replenishing of ethylene glycol in closed loop systems. 4. Four (4) hours of instruction to demonstrate the sampling, testing, and adjusting of the water treatment equipment to maintain proper water quality in open loop condenser water systems. 5. Six (6) hours of instruction to demonstrate the sampling, testing, and adjusting of the chemical treatment equipment to maintain proper water quality in steam boiler systems. The training shall also demonstrate the proper techniques for mixing dry chemicals into solution.
B. In addition to sampling and testing procedures, the instructional period shall be used to familiarize the operator on the philosophy of the water treatment programs, blowdown techniques, and their objectives and to discuss frequency which the various tests and samples should be taken.
C. Instructions shall take place in blocks of no more than four hours per day. Instructional periods are to be scheduled with the Owner and his operating staff.
3.7 WATER TREATMENT PROGRAM CONDENSER WATER SYSTEM
A. Provide initial fill chemicals plus an approximate one year supply of chemicals and biocides for the condenser water system. 1. The first year's chemicals will be based on 3200 ton hours of cooling. All extra chemicals not used during the first year will be delivered to the site at the end of the first year. 2. In the cost breakdown for chemical treatments, the Contractor shall include costs for equipment, cleanout and chemical costs for each treatment program.
B. The chemical supplier shall maintain at the site, two extra containers (which are not in use) of each material during the first three months of operation and one extra container thereafter for the remainder of the year.
C. Inhibitor/Dispersant 1. Provide a liquid non-chromate/zinc or other heavy metal formulation containing no organics such as lignin or tannins or any other material to contribute to color,
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 19 of 22 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
COD or BOD. Material must be thermally stable at maximum system heat exchange surface temperatures which will not exceed 200F and shall be suitable for all system metals. Treatment shall be equal to Nalco 2523.
D. pH Control 1. No formulation of acid, 66o Baume sulfuric or any other acid product whether or not formulated in a given product shall be used. Corrosion control shall be alkaline and be provided by natural pH climbs as the "Open Loop" water concentrates in "cycles of concentration".
E. Cycles of Concentration 1. Not less than six. Automatic control range, 0 to 10. Final control points shall be determined by water treatment company.
F. Algaecide/Biocide 1. Use concentrated non-phenol and oxidizing products fed in sufficient quantities, at timed intervals per water treatment company's recommendations, to effectively "kill" micro-organisms and algae. Two formulations shall be provided and added per water treatment company's recommendations at different intervals. Drums shall be distinctly marked "for rotation". Algaecide shall be equal to Nalco 2504 or 2599, biocide shall be equal to Nalco 2532.
G. Corrosion Coupons 1. Install a minimum of five (5) black carbon steel type coupons per ASTM 2688 D method to simulate corrosion on condenser water system wetted parts.
H. Guarantee 1. Protect various dissimilar materials of constructions. 2. Corrosion rate of ferrous metals shall not exceed 5.0 mils penetration per year. 3. Treatment system shall not permit fouling to cause equipment capacity reduction beyond the allowed 0.00025 water side "fouling factor".
3.8 WATER TREATMENT PROGRAM CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS
A. Provide initial fill chemicals plus provide chemicals and maintain recommended chemical levels for a period of one year. 1. Include an allowance for various leaks which will occur throughout the system, i.e., leaky pump seals, leaks due to maintenance functions, etc.
B. Inhibitor 1. A liquid formulation of borate and nitrate containing a "scale modified" and color concentration indicator shall be used. Nitrite concentrations shall be 300 500 ppm in chilled systems.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 20 of 22 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
C. pH Control 1. Must be incorporated in inhibitor formulation using borate as the pH buffer. The pH shall be maintained between 7.0 and 9.0.
D. Corrosion Coupons 1. Install a minimum of five (5) black carbon steel type coupons (and five (5) copper type coupons) per ASTM 2688 D method to simulate corrosion on chilled water system wetted parts.
E. Guarantee 1. Protect various dissimilar materials of construction. 2. Corrosion rate of ferrous metals shall not exceed 1.0 mils penetration per year. 3. Treatment system shall not permit fouling to cause equipment capacity reduction beyond the allowed 0.00025 water side "fouling factor".
3.9 WATER TREATMENT PROGRAM HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEMS
A. Provide initial fill chemicals plus provide chemicals and maintain recommended chemical levels for a period of one year. 1. Inhibitor 2. A liquid formulation of borate and nitrate containing a "scale modified" and color concentration indicator shall be used. Nitrite concentrations shall be 1500 3000 ppm in hot water heating systems.
B. pH Control 1. Must be incorporated in inhibitor formulation using borate as the pH buffer. The pH shall be maintained between 7.0 and 9.0.
C. Corrosion Coupons 1. Install a minimum of five (5) black carbon steel type coupons and five (5) copper type coupons per ASTM 2688 D method to simulate corrosion on hot water system wetted parts. D. Guarantee 1. Protect various dissimilar materials of construction. 2. Corrosion rate of ferrous metals shall not exceed 1.0 mils penetration per year. 3. Treatment system shall not permit fouling to cause equipment capacity reduction beyond the allowed 0.00025 water side "fouling factor".
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by Owner will perform field quality-control testing.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 21 of 22 SECTION 15189
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
B. Testing Agency: Provide the services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.
3.11 ADJUSTING
A. Sample boiler water at 1-week intervals after boiler startup for a period of 5 weeks and prepare certified test report for each required water performance characteristic. Where applicable, comply with ASTM D 3370 and the following standards: 1. Silica: ASTM D 859. 2. Steam System: ASTM D 1066. 3. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067. 4. Iron: ASTM D 1068. 5. Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126. 6. Particulate and Dissolved Matter: ASTM D 1888.
3.12 START UP
A. Startup Services: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service and to demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C. Startup Procedures: During boiler system startup, operate boiler water treatment system (after charging with specified chemicals) to maintain required steady-state characteristics of feedwater.
3.13 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide services of supplier's technical representative for half a day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation, maintenance, and testing procedures of boiler water treatment system.
B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
C. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Section "Contract Closeout."
D. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 HVAC Water Treatment 15189 Page 22 of 22 SECTION 15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters. 2. Section 15110 "Valves" for general-duty valves used as supply stops. 3. Section 15155 "Domestic Water and Drainage Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers and other specialties not specified in this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, faucets, other fittings, and related components.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible: Plumbing fixture, building, facility, or portion thereof that can be approached, entered, and used by physically handicapped, disabled, and elderly people.
B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, traps and waste pipes. Pipe fittings, tube fittings, and general-duty valves are included where indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each plumbing fixture category and type specified. Include selected fixture, trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates. C. Wiring diagrams from manufacturer for electrically operated units.
D. Maintenance data for plumbing fixtures and components to include in the operation and maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Plumbing Fixtures 15410 Page 1 of 12 SECTION 15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category from one source and by a single manufacturer.
1. Exception: Where fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for this category.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of CABO A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; regarding plumbing fixtures for physically handicapped people.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's (ATBCB) "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS), 1985-494-187" regarding plumbing fixtures for physically handicapped people.
D. Energy Policy Act Requirements: Comply with requirements of Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," regarding water flow rate and water consumption of plumbing fixtures.
E. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures and components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.
G. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional requirements, and characteristics of plumbing fixtures and are based on specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' fixtures with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Section "Substitutions."
H. The design drawings for this work are diagrammatic and all installation details are not specifically indicated. The Contractor shall furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and components incidental or necessary for a complete installation that will perform to the manufacturer's specifications in a manner acceptable to the regulatory authority having jurisdiction.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Plumbing Fixtures 15410 Page 2 of 12 SECTION 15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES
B. Contractor: Company and company field staff specializing in performing work of this section with minimum five years experience.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturer's protective packing, crating, and covering. B. Store plumbing fixtures and all related paraphernalia on elevated platforms in a dry secured location.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Coordinate roughing-in and final fixture locations and verify that plumbing fixtures can be installed to comply with original design, referenced standards and to the requirements of the regulatory authority having jurisdiction.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10 percent of each type and size installed. 2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of each type and size installed. 3. Faucet, Laminar-Flow Fittings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10 percent of each type and size installed. 4. Faucet, Flow-Control Fittings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10 percent of each type and size installed. 5. Supply, Flow-Control Fittings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of each type and size installed. 6. Shower, Flow-Control Fittings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of each type and size installed. 7. Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10 percent of each type installed. 8. Provide hinged-top, wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, having separate compartments for each type and size of extra materials listed above. 9. Flushometer Tank, Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of each type installed. 10. Water-Closet Tank, Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of each type installed. 11. Toilet Seats: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of each type installed. 12. Filter Cartridges: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 50 percent of each type and size installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Plumbing Fixtures 15410 Page 3 of 12 SECTION 15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES
2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURE STANDARDS
A. Comply with applicable standards below and other requirements specified.
1. Electric Water Coolers: ARI 1010 and UL 399. 2. Emergency Equipment: ANSI Z358.1. 3. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M. 4. National Sanitation Foundation Construction: NSF 2. 5. Porcelain-Enameled Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M. 6. Semi-vitreous Ceramic Fixtures: ASME A112.19.9M. 7. Slip-Resistant Bathing Surfaces: ASTM F 462. 8. Stainless-Steel Fixtures Other than Service Sinks: ASME A112.19.3M. 9. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. a. Exception: ASME A112.19.9M, semi-vitreous, ceramic fixtures, except water closet bowls and urinals with integral traps, may be furnished instead of vitreous-china fixtures. 10. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5. 11. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037. 12. Whirlpool Bathtub Fittings: ASME A112.19.8M.
2.2 LAVATORY/SINK FAUCET STANDARDS
A. Comply with ASME A112.18.1M and other requirements specified for lavatory, sink, and similar type-fixture faucet fittings. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; 2.5-gpm- (0.16L/s-) maximum flow rate; and polished, chrome-plated finish; except where otherwise indicated. Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
1. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025. 2. Faucet Hose: ASTM D 3901. 3. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011. 4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 5. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 6. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 7. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951. 8. Sink Spray Hoses: ASTM D 3573. 9. Faucet: Sloan Valve Company EBF-85 Optima Plus.
2.3 BATHTUB/SHOWER FAUCET STANDARDS
A. Comply with ASME A112.18.1M and other requirements specified for bathtub and shower faucet fittings. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; 2.5-gpm- (0.16-L/s-) maximum flow rate; and polished, chrome-plated finish; except where otherwise indicated. Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and outlet with diverter valve; tub spout; and shower head, arm, and flange.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Plumbing Fixtures 15410 Page 4 of 12 SECTION 15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES
1. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing- and Thermostatic-Control, Antiscald Faucets: ASSE 1016. 2. Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014. 3. High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices: ASTM F445. 4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.1 or ASME B1.20.7. 5. Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444. 6. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 7. Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016. 8. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951. 9. Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS FITTING STANDARDS A. Comply with ASME A112.18.1M and other requirements specified for fittings, other than faucets. Include polished, chrome-plated finish, except where otherwise indicated. Coordinate fittings with other components and connectors.
1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 2. Automatic Flow Restrictors: ASSE 1028. 3. Brass and Copper, Supplies and Tubular Brass: ASME A112.18.1M. 4. Fixed Flow Restrictors: ASSE 1034. 5. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. 6. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409. 7. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENT STANDARDS
A. Comply with applicable standards below and other requirements specified for components for plumbing fixtures, equipment, and appliances.
1. Floor Drains: ASME A112.21.1M. 2. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 3. Hot-Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023 and UL 499. 4. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 5. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 6. Supply and Drain Insulation Kits: CABO A117.1. 7. Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.
2.6 FITTINGS
A. Fittings for Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Fittings include the following:
1. Supply Inlets: Brass pipe or copper tube, size required for final connection. 2. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, angle or straight; compression, loose-key type; same size as supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Plumbing Fixtures 15410 Page 5 of 12 SECTION 15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES
3. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, angle or straight; compression, wheel handle type; same size as supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser. 4. Supply Risers: 3/8-inch NPS (DN10) flexible copper tube with knob end. Use chrome-plated tube for exposed applications. 5. Supply Risers: 3/8-inch NPS (DN10) rigid brass tube with 1/4-inch NPS (DN8) straight, knob-end tailpiece. Use chrome-plated tube for exposed applications. 6. Supply Risers: 3/8-inch NPS (DN10) rigid brass tube with 1/4-inch NPS (DN8) offset, knob-end tailpiece. Use chrome-plated tube for exposed applications. 7. Traps: Tubular brass with 0.045-inch (1.1 mm) wall thickness, slip-joint inlet, cleanout, wall flange, escutcheons, and size to match equipment. Use chrome- plated tube for exposed applications. 8. Traps: Cast brass with slip-joint inlet, cleanout pipe nipple to wall, wall flange, escutcheons, and size to match equipment. Use chrome-plated tube for exposed applications. 9. Continuous Waste: Tubular brass, 0.045-inch (1.1-mm) wall thickness, with slip- joint inlet, and size to match equipment. 10. Continuous Waste: Tubular brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) wall thickness, with slip- joint inlet, and size to match equipment. 11. Indirect Waste: Tubular brass, 0.045-inch (1.1-mm) wall thickness, and size to match equipment.
2.7 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Koehler Co. 2. American Standard Plumbing. 3. Crane 4. Sloan Valve Company
B. Bowl: ASME A112.19.2; siphon jet vitreous china closet bowl, with elongated rim, 1-1/2 inch spud, china bolt caps.
C. Sensor Operated Flush Valve: Sloan Valve Company G2 Optima Plus Flushometer.
D. Seat: Solid plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, brass bolts, elongated seat without cover.
E. Wall Mounted Carrier: ASME A112.6.1; adjustable cast iron frame, integral drain hub and vent, adjustable spud, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers.
2.8 WALL HUNG URINALS
A. Manufacturers:
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Plumbing Fixtures 15410 Page 6 of 12 SECTION 15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES
1. Kohler Co. 2. American Standard Plumbing 3. Crane
B. Urinal: ASME A112.19.2; vitreous china, wall hung siphon jet urinal with shields, integral trap, ¾ inch spud, steel supporting hanger.
C. Sensor Operated Flush Valve: Sloan Valve Company G2 Optima Plus Flushometer .
D. Wall Mounted Carrier: ASME A112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lungs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixtures studs for fixture hanger, bearing studs.
2.9 LAVATORIES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Kohler Co. 2. American Standard Plumbing 3. Crane
B. Cast Iron Wall Hung Basin: ASME A112.19.1; porcelain enameled cast iron wall-hung lavatory, rectangular basin with splash lip, front overflow, and soap depression.
C. Supply Fitting: ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated supply fitting with open grid strainer, water economy aerator with maximum 2.0 gpm flow, indexed handles.
D. Sensor-Actuated Faucet: Sloan Valve Company EBF-85 Optima Plus.
E. Accessories:
1. Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon. 2. Offset waste with perforated open strainer. 3. Screwdriver stops. 4. Flexible supplies.
F. Wall Mounted Carrier: ASME A112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, concealed arm supports, bearing plate and studs.
2.10 SINKS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Kohler Co. 2. American Standard Plumbing 3. Crane 4. Elkay Manufacturing Co.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Plumbing Fixtures 15410 Page 7 of 12 SECTION 15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES
B. Single Compartment Bowl: ASME A112.19.3; outside dimensions, stainless steel. Self rimming and undercoated, with 1-1/2 inch stainless steel drain 3-1/2 inch crumb cup and tailpiece, ledge back drilled for trim.
C. Trim: ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated brass supply with swing spout, water economy aerator with maximum 2.2 GPM flow.
2.11 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Elkay Manufacturing Co. 2. Sunroc, Inc. 3. Haws Drinking Fountain Co.
B. Fountain:
1. ARI 1010; Vandal resistant two-level barrier free, surface mounted electric water cooling with dual height stainless steel tops, stainless steel body, elevated antisquirt bubbler with stream guard, automatic stream regulator, push button, mounting bracket, refrigerated with integral air-cooled condenser, apron enclosure. 2. Electrical: 6 foot card and plug for connection to electric wiring system including grounding connector.
2.12 SERVICE SINKS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Kohler Co. 2. American Standard Plumbing 3. Crane, Inc. 4. Eljer Plumbingware
B. Bowl: 24 x 24 x 10 inch high white molded stone, floor mounted, with one inch wide shoulders, vinyl bumper guard, stainless steel strainer.
C. Trim: ASME A112.18.1 exposed wall type supply with lever handles, spout wall brace, vacuum breaker, hose end spout, strainers, eccentric adjustable inlet, integral screwdriver stops with covering caps and adjustable threaded wall flanges.
D. Accessories:
1. 5 feet of 2 inch diameter plain end reinforced rubber hose.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Plumbing Fixtures 15410 Page 8 of 12 SECTION 15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES
2. Hose clamp hanger. 3. Mop hanger.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for potable, hot- and cold-water supply piping systems; soil, waste, and vent piping systems; and supports. Verify that locations and sizes of piping and locations and types of supports match those indicated, before installing and connecting fixtures. Use manufacturer's roughing-in data when roughing-in data are not indicated.
B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Include supports for plumbing fixtures according to the following:
1. Carriers: For wall-hanging water closets and fixtures supported from wall construction. 2. Chair Carriers: For wall-hanging urinals, lavatories, sinks, drinking fountains, and electric water coolers. 3. Heavy-Duty Chair Carriers: For accessible urinals, lavatories, and other fixtures where indicated. 4. Reinforcement: For floor-mounted lavatories and sinks that require securing to wall and recessed, box-mounted, electric water coolers. 5. Fabricate reinforcement from 1/4-by-6-inch (6.35-by-152.4-mm) steel plates attached to studs, in wall construction, to secure fixtures to wall. Include length that will extend beyond ends of fixture mounting bracket and attach to at least 2 studs.
B. Include fitting insulation kits for accessible fixtures according to the following:
1. Lavatories: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, stops and handles, drain, trap, and waste to wall. 2. Lavatories: Cover hot-water supply, stop and handle, drain, trap, and waste to wall. 3. Sinks: Cover hot-water supply, stop and handle, drain, trap, and waste to wall. 4. Fixtures with Offset Drain: Cover hot-water supply, offset drain, trap, and waste to wall. 5. Other Fixtures: Cover exposed fittings below fixture.
3.3 PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Plumbing Fixtures 15410 Page 9 of 12 SECTION 15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Assemble plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, faucets, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions, rough in drawings, and referenced standards.
C. Install floor-mounted, floor-outlet water closets with closet flanges and gasket seals.
D. Install floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets with fittings and gasket seals.
E. Install wall-hanging, back-outlet water closets with support manufacturer's tiling frame or setting gage.
F. Install toilet seats on water closets.
G. Install wall-hanging, back-outlet urinals with gasket seals.
H. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for handicapped people to reach. I. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of compartment.
J. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate when supports are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated.
K. Fasten floor-mounted fixtures to substrate. Fasten fixtures having holes for securing fixture to wall construction, to reinforcement built into walls.
L. Fasten recessed, wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls.
M. Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls.
N. Fasten counter-mounting plumbing fixtures to casework.
O. Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space behind fixture.
P. Set shower receptors and mop basins in leveling bed of cement grout.
Q. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to fixture. Use gate or globe valve where specific stop valve is not specified.
1. Exception: Omit stop valves on supplies to emergency equipment, except when permitted by authorities having jurisdiction. When permitted, install valve chained and locked in OPEN position.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Plumbing Fixtures 15410 Page 10 of 12 SECTION 15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES
R. Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations.
S. Install faucet, laminar-flow fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts when faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters when required.
T. Install supply, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves.
U. Install faucet, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts when faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters when required.
V. Install shower, flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.
W. Install traps on fixture outlets. Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps. Omit traps on indirect wastes, except where otherwise indicated.
X. Install disposers in sink outlets. Install switch where indicated, or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated.
Y. Install hot-water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in counter with spout over sink. Z. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.
AA. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, 1-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant according to sealing requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Match sealant color to fixture color.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing equipment specified in other Division 15 Sections.
B. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture schedules at the end of this Section for fitting sizes and connection requirements for each plumbing fixture.
C. Supply and Waste Connections to Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Connect equipment with supply inlets, supply stops, supply risers, and traps specified in this Section. Use fitting sizes required to match connected equipment. Connect fittings to plumbing piping.
D. Ground equipment.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Plumbing Fixtures 15410 Page 11 of 12 SECTION 15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
E. Arrange for electric-power and/or control connections to fixtures and devices that require power. Electric power is specified in Division 16 Sections.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.
B. Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.
C. Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized and demonstrate proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.
B. Operate and adjust disposers, hot-water dispensers, and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning units and controls.
C. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, electric water coolers, faucets, shower valves, and flushometer valves having controls, to produce proper flow and stream. D. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
E. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Include the following:
1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts. 2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by Owner. END OF SECTION 15410
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Plumbing Fixtures 15410 Page 12 of 12 SECTION 15741
MULTI-ZONE PACKAGED INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Design, performance criteria, controls, and installation requirements for indoor Multizone Central Station Air Handling Units.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. AFBMA 9 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings
B. AMCA Publication 99 – Standards Handbook
C. AMCA Standard 203 – Field Performance Measurement of Fan Systems
D. ANSI/AMCA Standard 204 – Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans
E. AMCA Standard 210 – Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Performance Rating
F. AMCA Standard 300 – Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans
G. AMCA Standard 500 – Laboratory Methods for Testing of Dampers and Louvers
H. ARI Standard 410 – Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils
I. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 111 – Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building HVAC Systems
J. ASHRAE Standard 52.1 – Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning Devices
K. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 52.2 – Method of Testing Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size
L. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 – Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems
M. ANSI/ASHRAE 62.1 – Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality
N. ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1 – Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings
O. ARI 1060 – Performance Rating of Air to Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment
P. ASTM A-653 – Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dipped Process
Q. ASTM B117 – Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray Apparatus
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Multi-zone Packaged Indoor AHUs 15741 Page 1 of 14 SECTION 15741
MULTI-ZONE PACKAGED INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
R. IBC 2000-2006 – International Building Code
S. NEMA MG1 – Motors and Generators T. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code
U. NFPA 90A – Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
V. UL 900 – Test Performance of Air Filters
W. UL 1995 – Standard for Heating and Cooling Equipment
X. UL94 – HF-1 - Standard for Safety of Flammability
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The AHU Manufacturer’s work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Furnish a complete set of submittals as described hereinafter. 2. Provide AHUs fully factory assembled with the exception of unit splits as required for shipping or installation requirements as indicated on the schedule and drawings. Disassembled AHU components provided to the Mechanical Contractor for field assembly as built-up AHUs shall not be acceptable. As shipped from the AHU Manufacturer, AHUs shall meet the performance requirements shown on the equipment schedule. Units shall be for indoor or outdoor application as scheduled and shall have all components and options as indicated on the schedule or drawings. Furthermore, units shall be constructed as detailed hereinafter. Field-provided components and options shall be unacceptable unless otherwise noted. 3. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the complete engineering, production, factory assembly, packaging, testing and delivery of the AHUs and their related equipment. Provide high voltage components, factory engineered, mounted and wired as defined within this specification. 4. Provide Owner's Manual including complete operating instructions. 5. Perform unit startup as detailed in this specification.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Division 1
B. Submittals shall include the following:
1. Submit shop drawings with product data. 2. Shop drawings shall indicate assembly weights, unit dimensions, required clearances, construction details, and field connection details 3. Product data shall indicate dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance to include fan curves, motor electrical characteristics to include motor technical data sheets,
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Multi-zone Packaged Indoor AHUs 15741 Page 2 of 14 SECTION 15741
MULTI-ZONE PACKAGED INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
coil capacities to include performance printouts with pressure drops (water & air), vibration isolation, filter data sheets to include pressure drops, gauges and finishes 4. Static pressure summaries for each individual fan selection clearly indicating all internal and external static pressures. 5. Unit picking and rigging points and instructions 6. Wiring diagrams 7. Clearly identify any variations from contract documents 8. Provide space on cover document for contractor and architect/engineer review 9. Completed and signed specification checklist 10. Submit sound power levels for air handling units at scheduled conditions 11. Submit fan sound power levels for each fan assembly or array operating together at design conditions. 12. Provide written certification from manufacturer that any and all foam used in the unit construction complies with UL94-HF-1. Provide safety data sheets on all foam material demonstrating compliance. 13. Revise & resubmit submittals as required
1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit installation, start-up and Operation & Maintenance Data.
B. Include instructions for rigging, lifting, filter replacement, motor and fan replacement, and wiring diagram.
C. Include a recommended spare parts list customized to each unit complete with appropriate tag #, serial and / or part numbers along with a description to clearly identify the items
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
A. Manufacturer shall be a company specializing in the design and manufacture of high performance air handling equipment with a minimum of 20 years experience.
B. Unit shall be completely factory assembled and tested prior to shipment and shall bear an ETL or UL label under UL Standard 1995 as a complete assembly. Fans shall be tested and rated in accordance with AMCA Standard 210 for performance and in accordance with ANSI standards of testing for sound power levels using the sound intensity method as referenced in AMCA standard 320 for sound. If the manufacturer cannot provide an ETL/UL sticker on the air handler, it will be the responsibility of the air handling unit manufacturer and the mechanical contractor to arrange for local ETL or UL approval and labeling
C. The Unit Electrical Panel(s) shall be built in strict accordance to NEC Standards and shall bear an appropriate label certifying compliance with UL Standard 508A.
D. The air handling equipment manufacturer shall provide single-source responsibility for all components for the unit whether specifically manufactured by the unit manufacturer or obtained
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Multi-zone Packaged Indoor AHUs 15741 Page 3 of 14 SECTION 15741
MULTI-ZONE PACKAGED INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
outside and installed in the equipment with the exception of consumable items such as filters, or as specifically warranted by the product manufacturer such as motors, VFD’s, etc.
E. The attached schedules, tables, checklists and specifications are to be used as the selection criteria for the air handling equipment to include sound performance, air flow rates, static pressures, dimensions, weights, and water flow rates, heat recovery device performance and MBH performance requirements.
F. Air handling manufacturer must certify in writing that all foam insulation products that are provided throughout the unit construction must comply with UL94–HF-1 - Standard for Safety of Flammability. Flammable foam in any location within the AHU construction is not acceptable. G. Additional Testing and Quality Assurance as explained in individual component / item sections in the following paragraphs of this specification.
1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fans provided as part of the submitted assembly shall be AMCA rated or tested in accordance with AMCA procedures, and shall be AMCA certified (and bear the label) for performance and efficiency in an AMCA arrangement “A” testing configuration. The manufacturer of the submitted fans shall provide a letter, signed by an officer of (or by a third-party testing agency employed by) the fan manufacturer, guaranteeing the submitted AHU performance for flow, pressure, and consumed power at each performance point scheduled. Performance shall be determined as providing the design flow and pressure at the boundary of the air handling unit. I.E., at the supply and exhaust/return air duct connections of the unit.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Unit shall be swept & vacuumed clean prior to packaging and shipment B. Unit shall ship with all openings securely covered with wood and / or nylon reinforced plastic wrap and to be watertight. Each unit will be securely strapped down on an open flatbed truck C. Units must be stored in a clean dry area and protected from the weather and construction traffic. Carefully follow manufacturers’ storage instructions if installation does not immediately follow arrival at the job site. D. Follow manufacturers rigging guidelines for movement and installation of equipment
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Unit manufacturer to warrant its product to be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use when installed and operated in accordance with factory recommendations for a period of 18 months from date of shipment or 12 months after initial equipment start-up, whichever occurs first. Equipment found to be defective should be replaced or repaired to include all parts and labor. Component parts that require periodic replacement due to normal wear such as filters, light bulbs, etc. are not covered by the warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Multi-zone Packaged Indoor AHUs 15741 Page 4 of 14 SECTION 15741
MULTI-ZONE PACKAGED INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
Basis of design is Temtrol. Acceptable manufacturers include the following provided that they meet or exceed performance and construction aspects as described and detailed herein.
- Temtrol
- Carrier Corp.; Carrier Air Conditioning Div. RACAN Custom Air Handlers
- Trane Custom Climate Changer
- Substitutions: Not Permitted 2.2 CABINET CONSTRUCTION
A. Casing Performance 1. Unit air leakage shall not exceed 1% of design cfm at +8.0” w.g. in all positive pressure sections and -8.0” w.g. in all negative-pressure sections. Leakage shall be calculated by totaling all leakage either in to or out of the unit. 2. Casing deflection shall not exceed L/200 at +8.0” w.g. in all positive-pressure sections and -8.0” w.g. in all negative-pressure sections, where L is defined as the panel span. 3. The casing shall incorporate insulating thermal breaks so that when fully assembled, there’s no path of continuous unbroken metal to metal conduction from inner to outer surfaces. All panel seams shall be caulked and sealed for an airtight unit. 4. All casing panel fasteners must be PK corrosion resistant or stainless steel with gasketed heads to ensure corrosion resistance and low leakage.
B. Bases and Floors 1. Unit base shall be completely welded and fabricated using heavy gauge structural steel tubing, I-beam or C-channels. 2. C-channel base cross supports and angle iron shall be welded to perimeter base steel and located on maximum 24” centers to provide support for internal components. Base rails shall include lifting lugs on the perimeter base at the corners of the unit or each section if de-mounted. 3. Entire welded base frame is to be painted with a phenolic coating for long term corrosion resistance. 4. Internal walk-on floor shall be minimum 16 gauge G90 bright spangled galvanized steel. 5. The outer sub-floor of the unit shall be made from minimum 20 gauge G90 bright spangled galvanized steel. 6. The floor cavity between the walk-on floor and the sub-floor shall be a minimum of 4” thick and filled with spray foam insulated with floor seams gasketed for thermal break and sealed for airtight / watertight construction. 7. Where access is provided to the unit interior, floor openings shall be covered with walk on phenolic coated minimum 1” thick welded steel safety grating.
8. Single wall floors with glued and pined insulation and no sub floor are not acceptable. 9. Base frame shall be attached to the unit at the factory.
C. Walls
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Multi-zone Packaged Indoor AHUs 15741 Page 5 of 14 SECTION 15741
MULTI-ZONE PACKAGED INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
1. The construction of the air handling unit casing shall consist of a (1” x 2”) steel frame with formed 16 gauge bright spangled galvanized steel. The exterior casing panels shall be attached to the gasketed (1 x 2) steel frame with corrosion resistant fasteners. All casing panels shall be completely removable from the unit exterior without affecting the unit’s structural integrity. Units without framed type of construction shall be considered, provided the exterior casing panels are made from 14 gauge G90 bright spangled galvanized steel and maximum panel center lines are less than 20 inches. 2. The air handling unit casing shall be of the “no-through-metal” design. The casing shall incorporate insulating thermal breaks as required so that, when fully assembled, there’s no path of continuous unbroken metal to metal conduction from inner to outer surfaces. 3. Double Wall Liner - Each unit shall have double wall construction with 20 gauge G90 bright spangled solid galvanized internal liners and 22 gauge G90 bright spangled perforated galvanized internal liners in the fan sections. The double wall interior panel shall be removable from the outside if the unit without affecting the structural integrity of the unit. A fan section constitutes the entire service section within the unit where a fan is located and all wall and ceiling surfaces within that section are to be perforated – not just select strips or panels. 4. Insulation - Entire unit to be insulated with a full 3” (R12.5) thick non-compressed fiberglass insulation unless otherwise noted on plans. The insulation shall have an effective thermal conductivity (C) of .24 (BTU in./sq.ft. F°) and a noise reduction coefficient (NRC) of 0.70 / per inch thick (based on a type "A" mounting). The coefficients shall meet or exceed a 3.0 P.C.F. density material rating. Insulation shall meet the erosion requirements of UL 181 facing the air stream and fire hazard classification of 25/50 (per ASTM-84 and UL 723 and CAN/ULC S102-M88) and meet NFPA 90A and 90B. All insulation edges shall be encapsulated within the panel. All perforated sections shall have Micromat® or equal insulation with non-woven mat facing, 5000 fpm rating and non-hygroscopic fibers as manufactured by Johns Manville or approved equal. Provide insulation thickness other than above when scheduled.
D. Roof 1. On indoor units the unit roof shall be flat with smooth exteriors and constructed the same as the wall panels specified above with minimum 16 gauge G90 bright spangled galvanized steel frame and panel construction. Sections in units with perforated interior wall liners shall have perforated interior ceiling liners. 2. Roof assemblies shall comply with NFPA 90 A.
E. Access Doors
1. Access Doors - The unit shall be equipped with solid double wall insulated (same as the unit casing), hinged access doors as shown on the plans. Provide access doors to each section of the AHU. Provide doors located and sized to allow for routine maintenance including motor replacement and filter replacement, electrical components and any other sections or components requiring access or maintenance 2. Doorframes shall be extruded aluminum, foam filled with a built in thermal break barrier and two full perimeter gaskets. 3. Door hinge assemblies shall be stainless steel and must be adjustable.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Multi-zone Packaged Indoor AHUs 15741 Page 6 of 14 SECTION 15741
MULTI-ZONE PACKAGED INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
4. There shall be a minimum of two heavy duty handles per door. Provide ETL, UL 1995, and CAL-OSHA approved tool operated safety latch on all fan section access doors. 5. Doors to seal on a minimum of two gasketed surfaces against the door frame assembly on all four sides of the door. Provide one gasketed seal against the flat frame surface and a second gasketed knife-edge seal against the door frame. 6. Door handles must be operable from both the exterior and interior of the AHU. 7. Door handle mechanisms to be field adjustable and to include heavy duty rollers for airtight interior seal. 8. Provide a 16 gauge G90 galvanized steel painted rain diverting cap above all access doors on outdoor weatherproof units to divert rain away from the top of the door frames.
F. Condensate / Drain Pans 1. Provide IAQ style drain pans under all cooling coils and under plate heat exchangers utilized for energy recovery. 2. The drain pan shall be fabricated from welded 16 gauge 304 stainless steel. All pans are to be triple pitched for complete drainage with no standing water in the unit. 3. Drain pans shall be insulated with a minimum 3-inches of foam insulation. 4. The drain pan assembly shall extend from the upstream inlet side of the cooling coil and a minimum of 24” past the leaving face of the coil. Drain pans that start at or near the leaving face of the chilled water coil are not acceptable. 5. Drain pan construction to include the chilled water coil supports, also constructed of welded 16 gauge 304 stainless steel. 6. Drain pan to extend below the chilled water coil headers and return bends within the unit casing. 7. Provide stainless steel, 1-1/4” MPT drain connection extended to the exterior of the unit base rail. The drain connection where it is welded to the drain pan assembly must drop below the bottom of the drain pan surface a minimum of ½”. 8. Units in excess of 159 inches shall have drain connections on both sides. All drain connections shall be piped and trapped separately in the field for proper drainage. 9. Where stacked coils are required, provide an intermediate drain pan constructed of welded 16 gauge 304 stainless steel. 10. Where intermediate drain pans are provided, include a downspout to the lower drain pan from the intermediate drain pan constructed of copper. Plastic or galvanized downspouts are not acceptable.
G. Shipping Splits 1. Shipping splits shall be provided as indicated on the schedule and drawings. Welded structural steel members shall be provided at the base of the unit to enable pull together of each shipping split. 2. Units shipped in multiple sections shall be engineered for field assembly. The base frame shall have integral lifting lugs. The lifting lugs shall be fabricated from structural steel with an appropriate rigging hole. Lifting lugs shall be located at the corner of each section (and along the sides if required) and sized to allow rigging and handling of the unit. 3. All gasket and necessary assembly hardware shall ship loose with unit.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Multi-zone Packaged Indoor AHUs 15741 Page 7 of 14 SECTION 15741
MULTI-ZONE PACKAGED INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
4. Junction boxes with a factory supplied numbered terminal strip shall be supplied at each shipping split for reconnection of electrical wiring. No factory wiring raceways or chases will be allowed through bulkhead walls within the unit as they are sources of significant air bypass and recirculation within the air handling unit cabinet.
2.3 FAN ASSEMBLIES
A. The Fan Array shall consist of multiple, direct driven, arrangement 4 plenum fans constructed per AMCA requirements for the duty specified, (Class I, II, or III). The quantity of fans in each unit and the motor HP for each fan shall meet the scheduled requirements. All fans shall be selected to deliver the specified airflow quantity at the specified operating Total Static Pressure and specified fan/motor speed. The Fan Array shall be selected to operate at a system Total Static Pressure that does not exceed 90% of the specified fan’s peak static pressure producing capability at the specified fan/motor speed. B. Each fan/motor cube or cell shall include a minimum 10 gauge, G 90 galvanized steel intake wall, .100 aluminum spun fan inlet funnel, and a 10 gauge G90 galvanized steel motor support plate rail and structure.
C. All motors shall be standard foot mounted type TEAO selected at the specified operating voltage, RPM, and efficiency as specified or as scheduled elsewhere. Motors shall meet the requirements of NEMA MG-1 Part 30 and 31, section 4.4.2. Motors shall be for use in multiple fan arrays that operate at varying synchronous speeds as driven by an approved VFD. Motor HP shall not exceed the scheduled HP as indicated in the AHU equipment schedule(s). D. All motors shall include permanently sealed (L10-500,000 hr) bearings and shaft grounding to protect the motor bearings from electrical discharge machining due to stray shaft currents.
E. Each fan/motor assembly shall be dynamically balanced to meet AMCA standard 20496, exceeding category BV-5, to meet or exceed an equivalent Grade G.55, producing a maximum rotational imbalance of .022” per second peak, filter in (0.55mm per second peak, filter in). Fan and motor assemblies submitted for approval incorporating larger than 22” wheel size and 215 T frames size motors shall be balanced in three orthogonal planes to demonstrate compliance with the G.55 requirement with a maximum rotational imbalance of .022” per second peak filter in (0.55 mm per second peak, filter in). Copies of the certified balancing reports shall be provided with the unit O&M manuals at the time of shipment. Submittals that do not include a statement of compliance with this requirement will be returned to the contractor without review.
F. The fan array shall be provided with discharge sound attenuation as specified or scheduled. Alternate manufacturers must submit acoustical data for review and approval prior to the bid indicating that the proposed alternate equipment can meet all specified performance requirements without impacting the equipment performance or design features including duct connection location, unit weights, acoustical performance or specified total fan HP for each array. Manufacturers shall be responsible for deviations to these numbers and will provide internal sound attenuation as required to meet the specifications at no cost to the owner. Any changes to the system static pressure, additional electrical components and/or consumed power shall be the responsibility of the alternate supplier.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Multi-zone Packaged Indoor AHUs 15741 Page 8 of 14 SECTION 15741
MULTI-ZONE PACKAGED INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
G. The fan array shall consist of multiple fan and motor ”cubes” as stacked, spaced in the air way tunnel cross section to provide a uniform air flow and velocity profile across the entire air way tunnel cross section and components contained therein. In order to assure uniform velocity profile in the AHU cross section, the fan cube dimensions must be variable, such that each fan rests in an identically sized cube or cell, and in a spacing fills the cross sectional area of the AHU air way tunnel. There shall be no blank off plates or “spacers” between adjacent fan columns or rows to position the fans across the air way tunnel.
H. Each fan shall be individually wired to a control panel containing individual motor overloads as outlined within this specification. Wire sizing shall be determined, and installed, in accordance with applicable NEC standards.
I. The fan array shall produce a uniform air flow profile and velocity profile within the airway tunnel of the air handling unit not to exceed the specified cooling coil and/or filter bank face velocity when measured at a point 12” from the intake side of the fan array intake plenum wall, and at a distance of 48” from the discharge side of the fan array intake plenum wall.
J. Each fan/motor assembly shall be removable through an access door located on the discharge side of the fan array without removing the fan wheel from the motor.
K. Each individual cube or cell in the multiple fan arrays shall be provided with backdraft dampers as an integral back flow prevention device that prohibits recirculation of air in the event a fan or multiple fans become disabled. Damper must be for the specific purpose of preventing back flow in any disabled fan cube and that is mounted directly at the inlet of each fan. AHU manufacturer to provide all power transformers, actuators, control sequences, controllers, wiring and sensors associated with the isolation dampers factory mounted and wired to ensure that they close in the event of a fan failure L. As required by system design, each fan assembly shall be equipped with airflow monitoring probes. The flow measuring system shall consist of a flow measuring station with two static pressure taps and two total pressure tubes located at the throat of the fan inlet cone. The flow measuring station shall not obstruct the inlet of the fan and shall have no effect on fan performance (flow or static) or sound power levels. A surface mounted transducer and indicator, located on the unit exterior, shall provide a digital CFM readout, and/or a (4-20 ma) (0-10 volt) output control signal for use in the BAS as specified elsewhere. Unless specified otherwise, only one fan in each fan array will be provided with the flow measuring station and the individual fan CFM will be totalized to represent the CFM of the fan array, however all fans must include the airflow monitoring probes to facilitate field relocation of the fan to be measured, or for measurement of multiple fans in the future.
2.4 SOUND POWER LEVELS
A. The sound power level at the air handling unit discharge, air intake (return air and / or OSA intake), and casing radiated shall not exceed the values given on the AHU schedule for each individual AHU, when the unit is operating at maximum design airflow and static pressure.
B. The air handling units sound power data shall be submitted for approval. The submittal shall include a complete description of the methods and procedures used to develop the sound power levels being submitted.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Multi-zone Packaged Indoor AHUs 15741 Page 9 of 14 SECTION 15741
MULTI-ZONE PACKAGED INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
2.5 COILS
A. All coil assemblies shall be leak tested under water at 450 PSIG and PERFORMANCE is to be CERTIFIED under AHRI Standard 410. Coils exceeding the range of AHRI standard rating conditions shall be noted.
B. Cooling coils shall be mounted on stainless steel support racks to permit coils to slide out individually from the unit. Provide intermediate welded 304 stainless steel drain pans on all stacked cooling coils with copper downspouts as described within this specification.
C. Water coils shall be constructed of seamless copper tubing mechanically expanded into fin collars. Fins shall be constructed of Aluminum. All fins shall be continuous within the coil casing to eliminate carryover inherent with a split fin design. Fins are die formed plate type. D. Headers are to be seamless copper with die formed tube holes.
E. Connections shall be male pipe thread (MPT) Schedule 40 Red Brass with 1/8" vent and drain provided on coil header for coil drainage. All coil connections shall be extended to the exterior of the unit casing by the manufacturer. Ferrous headers are not acceptable. F. Coils shall be suitable for 250 PSIG working pressure.
G. Provide full depth 16 gauge intermediate tube support sheets on coils every 42" in fin length. The intermediate supports must extend through the entire coil depth and support each individual tube. Coil casing stiffeners on the face of the coil are not an acceptable substitute. H. Provide minimum 0.25” wall copper tube return bends on all coils
I. Cooling coils to be provided with a 16 gauge G90 bright spangled galvanized steel casing
J. Heating coils to be provided with a 16 gauge G90 bright spangled galvanized steel casing
K. Coils shall be counter flow design with connections either left or right hand as specified. The use of internal restrictive devices such as turbolater springs or ribbons to obtain turbulent construction is not acceptable
L. Coil Supply & Return piping connections extending through the cabinet wall shall be sealed by Rubber Grommets with caulking on the exterior of the casing
2.6 FILTERS
A. Provide filter types and locations as noted within this specification, as well as on the AHU schedule and on plan details.
B. Factory fabricated filter sections shall be of the same cabinet construction and finish as the unit.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Multi-zone Packaged Indoor AHUs 15741 Page 10 of 14 SECTION 15741
MULTI-ZONE PACKAGED INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
C. Face loaded pre and final filters shall have Type 8 frames as manufactured by AAF, FARR or equal. All filter frames to be provided with face load gaskets to ensure airtight seal of the filter to the frame. AHU manufacturer is responsible for providing all required filter clips to hold the filters in place.
D. Internal blank-offs shall be provided by the air unit manufacturer as required to prevent air bypass around the filters. The filter rack assemblies to blanked off to the sides, roof and floor and properly sealed at the factory.
E. Filters shall be in compliance with ANSI/UL 900 – Test Performance of Air Filters.
F. Each filter bank to be provided with a 4 ¾” OD Dwyer Series 2000 Magnehelic Air Filter Gauge with adjustable signal flag. Gauges to be factory installed and externally mounted and piped.
G. Provide walk-in filter access sections upstream / downstream of each filter rack with adequate space for filter service
H. Filter banks to be sized so maximum filter face velocity does not exceed 500 fpm (or lower velocities as scheduled)
I. Medium Efficiency MERV 8 Pleated filters – Provide 2” filters as specified on air handling unit schedule. Filters shall be in compliance with ANSI/UL 900 – Test Performance of Air Filters.
J. Provide two (2) total sets of all filter media. Provide first set of filters with the AHU’s upon delivery. Provide the second set of filters following startup and test & balance.
2.7 DAMPERS A. Furnish and install as indicated in this specification, at locations shown on plans, or in accordance with schedules and diagrams, ultra-low leak dampers with published leakage data certified under the AMCA certified ratings program.
B. Frames shall be 5" x 1" x .125" (minimum thickness) (127 x 25 x 3.2) 6063T5 extruded aluminum hat channel with hat shaped mounting flanges on both sides of the frame. Each corner shall be reinforced with two die formed internal braces and machine staked for maximum rigidity.
C. Damper blades shall be airfoil type galvanized for superior pressure drop and low noise generation. Each blade shall be maximum 6" (152) depth with integral structural reinforcing tube running full length. Minimum thickness of blade shall be .070 (1.78).
D. Blade edge seals shall be flexible and suitable for -72°F (-60°C) to +275°F (+135°C) mechanically locked in extruded blade slots yet easily replaceable in field. Jamb seals shall be flexible stainless steel, compression type to prevent leakage between the end of the blade and the damper frame. Use of blade end to overlap the frame for jamb seal is not acceptable. Adhesive or clip-on type blade or jamb seals are not acceptable.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Multi-zone Packaged Indoor AHUs 15741 Page 11 of 14 SECTION 15741
MULTI-ZONE PACKAGED INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
E. Bearings shall be non-corrosive molded synthetic. Axles shall be ½” (13) plated steel hexagonal or square shaped and to provide positive locking connection to blade (round axles are not acceptable). Linkage shall be concealed out of airstream, within frame to reduce pressure drop, noise and maintenance.
F. Submittal must include leakage, maximum airflow and maximum pressure ratings based on AMCA Publication 500.
G. Damper shall be tested and licensed in accordance with AMCA 511 for Air Performance and Air Leakage. Damper shall meet the leakage requirements of the International Energy Conservation Code by leaking less than 3 cfm/sq. ft. at 1" of static pressure and shall be AMCA licensed as Class 1A.
Locations: - Outside air dampers - RA Recirculation dampers - Other as noted in project documents as required
2.8 MULTIZONE
A. The dual deck multizone damper assembly shall be constructed of aluminum airfoil blades and shall be mounted in a heavy gauge aluminum frame.
B. The hot deck and cold deck damper blades shall be mounted to a hex shaft which shall rotate in permanently lubricated nylon bearings to insure smooth operation.
C. The edges of the damper blades shall have vinyl gasket to seal with the damper frame when fully closed. D. Fully insulated and lined divider walls shall be provided to separate the hot, cold, and neutral deck airstreams.
E. A hinged access door shall be provided for access to the zone actuators and damper linkage. All zone actuators shall be provided by the control contractor and installed in the field.
2.9 ELECTRICAL POWER AND CONTROLS
A. Outdoor weatherproof air handling units
1. Units to include a single point 460V 3 phase, 60 Hz power connection and a separate 120V power connection serving internal lights, and GFI. Conduit and wiring between the 460V
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Multi-zone Packaged Indoor AHUs 15741 Page 12 of 14 SECTION 15741
MULTI-ZONE PACKAGED INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
power connections and the fan motors to be factory installed by the AHU manufacture. Conduit and wiring between the 120V power connection and the internal lights and GFI to be factory installed by the AHU manufacturer.
2. Provide factory mounted and wired Variable Frequency Drives within an electrical control panel along with associated individual motor overloads as specified. Provide remote motor indication by means of aux contacts wired in series.
3. The number of VFD’s provided shall match the schedule requirements on each AHU.
4. The unit shall feature a mounted permanent nameplate displaying at a minimum the manufacturer, serial number, model number, voltage and amps. The unit must have an ETL or UL Listing and bear the appropriate mark.
5. Provide vapor proof marine type 100-watt light fixtures in each accessible section complete with a protective metal cage and sealed glass enclosure. Lights to be factory wired to a factory installed common switch mounted in a weatherproof box adjacent to the fan access door complete with a GFI convenience outlet. Power shall be 120v/1/60
6. The air handler manufacturer shall allow a minimum 1.5” clearance above the entire width of each interior bulk headers (coils, filters, fan blank off, etc.) that is completely sealed with the bulk head wall, but accommodates space in the field if needed by other trades. This will be to allow conduit and field wiring of any 110v or 24v runs internally to the unit as required by the controls contractor and reduce the number of penetrations of the exterior panels. No factory wiring raceways or chases will be allowed through bulkhead walls or at section splits within the unit as they are sources of significant air bypass and recirculation within the air handling unit cabinet.
7. If the unit requires splitting, junction boxes shall be furnished at each section to allow the electrical contractor to make final connections in the field. Wiring to be clearly labeled at junction points to facilitate reconnection
8. All controls, control conduit and control components are to be field installed and wired by the DDC controls contractor unless otherwise specified in this document. 2.10 UNIT TESTING AND QUALITY CONTROL
A. Unit shall be ETL or UL listed as an assembly. If the manufacturer cannot provide an ETL/UL sticker on the air handler, it will be the sole responsibility of the contractor to arrange for local ETL or UL approval and labeling. Factory run test all fans to ensure structural integrity and proper RPM as specified in this section. See individual component sections of this specification for additional testing and quality control requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Multi-zone Packaged Indoor AHUs 15741 Page 13 of 14 SECTION 15741
MULTI-ZONE PACKAGED INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer’s requirements, shop drawings, and Contract Documents.
B. Adjust in alignment on concrete foundations, sole plates, roof curbs or other supporting structure. Level, grout, and bolt in place.
C. Coordinate electrical installation with electrical contractor.
D. Coordinate controls with control contractor.
E. Provide all appurtenances required ensuring a fully operational and functional system.
F. The AHU Manufacturer shall provide all fasteners and gaskets for joining of sections in the field.
G. The Mechanical Contractor shall verify that the following items have been completed prior to scheduling the AHU Manufacturer's final inspection and start-up: 1. On all field-joined units, that all interconnections have been completed, i.e., electrical and control wiring, piping, casing joints, bolting, welding, etc. 2. All water piping connections have been completed and hydrostatically tested and all waterflow rates have been set in accordance with the capacities scheduled on the Drawings. 3. All ductwork connections have been completed and tested 4. All power wiring, including VFDs and electrical panels, serving the unit has been completed. 5. All automatic temperature and safety controls have been completed. 6. All dampers are fully operational. 7. All shipping materials have been removed. 8. All filter media has been installed in the units.
3.2 START-UP
A. Equipment start-up is to be provided by the unit manufacturer or their local factory certified service organization. Startup to include all components provided factory installed or shipped loose as accessories including overload panels and VFD’s. All physical connections and installation are provided by the installing contractor. The start-up organization shall submit a written report to the owner and manufacturer containing all recorded startup data as required. B. Provide 4 hours of on-site training and instruction to the owner following the equipment startup.
C. Provide complete Operation & Maintenance Manuals with descriptive literature, model, and serial number of all equipment, performance data, manufacturer’s instructions for operating and maintenance.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Multi-zone Packaged Indoor AHUs 15741 Page 14 of 14 SECTION 15763
FAN COIL UNITS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Section 15050 “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” 2. Section 15055 “Motors” 3. Section 15060 “Hangers and Supports” 4. Section 15074 “Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment” 5. Section 15181 “Hydronic Piping”
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fan-coil units with water coils for heating and cooling.
B. This Section includes fan-coil units with water cooling coils.
C. This Section includes large capacity fan-coil units.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of product specified.
C. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating clearly between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
D. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Control" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
E. Field test reports from a qualified independent inspecting and testing agency indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance with performance requirements of fan coil units.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Fan Coil Units 15763 Page 1 of 6 SECTION 15763
FAN COIL UNITS
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing fan-coil units similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance. Comply with ARI 440 for testing and rating units.
B. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for testing air coils.
C. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Fan-Coil Unit Filters: Furnish one spare filter for each filter installed. 2. Belts: Furnish one set of belts for belt drive units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. United Technologies Corp; Carrier Corp. Div. 2. Trane Company (The) 3. York International Corp.; Applied Systems Div. 4. International 5. Williams
2.2 FAN COIL UNITS
A. Provide fan coil units where shown on the Drawings. Fan coil units shall be of size, type, and capacity as scheduled; all units shall be tested and rated in accordance with ARI Standard 440 81. Units shall be horizontal or vertical type with recessed, semi recessed or wall mounted cabinet as shown. Each unit shall have dimensions and design suitable for the locations shown on the Drawings.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Fan Coil Units 15763 Page 2 of 6 SECTION 15763
FAN COIL UNITS
1. NOTE: All data provided on the schedules are for units operating at medium speed.
B. Units shall have a maximum sound power level of 34 dB based on 10 12 watts for the fourth octave band when operating at medium speed. All units shall be sound rated in accordance with ARI Standard 350 82.
C. Each fan coil unit shall consist of a cabinet, a fan assembly, a chilled water coil, a heating coil, a condensate drain pan, an auxiliary condensate drain pan, a filter, and a fan speed switch unless indicated otherwise. 1. Cabinets shall be constructed with 16 gauge front panels for vertical units and with 18 gauge front panels for horizontal units and with 18 gauge back panels. All panels shall be phosphorized for rust resistance and finished with baked enamel finish of color selected by the Owner. Oversized cabinets shall be provided if required for making the necessary piping connections. All portions of the cabinets exposed to cold air discharge shall be provided with heavy insulation to prevent sweating. a. Type 1 cabinets shall have a fully concealed vertical wall type chassis. Units shall have top ducted discharge and front return. b. Type 2 cabinets shall have vertical floor mounted type cabinets. Units shall have top discharge and front return. c. Type 4 cabinets shall have fully recessed vertical wall type cabinets. Units shall have top ducted discharge and front return. d. Type 5 cabinets shall have surface mounted horizontal ceiling type cabinets. Units shall have front (horizontal) discharge and rear return. e. Type 7 cabinets shall have recessed horizontal ceiling type cabinets. Units shall have ducted front discharge and bottom return. f. Type 8 cabinets shall have fully concealed horizontal ceiling type cabinets. Units shall have ducted front discharge and ducted rear return. Cabinet face shall be fully accessible from below the unit. No filters will be required with this type of unit when return filter grilles are employed. 2. Fans shall be constructed of non-corrosive material and be of the forward curved single or double centrifugal type. Cabinets shall be equipped with removable fronts (bottoms) for access to the interior. Fans shall be direct drive type arranged for blow-through configuration. Motors shall be high efficiency, resilient mounted, permanently lubricated 3 speed tap wound permanent split capacitor, open type motors and shall be suitable for 115 volt 1 phase 60 hertz service. All motors shall have integral thermal overload protection. 3. Chilled water cooling coils shall be constructed of copper tubes rated for 150 (300) psig working pressure, mechanically expanded into plate type aluminum fins. Coils shall have female sweat end connections. 4. Heating coils shall be constructed of copper tubes rated for 150 (300) psig working pressure, mechanically expanded into plate type aluminum fins. Tubes shall be of
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Fan Coil Units 15763 Page 3 of 6 SECTION 15763
FAN COIL UNITS
minimum of 1/2-inch O.D. and shall be joined to steel headers. Coils shall be suitable for use with hot water. 5. Drain pan shall be constructed of 18 gauge galvanized steel and insulated on the under side with closed cell insulation. Auxiliary drain pan shall be insulated and have a 3/4 inch male pipe thread drain connection. 6. Filters shall be throwaway 30 percent efficiency type. 7. Each vertical unit shall be provided with a four position (off-high medium low) switch mounted inside the cabinet, which shall be easily accessible for operation from outside the cabinet. This switch shall also act as a disconnect switch. In addition, a factory mounted disconnect switch shall be provided inside the unit. 8. Each horizontal unit shall be provided with a wall mounted four position (off high medium low) switch shipped loose for field installation. In addition, a factory mounted disconnect switch shall be provided inside the unit. 9. Chilled water coils must be designed with a 16˚ to 18˚ temperature differential.
D. Each unit shall be furnished with factory formed piping to suit control valves. Vertical units shall be furnished with cabinet levelers; horizontal units shall be provided with spring vibration isolators.
2.3 LARGE CAPACITY FAN COIL UNITS A. Provide fan coil units where shown on the Drawings. Units shall be of size and capacity as scheduled.
B. Each fan coil unit shall consist of a water cooling coil, a drain pan assembly, and a centrifugal fan with drive mounted in a common cabinet for independent air delivery from a single unit. Units shall be complete except for controls. 1. Casings shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel, phosphorized to assure paint adherence and finished with baked enamel. Casings shall be insulated with minimum 3/4 inch fire proof, odorless fiber glass material to prevent condensation. 2. Water coils shall be of a multiple row design with as indicated with highly efficient fins. Aluminum fins shall be mechanically bonded to 5/8 inch O.D. seamless copper tubes. All coils shall be specifically designed and circuited for water use. All coils shall be suitable for 200 psig working pressure and shall be tested at 300 psi. Sweat type coil connections shall be provided. 3. Fans shall be forward curved, centrifugal blower type fans equipped with heavy duty adjustable V belt drive. The fan shaft shall be supported by permanently lubricated bearings which shall be designed for long life. All fans shall be dynamically balanced. All units shall have a single fan. 4. Drain pans shall be integrally attached to coil casings and shall be complete with threaded pipe drain connection. All pans shall be galvanized for corrosion resistance and cover the entire coil length.
C. Filters shall be supplied separately.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Fan Coil Units 15763 Page 4 of 6 SECTION 15763
FAN COIL UNITS
D. Motors less than 1/2 horsepower shall be two pole single phase motors suitable for 115 volt, 1 phase, 60 hertz electrical power. All motors shall have 10% voltage utilization range and shall be wired to a unit mounted junction box. Motors shall be designed for long life and shall include internal thermal overload protection.
E. Motors 1/2 horsepower and larger shall be as specified in Motors Section. Motors shall also be provided with combination starters as specified in Motors Section.
F. Units shall be provided with spring vibration isolators.
G. Each fan coil unit which is not provided with a combination starter shall be provided with a manual motor starter of ample capacity to disconnect unit. This starter shall be shipped loose and shall also serve as a disconnect switch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and supports to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fan-coil units. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fan-coil units as indicated, to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and NFPA 90A.
B. Connect fan-coil units and components to wiring systems and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque-tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening requirements specified in UL 486A.
C. Connect fan-coil units to hydronic piping according to Section 15181 "Hydronic Piping." Provide shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.
D. Fan coil units installed above the ceiling grid level shall have all returns ducted to ceiling grid level with filters installed at ceiling grid.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Fan Coil Units 15763 Page 5 of 6 SECTION 15763
FAN COIL UNITS
A. Testing: After installing fan-coil units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units, and retest.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Replace filters in each fan-coil unit.
3.5 START UP SERVICE
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service.
B. Operate fan motor to verify proper rotation.
C. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Fan Coil Units 15763 Page 6 of 6 SECTION 15790
AIR COILS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Section 15900 "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for air coil, temperature control valve requirements.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: 1. Integral face and bypass heating coils. 2. Chilled water cooling coils. 3. Direct expansion cooling coils. 4. Refrigerant condenser coil. 5. Hot (glycol) water coils. 6. Hot glycol coils. 7. Hot water re-heat coils. 8. Heat recovery coils. 9. Electric duct heaters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Specification Sections.
B. No equipment shall be fabricated or delivered until receipt of approved shop drawings from the Architect.
C. Prior to submittal, the equipment supplier shall coordinate with the Contractor to determine the quantity and arrangement of each type of equipment device provided for this project. Equipment furnished with improper arrangement shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. Provide the following information with each shop drawing submission. 1. Complete specification of the equipment which will be provided including all optional equipment. All equipment shall be tagged. Refer to "Mechanical Identification" Section for further requirements. 2. Submittal data may include unpriced factory order forms indicating manufacturer's model number, cabinet type, materials of construction and what
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Coils 15790 Page 1 of 10 SECTION 15790
AIR COILS
optional Contract No. IH-17-013 Air Coils 15790 Page 1 of 1 equipment will be furnished along with catalog information explaining the model number, standard features, and optional features. 3. Commodity items with fixed performance characteristics such as unit heaters, convectors, fan coil units, unit ventilators and reheat coils shall be listed individually indicating performance equal to or superior to the standard product scheduled using identical air and water flow rates for each standard size. Generally, supply air temperatures and supply water temperatures will be considered fixed. It is optional for the manufacturer to submit a complete list of items which will be delivered. If submitted, tag numbers must correspond to the room numbers shown on the Architectural Drawings which the item will service. 4. Provide computerized selection data for each coil and heat exchanger provided. Data shall disclose all coil selection conditions including altitude. 5. Provide color charts for exposed equipment color selection. 6. Submittal data showing that all coils and terminal equipment bear the ARI Certified Performance Seal for performance at the capacities specified on the Drawings. 7. Arrangement drawings including physical dimensions, support locations, and weight of each terminal device, and the locations of access doors, pipe connections, and "left hand unit and right-hand units". 8. Installation, operation and maintenance instructions in shop manual format including spare parts list.
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing air coils and duct heaters similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance.
B. All coils shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 410 and shall comply with the ARI Certified Ratings Program.
C. Refrigerant coils shall meet the requirements of the latest edition of ASHRAE Standard 15.
D. Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for components and installation.
E. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
F. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain air coil components from one source and by a single manufacturer.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Coils 15790 Page 2 of 10 SECTION 15790
AIR COILS
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of air coils with duct, insulation, and with other installations. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions, and as approved by the Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Integral Face and Bypass Heating Coils: a. Aerofin b. Marlo c. Wing 2. Chilled Water Cooling Coils: a. Aerofin Corporation b. Airtherm c. Bohn d. Carrier Corporation e. Heatcraft f. Marlo g. McQuay h. Miller Picking i. Pace j. Trane k. York 3. Direct Expansion Cooling Coils: a. Aerofin Corporation b. Airtherm c. Bohn d. Carrier Corporation e. Heatcraft f. Marlo g. McQuay h. Miller Picking i. Pace j. Trane k. York 4. Refrigerant Condenser Coils: a. Aerofin Corporation
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Coils 15790 Page 3 of 10 SECTION 15790
AIR COILS
b. Airtherm c. Bohn d. Carrier Corporation e. Heatcraft f. Marlo g. McQuay h. Miller Picking i. Pace j. Trane k. York 5. Hot (Glycol) Water Coils and Hot Glycol Coils: a. Aerofin Corporation b. Airtherm c. Bohn d. Carrier Corporation e. Heatcraft f. Marlo g. McQuay h. Miller Picking i. Pace j. Trane k. York 6. Hot Water Reheat Coils: a. Carrier Corporation b. McQuay c. Trane d. York 7. Heat Recovery Coils: a. Aerofin Corporation b. Airtherm c. Bohn d. Carrier Corporation e. Heatcraft f. Marlo g. McQuay h. Miller Picking i. Pace j. Trane k. York 8. Electric Duct Heaters a. Q-Mark
2.2 TYPE "VIFB" OR "HIFB" INTEGRAL FACE AND BYPASS HEATING COILS
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Coils 15790 Page 4 of 10 SECTION 15790
AIR COILS
A. Provide integral face and bypass heating coils of the size, type, and capacity as shown and scheduled on the Drawings. Type VIFB coils shall have a vertical steam path; Type HIFB coils shall have a horizontal steam path.
B. Each heating coil shall consist of a built-in series of finned heating elements and bypasses with interlocked dampers modulated by a damper motor. 1. Dampers shall be 16-gauge roll-formed cold-rolled steel with baked enamel finish. Damper motors shall be pneumatic type suitable for 3-15 psig modulating air signal and 18 to 20 psig main air motors shall be provided by the coil manufacturer and shall be similar to those specified for dampers in Section 15900/15950. Dampers shall fail to the full heating position when a 0 psig signal or 0 psig main air is applied. Motors shall be complete with pilot positioners. 2. Casing shall be 14-gauge steel, galvanized and painted, with rigid framework including structural steel pipe supports in all four corners on both entering and leaving air side. 3. Vertical (and/or horizontal) finned heating elements shall be fabricated of seamless copper tubes with aluminum fins spaced not closer than 10 fins per inch. Each tube shall be individually secured to the steam and return headers by a brazed joint with provision for individual tube expansion and contraction. Finned elements shall be suitable for 100 psig saturated steam and 330 deg. F temperature and shall be factory tested at 200 psig steam and with air pressure under water (hydrostatically) at 400 psig.
C. Dampers shall be arranged so as to completely enclose and isolate the heating coil passes when no heating is required. Each coil shall be capable of maintaining a constant discharge air temperature regardless of variations in entering air temperature with full steam pressure (or with full hot water flow). 1. Proportioning of the air shall be such that the temperature at any point in a plane parallel to the face of the coil three feet downstream form the leaving side will not vary more than 5 deg. F from the average discharge airstream temperature. Pressure drop of air passing through the coil shall not vary more than plus or minus 5 percent, regardless of the position of the internal dampers.
D. The coil shop drawing submittal shall include data on all the coils and on the damper motors. The data shall be broken down for each application or installation.
2.3 CHILLED WATER COOLING COILS
A. Provide chilled water cooling coils of the capacity and size as scheduled on the Drawings. Coil ratings shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410.
B. The primary surface shall be 5/8-inch O.D. copper tubes with 0.025-inch nominal wall thickness. The tube joints shall be rolled for pressure tightness. The tube circuiting shall be completely drainable from a single location.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Coils 15790 Page 5 of 10 SECTION 15790
AIR COILS
1. Bronze, spring type turbulators shall be provided in glycol coils only; use of turbulators in water coils will not be permitted.
C. (Unless otherwise noted) the secondary surface shall be aluminum fins. Fins shall have belted collars and be bonded to tubes by mechanical expansion. A foam sealing strip shall be located between the casing bottom and fin ends to prevent air bypass and water carryover.
1. The secondary surface for coil(s) shall be copper fins.
D. The coil shall have either cast iron, copper, or steel headers. Headers shall include air vent and drain plugs.
E. Coil casing shall be the cartridge type, removable from the coil connection side of the casing and supported in tracks over the entire length of the coil. The coil casing shall be 304 stainless steel.
F. Each coil shall be rated for working pressures up to 200 psig (300 psig) at 200 deg. F.
G. Design Basis: Trane Type W.
2.4 DIRECT EXPANSION COOLING COILS
A. Provide direct expansion cooling coils of the capacity and size as scheduled on the Drawings. Coil ratings shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410 and shall meet the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 15-1992.
B. The primary surface shall be 5/8-inch O.D. seamless copper tubing with 0.035-inch nominal wall thickness. 1. Tubes shall be fed with one-piece low pressure drop venturi type refrigerant distributors arranged for down-feed with male sweat connections. Liquid lines shall be 1/4-inch Type S or 5/16-inch Type L copper. Each distributor shall feed a maximum of 12 refrigerant circuits. 2. The suction header shall be constructed of round seamless copper tubing. 3. All joints shall be silver soldered or brazed. 4. Where multiple refrigerant circuits are required by coil size (over approximately 18inches tall) or application, the circuits shall be intertwined full face circuits.
C. The secondary surface shall consist of aluminum fins. Fins shall have belted collars and shall be bonded to the tubes by mechanical expansion. A foam sealing strip shall be located between the casing bottom and fin ends to prevent air bypass and water carryover.
D. The coil casing shall be the cartridge type, removable from the coil connection side of the air handling unit casing and supported in tracks over the entire length of the coil. The coil casing shall be 304 stainless steel. Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Coils 15790 Page 6 of 10 SECTION 15790
AIR COILS
E. Each coil shall be rated for working pressures up to 300 psig at 200 deg. F. The coil shall be suitable for use with refrigerant HCFC-22 (HFC-134a). Refer to "Condensing Units" Section for condensing unit requirements. 1. Each coil installed in air conditioning units or ductwork shall be constructed to withstand a temperature of 700 deg. F without refrigerant leakage into the airstream.
F. Each coil shall be cleaned, dehydrated and sealed with dry nitrogen charge at the factory before shipment.
G. Design Basis: Trane Type F.
2.5 REFRIGERANT CONDENSER COIL
A. Provide refrigerant condenser coils of the capacity and size as scheduled on the Drawings. Coil ratings shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410 and shall meet the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 15-1992.
B. The primary surface shall be 5/8-inch O.D. seamless copper tubing with 0.035-inch nominal wall thickness. 1. Suction and discharge headers shall be constructed of round seamless copper tubing arranged for draining the refrigerant condensate. Coils shall be arranged for air flow in the horizontal (vertical up) direction. 2. All joints shall be silver soldered or brazed. 3. Where multiple refrigerant circuits are required by application, the circuits shall be arranged to split the coil face into sections.
C. The secondary surface shall consist of aluminum fins. Fins shall have belted collars and be bonded to the tubes by mechanical expansion.
D. The coil casing shall be the cartridge type, removable from either side of the air handling unit casing and supported by tracks over the entire length of the coil. (Unless otherwise noted) the coil casing shall be galvanized steel. 1. The casings for coils located directly downstream of cooling coils shall be 304 stainless steel.
E. Each coil shall be rated for working pressures up to 300 psig at 250 deg. F. The coil shall be suitable for use with refrigerant HCFC-22 (or HFC-12) and for being located within close proximity of the refrigerant compressor discharge. Refer to Section 15640 for condensing unit requirements. 1. Each coil installed in air conditioning units or ductwork shall be constructed to withstand a temperature of 700 deg. F without refrigerant leakage into the airstream.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Coils 15790 Page 7 of 10 SECTION 15790
AIR COILS
F. Each coil shall be cleaned, dehydrated and sealed with a dry nitrogen charge at the factory before shipment.
G. Design Basis: Trane Type H,
2.6 HOT (GLYCOL) WATER COILS
A. Provide hot (glycol) water heating coils of the capacity and size as scheduled on the Drawings. Coil ratings shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410 (and with proper modifications for use with ethylene glycol solutions).
B. Primary surface shall be fabricated of 5/8-inch O.D. copper tubes with 0.025-inch nominal wall thickness. The tube joints shall be rolled for pressure tightness. The tube circuiting shall be completely drainable from a single location. 1. Bronze, spring type, turbulators shall be provided in glycol coils only, use of turbulators in water coils will not be permitted.
C. The secondary surface shall be aluminum fins. Fins shall have belted collars and be bonded to tubes by mechanical expansion.
D. Coils shall have either cast iron, copper or steel headers. Headers shall include air vent and drain plugs.
E. The coil casing shall be the cartridge type, removable from either the coil connection side or the opposite side of the air handling unit and supported in tracks over the entire length of the coil. (Unless otherwise noted) the coil casings shall be galvanized steel. 1. The casings for coils located directly downstream of cooling coils shall be 304 stainless steel.
F. Each coil shall be rated for working pressures up to 200 psig at 250 deg. F.
G. Design Basis: Trane Type W.
2.7 HOT GLYCOL COILS
A. Provide hot glycol water heating coils of the capacity and size as scheduled on the drawings. Coils shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 410 and with proper modifications for use with ethylene glycol water solutions.
B. Hot glycol coils shall be the same as specified for hot water heating coils.
C. Hot glycol coils shall be provided with bronze, spring type turbulators.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Coils 15790 Page 8 of 10 SECTION 15790
AIR COILS
2.8 HOT WATER REHEAT COILS
A. Provide as scheduled hot water heating coils with supply and return on same end of each coil. Coils shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410.
B. Primary surfaces shall be 5/8-inch O.D. tubes with 0.025-inch nominal wall thickness. Tube joints shall be rolled for pressure tightness. The tubes shall form a single or double parallel continuous water circuit within the coil face.
C. Secondary surface shall consist of aluminum fins. Fins shall have belted collars and shall be bonded to tubes by mechanical expansion.
D. (Unless otherwise noted) The casing shall be constructed of galvanized sheet steel having provisions for bolting to ductwork on the top and bottom channels and on both ends. 1. The casing for coils located directly downstream of cooling coil shall be 304 stainless steel.
E. Each coil shall be rated for working pressures up to 200 psig at 250 deg. F.
F. Design Basis: Trane Type "T" or "TT".
2.9 HEAT RECOVERY COILS
A. Provide heat recovery coils of the capacity and size as scheduled on the drawings. Coils shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 410 and with proper modifications for use with ethylene glycol/water solutions.
B. Heat recovery coils in the outdoor air intake air stream shall be the same as specified for hot (glycol) water heating coils.
C. Heat recovery coils in the exhaust air stream shall be the same as specified for chilled water cooling coils.
D. Bronze, spring type turbulators shall be provided in glycol coils.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine ducts, plenums, and units to receive air coils for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the air coils. Verify piping rough-in dimensions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Coils 15790 Page 9 of 10 SECTION 15790
AIR COILS
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install air coils and duct heaters as indicated, level and plumb, and according to manufacturer's written instructions, rough-in drawings, the original design, and referenced standards.
B. Install air coils and duct heaters in metal ducts and casings constructed according to SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards."
C. Anchor air coils in position using suitable supports.
D. Install piping connections, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance of coils.
E. Install moisture eliminators as indicated.
F. Install shutoff valves at coil inlet and outlet connections.
G. Install galvanized-steel drain pan under each chilled-water coil. 1. Install galvanized-steel gutter underneath each coil above the lowest coil in stacked assemblies. 2. Construct drain pans to extend beyond coil length and width. Provide condensate trap and drainage. 3. Extend drain pan 10 inches beyond moisture eliminator. 4. Extend drain pan 10 inches beyond coil.
H. Connect duct heaters and components to wiring systems and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque-tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torqueing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening torques specified in UL 486A.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Comb bent fins on each air coil. 3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including duct and fittings, clean coils using materials and methods recommended by manufacturers, and clean inside of casings and enclosures to remove dust and debris.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Coils 15790 Page 10 of 10 SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09900 “Painting”: Execution requirements for Weld priming, weather resistant, paint or coating specified by this section. 2. Section 15060 “Hangers and Supports”: Product requirements for hangers, supports and sleeves for placement by this section. 3. Section 15950 “Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing”. 4. Section 15074 “Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment”. 5. Section 15075 “Mechanical Identification”. 6. Section 15080 “Mechanical Insulation”.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes rectangular, round, and flat-oval metal ducts and plenums for heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2 inch w.g. to plus 10-inch w.g.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
B. ASTM A90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles.
C. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
D. ASTM A366 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Commercial Quality.
E. ASTM A568 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and ColdRolled.
F. ASTM A569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality.
G. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
H. NFPA 90A (National Fire Protection Association) - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Metal Ducts 15815 Page 1 of 16 SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS
I. NFPA 90B (National Fire Protection Association) - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
J. SMACNA (Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
K. SMACNA (Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
L. UL 181 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined in ASTM C 168. In this Section, these values are the result of the formula Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or W/m x K at the temperature differences specified. Values are expressed as Btu or W.
1. Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 or 0.037.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving and distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by the Owner. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For duct liner and sealing materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of the following:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Duct layout indicating pressure classifications and sizes on plans. 3. Fittings. 4. Reinforcement and spacing. 5. Seam and joint construction. 6. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 7. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations. 8. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation, seismic restraints, and duct attachment.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Metal Ducts 15815 Page 2 of 16 SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts. 3. Ceiling- and wall-mounted access doors and panels required to provide access to dampers and other operating devices. 4. Coordination with ceiling-mounted items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinkler heads, access panels, and special moldings.
D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates indicating welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in "Quality Control" Article.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
F. Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and installed accessories and devices.
1.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. All ductwork shall be constructed in accordance with the latest issue of the applicable Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA), Inc., "HVAC Duct Construction Standards" and "Industrial Duct Construction Standards".
B. Zinc-coated metal shall be in accordance with ASTM A525.
C. Aluminum alloy shall be in accordance with ASTM B209, mill finish.
D. Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to perform welding processes for this Project according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-Steel," for hangers and supports; AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," for aluminum supporting members; and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
E. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," unless otherwise indicated.
F. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems," unless otherwise indicated.
G. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Metal Ducts 15815 Page 3 of 16 SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS
H. Mockups: Before installing duct systems, erect mockups representing system pressure classifications higher than 2-inch wg. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work:
1. Locate mockups in the locations and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Mockup may be a representative section of the actual duct system. 2. Include the minimum number of each of the following features and fittings: a. Five transverse joints. b. One access door. c. Two typical branch connections, each with at least one elbow. d. Two typical flexible duct or flexible connector connections for each duct and apparatus. 3. Perform tests specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. Modify mockup construction and perform additional tests as required to achieve specified minimum acceptable results. 4. Obtain McCarran International Airport’s approval of mockups before starting Work. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site. 7. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.
B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
C. Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper maintained through fabrication and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASSIFICATIONS
A. The following are lists of ductwork construction pressure classifications to be used on this project. Where ductwork pressure class is not stated, the duct system shall be constructed to the static pressure classification which exceeds the fan shut-off pressure.
B. SMACNA + 0.5" w.g. static pressure class and 2000 FPM maximum velocity.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Metal Ducts 15815 Page 4 of 16 SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS
C. SMACNA - 0.5" w.g. static pressure class and 2000 FPM maximum velocity.
D. SMACNA + 1.0" w.g. static pressure class and 2500 FPM maximum velocity.
1. All supply and make-up ducts downstream of terminal units.
E. SMACNA - 1.0" w.g. static pressure class and 2500 FPM maximum velocity.
1. All return air ductwork upstream of the main branch fire or combination fire/smoke damper at the main duct riser. 2. All exhaust air ductwork and smoke exhaust ductwork unless otherwise noted.
F. SMACNA + 2.0" w.g. static pressure class and 2500 FPM maximum velocity.
G. SMACNA - 2.0" w.g. static pressure class and 2500 FPM maximum velocity.
H. SMACNA + 3.0" w.g. static pressure class and 4000 FPM maximum velocity.
I. SMACNA - 3.0" w.g. static pressure class and 4000 FPM maximum velocity.
1. Main return air duct risers from the return fan upstream to the fire dampers or combination fire/smoke dampers serving the individual floors. 2. All kitchen hood exhaust ductwork.
J. SMACNA + 4.0" w.g. static pressure class and 4000 FPM maximum velocity.
1. All plenums for air handling units downstream of control dampers. 2. All supply air and make-up air ductwork from air handling units downstream to terminal units.
K. SMACNA +6.0" w.g. static pressure class and 4000 FPM maximum velocity.
L. SMACNA + 10.0" w.g. static pressure class and 4000 FPM maximum velocity.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. All supply, return, relief, outside air and ventilating ducts for air handling units, and general exhaust systems, including casings for coils and fans, plenums, volume control dampers, vanes, baffles and duct hangers shall be constructed of galvanized steel or aluminum.
B. All boiler breechings, belt guards, concealed ductwork from kitchen exhaust hoods and fabricated exhaust hoods shall be constructed of black steel sheets, hot or cold rolled.
C. All Locker Room and Shower Room exhaust ducts and all goosenecks and vent ducts above roof shall be constructed of aluminum.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Metal Ducts 15815 Page 5 of 16 SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS
D. All exposed ductwork in the kitchen and dishwasher rooms, kitchen hoods and dishwasher exhaust hoods shall be constructed of stainless steel.
E. All exhaust ductwork from dishwashers rooms, and other exhaust ductwork conveying moist air shall be constructed of welded stainless steel. Gauge of metal shall be of a thickness suitable for welding.
F. Ductwork downstream of humidifiers shall be aluminum. Refer to notes on the Drawings.
2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
B. PVC-Coated Galvanized Steel: UL 181, Class 1 listing. Lock-forming-quality, galvanized, sheet steel with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; factory-applied, 4-mil PVC coating on exposed surfaces of ducts and fittings (exterior of ducts and fittings for underground applications and interior of ducts and fittings for fume handling applications) and with factory-applied, 2-mil PVC coating on reverse side of ducts and fittings.
C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with oiled, exposed matte finish.
D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 316, sheet form with No. 4 finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view; and Type 304, sheet form with No. 1 finish for concealed ducts.
E. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form with standard, oneside bright finish for ducts exposed to view and with mill finish for concealed ducts.
F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. Additional Tie-Rods shall be added in addition to those required by SMACNA to insure a pulse free installation in the ductwork.
2.4 BLACK STEEL SHEETS
A. Black steel sheets used in the construction of boiler breechings shall be 10 gauge material.
B. Black steel sheets used in the construction of rectangular or round ductwork or exhaust hoods shall be of gauge set forth in the following schedule:
1. Rectangular ducts (longest side)
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Metal Ducts 15815 Page 6 of 16 SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS
Up to 24 inches 16 gauge 25 inches to 36 inches 14 gauge 37 inches to 60 inches 12 gauge Over 60 inches 10 gauge
2. Round ducts (diameter)
Up to 26 inches 16 gauge 27 inches to 39 inches 14 gauge 40 inches to 65 inches 12 gauge Over 65 inches 10 gauge
C. Black steel sheets used in the construction of belt guards shall be 18 gauge material. The side panels shall be expanded metal. An opening with cover shall be provided in side panel at both the motor and fan shafts for taking rpm readings.
D. All seams and joints shall be continuous weld. Where seams and joints are exposed to view, in finished areas, the weld seams shall be ground to a smooth finish.
2.5 STAINLESS STEEL DUCTS OR SHEETS
A. Stainless steel used in the construction of ductwork and for kitchen exhaust, and dishwashing exhaust hoods shall be Type 302 with No. 4 finish for exposed areas.
B. Minimum gauges for stainless steel, type of joints and reinforcing angle sizes shall be as set forth for galvanized steel in the latest SMACNA low pressure duct construction standard.
C. All stainless steel ductwork exposed to view in finished areas shall be streamlined construction having no visible standing seam, joints or angle bracing. Gauge of metal shall be of a thickness suitable for welding, and all welded joints shall be ground and polished.
D. All hoods shall be constructed having no visible standings seams, joints or angle bracing on the outer surface of the hood. Gauge of metal shall be of a thickness suitable for welding and all welded joints shall be ground and polished.
E. Concealed and visible ductwork serving dishwashers shall be constructed of welded type 304 stainless steel. Gauge of metal shall be suitable for welding. Welded joints in concealed locations will not be required to be ground or polished but must be neat. Welded joints in visible locations shall be ground and polished.
2.6 DUCT LINER
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Metal Ducts 15815 Page 7 of 16 SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS
A. General: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
B. Materials: ASTM C 1071 with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of glass fibers.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches. 4. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature. 5. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and smoke developed rating of 50, when tested according to ASTM C 411. 6. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and ASTM C 916. 7. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct. a. Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb- tensile, dead-load test perpendicular to duct wall. b. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without projecting more than 1/8 inch into airstream. c. Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard classification of duct liner system.
2.7 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. All ductwork shall be Seal Class ‘A’ for all McCarran International Airport ductwork, No Exceptions . Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.
1. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass-fiber fabric reinforced. 2. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral compound and a modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form a hard, durable, airtight seal. 3. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, non-sag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids. 4. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealants, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
2.11 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for building materials.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Metal Ducts 15815 Page 8 of 16 SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for Lightweight aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, threaded steel rod.
1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electro-galvanized, all-thread rod or galvanized rods with threads painted after installation. 2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials, unless materials are electrolytically separated from ductwork.
2.12 DUCTWORK CONSTRUCTION: 2.0" W.G. STATIC PRESSURE CLASS AND LESS (LOW PRESSURE)
A. Minimum gauges of sheet metal, types of joints, bracing, etc. shall be as set forth in the latest edition of the SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards". Seal Class A construction is required for duct pressure classes between positive 1" w.g. and negative 1" w.g.; Seal Class A construction is required otherwise.
B. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. Adjustable elbows shall not be used.
C. Construct T’s, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1-1/2 times centerline duct width. Where possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.
D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Metal Ducts 15815 Page 9 of 16 SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS
E. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard Minimum 4-inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints.
F. Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90degree conical tee connections may be used.
2.13 DUCTWORK CONSTRUCTION: GREATER THAN 2.0" STATIC PRESSURE CLASS (HIGH PRESSURE)
A. All ductwork from static pressures greater than 2 inches w.g. and/or velocity greater than 2,500 fpm shall be considered as "high pressure" construction.
B. All gauges of sheet metal, transverse joints, and bracing shall be as set forth in the latest edition of the SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards" and the SMACNA "Industrial Duct Construction Standards" with Class 1 construction. Ductwork shall be Seal Class A construction.
C. All longitudinal and transverse joints shall be carefully sealed with sealing compound. Compound shall be applied both when forming joints, and when pulling joints together. When transverse joints are flanged, provide gaskets of neoprene or other suitable material between flanges.
D. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. Adjustable elbows shall not be used.
E. Construct T’s, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1-1/2 times centerline duct width. Where possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.
F. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.
G. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard Minimum 4-inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints.
H. Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90degree conical tee connections may be used.
2.14 FACTORY FABRICATED DUCT JOINTS.
A. Factory fabricated duct joint systems for rectangular or round ductwork may be used on this project in lieu of Standard SMACNA joints provided the "EI" factor for rigidity and
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Metal Ducts 15815 Page 10 of 16 SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS
strength exceeds the "EI" factor required by the SMACNA manual. Submit "EI" factor data for each joint proposed for use on the project along with the ductwork construction shop standards.
B. Each factory fabricated duct joint system shall be applied in full conformance with the joint manufacturer's installation instructions and with all required sealants, gaskets, bolts, and spring clips. Substitution of zip screws for spring clips will not be permitted.
C. Approved factory fabricated “Proprietary” duct joint systems for the project are Ductmate and WDCI.
2.15 REINFORCEMENT OF SHEET METAL PLENUMS
A. Sheet metal air plenums with dimensions exceeding 48" wide by 48" high, which are not part of an engineered enclosure system, shall have walls and floors reinforced with coldformed light gauge metal framing or with bent sheet metal channel having a similar section modulus.
1. Provide wall framing on 48" centers to meet an internal pressure loading of 15 lbs. per sq. ft. (3" w.g.). Note to Contractor - This loading is similar to the load on wall framing subject to an internal pressure of 30 lbs. per sq. ft. with joists spaced at 24" centers. 2. Provide reinforcement on 24" centers at 40 lbs. per sq. ft. loading for plenum floors exceeding 36" in depth. Deflection shall not exceed 1" per 240" of span.
B. Submit framing dimensions and gauges on the sheet metal shop drawings.
C. For plenums with a wall exceeding 15' high, furnish the services of a Civil/Structural Engineer registered in the State of Nevada to design the reinforcement framing system. The Civil/Structural Engineer shall stamp all sketches and drawings certifying that reinforcements have been properly designed.
2.16 DOUBLE WALL PLENUMS
A. Provide double wall acoustical plenums where shown on the drawings and as specified. Refer to "Duct Accessories" Section for requirements.
2.17 SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of adhesive at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated thickness are prohibited.
B. Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Metal Ducts 15815 Page 11 of 16 SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted edge overlapping.
E. Do not apply liners in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm.
G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely around perimeter; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.
H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:
1. Fan discharge. 2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. 3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts.
I. For high pressure duct work defined in section 2.13.A., secure insulation liner with perforated sheet metal liner of same metal thickness as specified for duct, secured to ducts with mechanical fasteners that maintain metal liner distance from duct without compressing insulation.
1. Sheet Metal Liner Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open area of 23 percent.
J. Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning vane assemblies, and other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct wall with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. Terminate liner at fire dampers at connection to fire-damper sleeve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.
B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.
C. Install round and flat-oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet, unless interrupted by fittings.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Metal Ducts 15815 Page 12 of 16 SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.
F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.
G. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.
I. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, unless specifically indicated.
K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work.
L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
M. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
N. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."
3.2 UNDERSLAB DUCT INSTALLATIONS
A. Verify undamaged conditions of duct before enclosure with fill or encasement.
B. Install under-slab ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible" and as indicated.
C. Protect ducts from damage by equipment used in placing concrete on or around ducts.
D. Protect duct openings.
3.3 RANGE HOOD EXHAUST DUCT INSTALLATIONS
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Metal Ducts 15815 Page 13 of 16 SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS
A. Install ducts to allow for thermal expansion of ductwork through 2000 deg F temperature range.
B. Install ducts without dips or traps that may collect residues, unless traps have continuous or automatic residue removal.
C. Install access openings at each change in direction and at 50-foot intervals; locate on sides of duct a minimum of 1-1/2 inches from bottom; and fit with grease-tight covers of same material as duct.
D. Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies.
3.4 DISHWASHER EXHAUST DUCT INSTALLATIONS
A. Install dishwasher exhaust ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Dust work shall be aluminum or stainless steel.
3.5 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. General: Seal duct seams and joints according to Seal Class A , No Exceptions . As indicated and as described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Pressure Classification Less Than 2-Inch wg: Transverse joints.
C. Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation.
3.6 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat-oval metal duct with support systems indicated in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.
C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor.
D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure (proof-test) load.
E. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
F. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Metal Ducts 15815 Page 14 of 16 SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Section 15820 "Duct Accessories."
B. For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems as required to accommodate leakage testing and as required for compliance with test requirements.
B. Conduct tests, in presence of Architect, at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
C. Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage to surface area of test section.
D. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Classification 3 for round and flat-oval ducts, Leakage Classification 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classifications less than and equal to 2-inch wg (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Classification 6 for pressure classifications from 2- to 10-inch wg.
E. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable.
F. Nosing Strips shall be provided for all internally lined ductwork per SMACNA Standards regardless of air velocity. Nosing strips shall be designed to prevent “air-flow lifting” of the insulation.
F. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Acceptable leakage rate is 3%, for +2 inch and +4inch W.G. duct.
G. Leakage testing shall be in accordance with Section 15950 – Testing/Balancing.
3.9 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust volume-control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design airflow.
B. Refer to Section 15950 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed procedures.
3.10 CLEANING
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Metal Ducts 15815 Page 15 of 16 SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the system. Vacuum ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris.
3.11 SCHEDULES
DUCTWORK MATERIAL SCHEDULE
AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL Supply Galvanized Steel Return and Relief Galvanized Steel General Exhaust Galvanized Steel, Aluminum
DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASSIFICATIONS
AIR SYSTEM PRESSURE CLASSIFICATION Supply – upstream of VAV box + 4 inch w.g. Supply – downstream of VAV box + 2 inch w.g. Return - 2 inch w.g. General / Toilet Exhaust - 1 inch w.g.
3.12 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTING
PRESSURE CLASSIFICATION MAXIMUM LEAKAGE
+ 4 inch w.g. 3% + 2 inch w.g. 3%
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Metal Ducts 15815 Page 16 of 16
SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16150 “Wiring Devices”: Execution requirements for connection of electrical Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers specified by this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes back-draft dampers, combination fire-and-smoke dampers, duct access doors, fire dampers, smoke dampers, volume control dampers, flexible duct connections and duct test holes.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 90A (National Fire Protection Association) - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
B. NFPA 92A (National Fire Protection Association) - Smoke Control Systems.
C. SMACNA (Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
D. UL 33 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service.
E. UL 555 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers.
F. UL 555S (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of equipment and accessory specified.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Duct Accessories 15820 Page 1 of 17 SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size of each field connection. Detail the following: 1. Special fittings and manual and automatic volume control damper installations. 2. Fire smoke and combination fire/smoke damper installations, including sleeves and duct-mounted access doors and panels.
C. Product Certificates: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self-noise power levels; and airflow performance data, static-pressure loss, dimensions, and weights.
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA standards: 1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B. Perform work in accordance with applicable local codes and standards.
C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fusible Links: Supply 2 of each size and type of fusible link.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
B. Installer: Company and company field staff specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five years experience.
1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect and cover all duct accessories during storage.
1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Duct Accessories 15820 Page 2 of 18 SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work where appropriate with building control Work.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year manufacturer warranty for duct accessories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck. 2. Ruskin. 3. Pottorff. 4. Nailor Industries, Inc. 5. Air Balance, Inc. 6. Cesco Products 7. Substitutions: Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Requirements: Substitutions and Contract Requirements.
B. Multi-Blade, back-draft dampers: Parallel-action, gravity-balanced, Galvanized 16 gage thick steel, or extruded aluminum. Blades, maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges. Blades linked together in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin. Provide dampers with adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
2.2 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck. 2. Ruskin. 3. Pottorff. 4. Nailor Industries, Inc. 5. Substitutions: Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Requirements: Substitutions and Contract Requirements.
B. Fabricate and install in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL 555, and UL 555S.
C. Multiple-Blade Dampers: Fabricate with 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades. Provide oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, stainless steel jamb seals, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock, and 1/2 inch actuator shaft.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Duct Accessories 15820 Page 3 of 18 SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
D. Operators: UL listed Class 2 and labeled spring return electric type suitable for 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz. Provide end switches to indicate damper position and locate damper operator on interior or exterior of duct and link to damper operating shaft, as indicated on the drawings.
E. Combination fire and smoke dampers shall include 165° F electric resettable systems. Fusible links will not be acceptable. Provide single point electrical connection for 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz; U.L. listed and labeled.
2.3 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated.
B. Fabrication: Rigid and close fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum 1 inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. 1. Less Than 12 inches square. Provide two (2) hinges and two (2) sash locks. 2. Up to 18 inches Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks, minimum 12 inches square. 3. Up to 24 x 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression latches, minimum 18 inches square. 4. Larger Sizes: Provide an additional hinge. 5. Access panels with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
C. Factory access doors by Ductmate or Titan.
2.4 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck. 2. Ruskin. 3. Pottorff. 4. Nailor Industries, Inc. 5. Substitutions: Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Requirements: Substitutions and Contract Requirements.
B. Provide in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and manufacturer’s condition of listing. Dampers shall be permanently marked for use in dynamic systems.
C. Ceiling Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage frame and 16 gage flap, two layers 0.125 inch ceramic fiber on top side, and one layer on bottom side for round flaps, with locking clip.
D. Horizontal Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage frame, stainless steel closure spring, and lightweight, heat retardant non-asbestos fabric blanket.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Duct Accessories 15820 Page 4 of 18 SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
E. Curtain Type Dampers: Galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel closure springs and latches for closure under airflow conditions. Configure with blades out of air stream except for 1.0-inch pressure class ducts up to 12 inches in height.
F. Multiple Blade Dampers: 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock.
G. Fusible Links: UL 33, separate at 165 degrees F with adjustable link straps as for combination fire/balancing dampers.
2.5 SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck. 2. Ruskin. 3. Pottorff. 4. Nailor Industries, Inc. 5. Substitutions: Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Requirements: Substitutions and Contract Requirements.
B. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 5555 and as indicated.
C. Dampers: UL Class 2 curtain or multiple blade type fire damper, normally closed automatically operated by electric actuator.
D. Smoke dampers shall include 165° F electric resettable systems. Fusible link will not be acceptable. Provide single point electrical connection for 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz; UL listed and labeled.
2.6 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS.
A. Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck. 2. Ruskin. 3. Pottorff. 4. Nailor Industries, Inc. 5. Air Balance, Inc. 6. Cesco Products 7. Substitutions: Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Requirements: Substitutions and Contract Requirements.
B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Duct Accessories 15820 Page 5 of 18 SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
C. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized frame channel with suitable hardware.
D. End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. Provide closed end bearings on all ducts having a pressure classification over 2 inches w.g.
E. Quadrants: 1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. 2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on standoff mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. 3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.
F. Provide 18 inch length of red or orange survey tape at each damper to facilitate balance work.
2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated.
B. Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric conforming to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd. 2. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 3 inches wide. 3. Metal: 3 inch wide, 24 gage galvanized steel.
2.8 DUCT TEST HOLES
A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.
B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.
2.9 COMBINATION FIRE-AND-SMOKE DAMPERS
A. General: Labeled to UL 555S. Combination fire and smoke dampers shall be labeled for one-and-one-half-hour rating to UL 555.
B. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 or 212 deg F rated as indicated.
C. Frame and Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Duct Accessories 15820 Page 6 of 18 SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor application.
E. Damper Motors: Provide for modulating or two-position action.
1. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear trains. 2. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf. 3. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outside-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation at minus 40 deg F. 4. Non-spring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf. 5. Two-Position Motor: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz. 6. Two-Position Motor: 230 V, single phase, 60 Hz. 7. Two-Position Motor: 230 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz. 8. Two-Position Motor: 460 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz. 9. Modulating, Spring-Return Motor: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz. 10. Modulating, Spring-Return Motor: 230 V, single phase, 60 Hz. 11. Modulating, Spring-Return Motor: 230 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz. 12. Modulating, Spring-Return Motor: 460 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz.
2.10 DUCT SILENCERS
A. General: Factory-fabricated and -tested, round or rectangular silencer with performance characteristics and physical requirements as indicated.
B. Fire Performance: Adhesives, sealers, packing materials, and accessory materials shall have fire ratings not exceeding 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed when tested according to ASTM E 84.
C. Rectangular Units: Fabricate casings with a minimum of 0.034-inch- thick, solid sheet metal for outer casing and 0.022-inch- thick, perforated sheet metal for inner casing.
D. Round Units: Casings with sheet metal thicknesses for diameters listed below:
1. Up to 24 Inches: 0.034 inch. 2. 26 through 40 Inches: 0.040 inch. 3. 42 through 52 Inches: 0.052 inch. 4. 54 through 60 Inches: 0.064 inch. 5. Casings fabricated of spiral lock-seam duct may be one size thinner than that indicated.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Duct Accessories 15820 Page 7 of 18 SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
6. Interior Partitions and Baffles: At least 0.034 inch and designed for minimum aerodynamic losses.
E. Sheet Metal Perforations: 1/8-inch diameter for inner casing and baffle sheet metal.
F. Fibrous Acoustic-Fill Material: Inert and vermin-proof fibrous material, packed under not less than 5 percent compression.
G. Nonfibrous Acoustic-Fill Material: Moisture-proof nonfibrous material.
H. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or otherwise react to system pressure variations.
1. Do not use nuts, bolts, and sheet metal screws for unit assemblies. 2. Lock form and seal or continuously weld joints. 3. Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to frame in quantities and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion. 4. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension.
I. Source Quality Control: Perform the following factory tests:
1. Acoustic Performance: Test according to ASTM E 477, with airflow in both directions through silencer. 2. Record acoustic ratings, including dynamic insertion loss and self-noise power levels, for both forward flow (air and noise in same direction) and reverse flow (air and noise in opposite directions) with an airflow of at least 2000-fpm face velocity. 3. Leak Test: Test units for airtightness at 200 percent of associated fan static pressure or 6-inch wg static pressure, whichever is greater.
2.11 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1-1/2-inch- wide, curved blades set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches o.c.; and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ducts.
C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate of airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.
2.12 ACOUSTICAL FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS (OPTIONAL)
A. Provide acoustical flexible connections in locations as shown on the Drawings.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Duct Accessories 15820 Page 8 of 18 SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
B. Refer to "Vibration Controls" Section in this specification for acoustical flexible connections material requirements.
C. Connection material shall be glass fabric coated with barium filled vinyl having a density of approximately 0.89 pounds per square foot. Material shall be Ferro Corporation Model "Coustifab" or approved equal by Peabody Kinetics.
D. Flexible connections shall be approximately 6" long and shall be installed with just sufficient slack to prevent transmission of vibration. Connections shall be secured to ducts and fan housing with 1" by 1/8" flat bars or with slip joints similar to those specified for duct joints. With slip joints, the fabric shall be tightly crimped into the slip joint. The complete joint shall be fastened with sheet metal screws at 8" intervals. Flexible connections shall not be painted and all metal used in such fabrication shall be the same as specified for ducts and fan plenums, respectively.
2.13 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Duct hangers and supports for low pressure and high-pressure flexible, round, flat oval or rectangular ductwork shall be as detailed in the latest issue of the applicable SMACNA duct construction standard.
B. Vertical ducts passing through floors shall be secured by extending the bracing angles to rest firmly on the floors, without loose blocking or shimming. Vertical ducts which do not pass through floors shall be supported by bands bolted to walls and columns.
2.14 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Flexible ducts shall be used only above accessible ceilings. Flexible ducts shall be used for low velocity applications only between VAV and reheat type terminal units and the outlet side of the box. Flexible ductwork shall also be used at the inlet connections to diffusers and registers in a horizontal plane or vertical plane. No flexible ductwork shall be used or installed as an elbow. All flexible ductwork shall be made with factory pre-insulated duct.
B. Flexible ducts shall be pressure rated for positive 10" w.g. and negative 2" w.g. at 4,000 feet per minute velocity.
C. Flexible duct shall be limited to an installed length not to exceed 6' and no elbow configurations. Lengths exceeding this shall be made with rigid, smooth round insulated duct.
D. Metallic flexible ducts shall be factory pre-insulated duct composed of an aluminum flexible duct core covered with 1", 1 pound density fiberglass insulation blanket sheathed in a vapor barrier of aluminum metalized film, laminated to glass mesh, elastomer back-coated. The duct must meet BOCA standards, must comply with the latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed as Class 0 or 1 Air Duct Material, UL Standard 181. Flexible duct material shall be Type SFA Clevaform as manufactured by the Clevaflex Company, or approved equal. No plastic or vinyl duct shall be permitted. Atco Series 30 shall not be acceptable.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Duct Accessories 15820 Page 9 of 18 SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
F. Nonmetallic flexible ducts shall be factory pre-insulated duct composed of a corrosion resistant reinforcing wire helix permanently bonded and enclosed in polyester film, then covered with 1", 3/4 pound density fiberglass insulation blanket sheathed in a vapor barrier of aluminum metalized polyester film, laminated to glass mesh, elastomer back-coated. The duct must meet BOCA standards, must comply with the latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed as Class 0 or 1 Air Duct Material, UL Standard 181. Flexible duct material shall be Type WK as manufactured by The Wiremold Company, Flex Master Type 3M Insulated or approved equal.
G. Flexible Duct Installation
1. Flexible duct (non-metallic and metallic) connections shall be sealed by peeling back the outer jacket and insulation. A chemically compatible sealer shall be applied to inside of flexible duct and to outside of collar. Apply sealer to half-length of sleeve on the outside. Duct sealer shall be Benjamin Foster #3202 or approved equal. 2. Metallic flexible duct equal to Clevaform shall then be attached using a minimum of three #8 sheet metal screws equally spaced around the duct's circumference. Ducts larger than 12" diameter shall have a minimum of five #8 sheet metal screws. Screws shall be located at least 1/2 inch from the duct end. Tape over end of outer skin with three wraps of Arno 20 duct tape to seal insulation. Pull insulation and outer jacket back over connection. 3. Non-metallic flexible duct equal to Flexmaster USA Type 3M shall then be taped with three wraps around the joint and either stainless steel band or neoprene band shall be clamped over the outside of tape. Tape shall be Arno 442 for aluminized outer skin or approved equal. Simple duct tape attachment is not allowed . Pull insulation and outer jacket back over connection.
2.15 DUCT SLEEVES
A. All ducts passing through a masonry wall, partition or ceiling shall be provided with a framed opening. Opening shall be 1/2 inch larger than the sheet metal or duct insulation if externally insulated.
B. Where ducts pass to a finished space or to mechanical rooms, provide sheet metal (20 gauge) angles, attached to the duct, to neatly close the opening between the duct and the wall, partition, ceiling or floor.
2.16 METAL ELBOWS
A. All changes in ductwork direction up to and including 30 degrees may be made with mitered elbows.
B. All changes in ductwork direction over 30 degrees shall be made with radius elbows with a throat radius equal to the width of the duct.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Duct Accessories 15820 Page 10 of 18 SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
C. Where space conditions do not allow the use of a standard radius elbow, a square elbow containing double thickness turning vanes may be used. The leading edge of the vane or vanes shall be hemmed for stiffening.
D. All round elbows shall be welded construction designed per SMACNA. Sectional and adjustable elbows are not allowed . Elbows shall be low ‘C’ value constructed.
2.17 CORNER GUARDS FOR DUCTWORK
A. Provide corner guards on all horizontal and vertical corners for all ductwork and duct- mounted equipment which is located below 7 feet above finished floor. Corner guards are intended for protection of personnel. Corner guards shall consist of 1-inch thick Armaflex sheet insulation, attached to ductwork or equipment with insulation adhesive. Paint corner guards with bright orange oil based paint containing flex additive.
2.18 DUCT DRAINS
A. In all ductwork which conveys moist contaminants, grease laden contaminants or spray booth exhaust, pitch ductwork and provide drains in all low points.
B. Drains shall consist of a flanged companion flange welded or bolted to the ductwork. Connection shall be sealed watertight using silicone caulk for low temperature applications and shall be welded or soldered for high temperature applications.
C. Drains shall include deep seal traps and shall be terminated over a floor drain or over a suitable waste receptor. Refer to "Duct Condensate Drain Piping" article in "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" Section.
2.19 DUCT CLEANOUTS
A. In ductwork 8" and smaller serving laundry dryer exhaust, and in other exhaust systems subject to the accumulation of debris and waste, provide duct cleanouts every 20' and at each change in direction.
B. Cleanout shall consist of a welded 45-degree wye branch into main duct which enters duct in direction of flow.
1. Branch size shall be same size as main duct or 1" smaller.
C. Cleanout shall be provided with a removable duct cap.
2.20 DUCT THERMOMETERS
A. Duct thermometers for ducts with openings 4 sq. ft. or larger shall be Trerice 3-1/2" diameter stainless steel vapor-activated dial thermometers No. V80025 with adjustable
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Duct Accessories 15820 Page 11 of 18 SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
angle bracket and a No. 4-3-1 - 8 foot long averaging bulb or approved equal by Marshalltown, Wekler or Weiss.
B. Duct thermometers for ducts with openings smaller than 4 sq. ft. shall be Trerice 3-1/2" diameter stainless steel vapor-activated dial thermometers No. V80025 with adjustable angle bracket and a No. 6-3D1 copper bulb with 5' seamless copper tubing or approved equal by Marshalltown, Wekler.
C. Thermometer scales shall be selected for -40 deg. F to 150 deg. F for outdoors (and for downstream of reheat coils). Scales shall be 0 deg. F to 10o deg. F for all other applications.
2.21 THERMOMETER LOCATIONS
A. In addition to duct thermometers shown on the Drawings, provide them at the following locations:
1. Outside air, return air, mixed air and discharge air at all air-handling units.
2. Entering air and leaving air at all coils in air handling units and ductwork.
2.22 PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS
A. Provide pressure relief dampers of size and in locations as shown on the Drawings.
B. Damper blades shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel. Blades shall be equipped with dual durometer vinyl seals. Jambs shall have EPT sponge.
C. Dampers shall be Model PR-10 as manufactured by American Warming and Ventilating, Inc., Ruskin CBD6 or approved equal.
2.23 ROOF FLASHING
A. All ductwork passing through roofs shall be provided with a curb, flashing and counterflashing. Refer to "Roof Curbs, Pipe Portals and Equipment Rails" article in the "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" Section for requirements.
2.24 TRAVERSE TYPE AIRFLOW MEASURING STATIONS
A. Provide traverse type air measuring stations as shown on the drawings for the air volumes scheduled. All interconnecting tubes between each air measuring station and any remote meter and control shall be furnished and installed.
1. The units scheduled are based on the inside (airpath) duct dimensions. The Contractor shall be responsible for suitable connections to lined and unlined ducts. Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Duct Accessories 15820 Page 12 of 18 SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
B. Each airflow measuring station shall measure airflow by the pitot tube traverse method. Each unit shall consist of a network of static and total pressure sensors, factory positioned and connected in parallel to produce an equalized velocity pressure. The measured velocity pressure when converted to airflow (cfm) shall have an accuracy within 2 percent of full scale throughout the velocity range from 700 to 4,000 feet per minute.
C. Each airflow measuring station shall be installed to meet the manufacturer's minimum installation requirements. Installation shall not amplify the sound level within the duct.
D. Maximum pressure drop allowable for each station shall be 15 percent of the velocity head at the specified airflow for Models FMS-AD, FMS-AC, and FMS-W. Maximum pressure drop shall be 30% of the velocity hood for Model FMS-D and 60% for FMS-F.
E. All models except FMS-W shall utilize a copper velocity pressure traverse section to measure airflow. Model FMS-W shall utilize single or multiple extruded aluminum wing design sensors.
F. Models FMS-F, FMS-D, FMS-AD and FMS-W shall have the sensors factory installed in 16 gauge sheet metal casings. The casings shall be flanged for circular units up to 24" diameter and for rectangular units. They shall be designed for slip-fitting for oval units and larger circular units. Models FMS-F and FMS-D shall include an aluminum air straightening section factory mounted in the casing.
G. Model FMS-AC shall be designed for retrofit into existing ductwork. Rectangular units are mounted on 16-gauge front and backplates. Round and oval units are mounted in 16 gauge metal casings, and secured within the existing ductwork by placing bands around the duct.
H. Velocity pressure traverse section shall consist of 1" cell air straightening tubes, total pressure sensors and static pressure sensors, all interconnected by copper manifolds to form a traverse which shall equalize and integrate each measurement into one (l) total pressure and one (l) static pressure at the metering port. There shall be one static pressure sensor for each total pressure sensor.
I. A minimum of one static and one total pressure sensor shall be used for every 16 square inches of duct cross sectional area for ducts up to four (4) square feet in cross section. For larger ducts, a minimum of one static and one total pressure sensor shall be used for every 36 square inches of duct cross sectional area up to a maximum as recommended in the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 111.
J. A companion meter, calibrated in cfm, shall be supplied for each airflow measuring station and shall be located (near the local temperature control panel) or (on a column or wall near the station).
K. A portable meter with carrying case complete with hoses and shut-off valves shall be supplied for reading airflow measurement at each station. The Contractor shall extend
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Duct Accessories 15820 Page 13 of 18 SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
plastic or rubber hosing in conduit to a suitable location no more than 5'-0" above the floor. Hose connectors and the station I.D. tag shall be installed at this location.
L. Each airflow measuring station shall have a permanent I.D. tag with the following information:
1. Unit size. 2. Unit designation. 3. Design air quantity. 4. Direction of airflow. 5. Design air velocity.
M. Traverse type airflow measuring station shall be Air Sentinel Model FMS-D, FMS-F, FMSAD, or FMS-AC as scheduled and as manufactured by Farr Filter Corporation, or approved equal by Air Monitor Corporation or Ultratech.
2.25 AIR BAR TYPE AIRFLOW MEASURING STATIONS
A. Provide air bar type air measuring stations as shown on the drawings for the air volumes scheduled. All interconnecting tubes between each air measuring station and any remote meter and/or control shall be provided.
1. The units scheduled are based on the inside (air path) duct dimensions. The Contractor shall be responsible for suitable connections to lined and unlined ducts.
B. Sensing elements shall be made of aluminum except for garage and fume exhaust which shall be of 316 stainless steel. Permanent pressure loss to the system shall not exceed 15 percent of the velocity head at the specified airflow. The flow sensor shall consist of three basic flow sensing chambers -- an upstream high-pressure chamber, high pressure interpolating tube, and single downstream low-pressure tube located on the centerline.
C. The measured velocity pressure when converted to airflows (CFM) shall have an accuracy within 2 percent of full scale throughout the velocity range from 700 to 4,000 feet per minute.
D. Sensors shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to insure accurate reading.
E. Flow sensors for installation and removal in all air duct installations shall be diamond- shaped or round.
F. Each flow element shall be complete with 1/8-inch hose barb and a permanent I.D. tag showing design flow rates, meter reading for design flow rates, metered fluid, line size and tag number, station or location number.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Duct Accessories 15820 Page 14 of 18 SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
G. A companion meter, calibrated in CFM, shall be supplied for each airflow measuring station and shall be located (near the local temperature control panel) or (on a column or wall near the station).
H. A portable meter with carrying case complete with hoses and shutoff valves shall be supplied for reading airflow measurement at each station. The Contractor shall extend plastic or rubber hosing in conduit to a suitable location no more than 5'-0" above the floor. Hose connections and station I.D. tag shall be installed at this location.
I. Each airflow measuring station shall have a permanent I.D. tag with the following information:
1. Unit size. 2. Unit designation. 3. Design air quantity. 4. Direction of airflow. 5. Design air velocity.
J. Air bar type flow elements shall be as manufactured by Dieterich Standard Corporation or approved equal by Farr Filter Corporation or Air Monitor Corporation.
2.26 AIRFLOW MEASURING STATIONS
A. Airflow measuring station shall be furnished as specified and scheduled.
B. Each airflow measuring station shall be installed to meet the manufacturer's minimum installation requirements. Installation shall not amplify the sound level within the duct.
C. Do not install obstructions such as duct thermometers, smoke detectors or duct static pressure sensors within the minimum installation clearance dimensions recommended by the airflow measuring station manufacturer.
D. Provide 1" thick fiberglass duct insulation or 2" thick duct blanket insulation on airflow measuring stations which are attached to insulated or lined duct systems. Where airflow measuring stations are installed within the duct, provide blank-off plates around the perimeter if required and provide sealer all around between the airflow measuring station and the duct.
E. Install the nameplate for each airflow measuring station in a readable location on the exterior of the ductwork.
2.27 DOOR LOUVERS AND TRANSFER GRILLES
A. Door louvers and transfer grilles shall be completely sight-proof with "V" shaped louvers and 20 gauge minimum one-piece steel frames. Louvers shall be rigidly attached to frames and rattle-free. Louvers and frames shall be finished with baked aluminum enamel.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Duct Accessories 15820 Page 15 of 18 SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
B. Louver sizes shown on the drawings have been selected to provide the required airflow at 0.10 inch water gauge maximum. Louvers provided by the Contractor may be of different size than specified, but shall provide the required airflow at 0.1 inch water gauge maximum.
C. Shop drawings shall include manufacturer's published test results indicating airflow and static pressure data. Submittal shall also include an area factor (Ak) for use in balancing with an Alnor Velometer or other airflow instrument.
D. Transfer grilles to be installed in walls with a thickness greater than 2-1/2 inches shall be provided with a single flange frame similar to Titus Model T-700-B. Door louvers (and transfer grilles to be installed in walls less than 2 1/2 inches thick) shall be provided with a companion frame similar to Titus Model T-700-A channel frame with wood molding. Louvers installed in wooden doors shall be increased in size to provide for area lost to molding.
2.28 LOUVERS
A. Louvers will be provided by the Contractor and coordination with the general construction.
B. Frames and blades shall be 0.081-inch thick 6063-T5 alloy extruded aluminum. Blades shall be 35 degree drainable type spaced 3-1/2" on center. Jambs shall be constructed with internal downspouts.
C. Screens shall be provided on the interior of the louver consisting of 1/2" mesh 0.063 inch diameter aluminum wire mounted in a removable aluminum frame.
D. Louvers shall be etched and anodized and finished with one coat of methacrylate lacquer.
E. Louvers shall pass air at 1,100 FPM based on free air with less than 0.19 inch water gauge pressure drop and shall carry less than 0.05 ounce of water per square foot during a 15 minute period when tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500.
F. Louvers shall bear AMCA certified rating seal for both air performance and water penetration.
G. Louvers shall be American Warming and Ventilating Company Model LE-31 6" deep weather louvers or approved equal by Arrow, Penn Ventilator, or Swarthout.
2.29 ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments, and length to suit duct insulation thickness.
B. Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc-plated damper blade bracket; 1/4-inch, zinc-plated operating rod; and a duct-mounted, ball-joint bracket with flat rubber gasket and square- head set screw.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Duct Accessories 15820 Page 16 of 18 SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 to 18 inches to suit duct size.
D. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify locations of walls requiring fire dampers, combination fire/smoke dampers and smoke dampers with architectural drawings.
B. Verify rated walls are ready for damper installation.
C. Verify ducts and equipment installation are ready for accessories.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 15815 “Metal Ducts” for duct construction and pressure class.
B. Provide back-draft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated.
C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 12 x 12 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Review locations prior to fabrication.
D. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
E. Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers and smoke dampers at locations indicated on contract drawings. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges, as required by manufacturer’s U.L. instructions.
F. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 92A.
G. Provide balancing dampers at point on supply, return and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Duct Accessories 15820 Page 17 of 18 SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Demonstrate re-setting of fire, smoke and combination fire/smoke dampers to OWNER's representative.
B. Test and demonstrate performance to the satisfaction of the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION 15820
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Duct Accessories 15820 Page 18 of 18 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 7 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for roof curbs and equipment supports. 2. Section 15050 “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods”. 3. Section 15055 “Motors”. 4. Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for vibration hangers and supports. 5. Section 15075 “Mechanical Identification” for tagging and hazardous warnings. 6. Section 15900 "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control devices. 7. Division 16 Section "Disconnects and Circuit Breakers" for disconnect switches. 8. Division 16 Section "Motor Controllers" for motor starters.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: 1. Equipment Room Filter Vent Sets (Type B) 2. Roof Exhaust Fans (Type C) 3. Roof Exhaust Fans (Type D) 4. Roof Hoods 5. Roof Exhaust Fans (Type E) 6. Roof Hoods 7. Up-Blast Roof Exhaust Fans (Type F) 8. Kitchen Exhaust Fans (Type G) 9. Up-Blast Propeller Roof Exhaust Fans (Type J) 10. Centrifugal Cabinet Exhaust Fans (Type K) 11. In-Line Centrifugal Fans (Type L) 12. Utility Vent Set Fans (Type P) 13. Fan Accessories
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include roof curbs for roof-mounted exhaust fans.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on sea-level conditions.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 1 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
C. Fan Unit Schedule: The following information is described in an equipment schedule on the Drawings. 1. Fan performance data including capacities (based on standard and actual cfm), outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics. 2. Fan arrangement including wheel configuration, inlet and discharge configurations, and required accessories.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Specification Sections.
B. No equipment shall be fabricated or delivered until receipt of approved shop drawings from the Owner.
C. Provide the following information with each shop drawing submission. 1. Complete specification of the equipment which will be provided including all optional equipment. All equipment shall be tagged. Refer to Section 15075 "Mechanical Identification" for further requirements. 2. Submittal data shall show that all fans bear the AMCA Certified Performance Seal for both air and sound performance at the capacities specified on the Drawings. 3. Arrangement drawings showing proposed scroll arrangement, rotation, discharge/drive arrangement, motor location, motor power connection location, access door location and drain connection locations as required. 1. Arrangement drawings including physical dimensions, support locations, identification of each component, and weight of fan assembly at each support location including drive and motor. Provide WR 2 for the fan wheel and drive assemblies, include individual WR 2 for each drive component. 2. Capacity and performance data corrected to actual operating temperature and altitude. Fan curves shall have operating points indicated. Refer to Engineering Service article in this section for actual fan curves and data required. 3. Motor data to verify motor type, efficiency and starting characteristics. 4. Fan noise characteristics including sound power levels for the 8 octave bands and a single sound power A-scale weighted level or sound levels in "Sones" when the fan is operating at its peak horsepower output. Refer to Engineering Service article in this section for further data. 5. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating clearly between manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring. 6. Damper motor data for fan dampers and for in-flight pitch blade controls. 7. List of spare parts for one year's normal maintenance, including drive-belt part numbers where applicable. Include all "off the shelf" readily available purchased items on the list. List shall include subassembly part number (identifiable in maintenance manual or on shop drawings), manufacturer's name, manufacturer's part number and a part description. Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 2 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
8. Installation, operation, maintenance and lubrication instructions in shop manual format.
D. Upon completion of the shop drawing submittal phase of the project, submit to the Owner for approval, three (3) copies of installation, operation and maintenance manuals which shall be in bound printed form. Each manual shall include one approved/reviewed copy of each item listed above.
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that are listed and labeled by UL where available.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that are rated in accordance with AMCA Standard 210 and are licensed to use the AMCA Seal.
D. NEMA Compliance: Provide components required as part of fans that comply with applicable NEMA standards.
E. UL Standard: Provide power ventilators that comply with UL 705.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. The Fan Manufacturer shall warrant all equipment for one (1) year as described herein and as further required in the "Warranty" article of this Specification.
B. Correct all critical defects within 24 hours following the Owner's verbal notification of a problem, for a period of one (1) year after acceptance by the Owner. A critical defect is defined as a defect in fan operation through bearing or shaft failure resulting from bearing burnout, or as a failure in fan operation resulting in belts breaking frequently.
C. Correct all non-critical defects, such as excessive bearing noise or belt set replacement, within 30 days following the Owner's written notice, for a period of one (1) year after acceptance by the Owner.
D. Acceptance date shall be considered date of issuance of a certificate of substantial completion.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 3 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
E. Failure to correct any defective work or equipment within 24 hours or within 30 days, as applicable, will render conduct negligent, in which case the Owner will be entitled to proceed with the correction of such defects at his discretion and to charge the Contractor cost plus 10% of the expenses incurred.
F. The Contractor shall be responsible to repair all damage caused by any defect in the work or equipment, whose repair is covered under warranty. G. The Fan Manufacturer shall coordinate all labor and material provisions of the warranty with the Contractor.
1.7 ENGINEERING SERVICE
A. The Fan Manufacturer shall furnish each fan with a motor which is 30% oversized and with capacity for a 10% increase in air flow and a corresponding 20% increase in total pressure. This increased capacity for each fan shall be based on an air flow and total pressure which are over and above the present and future values as scheduled on the Drawings. The Fan Manufacturer shall provide each fan with a drive which will meet the present capacity condition as scheduled on the Drawings.
B. In addition to the design parameter stated above for increased capacity, the fan motor and drive selection shall be based on the following: 1. All fans shall be non-overloading. 2. The fan motor size shall be based on available sheave sizes, where fixed pitch sheaves are employed on both the motor and fan shafts. I.e. Based on the present or future scheduled condition for airflow and total pressure (whichever is worse) with replacement of the smaller sheave, the fan shall not overload. 3. The fan (single fan arrangements) shall be considered to be non-overloading when, with the fan operating 10 percent faster than the present (or future) scheduled conditions, a decrease in total pressure results in an increase in flow to 130% of the present (or future) scheduled air flow along the fan operating curve without the fan overloading. 4. Where dual fans are employed (two fans operating from a single plenum to another single plenum), the individual fans shall be considered to be non-overloading when, with the fans operating 10 percent faster than the present or future scheduled conditions, the fan is non-overloading on any part of its fan operating curve. 5. Per AMCA Publication 203, the following allowances shall be made for V-Belt Drive Losses:
MOTOR BELT DRIVE MAXIMUM FAN HORSEPOWER LOSS (BHP) BRAKE HORSEPOWER
1/4 0.06 0.19 1/3 0.08 0.25
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 4 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
1/2 0.10 0.40 3/4 0.13 0.62 1.0 0.15 0.85
1.5 0.21 1.29 2.0 0.26 1.74 3.0 0.33 2.67 5.0 0.45 4.55 7.5 0.62 6.88
10 0.80 9.2 15 1.1 13.9 20 1.5 18.5 25 1.8 23.2 30 2.1 27.9
40 2.7 37.3
50 3.3 46.7
60 3.9 56.1
75 4.9 70.1 100 6.3 93.7
125 7.9 117.1 150 9.3 140.7 200 12 188
6. All motors shall be selected to operate with a service factor of 1.0 or less. Motors shall not be designed to operate over nominal motor horsepower.
C. The Fan Manufacturer's engineer shall prepare the following fan performance curves for submission: 1. Fan curve for present operating condition as scheduled on the drawing with proposed drive or fan blade setting. 2. Fan curve for future operating condition as scheduled on the drawing with proposed drive or fan blade setting. 3. Fan curve for fan speed 10 percent faster than for present operating condition, whichever is worse, as scheduled on the drawing with proposed drive or fan blade setting. Note: For proposed drive allow only one drive sheave to be changed.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 5 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
4. For fans with motors 5 horsepower and larger, sound power levels when the fan is operating at its peak horsepower output shall be provided for each of the eight octave bands and for a single A-scale rated level. Power levels shall be in units of "dB re 1pW". Power levels shall be provided for the present condition and the future condition and for the 10 percent faster condition listed above. 5. For fans with motors under 5 horsepower and for roof exhaust fans, sound levels shall be provided in "Sones" or in a manner similar to the larger fans at the Fan Manufacturer's option. 6. Correction factors shall be applied to the above curves for altitudes and for the lowest operating temperature. 7. Fan curves shall include allowances for fan inlet boxes, fan inlet cones, fan outlet shutters and fan discharge cones which are provided by the Fan Manufacturer in conjunction with the individual fans. 8. Fan curves shall be constructed as follows: a. Flow in SCFM (ACFM) on the horizontal. b. Total or static pressure in inches of water gauge on the vertical. c. Fan brake horsepower at the fan shaft on the vertical (not including drive losses). d. Fan mechanical efficiency on the vertical. e. Any correction factors for the above shall be tabulated on the curve. f. Modifications to the above with varying positions of the of in-flight pitch fan blade controls from full open to full closed (if equipped). g. A statement of the fan speed, the maximum fan speed, and of the maximum anticipated fan brake horsepower for the fan speed listed along any part of the fan curve. h. A statement of fan operating point with each of the four parameters (SCFM), (ACFM), Pressure, BHP, and Mechanical efficiency) listed. i. Note to Fan Manufacturer, generic fan curves which cover many sizes and speeds are not acceptable. All curves shall be tailored to the individual fan.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances.
B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated, and fans have been commissioned.
1.9 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.
B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 6 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Filter Vent Sets: a. Greenheck b. Buffalo Forge c. Hartzell 2. Roof Exhaust Fans and Roof Hoods: a. Greenheck b. Buffalo Forge c. Hartzell 3. Kitchen Exhaust Fans: a. Greenheck b. Acme c. Cook (Loren) Co. d. Penn Ventilator (for Low Profile Kitchen Exhaust Fans) 4. Up-blast Roof Exhaust Fans: a. Greenheck b. Cook (Loren) Co. 5. Centrifugal Cabinet Exhaust Fans: a. Greenheck b. Cook (Loren) Co. 6. In-Line Centrifugal Fans: a. Greenheck b. Cook (Loren) Co. 7. Utility Vent Set: a. Greenheck b. Cook (Loren) Co. c. New York Blower
2.2 AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT-GENERAL
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 7 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
A. All air moving equipment shall be licensed to bear the AMCA seal. The ratings for the fans shall be based on tests which are made in accordance with AMCA Standard 210 and which comply with the requirements of the AMCA Certified Rating Program. Fans shall be AMCA certified for both air moving capacity and sound performance.
B. All fan drive arrangements and motor positions listed on the drawings shall be based on AMCA Standards.
C. Refer to the drawings for actual fan scroll arrangements.
D. All fans or the fan motors shall bear the Underwriter's Laboratory Label.
2.3 FAN DRIVES
A. For belt-driven fans serving main air handling units, the Fan Manufacturer shall provide Vbelt drives with a minimum service factor of 2.0 with all belts in service and of 1.3 with one belt broken. Drive horsepower ratings shall be based on the nominal fan motor horsepower.
B. For all other applications the Fan Manufacturer shall provide V-belt drives with a service factor of 1.65 minimum based on nominal fan motor horsepower.
C. V-belt drives for motor sizes up to 25 horsepower shall be adjustable type (plus or minus 10 percent) with the fan sheave being fixed and the motor sheave being adjustable; the drive shall be selected with the fan operating near the mid-point of the drive sheave based on the performance scheduled under the present condition.
D. V-belt drives for motor sizes 30 horsepower and larger shall be fixed sheave type for both the fan and the motor and shall be selected based on the performance scheduled under the present condition.
E. All exposed V-belt drives shall be enclosed in an OSHA approved removable belt cover with tachometer openings.
F. The Fan Manufacturer shall provide all V-belts in matched sets for all initial installations and for warranty work. G. Under the base contract and after initial balancing, the Fan Manufacturer shall furnish the Air Balancing Subcontractor with the correct fixed pitch sheaves with belts to match the air balance requirements. These sheaves shall be installed by the Contractor at no additional charge to the Owner.
2.4 PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND FINISHES
A. Unless otherwise noted, all interior carbon steel surfaces in contact with the airstream shall be finished with the Fan Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 8 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
B. Unless otherwise noted, fans or fan parts constructed of aluminum or stainless steel will not require interior or exterior surfaces to be painted.
C. Fans located indoors shall have the Fan Manufacturers standard enamel finish applied to the exterior of the fan.
D. Standard fans located outdoors shall have the exterior of the fan finished with the same finish as the interior except the finished shall be of mils thickness scheduled. E. Fan shafts shall not be painted.
2.5 SPARK RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION
A. Fans shall be furnished with all parts of the fan, which are in contact with the air or gas handled, made of non-ferrous material to meet AMCA Type A spark-resistant construction.
B. Fans shall be furnished with a non-ferrous wheel and ring around the opening through which the shaft passes, to meet AMCA Type B spark-resistant construction.
C. Fans shall be furnished with a non-ferrous inlet cone and housing cover plate on the side opposite the inlet, to meet AMCA Type C spark-resistant construction.
2.6 EQUIPMENT ROOM FILTER VENT SETS (TYPE B)
A. Provide where shown and scheduled on the drawings filter vent sets with filter boxes which house replaceable filters to filter air supplied to equipment rooms. B. Vent set housings shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel sheet metal with hinged access door for replacement of filters. Refer to Access Door article in this section for further requirements.
C. Propeller fans shall be as specified previously in this section.
D. Filters shall be permanent washable media impingement type filters ASHRAE 30 percent pleated extended media type filters. Minimum filter thickness shall be 2 inches. Maximum filter face velocity shall be 250 feet per minute. See Section 15861 “Air Filters”. E. Fans shall be furnished with rear guard for fan blades, with motorized inlet damper constructed with edge sealed aluminum blades, nylon bushings and stainless steel pins, and with heavy gauge aluminum inlet cowl with bird screen.
F. Fans shall have integral UL listed disconnect switch mounted on the fan housing. Switches shall be prewired to the motors at the factory.
G. Fans shall be AMCA-certified for both air and sound performance at the capacities listed on the drawings.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 9 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
H. Fans shall be UL listed and shall have UL label affixed.
2.7 ROOF EXHAUST FANS (TYPE C)
A. Provide direct drive 1750 rpm only or V-belt drive as scheduled centrifugal roof exhaust fans as scheduled on the drawings.
B. Fan housings shall be constructed of minimum 12 gauge spun aluminum and shall be completely weatherproof. Fan wheels shall be of aluminum construction, shall be backwardly inclined, non-overloading centrifugal design and shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The motor and fan assembly shall be attached to the fan base with vibration isolation mountings.
C. Fan drive shall be direct type or V-belt driven. V-belt drives shall be equipped with variable pitch motor sheaves. Refer to Fan Drive article in this section for further requirements.
D. All motors under 1/2 horsepower shall be single phase type with permanent split-capacitor design. Motors 1/2 horsepower and over shall be 3-phase. Refer to Section 15055 "Motors" for fan motor requirements.
E. Each fan shall be equipped with a motorized damper with felt edges and transformer, and 3/4 inch expanded aluminum bird screen. Damper shall open when fan is started.
F. Each fan base shall incorporate an integral aluminum curb cap/rolled venturi inlet for mounting on a roof curb. The curb cab shall be hinged to the roof curb using a sub-base for access to the damper and ductwork below. Each fan shall be provided with a 15-inch high roof curb. Refer to Roof Curb article in this section for further requirements. G. Fans shall have integral UL listed disconnect device mounted adjacent to motors. Switches shall be prewired to the motors at the factory.
H. Fans shall be AMCA-certified for both air and sound performance at the capacities listed on the Drawings.
I. Fans shall be UL listed and shall have UL label affixed.
2.8 ROOF EXHAUST FANS (TYPE D) A. Provide low profile, mushroom design V-belt drive centrifugal roof exhaust fans as scheduled on the drawings.
B. Fan housings shall be constructed of heavy gauge fabricated aluminum sheet metal and shall be completely weatherproof. Fan wheels shall be of aluminum construction, shall be backwardly inclined, non-overloading centrifugal design and shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The motor and fan assembly shall be attached to the fan base with vibration isolation mountings.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 10 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
C. V-belt drives shall be equipped with variable pitch motor sheaves. Refer to Fan Drive article in this section for further requirements.
D. All motors under 1/2 horsepower shall be single phase type with permanent split-capacitor design. Motors 1/2 horsepower and over shall be 3-phase. Refer to Section 15055 "Motors" for fan motor requirements.
E. Each fan shall be equipped with a motorized damper with felt edges and transformer, and 3/4 inch expanded aluminum bird screen. Damper shall open when fan is started.
F. Each fan base shall incorporate an integral steel curb cap/rolled venturi inlet for mounting on a roof curb. The curb cap shall be hinged to the roof curb using a sub-base for access to the damper and ductwork below. Each fan shall be provided with a 21-inch high roof curb. Refer to Roof Curb article in this section for further requirements.
G. Fans shall have integral UL listed disconnect device mounted adjacent to motors. Switches shall be prewired to the motors at the factory.
H. Fans shall be AMCA-certified for both air and sound performance at the capacities listed on the Drawings.
I. Fans shall be UL listed and shall have UL label affixed.
2.9 ROOF HOODS
A. Provide low profile, mushroom design roof hoods as specified on the drawings.
B. Roof hoods shall be constructed of heavy gauge fabricated aluminum sheet metal and shall be completely weatherproof. Hoods shall be provided complete with all guy wires and accessories necessary for the installation. C. Each hood shall be equipped with a motorized damper with felt edges, a hinged curb cap hood arrangement, a backdraft damper, and 3/4 inch exposed aluminum bird screen. Refer to Section 15900 "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for operation of damper.
D. Each exhaust hood shall be factory-provided with 1" thickness fiberglass insulation on the underside of the hood and at the interior of the airshaft.
E. Each exhaust hood shall be provided with a minimum 15-inch high roof curb; curb shall also be sufficient height to maintain a minimum 18 inch distance between bottom of hood and roof surface. Refer to Roof Curb article in this section for further requirements. F. Each supply hood shall be provided with an extended throat collar and a 15" high roof curb, as required to maintain a minimum 36" distance between the bottom of the hood and the roof surface, per the Department of Health and Human Services requirements for air intakes on roofs. Refer to Roof Curb article in this section for further requirements.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 11 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
2.10 ROOF EXHAUST FANS (TYPE E)
A. Provide low profile, louvered design V-belt drive centrifugal roof exhaust fans as scheduled on the drawings.
B. Fan housings shall be constructed of extruded aluminum sidewall louvers, a formed aluminum roof cap, and shall be completely weatherproof. Fan wheels shall be of aluminum construction, shall be backwardly inclined, non-overloading centrifugal design and shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The motor and fan assembly shall be attached to the fan base with vibration isolation mountings.
C. V-belt drives shall be equipped with variable pitch motor sheaves. Refer to Fan Drive article in this section for further requirements.
D. All motors under 1/2 horsepower shall be single phase type with permanent split-capacitor design. Motors 1/2 horsepower and over shall be 3-phase. Refer to Section 15055 "Motors" for fan motor requirements.
E. Each fan shall be equipped with a motorized damper with felt edges and transformers, and 3/4 inch expanded aluminum bird screen. Damper shall open when fan is started.
F. Each fan base shall incorporate an integral aluminum curb cap/rolled venturi inlet for mounting on a roof curb. The curb cap shall be hinged to the roof curb using a sub-base for access to the damper and ductwork below. Each fan shall be provided with a 15-inch high roof curb. Refer to Roof Curb article in this section for further requirements.
G. Fans shall have integral UL listed disconnect device mounted adjacent to motors. Switches shall be prewired to the motors at the factory. H. Fan housing shall have a mill finish.
I. Fans shall be AMCA-certified for both air and sound performance at the capacities listed on the Drawings.
J. Fans shall be UL listed and shall have UL label affixed.
2.11 ROOF HOODS
A. Provide low profile, louvered design roof hoods as scheduled on the drawings.
B. Roof hoods shall be constructed of extruded aluminum louvers, a formed aluminum roof cap, and shall be completely weatherproof. Roof cap shall be removable (hinged). C. Each hood shall be equipped with a motorized damper with felt edges or an automatic backdraft damper as scheduled, and 3/4 inch expanded aluminum bird screen. Refer to Section 15900 “HVAC Instrumentation and Controls” for operation of damper.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 12 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
D. Each supply hood shall be provided with an extended throat collar and a 15" high roof curb as required to maintain a minimum 36" distance between the bottom of the hood and the roof surface, per the Department of Health and Human Services requirements for air intake on roofs. Refer to Roof Curb article in this section for further requirements.
E. Each exhaust hood shall be provided with a all-weather shield curb cap and a minimum 15-inch high roof curb. Refer to Roof Curb article in this section for further requirements. F. Roof hoods shall have a mill finish.
2.12 UP-BLAST ROOF EXHAUST FANS (TYPE F)
A. Provide up-blast V-belt drive centrifugal roof exhaust fans for kitchen application as scheduled on the drawings. Each fan shall be installed in strict conformance to the requirements of NFPA 96 and applicable local Code.
B. The fans shall be expressly engineered for handling hot, grease laden and humid air. The fan motor compartment shall be insulated ventilated type with the motor compartment separated from the fan air stream. A motor shaft seal shall be provided with separate heat shield.
C. Fan housings shall be constructed of minimum 12 gauge spun aluminum and shall be completely weatherproof. Fan wheels shall be constructed of aluminum, and shall be backwardly inclined, non-overloading centrifugal design and shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The motor and fan assembly shall be attached to the fan base with vibration isolating mountings.
D. Each fan shall be equipped with a variable pitch motor sheave. Refer to Fan Drive article in this section for further requirements.
E. All motors under 1/2 horsepower shall be single phase type with permanent split capacitor design. Motors 1/2 horsepower and over shall be 3 phase. Motors shall be Class H insulated, forced cooled with outdoor air through breather tubes built into the fan housing. Refer to Section 15055 "Motors" for fan motor requirements.
F. Each fan base shall incorporate an integral aluminum curb cap for mounting on a roof curb. The curb cap shall be hinged to the roof curb using a sub-base for access to the ductwork below. Each fan shall be provided with a minimum 18-inch high roof curb or a 15-inch high roof curb and a 12-inch high ventilated pedestal. Refer to the Roof Curb article in this section for further requirements. The discharge of the fan shall be a minimum of 40 inches above the roof.
G. Fans shall have integral UL listed disconnect device mounted adjacent to motors. Switches shall be prewired to motors at the factory.
H. Fans shall be equipped with a grease collection trough at the base of the fan housing.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 13 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
I. Fans shall be AMCA-certified for both air and sound performance at the capacities listed on the Drawings.
J. Fans shall be UL listed and shall have UL label affixed.
2.13 KITCHEN EXHAUST FANS (TYPE G)
A. Provide low profile up-blast V-belt drive centrifugal roof exhaust fans for kitchen application as scheduled on the drawings. Each fan shall be installed in strict conformance to the requirements of NFPA 96.
B. The fans shall be expressly engineered for handling hot, grease laden and humid air. The fan motor compartment shall be insulated ventilated type with the motor compartment separated from the fan air stream. A motor shaft seal shall be provided with separate heat shield.
C. Fan housings shall be constructed of heavy gauge fabricated aluminum sheet metal siding and roof cap and shall be completely weatherproof. Fan wheels shall be constructed of aluminum, and shall be backwardly inclined, non-overloading centrifugal design and shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The motor and fan assembly shall be attached to the fan base with vibration isolating mountings.
D. Each fan shall be equipped with a variable pitch motor sheave. Refer to Fan Drive article in this section for further requirements.
E. All motors under 1/2 horsepower shall be single phase type permanent split capacitor design. Motors 1/2 horsepower and over shall be 3-phase. Motors shall be Class H insulated, forced cooled with outdoor air through ventilation passages built into the fan housing. Refer to Section 15055 "Motors" for fan motor requirements.
F. Each fan base shall incorporate an integral “galv-alum” galvanized/aluminized steel curb cap for mounting on a roof curb. The curb cap shall be hinged to the roof curb using a subbase for access to the ductwork below. Each fan shall be provided with a minimum 21inch high roof curb or a 12-inch high roof curb and a 12-inch high ventilated pedestal. Refer to Roof Curb article in this section for further requirements. The discharge of the fan shall be a minimum of 40 inches above the roof.
G. Fans shall have integral UL listed disconnect device mounted adjacent to motors. Switches shall be prewired to motors at the factory. H. Fans shall be equipped with a discharge cowl with automatic backdraft damper and a grease collection container at the base of the fan housing.
I. Fans shall be AMCA-certified for both air and sound performance at the capacities listed on the Drawings.
J. Fans shall be UL listed and shall have UL label affixed. Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 14 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
2.14 UP-BLAST PROPELLER ROOF EXHAUST FANS (TYPE J) A. Provide up-blast direct drive (1750 rpm only) or V-belt drive propeller roof exhaust fans as scheduled on the drawings.
B. Fan throat shall be constructed of minimum 12 gauge aluminum sheet metal and shall be completely weatherproof. Fan blades shall be constructed of cast aluminum or fabricated steel and shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The motor and fan assembly shall be attached to the fan base with vibration isolation mountings.
C. Fan drive shall be direct type or V-belt driven. V-belt drives shall be equipped with variable pitch motor sheaves. Refer to Fan Drive article in this section for further requirements. 1. Drives for fans shall be mounted remotely with respect to the fan throat when scheduled. Fans with remote mounted motors shall be provided with belt and bearing enclosures inside the fan and a weatherproof enclosure for the motor located outside the fan.
D. All motors under 1/2 horsepower shall be single phase type with permanent split-capacitor design. Motors 1/2 horsepower and over shall be 3 phase. Refer to "Motors" Section for fan motor requirements.
E. Each fan shall be equipped with a clam shell damper outlet and windband. Unless otherwise noted, damper outlet and windband shall be constructed of aluminum. Refer to article on Fan Outlet Shutters article in this Section for further requirements.
F. Each fan base shall incorporate an integral aluminum curb cap/rolled venturi inlet for mounting on a roof curb. The curb cap shall be hinged to the roof curb using a sub-base for access to the damper and ductwork below. Each fan shall be provided with a 15-inch high roof curb. Refer to Roof Curb article in this section for further requirements.
G. Fans shall have integral UL listed disconnect device mounted adjacent to motors. Switches shall be prewired to the motors at the factory.
H. Fans shall be AMCA-certified for both air and sound performance at the capacities listed on the Drawings.
I. Fans shall be UL listed and shall have UL label affixed.
2.15 CENTRIFUGAL CABINET EXHAUST FANS (TYPE K)
A. Provide direct drive cabinet exhaust fans as scheduled on the drawings. B. Fan housings shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel, shall be acoustically insulated, and shall have a maximum sound level rating of 5 sones. The housing shall be configured as shown on the drawings.
C. Fans shall be supplied complete with integral backdraft damper, centrifugal fan wheel, terminal box, power cord, and plug-type disconnect receptacle inside the housing. Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 15 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
D. Entire fan, motor and wheel assembly shall be easily removable without disturbing the housing. Motor shall not exceed 1050 rpm, shall be suitably grounded and shall be mounted on rubber-in-shear vibration isolators. Motors shall be permanent split capacitor type suitable for 115 Volt single phase power.
E. Wall caps, roof caps, brick vents, and inlet grilles shall be provided where required.
F. Each fan shall be provided with a mark-time, speed control, or ON/OFF switch as indicated on the drawings. The switch shall be wall mounted in the room served.
G. Fans shall be AMCA-certified for both air and sound performance at the capacities listed on the Drawings.
H. Fans shall be UL listed and shall have UL label affixed.
2.16 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS (TYPE L)
A. Provide V-belt drive in line centrifugal fans as scheduled on the drawings.
B. Fan housings and inlet venturi shall be square and shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel and shall include square or round duct mounting collars as required. Fan housing shall have an access door conveniently located to provide full access to the interior of the fan without removing the motor or drive. A threaded drain connection shall be provided at the lowest point in the fan housing.
C. Fan wheels shall be constructed of aluminum, shall be backwardly inclined, non- overloading centrifugal design and shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
D. Each fan shall be equipped with a variable pitch motor sheave. Refer to Fan Drive article in this section for further requirements.
E. Fan bearings and pulleys shall be enclosed by a protective shroud; bearings shall be provided with extended lube lines to the outside of the fan housing.
F. All motors under 1/2 horsepower shall be single phase type with permanent split capacitor design. Motors 1/2 horsepower and larger shall be 3 phase. Refer to Section 15055 "Motors" for fan motor requirements.
G. Each fan shall be provided with hanger or support brackets for mounting the fan in the horizontal or vertical position shown on the drawings. Each fan shall be provided with rubber in shear or spring type vibration isolators; refer to Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for further requirements.
H. Factory built inlet vanes shall be provided as indicated on the fan schedule. Refer to Fan Volume Control article in this section for further requirements.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 16 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
I. Each fan shall be provided with a motorized damper, an outlet shutter, an inlet grille or, a discharge grille as indicated on the drawings.
J. Fans shall have a UL listed disconnect switch mounted adjacent to the motors. Switches shall be prewired to the motors at the factory. K. Fans shall be AMCA-certified for both air and sound performance at the capacities listed on the Drawings.
L. Fans shall be UL listed and shall have UL label affixed.
2.17 UTILITY VENT SET FANS (TYPE P)
A. Provide utility vent set fans as scheduled on the drawings. Fans shall be furnished with the size, housing arrangement, and drive arrangement as shown on the drawings.
B. Fans shall be fully assembled, prepackaged, single width single inlet blowers, complete with belt drive and motor.
C. Fan housings shall be fabricated from heavy gauge galvanized steel sheet metal with lock formed seams. Housing inlets shall be fully streamlined. The housing and bearing supports shall be constructed of welded structural steel members. A threaded drain connection shall be provided at the lowest point of the fan housing. 1. Fans with housings, 19 inches wide and greater, shall be provided with access doors. Refer to Access Door article in this section for further requirements.
D. Fan wheels shall be constructed of aluminum, shall be backwardly inclined, non- overloading centrifugal design and shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
E. Bearings shall be grease-lubricated ball type, selected for 200,000 hours of L-10 life.
F. Fan shall be furnished complete with removable shaft covers, adjustable motor mount, motor, adjustable "V" belt drive, shaft seals, drive belt covers with tachometer openings, and vibration isolators. Refer to Fan Drives article in this section for further requirements. Refer to Section 15055 "Motors" for motor requirements. Refer to Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation requirements.
G. Factory built inlet vanes shall be provided as indicated on the fan schedule. Refer to Fan Volume control article in this section for further requirements.
H. Fans located outdoors shall be provided with a protective weather hood for the motor and drive and an outlet shutter. Refer to articles in this section for further requirements. I. Provide disconnect switch for each fan located on the roof. Refer to article in Section 15055 "Motors" of this Specification and coordinate with the Electrical Contractor.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 17 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
J. Refer to other articles in this section for special coatings and for spark resistant construction requirements.
K. Fans shall be AMCA-certified for both air and sound performance at the capacities listed on the Drawings.
2.18 FAN INLET BOXES, INLET CONES AND OUTLET CONES
A. Fans when scheduled shall be furnished with inlet boxes, inlet cones and outlet cones. B. Each inlet box, inlet cone and outlet cone shall be furnished with a factory-installed access door for servicing fan bearings and for blade adjustment. Refer to Access Door article in this section for further requirements.
C. Fan inlet boxes, inlet cones and outlet cones shall be furnished by the Fan Manufacturer. The performance of these devices (flow and pressure drop characteristics) shall be guaranteed by the Fan Manufacturer.
D. The Fan Manufacturer shall furnish fan inlet boxes, whether or not indicated on the Drawings, for all fans which are configurated with a 90 degree turn at the air inlet.
E. Fan inlet boxes, inlet cones, and outlet cones shall meet or exceed SMACNA construction and gauge requirements.
F. The fan inlet boxes, inlet cones and outlet cones shall be constructed with the same materials, protective coatings and finishes, as the fans for which they are provided.
G. The fan inlet boxes, inlet cones, and outlet cones shall be constructed of the same material thickness as the adjoining duct system.
2.19 FAN VOLUME CONTROLS
A. Adjust all fan performance curves to reflect the installation of these devices on each individual fan. i.e. Performance curve should reflect the resulting performance of the fan and device as if they were a single device.
B. Refer to Section 15900 “HVAC Instrumentation and Controls” and Section 15051 “Motors and Variable Frequency Drives” for further requirements on fan volume control adjustments.
2.20 FAN OUTLET SHUTTERS
A. Fan outlet shutters for centrifugal fans and horizontal axial fans shall be the Fan Manufacturer's standard hooded outlet shutter (when scheduled). Dampers shall be weighted backdraft type and provided with felted edges to insure weathertight shut-off. The
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 18 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
damper blades shall be linked so that the assembly operates as a unit. The dampers shall be protected by a cowl which shall protect the damper mechanism against rain and sleet.
B. Fan outlet shutters for vertical (upward flow) axial fans shall be the Fan Manufacturer's standard clam shell damper outlet complete with stack hood.
C. All fan outlet shutters, cowls, and stack hoods shall be constructed of the same or better materials as the fan casing interior or wheels.
2.21 WEATHER HOODS
A. All fans located outdoors shall be provided with the Fan Manufacturer's standard ventilated weather hood for protection of both the fan motor and drive.
2.22 ACCESS DOORS
A. All access doors for fans with scheduled total pressures of 2 inches or less shall be provided with hinged, gasketed access doors with cam-type levers.
B. All access doors for fans with over 2 inches total pressure shall be provided with gasketed access doors with steel stud fasteners.
C. All hardware (i.e. hinges, latches, studs, and nuts) for access doors located outdoors shall be 304 stainless steel.
2.23 SPLIT HOUSINGS
A. Where split housings are called for on the drawings the Fan Manufacturer shall coordinate with the Contractor to determine the best way to split the housing to ensure that the fan can be removed from the mechanical equipment room through available access means.
2.24 ROOF CURBS
A. The individual Fan Manufacturer(s) shall furnish prefabricated roof curbs for each roof fan and hood. Curbs shall be of box section design, 18 gauge galvanized steel with continuous welded corner seams, factory installed wood nailer and insulated with 1-1/2 inch, 3 pound density rigid fiberglass board. Height of curb shall be determined in field (15" minimum).
B. The base of each curb shall be pitched to match the roof pitch while maintaining a level fan installation.
C. Curb shall be Fan Manufacturer's standard curb.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 19 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
D. In addition, the roof curbs for fans shall be provided with the Fan Manufacturer's standard sound attenuation material as scheduled.
2.25 FAN CONSTRUCTION CLASSIFICATION
A. Fan construction classification shall be based on AMCA Class Standard AS2408-69. B. Minimum fan construction class for this project is Class II or III.
C. Fans shall be constructed in accordance with the following schedule: 1. Use Class I for outlet velocities up to 2000 FPM or pressures up to 2.5" w.g. 2. Use Class II for outlet velocities from 2000 up to 2750 FPM or pressures from 2.5" w.g. up to 4.5" w.g. 3. Use Class III for outlet velocities over 2750 FPM or pressures over 4.5" w.g.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements of installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the power ventilators. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control devices are specified in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 1. Support utility set fans on concrete housekeeping bases or roof supports using neoprene pads. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in housekeeping base. 2. Support utility set fans on concrete housekeeping bases or roof supports using housed spring isolators. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in housekeeping base. 3. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. a. Installation of roof curbs is specified in Division 7 Sections. 4. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods and vibration isolation springs. 5. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure using steel wire or metal straps.
C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
D. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 15075 "Mechanical
Identification."
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 20 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
3.3 HOUSEKEEPING BASES
A. Construct concrete housekeeping pads as follows: 1. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base 4 inches larger, in both directions, than the overall dimensions of the supported unit. 2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36, size and location as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing. Anchor or key to floor slab. 3. Form concrete pads with framing lumber with form-release compounds. Chamfer top edge and corners of pad. 4. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate securing units. 5. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use Portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150, 4000-psi compressive strength, and normal-weight aggregate. 6. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC Surface Preparation Specifications SP 2 or SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal primer.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in Section 15815 “Metal Ducts” and Section 15820 “Duct Accessories”. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.
C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly of components and installation of fans, including duct and electrical connections, and to report results in writing.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Lubricate bearings.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 21 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
3.7 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet.
3.8 START-UP A. The Fan Manufacturer or his authorized service representative shall provide start-up service for each roof exhaust and cabinet exhaust fan with a scheduled capacity of 3/4 horsepower or larger. Refer to Section 15995 “Commissioning of Mechanical Systems”.
B. The Contractor shall provide start-up service for all other fans.
C. Lubricate and start-up all fans in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. Prepare and submit for approval a completed start-up data sheet or checklist for each equipment item. The Fan Manufacturer's representative shall be present at fan start-up as stated above and shall sign the start-up data sheet certifying correct installation and startup. Do not energize any large 3-phase fan motors except in the presence of the Fan Manufacturer's authorized service representative.
D. Start-up service shall, as a minimum, include the following: 1. Lock out power source. 2. Verify that mounting arrangement and duct connections are adequately installed in accordance with recognized acceptable installation practices and with the Fan Manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Check adjustable pitch vane axial fans for proper blade setting positions. 4. Check and tighten all securing bolts. 5. Spin wheel to verify that rotation is free and that the wheel does not rub or bind. 6. Inspect wheel to verify proper rotation for fan design. 7. Check all set screws and tighten, if necessary. 8. Check lubrication. 9. Verify all electrical power connections. 10. Check V-belt drive or coupling for proper alignment. 11. Check V-belt drive for proper tension. For construction projects with 3 months or longer between fan shipment and start-up, all belt-driven fans shall be furnished with V-belts shipped loose. The Fan Manufacturer shall provide a factory-trained service representative for tightening the belts in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. The Contractor shall check belt tension during the second and seventh day's operation and re-adjust belts, as may be required, to maintain proper tension as directed by the Fan Manufacturer. 12. Remove all foreign loose material in ductwork leading to and from the fan and in the fan itself.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 22 of 23 SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
13. Disengage all shipping fasteners on vibration isolation equipment. 14. Check safety guards to insure they are properly secured. 15. Secure all access doors to the fan and the ductwork. 16. Switch electrical supply "on" and allow fan to reach full speed. 17. Check carefully for correct wheel rotation, proper belt alignment, proper lubrication, proper amperage and voltage readings, excessive vibration and unusual noise. 18. Tabulate voltage and amperage readings. 19. Physically check each fan at start-up and shut-down to insure no abnormal or problem conditions exist. 20. If any problem arises, switch the fan "off" immediately. Lock out the electrical supply, check carefully for the cause of the problem and correct as necessary. E. The Fan Manufacturer shall provide the services of an authorized service representative for one blade pitch adjustment of each adjustable pitch vane-axial fan under the base contract. This service will not be used for adjusting blades to settings shown on the equipment submittals; blade settings, as shown on submittals, shall be provided at the factory before shipment of fans.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
B. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Section "Contract Closeout."
C. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice. D. Demonstrate operation of power ventilators. Conduct walking tour of the Project. Briefly identify location and describe function, operation, and maintenance of each power ventilator.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Power Ventilators 15838 Page 23 of 23
SECTION 15855
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts. 2. Section 15820 "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. 3. Section 15950 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ADC 1062 (Air Diffusion Council) - Certification, Rating and Test Manual.
B. AMCA 500 (Air Movement and Control Association) - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
C. ASHRAE 70 (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers) - Method of Testing for Rating the Airflow Performance of Outlets and Inlets.
D. SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association) - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.
B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be located in a sidewall, ceiling, or floor.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 15855 Page 1 of 10 SECTION 15855
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate construction, finish, and mounting details. 2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for each type of air outlet and inlet. 3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 4. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and methods of assembly of components.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and wall elevations drawn to scale to show locations and coordination of diffusers, registers, and grilles with other items installed in ceilings and walls.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: Of diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's standard sizes, showing the full range of colors. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers, registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered.
B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 15855 Page 2 of 10 SECTION 15855
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering diffusers, registers and grilles that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Titus 2. Price 3. Krueger 4. Air Factors
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
B. All diffusers, registers and grilles shall be the product of a single manufacturer unless otherwise noted.
2.4 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS - GENERAL
A. All diffusers, grilles and registers shall be selected to diffuse the air uniformly throughout the occupied space. The air shall be introduced at a temperature differential of approximately 20 deg. F and shall be diffused at the 5-foot level to a velocity of not greater than 50 fpm and a temperature differential of not greater than 2 deg. F, when compared with mean room temperature.
B. All diffusers, grilles and registers shall be provided with frames which are compatible with the adjacent ceiling at no additional cost to the Owner. The supplier shall carefully examine the reflected ceiling plans in the general construction drawings, the room finish schedule and any other source of information including visiting the job site to make this determination.
C. Provide engineering data prepared by the Diffuser Manufacturer of aspiration ability; including temperature and velocity transverses; throw and drop for each unit; noise criteria ratings for each unit size; free area, and Ak balancing factor. All engineering data shall be certified by ADPI, ASHRAE, and ANSI.
D. All diffusers, registers and grilles shall be provided with the manufacturer's standard available anodized or baked enamel finish. Provide with each shop drawing submission for steel and aluminum grilles, registers and diffusers, two (2) color finish charts showing the manufacturer's available satin anodized finish or baked enamel paint finish. Final color shall be selected from these color finish charts by the Owner.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 15855 Page 3 of 10 SECTION 15855
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
E. Manufacturer's names and catalog numbers given hereafter are intended to establish type, size, performance and standard of quality.
2.5 LINEAR DIFFUSERS
A. Supply diffusers shall be of the dimensions shown on the plans and shall distribute air in the patterns outlined in the schedules and shown on the drawings. Units shall have performance ratings of air volume, static pressure, noise criteria and throw as indicated. Units shall be guaranteed not to "dump" at the lowest CFMs indicated.
B. Diffuser vanes shall be constructed of ‘galv-alum’ or suitable similar rust inhibited steel. Diffuser vanes shall be removable from the plenum. Thermal and acoustic insulation shall be a minimum of 0.5 inch thick glass fiber material with its surface treated to prevent erosion. All material shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A. The diffuser frame shall be suitable for the ceiling type in which it is to be installed (no plenums).
C. Diffuser inlets shall be provided with volume dampers. Diffusers installed with terminal units equipped with volume dampers need not be equipped with inlet dampers.
D. Diffuser vanes shall be supplied with painted surfaces over rust inhibited steel. Exposed portion of diffusers shall be painted with a semi-gloss (white) baked enamel finish.
2.6 EXTRUDED ALUMINUM LINEAR DIFFUSERS
A. Diffuser frame and inner members shall be constructed of extruded aluminum. Diffuser throws shall be completely adjustable using manually adjustable pattern controller and volume control vanes. Slots shall be 3/4 inch wide.
B. Factory built plenum casings, where employed, shall be constructed of ‘galv-alum’ or similar rust inhibited steel. Thermal and acoustical insulation shall be a minimum of 0.5 inch thick glass fiber material with its surface treated to prevent erosion. All material shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A.
C. Diffuser inlets shall be provided with volume dampers. Diffusers installed with terminal units equipped with volume dampers need not be equipped with inlet dampers.
D. Continuous diffuser installations shall be furnished complete with air distributor plenums, mounting brackets, alignment strips and ends for assembly and erection.
E. Diffusers shall be painted with semi-gloss baked enamel finish of a color selected by the Owner.
2.7 CEILING DIFFUSERS
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 15855 Page 4 of 10 SECTION 15855
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
A. Diffusers shall be directional type selected for the throws, air volumes and patterns as shown on the Drawings. Diffusers shall have a removable core, 0.051 inch thickness frame and shall be constructed of extruded aluminum.
B. The frame shall be beveled drop-type for surface mounting or as required to match other ceiling types.
C. Each diffuser shall be provided complete with combination volume control and equalization grid.
D. Diffusers shall be painted with a semi-gloss white baked enamel finish.
2.8 SECURITY GRADE CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Diffusers shall have a minimum 12-gauge steel face plate with 13/16" square holes spaced maximum 1" on center. Diffusers shall be all steel construction, 4-way blow pattern with flanges for surface-mounting.
B. Each diffuser shall be provided complete with an opposed blade damper, adjustable from the diffuser face and a duct mounted equalizing deflector.
C. Diffusers shall be secured with tamperproof screws.
D. Diffusers shall be painted with a semi-gloss baked enamel finish of a color selected by the Owner.
2.9 PERFORATED DIFFUSERS
A. Diffusers shall be of square or rectangular design as shown on the drawings. Perforated face plate shall be hinged and removable without the use of tools. Diffuser frame and faceplate shall be constructed of steel.
B. The frame shall be beveled drop type for surface mounting or as required to match other ceiling types.
C. Diffusers shall be complete with adjustable internal deflecting vanes and opposed blade volume damper with equalizer.
D. Frame and diffuser face shall be painted with semi-gloss baked enamel finish of a color selected by the Owner.
2.10 LAMINAR FLOW DIFFUSERS
A. Laminar flow diffusers for use in high volume applications shall be of the sizes indicated on the drawings. The design of the laminar flow diffusers shall be such that it precludes aspiration at the face of the diffuser and produces an even distribution of conditioned air
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 15855 Page 5 of 10 SECTION 15855
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
over the entire perforated distribution plate to provide the downward piston-like effect of laminar air flow.
B. Each diffuser unit shall consist of the following components: 1. A frame body reinforced panel with top-round inlet collar and adjustable air valve disc to balance and evenly distribute the air. Adjustment of the valving mechanism shall be performed without removal of the perforated distribution plate. Access to the valve adjustment shall be obtained by the removal of a plug button, located beneath the valve, in the perforated distribution plate. The air valve disc shall be welded aluminum, painted high gloss, baked white epoxy. 2. A distribution plate, perforated over its entire area, with a 13 percent open area. The perforated distribution plate shall be secured to the frame body by means of quarter turn fasteners in conjunction with a hinged distribution plate. A nickel- plated safety retaining chain shall be securely attached to the frame body and distribution plate to prevent accidental dropping of the distribution plate.
C. The construction of the frame body and distribution plate shall be 20 gauge aluminum. Gasket material shall be provided around the frame body and on the frame face to provide an air seal.
D. Laminar flow diffusers shall be painted with semi-gloss baked enamel finish of a color selected by the Owner.
2.11 SUPPLY AIR REGISTERS
A. Registers shall have two sets of individually adjustable louvers of steel or extruded aluminum as scheduled tapered 0.170 to 0.025 inch thickness spaced approximately 3/4 inch on center and set in a 1-1/4 inch by 20 gauge steel beveled edge frame.
B. Registers shall be provided with opposed blade dampers constructed of 18 gauge steel frame and roll-formed galvanized steel blades. Dampers shall be adjustable from the face of the register.
C. Provide manufacturers "Volume Extractors" in branch ductwork where register is located less than three (3) average duct diameters from the main trunk duct.
D. Registers shall be provided with sponge rubber gasket between frame and adjacent wall or ceiling surface.
E. Registers shall be painted with a semi-gloss baked enamel finish of a color selected by the Owner.
2.12 SUPPLY AIR GRILLES
A. Same as type supply registers specified except without opposed blade volume damper.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 15855 Page 6 of 10 SECTION 15855
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
2.13 HIGH CAPACITY SUPPLY AIR REGISTERS
A. Registers shall have two sets of individually adjustable louvers of extruded aluminum tapered 0.170 to 0.062 inch thickness spaced approximately 1-1/2 inch on center and set in a 1-1/4 inch by 0.055 inch thick extruded aluminum frame.
B. Registers shall be provided with opposed blade dampers constructed of 18 gauge steel frame and roll-formed galvanized steel blades. Dampers shall be adjustable from the face of the register.
C. Provide "Volume Extractors" where register is located less than three (3) average duct diameters from the main trunk duct.
D. Registers shall be provided with sponge rubber gasket between frame and adjacent wall or ceiling surface.
E. Registers shall be provided with a standard mill finish.
2.14 SECURITY GRADE SUPPLY AIR REGISTERS
A. Registers shall have a minimum 8-gauge steel perforated face plate with 1/4" holes on 3/8" staggered centers (minimum 40% free area).
B. Each register shall have a minimum 12-gauge thick welded sleeve, length to be determined by the Contractor and subject to the approval of the Owner (maximize sleeve length; coordinate with field requirements). Each register shall include a 1" x 1" x 3/16" angle frame, to be field-welded to the sleeve by the Contractor and 2" x 3/8" flat security bars welded inside the sleeve, maximum 4" on center. Security bars shall be installed parallel to the short dimension of each register.
C. Each register shall include an opposed-blade volume damper, adjustable from the face of the register. Volume adjustment devices shall be tamperproof.
D. Register shall be painted with a semi-gloss baked enamel finish of a color selected by the Owner.
2.15 RETURN AIR REGISTERS
A. Registers shall be constructed with 20 gauge by 1-3/4 inch wide steel frame and 22 gauge steel fins. Blades shall be curved with 30 degree deflection and spaced 1/2 inch on center.
B. Registers shall be provided with opposed blade volume damper constructed of 18 gauge steel frame and roll formed galvanized steel blades. Dampers shall be adjustable from the face of the register.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 15855 Page 7 of 10 SECTION 15855
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
C. Registers shall be provided with sponge rubber gasket between frame and adjacent wall or ceiling surface.
D. Registers shall be painted with a semi-gloss baked enamel finish of a color selected by the Owner.
2.16 RETURN GRILLES
A. Same as type return air registers specified except without volume damper.
2.17 RETURN FILTER GRILLES
A. Same as type return air registers specified except the grille shall be provided with hinged locking grille and frame, a stationary filter holding frame suitable for 1 inch thick filter, and no volume control damper.
2.18 HEAVY DUTY WALL RETURN AIR REGISTERS
A. Registers shall be constructed with 16 gauge by 1-1/4 inch wide steel frame and 13 gauge steel fins. Blades shall be curved with 45 degree deflection and spaced 1/2 inch on center.
B. Registers shall be provided with opposed blade volume damper constructed of 18 gauge steel frame and roll formed galvanized steel blades. Dampers shall be adjustable from the face of the register.
C. Registers shall be provided with sponge rubber gasket between frame and adjacent wall or ceiling surface.
D. Registers shall be painted with a semi-gloss baked enamel finish of a color selected by the Owner.
2.19 SECURITY GRADE RETURN AIR REGISTERS
A. Registers shall have a minimum 3/16" steel faceplate with 2" x 2" square holes spaced 21/2" on center. A 10-gauge x 0.50" centers steel woven mesh shall be nested between the faceplate and a 3/16" steel backup plate. Registers shall be all steel construction with flanges for surface mounting.
B. Each register shall have a 12-gauge sleeve welded to the faceplate, length as required. Each register shall include a 1" x 1" x 3/16" angle frame, to be field welded to the sleeve by the Contractor and 2" x 3/8" flat security bars welded inside the sleeve, maximum 4" on center. Security bars shall be installed parallel to the short dimension of the registers.
C. Each register shall include an opposed blade volume damper, adjustable from the face of the register. Volume adjustment devices shall be tamperproof.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 15855 Page 8 of 10 SECTION 15855
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
D. Register shall be painted with a semi-gloss baked enamel finish of a color selected by the Owner.
2.20 EXHAUST AIR REGISTERS
A. Registers shall be constructed with removable 0.055 inch thickness extruded aluminum "egg crate" grid core with 0.025 inch thickness by 1-3/8 inch wide extruded aluminum frame. Grid fins shall be spaced 1/2 inches on center.
B. Registers shall be provided with opposed blade volume dampers constructed of 18 gauge steel frame and roll formed galvanized steel blades. Dampers shall be adjustable from face of register.
C. Registers shall be provided with sponge rubber gasket between frame and adjacent wall or ceiling surface.
D. Registers shall be painted with a semi-gloss baked enamel finish of a color selected by the Owner.
2.21 EXHAUST GRILLES
A. Same as exhaust registers specified except without opposed blade volume damper.
2.22 SECURITY GRADE EXHAUST AIR REGISTERS
A. Security grade exhaust air registers shall be the same as security-grade return air registers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of the panel. For plaster walls and ceilings, insure
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 15855 Page 9 of 10 SECTION 15855
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
that all diffusers, registers and grilles are set in a proper means so the finishes are proper and meet the architectural requirements. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify the Owner for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION 15855
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 15855 Page 10 of 10 SECTION 15861
AIR FILTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Section 15050 “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods”. 2. Section 15075 “Mechanical Identification”. 3. Section 15741 “Multizone Packaged Indoor Central Station Air Handling Units”. 4. Section 15820 “Duct Accessories” for duct access doors required for air filters. 5. Section 15900 “HVAC Instrumentation and Controls” for control wiring for automatic temperature controls. 6. Division 16 Sections for power supply wiring from power source to power connection on air filter units including starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, not specified as furnished by manufacturer or factory-installed. 7. Division 16 Sections for control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and air filter unit control panels.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of air filters and accessories: 1. 30 Percent Efficiency Air Filters 2. ASHRAE 60-65% Bag Filters 3. ASHRAE 80-85% Bag Filters 4. Disposable Carbon Panel Adsorbers (12# Per 2,000 CFM @ 500 FPM Face Velocity & 0.32" P.D.) 5. Moisture Separators 6. Side Access Filter Housings (For 2" Single Stage Filtering) 7. Side Access Filter Housings (For 2 Stage Filtering) 8. Universal Filter Holding Frames for Built-Up Filter Banks 9. Standard Capacity Side Access Carbon Filter Housing 10. Standard Capacity Carbon Filter Retainer Packs for Built-Up Banks 11. Side Access Frames for Moisture Separators 12. Side Access Frames and Diffuser Plate Housings 13. Side Access Filter Housing Options 14. Air Filter Gauge
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ARI 850 (Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute) – Commercial and Industrial Air Filter Equipment.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Filters 15861 Page 1 of 15 SECTION 15861
AIR FILTERS
B. ASHRAE 52 (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers) – Method of Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter.
C. MIL-STD-282 – Filter Units, Protective Clothing, Gas-Mask Components, and related Products: Performance-Test Methods. D. UL 586 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) – Test Performance of High Efficiency Particulate, Air Filter Units.
E. UL 867 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) – Electrostatic Air Cleaners.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Specification Sections.
B. No equipment shall be fabricated or delivered until receipt of approved shop drawings from the Owner.
C. Provide the following information with each shop drawing submission. 1. Complete specification of the equipment which will be provided including all optional equipment. All equipment shall be tagged. Refer to Section 15075 "Mechanical Identification" for further requirements. 2. Filter submittal data shall include unpriced factory order forms indicating filter tag, filter quantities, sizes, manufacturer's model number, mounting frame type, and what optional equipment will be furnished along with catalog information explaining the model number, standard features, and optional features. 3. For commodity, ASHRAE type filters, provide one catalog cut sheet of each type of filter proposed for installation on this project. The catalog cut sheet data shall indicate the ASHRAE efficiency, the U.L. fire classification, the available sizes of the filters, (total media surface area, dust holding capacity,) their normal air flow capacity range, their "clean" pressure drops at rated air flows, and their recommended change-out pressure drop. 4. For specialty type filters, provide all data as listed above for commodity/ASHRAE type filters, plus provide data outlining that the performance characteristics of the filter in its specialty adsorption role meets the design's intent. 5. For specialty type filters, also provide a letter from the filter supplier with specific reference to this project, that explains the filter he intends to supply and how it will fulfill this specific project's needs. 6. Where filters are to be installed in specific rooms, tag numbers must correspond to the room numbers shown on the Architectural Drawings which the item will service. 7. Submittal data showing that all air filtering equipment has been certified and tested in accordance with ASHRAE Standards 52-76 and 52.1-1992 (as applicable) for filtering, air flow and pressure drop performance at the capacities specified on the Drawings.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Filters 15861 Page 2 of 15 SECTION 15861
AIR FILTERS
8. Arrangement drawings including physical dimensions, support locations, and weight of each air filter housing. Include dimensions of mating flanges and access door locations. 9. Installation, operation and maintenance instructions in shop manual format including complete bill of material of sizes and types of filters required for each group of filters. Each group of filters shall be tagged by filter tag and by air handling unit tag. Data shall include approximate initial pressure drop and recommended pressure drop at change-out. Data shall also include filter supplier's estimate of change-out based on time and based on the filter application. Also include a copy of this Section of the specification in the manual and the recommendation letter specified above for the specialty filters.
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide filters identical with those tested for the fire performance characteristics indicated. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
B. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."
C. NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of filter assembly that are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards.
D. All air filters shall comply with U.L. Standard 900 pertaining to safety and performance of air filter units.
E. All air filters shall be U.L. labeled, Class 2 or better for all occupancies.
F. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrical components that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed and Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical Code," Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
G. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NFPA 90A and 90B pertaining to installing air filters.
H. ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE Standard 52 and 52.1 for method of testing and rating air filter units.
I. ARI Compliance: Comply with provisions of ARI Standard 850 (Standard for Commercial and Industrial Air Filter Equipment) pertaining to testing and performance of air filter units.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Filters 15861 Page 3 of 15 SECTION 15861
AIR FILTERS
A. Lift and support factory-assembled units only at designated lifting or supporting points, as indicated on shop drawings. Deliver with protective crating and covering.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Provide one complete extra set of filters for each filter bank. If system includes pre-filters and after-filters, provide only pre-filters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Air Filters, and Filter Holding Systems: a. Flanders Filters Inc. b. Eco-Air c. Farr Co. d. Purolator 2. Filter Gages: a. Cambridge Filter Corp. b. Dwyer Instruments, Inc.
C. All air filtering equipment and accessories shall be the product of a single manufacturer unless otherwise noted.
2.2 COMMODITY AND ASHRAE TYPE FILTERS - GENERAL
A. Commodity type filters are specified as "commodity-type" or "ASHRAE-type because it is intended that these filters fit within the range of filters generally covered by ASHRAE standards or manufactured by most filter manufacturers. These filters are distinguished from "specialty-type" filters because specialty filters may have some specific feature or absorption capability which is required by the Owner and is only manufactured by a single manufacturer.
B. Cartridge type filters may be substituted for bag type filters for each high efficiency filter application during the construction phasing, when air handling unit is used during the construction work. The substitution of cartridge type filters will not however relieve the Contractor from providing the Owner with new bag type high efficiency filters after completion of all construction phase work, including clean-up phase. Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Filters 15861 Page 4 of 15 SECTION 15861
AIR FILTERS
C. Manufacturer's names and catalog numbers given hereafter are intended to establish type, size, performance and standard of quality.
D. Provide filter media for all air handling units, and replacement roof top air handling units, and at other locations as shown and scheduled on the drawings.
E. Provide throw-away type filter media for all packaged terminal equipment such as fan coil units, cabinet unit heaters, and fan powered terminal boxes. Refer to the drawing schedules. Filter media shall be the size required by the terminal equipment device.
F. Provide replaceable impingement filters (impingement filter media in permanent holding frames) in all return filter grilles as indicated on the drawings. Refer to Section 15855 "Diffusers, Registers and Grilles" for requirements.
2.7 30 PERCENT EFFICIENCY AIR FILTERS
A. Provide 30 Percent Efficiency Air Filters of the size and depth as scheduled on the drawings and as specified in other sections of this specification. Air filters shall be medium efficiency, pleated, disposable type. Each filter shall consist of synthetic fabric media, media support grid, and enclosing frame. The filter shall be listed as Underwriters' Laboratories Class 2 (or Class 1).
B. The media shall have an average efficiency of 25-30% when tested under ASHRAE Standard 52-76. It shall have an average arrestance of 90-93% in accordance with that standard. 1. For 1 inch deep filters, the effective filter media shall be not less than 1.9 square feet of media per square foot of filter face area. There shall be not less than 14 pleats per linear foot of filter face area. Initial resistance at 500 feet per minute approach velocity shall not exceed 0.45" w.g. Filter shall be rated for a final pressure drop of not less than 1.0" w.g. 2. For 2 inch deep filters, the effective filter media shall be not less than 4.4 square feet of media per square foot of filter face area. There shall be not less than 14 pleats per linear foot of filter face area. Initial resistance at 500 feet per minute approach velocity shall not exceed 0.30" w.g. Filter shall be rated for a final pressure drop of not less than 1.0" w.g. 3. For 4 inch deep filters, the effective filter media shall be not less than 6.7 square feet of media per square foot of filter face area. There shall be not less than 10 pleats per linear foot of filter face area. Initial resistance at 600 feet per minute approach velocity shall not exceed 0.35" w.g. Filter shall be rated for a final pressure drop of not less than 1.0" w.g.
C. The media support grid shall be constructed of a corrosion resistant expanded metal backing.
D. The enclosing frame shall be constructed of a rigid, heavy-duty, high wet-strength beverage board. Diagonal support members, of the same construction, shall be bonded to the air
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Filters 15861 Page 5 of 15 SECTION 15861
AIR FILTERS
entering and air exiting side of each pleat. The inside periphery of the enclosing frame shall be bonded to the filter pack eliminating the possibility of air bypass.
E. The filter shall be identified on the enclosing frame as to manufacturer, model, and U.L. Class rating.
2.13 ASHRAE 60-65% PERCENT BAG TYPE FILTERS
A. ASHRAE 60-65 Percent Bag Type Filters shall be high performance, extended surface, deep pocketed, and disposable type. Each filter shall consist of high density glass microfiber or synthetic media, individual dust holding compartments, and a corrosion resistant galvanized steel enclosing frame. The filter unit shall be completely factory assembled and shall be classified by Underwriters' Laboratories as Class 2 (or Class 1).
B. Filter media shall be of high density glass microfibers, reinforced with a backing to form a lofted filter blanket. The filter media shall have an average efficiency of 60-65% in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52-76 and shall have an average arrestance of not less than 98% on that standard. 1. For 21 to 22 inch deep filters, the effective filter media shall be not less than 14.88 square feet of media per square foot of filter face area. Initial resistance at 375 feet per minute approach velocity shall not exceed 0.23" w.g. Filter shall be rated for a final pressure drop of not less than 1.0" w.g.
C. Dust holding compartments shall consist of glass microfibers bonded to a reinforcing backing. The configuration of the dust holding compartment shall be controlled by means of progressive link stitching. The stitching shall be such that it forms a supported compartment resulting in uniform velocities in the passages of the air entering and the air exiting side of the filter. All stitching points shall be sealed with a hot melt adhesive or equivalent. The dust holding compartment shall be equipped with a galvanized entry faceplate which becomes an integral part of the enclosing frame.
D. Enclosing frame shall be constructed of a galvanized steel return channel and shall retain the individual dust holding compartments. The channel formed shall be 0.81" in depth.
2.14 ASHRAE 80-85% PERCENT BAG TYPE FILTERS
A. ASHRAE 80-85 Percent Bag Type Filters shall be high performance, extended surface, deep pocketed, and disposable type. Each filter shall consist of high density glass microfiber or synthetic media, individual dust holding compartments, and a corrosion resistant galvanized steel enclosing frame. The filter unit shall be completely factory assembled and shall be classified by Underwriters' Laboratories as Class 2 (or Class 1).
B. Filter media shall be of high density glass microfibers, reinforced with a backing to form a lofted filter blanket. The filter media shall have an average efficiency of 80-85% in
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Filters 15861 Page 6 of 15 SECTION 15861
AIR FILTERS
accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52-76 and shall have an average arrestance of not less than 98% on that standard. 1. For 21 to 22 inch deep filters, the effective filter media shall be not less than 14.88 square feet of media per square foot of filter face area. Initial resistance at 375 feet per minute approach velocity shall not exceed 0.36" w.g. Filter shall be rated for a final pressure drop of not less than 1.0" w.g.
C. Dust holding compartments shall consist of glass microfibers bonded to a reinforcing backing. The configuration of the dust holding compartment shall be controlled by means of progressive link stitching. The stitching shall be such that it forms a supported compartment resulting in uniform velocities in the passages of the air entering and the air exiting side of the filter. All stitching points shall be sealed with a hot melt adhesive or equivalent. The dust holding compartment shall be equipped with a galvanized entry faceplate which becomes an integral part of the enclosing frame.
D. Enclosing frame shall be constructed of a galvanized steel return channel and shall retain the individual dust holding compartments. The channel formed shall be 0.81" in depth.
2.17 DISPOSABLE CARBON PANEL ADSORBERS (12# per 2,000 CFM @ 500 FPM face velocity & 0.32" P.D.)
A. Disposable Carbon Panel Absorbers (Carbon Filters) shall consist of a carbon adsorber media, and 2" deep disposable frame. Each absorber shall be total retention type.
B. The purpose of the carbon absorbers is to remove the contaminant listed in the schedules from the recirculated air streams.
C. The carbon absorber media shall consist of 12 pounds of 60% activity coconut shell carbon per 24" x 24" absorber section. Each absorber section shall be rated for 500 feet per minute face velocity. The resistance of the absorber shall not exceed 0.32" w.g. Ozone removal efficiency of the absorber shall not be less than 80%.
2.23 MOISTURE SEPARATORS
A. Provide Moisture Separators of the size and type indicated on the drawings. Moisture separators shall be permanent, cleanable, all metal, panel type.
B. Each separator shall consist of steel screen media and enclosing frame. 1. Media pack shall be constructed of 15 corrugated and flat layers of galvanized screen wire. Media pack shall be 2 inches deep and be permanently fastened together to ensure rigidity. 2. Enclosing frame shall be 16-gauge galvanized steel, by nominal 4 inches deep, with flush, mitered and reinforced corners. Frame bottoms shall be equipped with a minimum of three (3) 3/8 inch diameter drain holes. To ensure proper installation and drainage, a "TOP" marker shall be placed by the manufacturer on the top of the enclosing frame.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Filters 15861 Page 7 of 15 SECTION 15861
AIR FILTERS
C. Built-up banks shall be constructed of standard filter frames. A drain trough shall be provided by the installer under each row of separators and frames to carry off accumulated liquids.
D. When installed vertically, the separator shall be 98% efficient at removing 20 micrometer moisture droplets at 500 FPM face velocity. Airflow resistance at 500 FPM shall not be greater than 0.25 w.g. Airflow shall not exceed 550 FPM to avoid liquid carry-over.
2.24 SIDE ACCESS FILTER HOUSINGS (FOR 2" SINGLE STAGE FILTERING)
A. Provide Side Access Filter Housings for the size and arrangement of filters as scheduled on the drawings. Filter housing shall be a side access, single-stage filter system consisting of a housing, access doors, and tracks. Housings shall accommodate filters up to a depth of 2 inches for 30% efficiency applications.
B. Leakage upstream to downstream of filter, holding frame, and slide mechanism, at rated airflow, shall be less than 1% at 3" w.g. differential. Housing negative pressure leakage from ambient at rated airflow shall be less than 1/2% at 3" w.g. differential.
C. Side access housings shall be factory fabricated and assembled of not less than 16-gauge galvanized steel with corner posts of Z-channel bracing to eliminate racking. Each housing shall be equipped with two (2) access doors and 1-1/2" standing flanges with pre-punched holes to facilitate field installation and/or in-line mating with other filter housings. Flanges shall be notched to provide water runoff. Housings shall be suitable for exterior installations. The housings in-line depth shall not exceed 12 inches. 1. Housings shall include insulated doors and insulated top and bottom panels. Construction shall be double walled 16-gauge galvanized steel with outer skin formed as a female section, stitch welded to the outside of housing suitable to enclose the insulation and improve the "K" factor. The insulation shall not be exposed to the airstream. The insulation shall be thermal, acoustical glass fiber 1 inch thick with a thermal conductivity of 0.25 0.03 K and a bond strength of 20 PSF S-08B modified. It shall withstand 250 deg. F, meet hazard standards of NFPA 90A, and be tested in accordance with ASTM-E84. Flame spread rating shall be 25 with a maximum smoke development of 50. 2. Units shall be phosphatized and prime coated with zinc chromate. 3. Factory-built transition plates shall be provided on air inlet and/or air exit side to match air handling unit. They shall be 16-gauge galvanized steel, constructed in such a manner as to provide a completely flat, leakproof surface. Transitions are to be factory welded to the housing.
D. Access doors shall be constructed of not less than 16-gauge galvanized steel and positioned to facilitate removal and replacement of filters from either side of the housing. Each door shall be equipped with adjustable and replaceable positive sealing latches and replaceable hinges. The peripheral sealing surface shall consist of high memory sponge neoprene. Holding frame to door contact shall be gasketed with 1" x 1-1/4" polyurethane foam to affect a positive seal.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Filters 15861 Page 8 of 15 SECTION 15861
AIR FILTERS
E. The filter tracks shall be heavy gauge anodized aluminum extrusions designed to accommodate a single stage of filtration.
2.25 SIDE ACCESS FILTER HOUSINGS (FOR 2 STAGE FILTERING)
A. Provide Side Access Filter Housings for the size and arrangement of filters as scheduled on the drawings. Filter housing shall be a side access, 2-stage filter system consisting of a housing, access doors, tracks. Housings shall accommodate 2 inch pre-filters and final filters for applications ranging from 65% to 85% efficiency.
B. Housing shall be sized so that the face velocity of the filter bank shall be less than 500 feet per minute or as scheduled on the drawings. Pre-filter media and Final filter media velocity shall not exceed the manufacturer’s recommended velocity.
C. Leakage upstream to downstream of the filter, the holding frame, and the slide mechanism, at rated airflow, shall be less than 1% at 3" w.g. differential. For housings located in a draw-through application, the housing negative pressure leakage from ambient at rated airflow shall be less than 1/2 of 1% at 3" w.g. differential. For housings located in a blow- through application, the housing positive pressure leakage to ambient at rated airflow shall be less than 1/2 of 1% at 6" w.g. differential. 1. (Optional - Side access filter housings may be available in high pressure configurations (up to 8" w.g.) if necessary. Please consult the Farr factory or our local representative for more information.)
D. Side access housings shall be factory fabricated and assembled of not less than 16-gauge galvanized steel with corner posts of Z-channel bracing to eliminate racking. Each housing shall be equipped with two (2) access doors and 1-1/2" standing flanges with pre-punched holes to facilitate field installation and/or in-line mating with other filter housings. Flanges shall be notched to provide water runoff. Housings shall be suitable for exterior installations. The housings in-line depth shall not exceed 21 inches. 1. Housings shall include insulated doors and insulated top and bottom panels. Construction shall be double walled 16-gauge galvanized steel with outer skin formed as a female section, stitch welded to the outside of main filter housing to enclose the insulation and to improve the "K" factor. The insulation shall not be exposed to the airstream. The insulation shall be minimum 1 inch thick thermal, acoustical glass fiber with a thermal conductivity of 0.25 0.03 Btu/hr./sq. ft./deg. F and a bond strength of 20 PSF S-08B modified. The insulation shall be suitable to withstand 250 deg. F, meet hazard standards of NFPA 90A, and be tested in accordance with ASTM-E84. Flame spread rating shall be 25 with a maximum smoke development of 50. 2. Units shall be phosphatized and prime coated with zinc chromate. 3. Factory-built transition sections shall be provided on the air inlet and/or air exit side of each filter housing to match air handling unit. They shall be 16-gauge galvanized steel, constructed the same as the adjacent filter housing and shall be provided with a completely flat, leakproof flanged joining surface. Transitions shall be factory welded to the housing.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Filters 15861 Page 9 of 15 SECTION 15861
AIR FILTERS
E. Access doors shall be constructed of not less than 16-gauge galvanized steel and positioned to facilitate removal and replacement of filters from either side of the housing. Each door shall be equipped with adjustable and replaceable positive sealing latches and replaceable hinges. The peripheral sealing surface shall consist of high memory sponge neoprene. Holding frame to door contact shall be gasketed with 1" x 1-1/4" polyurethane foam to provide a positive seal.
F. Filter tracks shall be replaceable heavy gauge anodized aluminum extrusions designed to accommodate any standard 2 inch pre-filters less than 35% average dust spot efficiency and any standard bag or cartridge type final filter ranging from less than 45% to 95% average dust spot efficiency in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52-76. 1. Each filter track extrusion shall be equipped with a replaceable woven pile finned seal. 2. Filter tracks in housing mechanism shall be designed to permit for field adjustments.
I. The static tap shall be constructed of brass and shall be equipped with standard pneumatic fittings. It shall be permanently installed between the pre-filter and final filter sections to provide for individual and/or total pressure drop readings of both pre and final filter sections with a single gauge and three-way gauge valve. The gage accuracy shall be 0.03% from 0-6" w.g.
2.26 UNIVERSAL FILTER HOLDING FRAMES FOR BUILT-UP FILTER BANKS
A. Provide Universal Filter Holding Frames in banks of the size, type, and arrangement indicated on the drawings.
B. Universal holding frames shall be constructed of not less than 16 gauge galvanized steel.
C. Frames shall be equipped with polyurethane foam gaskets, fastener cut-out locations, fasteners, and filter centering dimples. The four sealing flange corners shall be flush mitered and secured in order to form a uniform sealing and gasketing surface.
D. The in line depth shall not be less than 2-5/8 inches in order to effect adequate bearing surface for built-up filter banks.
E. Filter fasteners shall be capable of being installed without the requirements of tools, nuts, or bolts. 1. The Contractor shall provide an extra 20 percent of the required filter fasteners as spares with this project.
F. The holding frames shall be universal in that they shall be designed to accommodate any manufacturer and model of standard size filters.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Filters 15861 Page 10 of 15 SECTION 15861
AIR FILTERS
G. The filter holding frame assembly shall be provided with a minimum 2 inch wide galvanized steel flashing strip around the perimeter of the filter bank next to the plenum wall to facilitate operator access to the filters during servicing.
H. Refer to Reinforcing requirements for larger built-up filter banks outlined later in this Section.
I. In lieu of the standard universal filter holding frame method of supporting the filter bank, Front (or Rear) Access Filter Framing Modules may be used.
2.32 STANDARD CAPACITY SIDE ACCESS CARBON FILTER HOUSING
A. Provide a Standard Capacity Side Access Filter Housing of the size and arrangement necessary for each carbon filter scheduled on the drawings.
B. Filter housing shall be a side access, two-stage filter system consisting of a housing and access doors. Housing shall accommodate four 2 inch deep disposable or rechargeable standard capacity carbon filter adsorbers panels and a 4 inch deep 30 percent efficiency dusting filter per 24" x 24" of face area.
C. Each housing shall be factory fabricated and assembled of not less than 16-gauge galvanized steel with corner posts of Z-channel bracing to eliminate racking. Each housing shall be equipped with two (2) access doors and 1-1/2 inch standing flanges with pre- punched holes to facilitate field installation and/or in-line mating with other filter housings. Flanges shall be notched to provide water runoff. Housings shall be suitable for exterior installation. 1. Housing negative pressure leakage from ambient at rated airflow shall be less than 1/2 of 1% at 3" w.g. differential. 2. Housings shall include insulated doors and insulated top and bottom panels. Construction shall be double walled 16-gauge galvanized steel with outer skin formed as a female section, stitch welded to the outside of main filter housing to enclose the insulation and to improve the "K" factor. The insulation shall not be exposed to the airstream. The insulation shall be minimum 1 inch thick thermal, acoustical glass fiber with a thermal conductivity of 0.25 0.03 Btu/hr./sq.ft./ deg. F and a bond strength of 20 PSF S-08B modified. The insulation shall be suitable to withstand 250 deg. F, meet hazard standards of NFPA 90A, and be tested in accordance with ASTM-E84. Flame spread rating shall be 25 with a maximum smoke development of 50. 3. Units shall be phosphatized and prime coated with zinc chromate. 4. Factory-built transition sections shall be provided on the air inlet and/or air exit side of each filter housing to match air handling unit. They shall be 16-gauge galvanized steel, constructed the same as the adjacent filter housing and shall be provided with a completely flat, leakproof flanged joining surface. Transitions shall be factory welded to the housing.
D. Access doors shall be constructed of not less than 16-gauge galvanized steel and positioned to facilitate removal and replacement of filters from either side of the housing.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Filters 15861 Page 11 of 15 SECTION 15861
AIR FILTERS
Each door shall be equipped with adjustable and replaceable positive sealing latches and replaceable hinges. The peripheral sealing surface shall consist of high memory sponge neoprene. Holding frame to door contact shall be gasketed with 1" x 1-1/4" polyurethane foam to effect a positive seal.
E. Each housing shall be equipped with an integral nominal 4 filter.
2.35 SIDE ACCESS FRAMES FOR MOISTURE SEPARATORS
A. Provide Side Access Frames for Moisture Separators of size and arrangement as indicated on the plans. Each housing shall be designed to match up with its corresponding downstream filter module side access housing. Side Access Frames for Moisture Separators shall be a side access, single-stage filter system consisting of a housing, access doors, tracks, and moisture draining facilities.
B. The side access housing and access doors shall be constructed similarly to its mating downstream side access filter housing section. Total housing depth shall be 12" or less. Housing negative pressure leakage from ambient at rated airflow shall be less than 1/2 of 1% at 3" w.g. differential. Housing positive pressure leakage to ambient at rated airflow shall be less than 1/2 of 1% at 6" w.g. differential.
C. Each housing shall be equipped with an integral 2 inch wide, 16-gauge galvanized steel, all welded moisture track to accommodate the housing manufacturer's standard moisture separators. Tracks shall have 1 inch high flanges on both sides and shall be sealed at both ends of contact with gasketed access doors. Tracks shall be notched with 3/4 inch diameter holes at points of contact with support/drain columns to provide liquid runoff. Each column shall be equipped with a 1/2" NPT nippled drain tube for external piping to a suitable waste receptor or collecting tank. Columns shall be constructed of 16-gauge galvanized steel, specially welded to moisture tracks to effect a permanent seal.
D. The side access frame for moisture separators shall be provided with the same construction features as specified for the downstream filter section including: insulation, stainless steel, primer paint coating, and transition plates.
2.36 SIDE ACCESS FRAMES AND DIFFUSER PLATE HOUSINGS
A. Provide Side Access Frames and Diffuser Plates housings of size and arrangement as indicated on the plans. Each housing shall be designed to match up with its corresponding downstream filter module side access housing. Diffuser housing section shall be a side access, air diffusion section consisting of housing, access doors and a permanently installed 51% open area, perforated plate.
B. The side access housing and access doors shall be constructed similarly to its mating downstream side access filter housing section. Housing positive pressure leakage to ambient at rated airflow shall be less than 1/2 of 1% at 6" w.g. differential.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Filters 15861 Page 12 of 15 SECTION 15861
AIR FILTERS
C. The diffuser plate shall be constructed of 16-gauge galvanized steel with 3/16" diameter holes on 1/4" centers staggered and factory installed on the air entering side of the housing. The perforated plate shall be mounted a minimum 15 inches upstream of the high efficiency filter section. Pressure drop shall not exceed 0.1" w.g. at 500 fpm approach velocity. When mated upstream of a side access filter housing with high efficiency bag or cartridge filters, and properly installed on the positive side of the fan, the housing manufacturer shall warrant protection of high efficiency filter section against high air velocity filter damage or media erosion. The housing's in-line depth shall not exceed 12 inches.
D. The side access frame and diffuser plate assembly shall be provided with the same construction features as specified for the downstream filter section including: insulation, stainless steel, primer paint coating, and transition plates.
2.37 SIDE ACCESS FILTER HOUSING OPTIONS
A. Where indicated on the drawings and/or specified hereafter, the Contractor shall provide the following options with each of the side access filter housing arrangements.
1. Provide one transition section at the air entering side to each filter arrangement and one transition section at the air exiting side for each filter arrangement. Each transition shall be custom fabricated to meet the conditions in the field.
B. Housings shall include insulated doors and insulated top and bottom panels. Construction shall be double walled 16-gauge galvanized steel with outer skin formed as a female section, stitch welded to the outside of main filter housing to enclose the insulation and to improve the "K" factor. The insulation shall not be exposed to the airstream. The insulation shall be minimum 1 inch thick thermal, acoustical glass fiber with a thermal conductivity of 0.25 0.03 Btu/hr/sqft/ deg. F and a bond strength of 20 PSF S-08B modified. The insulation shall be suitable to withstand 250 deg. F, meet hazard standards of NFPA 90A, and be tested in accordance with ASTM-E84. Flame spread rating shall be 25 with a maximum smoke development of 50.
C. Housings shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel.
D. Units shall be phosphatized and prime coated with zinc chromate.
E. Factory-built transition sections shall be provided on the air inlet and/or air exit side of each filter housing to match air handling unit. They shall be 16-gauge galvanized steel, constructed the same as the adjacent filter housing and shall be provided with a completely flat, leakproof flanged joining surface. Transitions shall be factory welded to the housing.
2.39 AIR FILTER GAUGE
A. An Air Filter Gauge for measuring the resistance to airflow through the filters shall be installed. Each housing shall include one gauge (magnehelic type) for measurement of pre- filter, final filter, and/or total filter bank resistance.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Filters 15861 Page 13 of 15 SECTION 15861
AIR FILTERS
B. The air filter gauge shall be diaphragm actuated, shall have 3-7/8" diameter white dial with black figures and graduations, shall have zero adjustment, shall be furnished with two static pressure tips, fittings for 1/4" metal or plastic tubing, and a means for mounting the gauge. Gauge graduations shall be from 0"-3".
C. A three-way gauge cock and fittings shall be provided to allow measurements relating to three tap locations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install filter frames and assemblies on housekeeping pads where indicated.
B. Install filter frames level and plumb, following manufacturer's written instructions, rough-in drawings, the original design, and referenced standards.
C. Install air filters and holding devices of types indicated and where shown following air filter manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that filters comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
D. Locate each filter unit accurately in position indicated in relation to other work. Position unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter holding frames to substrate.
E. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air.
F. Install filter gage for each filter bank. 1. Install filter gage static-pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters to indicate air pressure drop through filter. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in an accessible position. Adjust and level inclined gages.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling unit installations.
B. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer used for control and monitoring, but not factory mounted. 1. Install electrical or control wiring according to manufacturer's printed instructions and Division 16.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly of components and installation of filters and filter frames and electrical wiring. Report results in writing.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Filters 15861 Page 14 of 15 SECTION 15861
AIR FILTERS
B. Operate installed automatic (self-renewing) roll filters to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for leakage of unfiltered air while system is operating. Correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new units and proceed with retesting.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filter media.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Filters 15861 Page 15 of 15 SECTION 15890
AIR DUCT CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15050 “Basic Mechanical Materials & Methods”. 2. Section 15083 “HVAC Insulation”. 3. Section 15741 “Multizone Packaged Indoor Central Station Air Handling Units 4. Section 15815 “Metal Ducts”. 5. Section 15820 “Duct Accessories”.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cleaning of the following existing duct systems: 1. Supply system. 2. Return system. 3. Exhaust system.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ASCS: Air system cleaning specialist.
B. NADCA: National Air Duct Cleaners Association.
C. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
D. MSDS: Material Safety Data Sheets.
E. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
F. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that products comply with requirements.
B. MSDS: Submittal of EPA approved cleaning and sanitizing products.
C. Qualification Data: For ASCS.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Duct Cleaning 15890 Page 1 of 7 SECTION 15890
AIR DUCT CLEANING
D. Access Doors
E. Field quality-control test reports.
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
A. ASCS Qualifications: A certified member of NADCA 1. Certification: Employ an ASCS certified by NADCA on a full-time basis 2. Supervisor Qualifications: Certified as an ASCS by NADCA 3. Experience: Submit records of experience in the field of HVAC systems cleaning. 4. Equipment, Materials, and Labor: Have equipment, materials, and labor required to perform specified services.
B. Comply with current published standards of NADCA.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. See Section 15820 “Duct Accessories” for approved manufacturers listings.
2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G60 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).
2.3 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Duct Cleaning 15890 Page 2 of 7 SECTION 15890
AIR DUCT CLEANING
A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. No sheet metal patches shall be allowed.
B. Rectangular Duct Door: Refer to Section 15820 “Duct Accessories” for manufacturers of duct mounted access doors.
2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. General Description: Fabricate flexible connectors of manufactured products suitable for the duct pressure class. B. Products shall be as listed in Section 15820 “Duct Accessories.
2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. General Description: Provide flexible ductwork when required to replace existing flexible ductwork that has been removed for access into the ductstream for cleaning operations or has been damaged beyond repair during the cleaning work.
B New flexible ducts shall be as listed in Section 15820 “Duct Accessories”. Flexible ducts shall be selected to meet the pressure class of the duct system in accordance with SMACNA Standards
2.6 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine systems to determine appropriate methods, tools, and equipment required for performance of work.
B. Prepare written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.
C. Proceed with work only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Engage a qualified ASCS to clean the following systems: 1. Supply system. 2. Return system. 3. Exhaust system.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Duct Cleaning 15890 Page 3 of 7 SECTION 15890
AIR DUCT CLEANING
B. Perform cleaning before air balancing or mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning.
C. Use duct-mounted access doors, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection. 1. Install additional duct-mounting access doors to comply with duct cleaning standards. Comply with requirements in Section 15820 "Duct Accessories" for additional duct-mounting access doors. 2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. Replace damaged and deteriorated flexible ducts. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section 15820 "Duct Accessories" for flexible ducts. 3. Disconnect and reconnect flexible connectors as needed for cleaning and inspection. Replace damaged and deteriorated flexible connectors. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section 15820 "Duct Accessories" for flexible connectors. 4. Replace damaged fusible links on fire and smoke dampers. Replacement fusible links shall be same rating as those being replaced. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section 15820 "Duct Accessories" for fusible links. 5. Remove and reinstall ceiling components to gain access for duct cleaning. Clean ceiling components after they have been removed and replaced.
D. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and restore to their marked position on completion.
E. Particulate Collection and Odor Control: 1. Where venting vacuuming system inside building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron size (or greater) particles. 2. When venting vacuuming system outside building, use filtration to contain debris removed from the HVAC system and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.
F. Clean the following metal-duct system components by removing visible surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air-handling-unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators, except in ceiling plenums and mechanical room. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components.
G. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Duct Cleaning 15890 Page 4 of 7 SECTION 15890
AIR DUCT CLEANING
1. Clean metal-duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of ducts so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts or duct liner. 4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment, and do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth. 5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. 6. Provide operative drainage system for washdown procedures. 7. Biocidal Agents and Coatings: Apply biocidal agents if fungus is present; use according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.
H. Cleanliness Verification: 1. Verify cleanliness after mechanical cleaning and before application of treatment, including biocidal agents and protective coatings. 2. Visually inspect metal-duct systems for contaminants. 3. Where contaminants are discovered, reclean and reinspect duct systems.
3.3 DUCT ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts, and Section 15820 “Duct Accessories” of this specification.
B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install duct-mounting access doors where access doors do not currently exist to allow for the cleaning of ducts, accessories, and terminal units as follows: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Downstream from volume dampers, turning vanes, and equipment. 3. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers; reset or install new fusible links. 4. Before and after each change in direction, at maximum 50-foot (15-m) spacing. 5. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available.
D. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm). 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm). 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm). Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Duct Cleaning 15890 Page 5 of 7 SECTION 15890
AIR DUCT CLEANING
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm). 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm). 6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm).
E. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches (200 mm) in diameter. 2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches (250 mm) in diameter. 3. Head and Hand Access: 12 inches (300 mm) in diameter. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches (460 mm) in diameter. 5. Body Access: 24 inches (600 mm) in diameter.
F. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, pressure relief access doors: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 7 inches (175 mm) in diameter. 2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches (250 mm) in diameter. 3. Head and Hand Access: 13 inches (330 mm) in diameter. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 19 inches (480 mm) in diameter.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Reconnect ducts to fans and air-handling units with existing flexible connectors after cleaning ducts and flexible connectors. Replace existing damaged and deteriorated flexible connectors.
B. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg (1250 Pa) and higher, cover replacement flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
C. Reconnect terminal units to supply ducts with existing flexible ducts or replace damaged and deteriorated existing flexible ducts with maximum 12-inch (300-mm) lengths of new flexible duct.
D. Reconnect diffusers to low-pressure ducts with existing flexible ducts or replace damaged and deteriorated existing flexible ducts with maximum 60-inch (1500-mm) lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
E. Reconnect existing and new flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid duct sealer and draw bands.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Gravimetric Analysis: Sections of metal-duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, may be tested for cleanliness according to NADCA vacuum test gravimetric analysis. 1. If analysis determines that levels of debris are equal to or lower than suitable levels, system shall have passed cleanliness verification. 2. If analysis determines that levels of debris exceed suitable levels, system cleanliness verification will have failed and metal-duct system shall be re-cleaned and re-verified.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Duct Cleaning 15890 Page 6 of 7 SECTION 15890
AIR DUCT CLEANING
B. Verification of Coil Cleaning: Cleaning shall restore coil pressure drop to within 10 percent of pressure drop measured when coil was first installed. If original pressure drop is not known, coil will be considered clean only if it is free of foreign matter and chemical residue, based on thorough visual inspection.
C. Report results of tests in writing.
END OF SECTION 15890
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Air Duct Cleaning 15890 Page 7 of 7 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment are included in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment. 2. Field quality-control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and equipment installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design objectives, including the following:
1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including submains, branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances. 2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities. 3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment. 4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment. 5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 6. Measuring sound and vibration. 7. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section. 8. Ducts (Pressure Test as indicated) Section 15815.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and terminals, according to design quantities.
C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results. E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 1 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.
H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested.
J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system.
K. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.
L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. M. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
N. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.
O. CTI: Cooling Tower Institute.
P. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
Q. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality-Control Submittals: Within 30 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this Project's testing, adjusting, and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in the "Quality Control" Article below.
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of this Section.
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-bystep procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.
D. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent. E. Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and balancing report forms.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 2 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
F. Warranty: Submit 2 copies of special warranty specified in the "Warranty" Article below.
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either AABC or NEBB.
B. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Owner's and the Architect's representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of testing, adjusting, and balancing team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls Installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7 days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following: a. Submittal distribution requirements. b. Contract Documents examination report. c. Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan. d. Work schedule and Project site access requirements. e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
C. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting, and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing, adjusting, and balancing reports. 2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.
D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."
E. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."
F. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."
G. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent's standard forms approved by the Architect.
H. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC national standards.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 3 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
I. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."
J. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during the entire testing, adjusting, and balancing period. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.
B. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy completed areas of the building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.
B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.
C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The national project performance guarantee specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC'S "National Standards" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:
C. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:
1. The certified Agent has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 4 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract. 2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.
B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C. Examine project record documents described in Section "Project Record Documents."
D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been performed.
G. Examine system and equipment test reports.
H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 5 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.
J. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
L. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.
M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations. N. Examine 3-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows.
O. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
P. Examine open-piping-system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
Q. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
R. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals. 4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2-way valves and 3-way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected. 5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls. 6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. 8. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values. 9. Interlocked systems are operating. 10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.
S. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 6 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be met.
3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC national standards and this Section.
B. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section.
C. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this Section.
D. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project.
E. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
3.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 7 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
E. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
3.5 CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and exhaust-air systems. Additional procedures are required for variable-air-volume, multizone, dualduct, induction-unit supply-air systems and process exhaust-air systems. These additional procedures are specified in other articles in this Section.
B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the fan manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows: a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 2. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component. a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters. 3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions. 4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 8 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions. 5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Architect. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes. 6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, and economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitottube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.
D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.
E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified tolerances of design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at the air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of design quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 DUAL-DUCT SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Set mixing boxes at full-cold airflow position for setting the fan volume, after verifying that the cooling coil is capable of full-system airflow.
B. Measure static pressure in both hot and cold ducts at the end of the longest duct run to determine that sufficient static pressure exists to operate mixing-box controls and to overcome resistance in the ducts and outlets downstream from mixing box.
1. If insufficient static pressure exists, increase the airflow at the fan.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 9 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
C. Test and adjust the constant-volume mixing boxes as follows:
1. Verify both hot and cold operations by adjusting the thermostat and observing the air temperature and volume changes. 2. Verify sufficient inlet static pressure before making volume adjustments. 3. Adjust mixing box to design airflows within specified tolerances. Measure the airflow by Pitot-tube traverse readings, totaling the airflow of the outlets; or by measuring static pressure at mixing-box taps if provided by the box manufacturer.
D. Re-measure static pressure in both hot and cold ducts at the end of the longest duct run to determine that sufficient static pressure exists to operate mixing-box controls and to overcome resistance in the ducts and outlets downstream from mixing box.
E. Adjust variable-air-volume, dual-duct systems in the same way as constant-volume dual duct systems, and adjust each mixing-box maximum- and minimum-airflow settings.
3.7 VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the fan design airflow volume, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum setpoint airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the design airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load. 2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge duct losses. 3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within 10 percent of design airflow. 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use the terminal unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems. 5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as described for constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 10 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
6. Re-measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems. 7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. 8. Record the final fan performance data.
C. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Balance systems similar to constant-volume air systems. 2. Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition. 3. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to design airflow and verify operation of the static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems. 4. Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings. 5. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan, if one is installed, and verify operation of the static-pressure controller. 6. Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static pressure to verify that it is being maintained by the controller. 7. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as described for constant-volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 8. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems.
D. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Set system at maximum design airflow by setting the required number of terminal units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. 2. Adjust supply fan to maximum design airflow with the variable-airflow controller set at maximum airflow. 3. Set terminal units being tested at full-airflow condition. 4. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to design airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems. 5. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow. 6. Measure static pressure at the sensor.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 11 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
7. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems.
3.8 MULTI-ZONE SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Set unit at full flow through the cooling coil if coil has that capacity.
B. Adjust each zone damper to design airflow.
3.9 INDUCTION-UNIT SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Balance primary-air risers by measuring static pressure at the nozzles of the top and bottom units of each riser to determine which risers must be throttled. Adjust risers to design airflow within specified tolerances.
B. Adjust each induction unit.
3.10 FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts. C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:
1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check expansion tank liquid level. 3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at design flow. 5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type, unless several terminal valves are kept open. 6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
3.11 HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE TEST
A. Unless otherwise noted; all water systems shall be tested and proved tight under a hydrostatic test of 150% of working pressure which is designated under each Pipe Material Specification. Test pressure shall be measured at the low point of the system.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 12 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
1. A preliminary check shall be made by filling the system with water and tabulating the water pressure at each pressure vessel, i.e., (boiler, chiller, expansion tank, pump, heat exchanger). The contractor shall verify that the pressure added by the test will not exceed the test pressure of any of these components by an additive process. 2. Piping shall be tested and proved tight for a test period of 3 hours during which the pressure should not drop more than 5%. During the test period, the Contractor shall verify by visual inspection that no leaks are apparent. 3. The Contractor is warned that he should properly vent the high points of the system to insure a minimum of interference by absorption of air by the water.
B. All air, refrigerant, natural gas, steam and steam condensate piping shall be tested and proved tight using compressed air (or nitrogen) at 125% of working pressure which is designated under each Pipe Material Specification. The Contractor is cautioned that pneumatic testing poses the risk of a sudden release of stored energy; for this reason preliminary tests shall be performed and the following procedures shall be followed:
1. Prior to the application of test pressure, a preliminary check for major leaks shall be made using 10-psig compressed air. 2. The test pressure shall be raised in increments of 25% of design working pressure. Following application of each pressure increase a waiting period of at least 10 minutes shall be allowed for system equalization prior to the next application of pressure. 3. Tests indoors shall be made with a scented non-flammable, non-toxic gas. The initial test shall be made by maintaining test pressure for a period of 3 hours during which period the pressure shall not drop more than 5%. 4. Following the initial test period, the test pressure shall be relieved to design working pressure by venting outdoors and the working pressure shall be maintained for an added period of 48 hours; during this period no detection of the scented gas should be apparent or reported. 5. Tests outdoors shall be similar to indoors, however, during initial test period all pipe joints shall be soap bubble tested. 6. The Contractor shall verify prior to the test that all components, i.e., (boilers) are suitable for the proposed test pressure.
C. All tests shall be performed before piping joints (including welded joints) are insulated. Piping scheduled to be inaccessibly concealed shall be tested prior to its being enclosed.
D. The Contractor shall isolate all equipment and components which are not capable of withstanding these tests using the component's isolation valves. In addition, the Contractor shall temporarily seal off all relief valves and shall temporarily restrain all expansion joints during the tests.
3.12 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Determine water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive displacement pumps:
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 13 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Verify with the pump manufacturer that this will not damage pump. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on the manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and confirm that the pump has the intended impeller size. 2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark the pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until design water flow is achieved. 3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on the pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage. 4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.
B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than design flow.
E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as follows:
1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over design flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over design flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over design flow. 3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.
F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures, including outdoor-air temperature.
G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing.
3.13 VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Balance systems with automatic 2- and 3-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems. 3.14 PRIMARY-SECONDARY-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Balance the primary system crossover flow first, then balance the secondary system.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 14 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
3.15 HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Measure water flow through all circuits.
B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.
C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.
D. Check the setting and operation of automatic temperature-control valves, self-contained control valves, and pressure-reducing valves. E. Record safety valve settings.
3.16 MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data.
3.17 CHILLERS
A. Balance water flow through each evaporator and condenser to within specified tolerances of design flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple chiller installation, do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chiller manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at design conditions:
1. Evaporator water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow. 2. Condenser water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow. 3. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments furnished by the chiller manufacturer. 4. Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kW. 5. The kW input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kW. 6. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling. 7. Air-Cooled Chillers: Verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan data, including number of fans and entering- and leaving-air temperatures. Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 15 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
3.18 COOLING TOWERS
A. Shut off makeup water for the duration of the test, and then make sure the makeup and blowdown systems are fully operational after tests and before leaving the equipment. Perform the following tests and record the results:
1. Measure condenser water flow to each cell of the cooling tower. 2. Measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures. 3. Measure wet- and dry-bulb temperatures of entering air. 4. Measure wet- and dry-bulb temperatures of leaving air. 5. Measure condenser water flow rate recirculating through the cooling tower. 6. Measure cooling tower pump discharge pressure. 7. Adjust water level and feed rate of makeup-water system.
3.19 CONDENSING UNITS
A. Verify proper rotation of fans and measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures. Record compressor data.
3.20 BOILERS
A. Measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow.
3.21 HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Entering- and leaving-water temperatures. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air for cooling coils designed for less than 7500 cfm. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop.
B. Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Nameplate data. 2. Airflow. 3. Entering- and leaving-air temperatures at full load. 4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage. 5. Calculated kW at full load. 6. Fuse or circuit breaker rating for overload protection. Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 16 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
3.22 TEMPERATURE TESTING
A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2 successive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied. C. Measure outside air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.23 HOODS
A. Determine total airflow into the room where the hood is located and balance systems to ensure adequate air supply to all hoods.
1. Set hood door opening at position of normal use. 2. Energize the exhaust fan and adjust airflow to provide the indicated average fume hood face velocity at hood opening. 3. Measure exhaust airflow volume by measuring airflow by Pitot-tube duct traverse. 4. Measure air velocity using Pitot-tube traverse method. 5. Record each face velocity measurement taken at 4- to 6-inch increments over the entire hood door opening. 6. Calculate the average face velocity by averaging all velocity measurements. 7. Calculate the airflow volume of exhaust-hood face velocity by multiplying the calculated average face velocity by the opening area. Compare this quantity with exhaust volume at exhaust fan and report duct leakage. 8. Measure airflow volume supplied by makeup fan. Verify that the makeup system supplies the proper amount of air to keep the space at the indicated pressure with the exhaust systems in all operating conditions. 9. Retest for average face velocity. Adjust hood baffles, fan drives, and other parts of the system to provide the indicated average face velocity and the indicated auxiliary air-supply percentages. 10. Retest and adjust the systems until fume-hood performance complies with Contract Documents.
3.24 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.
D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 17 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.
F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes. G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
I. Verify main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates on a grounded or non-grounded power supply.
K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.25 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.
3.26 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.27 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 18 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop Drawings and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable:
1. Title page. 2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Engineer's name and address. 6. Contractor's name and address. 7. Report date. 8. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report. 9. Summary of contents, including the following: a. Design versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 10. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 11. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 12. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values. 13. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following: a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present with single-line diagrams and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 19 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
2. Water flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations.
F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number of belts, make, and size. k. Number of filters, type, and size. 2. Motor Data: Include the following: a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches. 3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. i. Outside airflow in cfm. j. Return airflow in cfm. k. Outside-air damper position. l. Return-air damper position. m. Vortex damper position.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 20 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following:
1. Coil Data: Include the following: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq. ft. h. Tube size in NPS. i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement. 2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Average face velocity in fpm. c. Air pressure drop in inches wg. d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. h. Water flow rate in gpm. i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. j. Entering-water temperature in deg F. k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig. n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.
H. Gas-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to the manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Fuel type in input data. g. Output capacity in Btuh. h. Ignition type. i. Burner-control types. j. Motor horsepower and rpm. k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz. l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor. m. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 21 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
n. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Entering-air temperature in deg F. c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. d. Air temperature differential in deg F. e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg. f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg. g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Low-fire fuel input in Btuh. i. High-fire fuel input in Btuh. j. Manifold pressure in psig. k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F. l. Operating set point in Btuh. m. Motor voltage at each connection. n. Motor amperage for each phase. o. Heating value of fuel in Btuh.
I. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in central-station air-handling units, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil identification. d. Capacity in Btuh. e. Number of stages. f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz. g. Rated amperage. h. Airflow rate in cfm. i. Face area in sq. ft. j. Minimum face velocity in fpm. 2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Heat output in Btuh. b. Airflow rate in cfm. c. Air velocity in fpm. d. Entering-air temperature in deg F. e. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. f. Voltage at each connection. g. Amperage for each phase.
J. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data: Include the following: a. System identification.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 22 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Motor Data: Include the following: a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number of belts, make, and size. 3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.
K. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data: Include the following: a. System and air-handling unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft. g. Design airflow rate in cfm. h. Design velocity in fpm. i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig.
L. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: For terminal units, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Test apparatus used.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 23 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
d. Area served. e. Air-terminal-device make. f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram. g. Air-terminal-device type and model number. h. Air-terminal-device size. i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft. 2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Air velocity in fpm. c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final airflow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space temperature in deg F.
M. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Room or riser served. d. Coil make and size. e. Flowmeter type. 2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Entering-water temperature in deg F. c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig. e. Entering-air temperature in deg F. f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.
N. Packaged Chiller Reports: For each chiller, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. Unit identification. b. Make and model number. c. Manufacturer's serial number. d. Refrigerant type and capacity in gal. e. Starter type and size. f. Starter thermal protection size. 2. Condenser Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Refrigerant pressure in psig. b. Refrigerant temperature in deg F. c. Entering-water temperature in deg F. d. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 24 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
e. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. f. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. 3. Evaporator Test Reports: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Refrigerant pressure in psig. b. Refrigerant temperature in deg F. c. Entering-water temperature in deg F. d. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. e. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. f. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. 4. Compressor Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Make and model number. b. Manufacturer's serial number. c. Suction pressure in psig. d. Suction temperature in deg F. e. Discharge pressure in psig. f. Discharge temperature in deg F. g. Oil pressure in psig. h. Oil temperature in deg F. i. Voltage at each connection. j. Amperage for each phase. k. The kW input. l. Crankcase heater kW. m. Chilled water control set point in deg F. n. Condenser water control set point in deg F. o. Refrigerant low-pressure-cutoff set point in psig. p. Refrigerant high-pressure-cutoff set point in psig. 5. Refrigerant Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Oil level. b. Refrigerant level. c. Relief valve setting in psig. d. Unloader set points in psig. e. Percentage of cylinders unloaded. f. Bearing temperatures in deg F. g. Vane position. h. Low-temperature-cutoff set point in deg F.
O. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, standalone refrigerant compressors, air-cooled condensing units, or water-cooled condensing units, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Unit make and model number. d. Manufacturer's compressor serial numbers. e. Compressor make.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 25 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
f. Compressor model and serial numbers. g. Refrigerant weight in lb. h. Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg F. 2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Inlet-duct static pressure in inches wg. b. Outlet-duct static pressure in inches wg. c. Entering-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F. d. Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F. e. Condenser entering-water temperature in deg F. f. Condenser leaving-water temperature in deg F. g. Condenser water temperature differential in deg F. h. Condenser entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. i. Condenser leaving-water pressure in feet of head or psig. j. Condenser water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. k. Control settings. l. Unloader set points. m. Low-pressure-cutout set point in psig. n. High-pressure-cutout set point in psig. o. Suction pressure in psig. p. Suction temperature in deg F. q. Condenser refrigerant pressure in psig. r. Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg F. s. Oil pressure in psig. t. Oil temperature in deg F. u. Voltage at each connection. v. Amperage for each phase. w. The kW input. x. Crankcase heater kW. y. Number of fans. z. Condenser fan rpm. aa. Condenser fan airflow rate in cfm. ab. Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower. ac. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection. ad. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.
P. Cooling Tower or Condenser Test Reports: For cooling towers or condensers, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. Unit identification. b. Make and type. c. Model and serial numbers. d. Nominal cooling capacity in tons. e. Refrigerant type and weight in lb. f. Water-treatment chemical feeder and chemical. g. Number and type of fans. h. Fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 26 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
i. Fan motor voltage at each connection. j. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. k. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches. l. Number of belts, make, and size. 2. Pump Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Make and model number. b. Manufacturer's serial number. c. Motor make and frame size. d. Motor horsepower and rpm. e. Voltage at each connection. f. Amperage for each phase. g. Water flow rate in gpm. 3. Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Entering-water temperature in deg F. b. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. c. Water temperature differential in deg F. d. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. e. Leaving-water pressure in feet of head or psig. f. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. g. Water flow rate in gpm. h. Bleed water flow rate in gpm. 4. Air Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Duct airflow rate in cfm. b. Inlet-duct static pressure in inches wg. c. Outlet-duct static pressure in inches wg. d. Average entering-air, wet-bulb temperature in deg F. e. Average leaving-air, wet-bulb temperature in deg F. f. Ambient wet-bulb temperature in deg F.
Q. Heat-Exchanger/Converter Test Reports: For hot-water heat exchangers, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and type. e. Model and serial numbers. f. Ratings. 2. Primary Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Entering-water temperature in deg F. b. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. c. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. d. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. e. Water flow rate in gpm.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 27 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
3. Secondary Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Entering-water temperature in deg F. b. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. c. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. d. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. e. Water flow rate in gpm.
R. Pump Test Reports: For pumps, include the following data. Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves.
1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and size. e. Model and serial numbers. f. Water flow rate in gpm. g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig. i. Pump rpm. j. Impeller diameter in inches. k. Motor make and frame size. l. Motor horsepower and rpm. m. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. Full-load amperage and service factor. p. Seal type. 2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Static head in feet of head or psig. b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig. c. Actual impeller size in inches. d. Full-open flow rate in gpm. e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig. f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig. g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig. h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig. i. Final water flow rate in gpm. j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase.
S. Boiler Test Reports: For boilers, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 28 of 29 SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
d. Make and type. e. Model and serial numbers. f. Fuel type and input in Btuh. g. Number of passes. h. Ignition type. i. Burner-control types. j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase. 2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: a. Operating pressure in psig. b. Operating temperature in deg F. c. Entering-water temperature in deg F. d. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. e. Number of safety valves and sizes in NPS. f. Safety valve settings in psig. g. High-limit setting in psig. h. Operating-control setting. i. High-fire set point. j. Low-fire set point. k. Voltage at each connection. l. Amperage for each phase. m. Draft fan voltage at each connection. n. Draft fan amperage for each phase. o. Manifold pressure in psig.
T. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following:
1. Report Data: Include the following: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration.
3.28 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 15950 Page 29 of 29 SECTION 15995
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Construction Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions, and specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The purpose of the commissioning process is to provide the owner/operator of the facility with a high level of assurance that the mechanical systems have been installed in the prescribed manner, and operate within the performance guidelines set in the Design Intent Documents (DID). The CxA shall provide the owner with an unbiased, objective view of the system’s installation, operation, and performance. This process is not intended to take away or reduce the responsibility of the design team or installing contractors to provide a finished product. Commissioning is intended to enhance the quality of system start-up and aid in the orderly transfer of systems for beneficial use by the owner. The CxA will be a member of the construction team, administrating and coordinating commissioning activities with the design team, construction manager, subcontractors, manufacturers and equipment suppliers.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE Guideline 1-1996.
B. AABC Commissioning Guideline.
1.4 HIRING OF INDEPENDENT 3 rd PARTY COMMISSIONING AGENCY
A. The Contractor will employ and pay for services of an independent 3 rd party commissioning agent (CxA) with the qualifications listed in paragraph 1.5.
B. This specification is provided here for the information of all related trades and Contractor.
C. Although the Contractor employs the CxA, they will report to the Owner, the Owner’s Representative and the Contractor.
D. The process of commissioning as defined here-in goes well beyond typical HVAC system start-up both in detail of testing and in detail of documentation. The director of the commissioning process is the Commissioning Authority (CxA).
E. Commissioning is a systematic process of ensuring that all building systems perform interactively according to the design intent, basis of design, construction documents and Owner’s system operational needs. This is achieved by beginning in the design phase,
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems 15995 Page 1 of 21 SECTION 15995
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
documenting design intent/basis of design and continuing through construction, building acceptance and the warranty period with actual verification of performance. The commissioning process shall coordinate what have traditionally been separate functions of system documentation, equipment startup, control system calibration, testing and balancing, performance testing and Owner training. F. Provide the services of a qualified Commissioning Authority (CxA) with commissioning expertise as described in this section with the following general requirements: 1. Furnish labor and material to accomplish building commissioning as specified herein. 2. Requirements of this specification and associated specific commissioning procedures shall be accomplished by a qualified CxA, as specified in this document.. 3. Unless noted otherwise, functional performance tests (FPT’s) described under Acceptance Criteria in the various sections of this document apply to all equipment and systems identified under “Systems to Be Commissioned”. 4. Develop and perform functional performance testing and troubleshooting of equipment and systems. 5. Manage the quality, coordination, scheduling, and execution of commissioning activities.
1.5 COMMISSIONING TEAM
A. Coordination and management: The Commissioning Authority Firm (CxA) shall provide overall coordination and management of the commissioning program as specified herein.
B. The commissioning process will require cooperation of the Contractor, subcontractors, vendors, Architectural Engineering firm, Commissioning Authority and Owner.
C. The commissioning team shall be comprised of the following: 1. Contractor: Project manager and MEP coordinator. 2. Subcontractors: As required by the prime contractor. 3. Manufacturers’ factory engineers: As specified elsewhere. 4. Commissioning Authority 5. Construction Management Engineer 6. Owner Construction Observers 7. Architectural/Engineering Representatives
1.6 COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY FIRM (CxA) QUALIFICATIONS
A. The CxA shall meet the following minimum qualifications: 1. A minimum of 4 years documented experience specifically in building commissioning. 2. Documentable experience in Building Commissioning.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems 15995 Page 2 of 21 SECTION 15995
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
3. Documentable experience in startup and troubleshooting HVAC, hot water heating, chilled water, plumbing, fire suppression, electrical, emergency power, fire alarm, life safety, and specialty systems of similar complexity to those contained in these documents. 4. A demonstrable working knowledge of complex environmental, fire alarm, electric power control and facility control systems; be capable of understanding control vendor’s operating system and control code; be capable of troubleshooting control code and recommending necessary modifications. 5. Competency in system design and intent. 6. Knowledge of the test and balance of air and hydronic systems. 7. Excellent communication and writing skills, organizational skills, and ability to work well with management and trades contractors. 8. Provide day to day project management by a registered professional engineer with extensive practical field experience and knowledge of the commissioning process. The technical training and experience with extensive practical field experience of all field personnel will also be reviewed. 9. Be a full member of the Building Commissioning Association
B. The CxA shall not be an employee of, or financially associated with any of the contractors, Test and Balance Agency or Temperature controls contractor providing services for the project.
C. The CxA shall not be the project superintendent, foreman, safety officer, MEP coordinator or hold other duties that would keep him/her from fulfilling the responsibilities of the CxA.
1.7 CONSTRUCTION PHASE COMMISSIONING RESPONSIBILITIES
A. ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE COMMISSIONING AGENT (CxA) 1. Mission: The primary point of responsibility is to inform the construction manager, the owner and design team on the status, integration, and performance of HVAC systems within the facility. 2. Information: The CxA shall function as a catalyst and initiator to disseminate information and assist the design and construction teams in implementing completion of the construction process. This shall include system verification, functional performance testing, and conformance with the intended design of each system. Services include documenting construction observations, verification and functional performance testing, and documenting proper distribution of performance and operating information to the owners O&M staff. 3. Quality Control: Assist the responsible parties to maintain a high-quality level of installation by meeting or exceeding prevailing standards and specifications. 4. Observation of Tests: The CxA shall observe and coordinate testing as required to assure system performance meets the design intent. 5. Documentation of Tests: The CxA shall document the results of the performance testing directly and/or assure that testing is documented by the appropriate
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems 15995 Page 3 of 21 SECTION 15995
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
technicians. The CxA shall approve standard forms to be used by all parties for consistency of approach and type of information to be recorded. 6. Deficiencies: The CxA shall provide technical expertise to oversee and verify the correction of deficiencies found during the commissioning process. 7. Resolution of Deficiencies: The CxA is to remain an independent party with specific HVAC knowledge of the project. The CxA shall investigate the scope and extent of the problem and facilitate communication to determine responsibilities by delineating specifications. The CxA shall monitor resolution for conformance with design intent and prevailing industry standards. 8. Acceptance: The CxA shall document the date of acceptance as determined by the construction manager, owner and design team. System Verification Checklists and Functional Performance Test results may be used in determining the start of the warranty period for HVAC systems and subsystems. 9. O&M Material: The CxA will review operating and maintenance materials for HVAC systems. 10. Phasing: The CxA will review phasing plans as provided by the CM relating to temporary use of HVAC equipment, O&M considerations, warranty issues, impact of construction sequencing on occupied areas, and interruption of services from the existing equipment. 11. Independence: The CxA shall be an independent third-party agency and shall work under a separate contract, and report directly to the owner. The CxA shall not be financially associated with any of the Division 2 through 16 installing contractors on this project to avoid potential conflicts of interest.
B. SYSTEMS INCLUDED IN THE COMMISSIONING PROCESS 1. Air Handling Units 2. Energy Recovery Units 3. Variable Air Volume Terminals 4. Fan Powered Terminals 5. Fan Coil Units 6. Propeller Unit Heaters 7. Cabinet Unit Heater 8. Exhaust Fans 9. Chillers 10. Cooling Towers 11. Boilers 12. Hydronic Pumps 14. DDC Control Systems
C. HVAC COMMISSIONING PLAN 1. Commissioning Team a. The Commissioning Team (CT) shall consist of key parties involved in design, construction and testing of this facility. It is necessary for each agency to appoint team members that will have long-term commitments to Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems 15995 Page 4 of 21 SECTION 15995
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
this project. Switching team members during the project will reduce the ability of the CT to provide continuity and acceptable results to the building owner. Team members must maintain an ongoing supervisory position on this project. One team member shall be provided by each of the parties listed below: 1) Program Manager (PrM) 2) Facilities Management Division (FMD) of McCarran International Airport 3) Commissioning Agent (CxA) 4) Design Team (DT) 5) Construction Manager (CM) 6) Mechanical Contractor (MC) 7) Sheet Metal Contractor (SM) 8) Controls Contractor (CC) 9) Test and Balance Contractor (TABC) 10) Electrical Contractor (EC) 2. Design Intent Document a. The Design Intent Document (DID) represents a composite of design drawings, project specifications, submittals, change orders and industry standards that describe the HVAC systems of this facility. References to design intent will be taken from these contract documents. The DID is an evolving manuscript maintained by the design professional to track and incorporate design alterations that occur throughout the construction process. Any industry standards used for this project will be specifically noted when referenced. b. The CxA will review the DID documents for adequate commissioning provisions, functional performance, optimization of performance, accessibility, TAB provisions, and O&M considerations. 3. Commissioning Meetings a. Commissioning meetings will be held in conjunction with progress meetings as necessary. The CxA will be on site for the Cx meetings. Commissioning meetings will be used to address any problems that alter the design intent or affect the commissioning process. These meetings provide an open forum for exchange of ideas between contractors, vendors, designers, users and owners. 4. Resolution Tracking Forms (RTF) a. The use of Resolution Tracking Forms is a method employed by the CxA to monitor and record problems, their causes, and solutions. The use of these lists promotes communication between the installing contractors, design team, commissioning agent, and owner, in order to expedite their resolution in a timely manner. b. The CxA will regularly submit RTF’s to the CT in order to document and resolve deficiencies as quickly as possible. The frequency of RTF submission will be adjusted as project conditions dictate.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems 15995 Page 5 of 21 SECTION 15995
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
5. System Verification Checklists (SVC) / Manufacturers' Checklists a. The CxA will write SVC’s based on the DID. These tests will be created for HVAC systems and subsystems. See SYSTEMS INCLUDED IN THE COMMISSIONING PROCESS above. b. The CxA will review the SVC for each piece of equipment prior to start-up. Equipment will be released for start-up only after these checklists have been completed by the installing contractor and reviewed by the CxA. c. The equipment manufacturers’ checklists must also be reviewed by the CxA prior to start-up. These lists must be completed by the installing contractor, and reviewed by the CxA before start-up can commence. 6. Start-Up a. Start-up of major HVAC systems will be witnessed the CxA. The appropriate contractors and/or manufacturer’s representative will be required on site to perform start-up. No system will be started until the appropriate SVC’s have been completed. No system will be started until the Manufacturer’s checklists have been completed. Start-up will be performed according to the Manufacturer’s recommended procedures. The CxA will visit the site to review completeness of installation in conjunction with progress meetings prior to starting HVAC equipment. b. CT members involved in installation, fabrication, manufacture, control, or design of equipment are required to be present at the time of start-up. A factory-authorized technician will be on site to start equipment when required by the specifications. This will minimize delays in bringing equipment on line and expedite acceptable functional performance in accordance with the DID. 7. Controls Monitoring a. Close monitoring of the Control Contractor’s progress will promote efficient coordination of the TAB work. The CC will be expected to submit point-to-point checklists verifying that his work has been completed and all systems are ready for TAB work and Functional Performance Testing. Programming and graphics will be surveyed by the CxA for completeness and conformance with the DID and the owner’s scheduling requirements. 8. TAB Monitoring a. The preliminary TAB report set-up will be reviewed prior to HVAC equipment start-up, in order to assure that the final TAB report format and content is acceptable. b. TAB work will be monitored so that any problems that prevent or hinder proper air and water balance can be addressed and corrected with minimal delays. By addressing these problems as quickly as possible, we can assure that functional performance testing and owner training will take place on schedule. c. A pencil copy of the TAB report will be reviewed prior to submission of the final TAB report. A written review will be submitted to the TAB contractor and to the DT for their comments. A TAB report approved by the DT will be required before Functional Performance Testing can be carried out. Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems 15995 Page 6 of 21 SECTION 15995
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
The CxA will visit the site during the TAB process in order to assist TABC and CC in the effective completion of their scope of work. 9. Functional Performance Tests (FPT) a. The CxA will write FPT’s based on the DID. These tests will be created for HVAC systems and subsystems. See SYSTEMS INCLUDED IN THE COMMISSIONING PROCESS above. b. Each major system will be tested. A random sample of each subsystem will be tested. This will be coordinated and witnessed by the CxA and the owner’s maintenance staff. Witnessing the FPT’s will serve as a compliment to the O&M Training. No FPT’s will be performed until the system and related subsystems have been started, the TAB report has been submitted and reviewed, and the completion of the control system has been documented through point-to-point checklists and other documentation. c. The Functional Performance Tests shall include HVAC and related equipment. 1) AHU’s will be tested in designed operating modes. Proper operation will be verified at minimum OA, maximum OA, automatic control, and other modes, if necessary, to achieve DID conformance. 2) ERU’s will be tested in designed operating modes. Proper operation will be verified at minimum OA, maximum OA, automatic control, and other modes, if necessary, to achieve DID conformance. 3) VAV’s will be tested at minimum and maximum airflow setpoints, and under automatic control. Intermediate settings will be tested as necessary. 4) FPT’s will be tested at minimum and maximum airflow setpoints, and under automatic control. Intermediate settings will be tested as necessary. 5) FCU’s will be tested at minimum and maximum temperature setpoints, and under automatic control. Intermediate settings will be tested as necessary. 6) Propeller Unit Heaters will be tested for conformance to DID. 7) Cabinet Unit Heaters will be tested for conformance to DID. 8) Exhaust fans will be tested for conformance to DID. 9) Chillers will be tested under relevant operating conditions. 10) Cooling towers will be tested under relevant operating conditions. 11) Boilers will be tested under relevant operating conditions. 12) Hydronic pumps will be tested under relevant operating conditions. 13) DDC control systems will be tested as necessary to achieve DID conformance. 14) HVAC systems will be tested to assure that the building as an integrated system operates properly. Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems 15995 Page 7 of 21 SECTION 15995
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
d. Off-season mode testing will be implemented as necessary to assure conformance with the DID. Installing contractors will be expected to participate as required by the project specifications. 10. Building Turn-Over / Owner Orientation / User Training a. The CxA will assist contractors prepare, coordinate and review O&M manuals, working closely with each contractor to achieve specificity and completeness. b. The CxA will review as-built drawings, working closely with each contractor to achieve specificity and completeness. c. Owner training will be coordinated with the assistance of the CxA. The training will be provided by the installing contractor, or manufacturer’s representative, and witnessed by the CxA. This training should include both classroom training and hands-on operational training. The owner may choose to videotape this training for future use. The CxA will visit the site during the Turn-Over and Training period to assure that any on-going HVAC related problems are being addressed and corrected in a timely and efficient manner. d. The CA will assist the owner/user with warranty issues. e. The CA will assist in the coordination of off-season testing, calibrating, and servicing as specified in the contract documents. 11. Warranty Review a. The CxA will participate in an 11th month walk-through to observe the operation of the HVAC system. This will include a review meeting with FMD, a discussion of warranty issues, energy usage, maintenance practices, usage changes, and chronic problems, as well as other issues affecting the owner and the operation of the HVAC systems.
D. RESPONSIBILITIES OF INSTALLING CONTRACTORS
1. Construction Manager (CM) a. Include commissioning requirements in the mechanical, electrical, and controls contracts, as well as other subcontracts, to assure full cooperation of all parties in the HVAC commissioning process. b. Assure acceptable representation, with the means and authority to prepare and coordinate execution of the mechanical commissioning program as described in the contract documents. c. Assure that the CxA shall receive a copy of all construction documents, addenda, change orders and appropriate approved submittals and shop drawings for review and use in development of the commissioning plan. d. Coordinate inclusion of commissioning activities in the construction schedule. e. Issue a statement that TAB work has been completed, and that the final TAB report has been submitted for review.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems 15995 Page 8 of 21 SECTION 15995
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
f. Issue a statement that control systems have been completely installed and calibrated. g. Facilitate resolution of deficiencies identified by observation or performance testing. 2. Mechanical Contractor (MC) a. Each contractor in this division shall include in their quote the cost of participating in the commissioning process. b. Include requirements for submittal data (including partial load data), O&M data, and training in each purchase order or sub-contract. c. Assure cooperation and participation of specialty sub-contractors such as sheet metal, piping, refrigeration, water treatment and TAB in commissioning activities. d. Assure participation of major equipment manufacturers in appropriate startup, training, and testing activities. e. Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the CxA. f. Assist the CxA in system verification and performance testing. g. Prepare preliminary schedule for HVAC system inspections, O & M manual submission, training sessions, pipe and duct system testing, flushing and cleaning, equipment start-up, system verification, performance testing, and system completion for use by the CxA. Update schedule as appropriate throughout the construction period. h. Complete System Verification Checklists and manufacturer’s pre-start checklists prior to scheduling startup of HVAC equipment. i. Monitor and respond to Resolution Tracking Forms distributed by the CxA in order to expedite corrective actions necessary to achieve design intent. j. Notify the CxA a minimum of two weeks in advance of scheduled system start-up. k. Update drawings to as-built condition and review with the CxA throughout the construction process. l. Schedule vendor and subcontractor provided training sessions as required by project specifications. m. Provide written notification to the CM and CxA that the following work has been completed in accordance with the project specifications, and that the equipment, systems and sub-systems are operating in accordance with design intent. 1) HVAC equipment including fans, air handling units, dehumidification units, ductwork, dampers, terminal devices, etc. 2) Fire detection and smoke detection devices furnished under other divisions as they affect the operation of the HVAC systems. 3) That BAS is functioning in accordance with design intent. n. Participate in the Functional Performance Tests as required to achieve design intent. o. Participate in the off-season mode testing as required to achieve design intent.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems 15995 Page 9 of 21 SECTION 15995
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
p. Participate in O&M Training as required by project specifications. q. Provide a complete set of as-built drawings and O & M manuals for review. The CxA shall review the as-built drawings and O&M manuals concurrently with the design team. 3. Test and Balance Contractor (TABC) a. Include cost for commissioning requirements in the contract price. b. Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the CxA.
c. Submit the TAB procedures and preliminary TAB report to the CxA for review at least two weeks prior to beginning TAB work. d. Notify the CA a minimum of two weeks in advance of scheduled TAB work. e. Assist the CA in system verification and performance testing. f. Monitor and respond to Resolution Tracking Forms distributed by the CxA in order to expedite corrective actions necessary to achieve design intent. g. Participate in verification of the TAB report, which will consist of repeating any selected measurement contained in the TAB report where required by the CxA for verification or diagnostic purposes. h. Participate in the Functional Performance Tests as required to achieve design intent. i. Provide sound and vibration where required to assist in diagnosis of areas exhibiting unacceptable levels of noise or vibration. j. Participate in the off-season mode testing as required to achieve design intent. k. Participate in O&M Training as required by project specifications. 4. Temperature Control Contractor (TCC) a. Include cost for commissioning requirements in the contract price. b. Review control sequence and component selection for conformance with design intent. 1) Verify that specified safeties and interlocks have been selected. 2) Verify proper selection of control valves and actuators based on design parameters. 3) Verify proper selection of control dampers and actuators based on design parameters. 4) Verify that sensor selection conforms to design intent. c. Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the CxA. d. Provide the following submittals to the CxA: 1) Hardware and software submittals. 2) Control panel construction shop drawings. 3) Narrative description of control sequences for each HVAC system and subsystem. 4) Schematics showing all control points, sensor locations, point names, actuators, controllers and where necessary, points of access. Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems 15995 Page 10 of 21 SECTION 15995
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
5) A list of all control points, including analog inputs, analog outputs, digital inputs and digital outputs. Include the values of all parameters for each system point. Provide a separate list for each stand-alone control unit. 6) A complete listing of all software routines employed in operating the control system. Also provide a program narrative that describes the logic flow of the software and the functions of each routine and subroutine. The narrative should also explain individual math or logic operations that are not clear from reading the software listing. 7) Hardware operation and maintenance manuals. 8) Application software and project applications code manuals. 9) Panel and equipment insert documents. e. Verify that specified interfaces provided by others are compatible with BAS hardware and software. f. Coordinate installation and programming of BAS with construction and commissioning schedules. g. Complete System Verification Checklists and manufacturer’s pre-start checklists prior to scheduling startup of HVAC equipment. h. Provide control system technician to assist during equipment startup. i. Monitor and respond to Resolution Tracking Forms distributed by the CxA in order to expedite corrective actions necessary to achieve design intent. j. Participate in the Functional Performance Tests as required by the project specifications. k. Provide a control system technician to assist during verification and performance testing. l. Provide system modifications to achieve system operation as defined by the design intent. m. Provide support and coordination for TAB contractor. Provide all devices, such as portable operator terminals and all software for the TAB to use in completing TAB procedures. n. Participate in the Functional Performance Tests as required to achieve design intent. o. Participate in the off-season mode testing as required to achieve design intent. p. Participate in O&M Training as required by project specifications. Include training on hardware operations and programming. 5. Electrical Contractor (EC) a. Include cost for commissioning requirements in the contract price. b. Review design for provision of power to the HVAC equipment. 1) Verify proper hardware specifications exist for performance as defined by the DID. 2) Verify proper safeties and interlocks are included in the design of electrical connections for HVAC equipment.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems 15995 Page 11 of 21 SECTION 15995
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
c. Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the CxA. d. Verify proper installation and performance of all electrical services provided. e. Complete System Verification Checklists and manufacturer’s pre-start checklists prior to scheduling startup of HVAC equipment. f. Monitor and respond to Resolution Tracking Forms distributed by the CxA in order to expedite corrective actions necessary to achieve design intent. g. Provide an electrical system technician to assist during verification performance testing. h. Participate in the Functional Performance Tests as required to achieve design intent. i. Participate in the off-season mode testing as required to achieve design intent. j. Participate in O&M Training as required by project specifications.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with general and supplemental conditions of the contract and Division I. 1. CxA resume and statement of qualifications: Submit the CxA’s resume for approval of the commissioning authority within 30 days of contract award with following information: a. A description of the firm with services offered and percentage of business dedicated to commissioning. b. Resumes of all commissioning personnel proposed for the project including education and technical training. c. References of a minimum of five (5) projects of similar size and complexity. d. A description of the firm’s approach to commissioning and quality control. The Owner and the A/E reserve the right to personally interview the CxA candidate prior to accepting placement in the position.
B. Commissioning Plan – Construction Phase: Within 60 calendar days of notice to proceed, submit a preliminary construction phase commissioning plan to identify how commissioning activities will be integrated into general construction and trade activities. The plan is the key means for the CxA to inform all parties as to how each system functions, independently and with respect to other systems. The plan shall be updated regularly and redistributed to the commissioning team for review and comment. The intent of this plan is to evoke questions, expose issues, and resolve them with input from the entire commissioning team early in construction. The commissioning plan shall identify how commissioning responsibilities are distributed. Include the following sections: 1. Executive Summary: Provide a description of the Commissioning Manual 2. Commissioning Team: Provide a listing of all commissioning team members including the names, addresses, and office/fax/cell phones number or the owner, commissioning authority, architect, mechanical engineer, electrical engineer,
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems 15995 Page 12 of 21 SECTION 15995
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
general contractor, mechanical contractor, electrical contractor, controls contractor, fire alarm system contractor and test & balance contractor. 3. System Overview: Provide a listing of design weather data, design parameters and all mechanical and electrical systems equipment data. 4. Overview of Testing Program Procedures: Provide a detailed description of the testing plan and procedures that will be implemented during the commissioning process. 5. Record Document - Sequences of Operation: Provide a detailed sequence of operation that is utilized for testing purposes. The final commissioning report shall describe any modifications to the engineer specified sequences of operation. 6. Pre-Functional Testing Checklists: Provide pre-functional testing checklist forms to the contracting team for each individual piece of mechanical equipment. The forms shall describe all events required to fully start-up a piece of equipment. 7. Functional Testing Procedures & Data Forms: Provide complete and detailed functional performance testing procedures required to fully test the entire system including the following: a. Identify which subcontractors will participate in each of the tests. b. Identify instrumentation required for each test. c. Identify who will provide instrumentation for each test. d. Operational description: This shall include, for example, the design criteria, design intent/basis of design, code requirements, specifics of the equipment to be provided, sequences of operation, operating priorities, protocols, etc. Some of these items will be provided to the CxA with the construction package and may be copied or referenced. e. Each procedure shall have a unique alphanumeric designator consisting of the applicable functional performance test procedure designator followed by a dash digit suffix to distinguish multiple repetitions of the same procedure. f. The same procedure may be applied to multiple identical pieces of equipment or systems. g. Procedures shall reference the applicable specification section upon which the procedure is based. h. Identify the value for all setpoints and inputs, positions of adjustable devices, valves, dampers, and switches. i. Identify the range of acceptable results for each condition tested. j. FPT procedures shall be detailed test instructions, written with sufficient step-by-step information to allow a test to be repeated under identical conditions with repeatable results. k. Include space to record: Description of the procedure; whether the form is for a retest of a failed procedure; identification and location of the equipment being tested; identification of instrumentation used by serial number; observed conditions at each step of the procedure; acceptable results as specified elsewhere; date of the test; names of technicians performing the procedure; name and signature of the CxA 8. Provide samples of commissioning forms including: Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems 15995 Page 13 of 21 SECTION 15995
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
a. Deficiencies and Issues Log: Provide a sample functional performance test deficiency report form. Include space to record: Associated functional performance test data form number; date of test; name of person reporting the deficiency; description of the observations associated with the failure of the test; cause of the failure, if apparent at the time of the test; date and description of corrective action taken; name and signature of person taking corrective action; and schedule for retest. b. Daily Log: Provide a blank log as an example. c. Meeting Minutes: Provide a blank log as an example. 9. Commissioning schedule: Submit within 90 calendar days of notice to proceed. 10. Test equipment identification list: For each instrument, sorted according to intended use: Manufacturer; model number; serial number; calibration certification; range; accuracy; resolution; and intended use. 11. Test, adjust, and balance (TAB) information (by TAB Contractor) including: a. TAB Data forms b. TAB procedures: c. TAB report.
1.9 SCHEDULE
A. Commissioning schedule: Integrate functional performance testing and commissioning requirements into the Critical Path Method (CPM) master construction schedule. Commissioning scheduling is the responsibility of the Contractor. 1. Prior to the beginning of start-up or functional performance testing activities, update the schedule of commissioning activities monthly. 2. Two weeks prior to the beginning of start-up or functional performance testing activities, provide a detailed two-week look-ahead schedule. Thereafter, update the two-week look-ahead schedule weekly for the duration of commissioning for that construction phase. The two-week look-ahead schedule shall identify the date, time, beginning location, contractor personnel required, and anticipated duration for each startup or test activity. B. Commissioning of systems shall proceed per the criteria established in the specific sections that follow, with activities to be performed on a timely basis. Commissioning of systems may proceed prior to final completion of systems. The CxA must be available to respond promptly to avoid delay to the CPM schedule.
C. Problems observed shall be addressed immediately, in terms of notification to responsible parties and actions to correct deficiencies.
1.10 COMMISSIONING MEETINGS
A. Scope Meeting: Early in the construction process, a commissioning scoping meeting involving all members of the commissioning team shall be held at a time and place designated by the Owner. The purpose of the meeting will be to familiarize all parties with
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems 15995 Page 14 of 21 SECTION 15995
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
the requirements of the commissioning process, and to ensure that the responsibilities of each party are clearly understood.
B. Progress Meetings: 1. Prior to the beginning of start-up or functional performance testing activities, the CxA will hold commissioning meetings at least monthly. These meetings may be held concurrently with the general construction meetings. 2. Beginning two weeks prior to the commencement of start-up or functional performance testing activities, whichever is earlier, the CxA will hold commissioning meetings at least weekly. Thereafter, and for the duration of commissioning for that construction phase, commissioning meetings will continue to be held at least weekly. These meetings may be held concurrently with the general construction meetings.
C. The CxA may require additional meetings if the commissioning process appears to be behind schedule or if there are coordination problems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. The Division contractor for the equipment tested provides all standard or proprietary testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and required functional performance testing. For example, the mechanical contractor of Division 15 is ultimately responsible for all standard or proprietary testing equipment for the Facility Controls System (FCS) in Division 15, except for equipment specific to and used by TAB in their commissioning responsibilities. The Division contractor provides two-way radios.
B. Include special or proprietary equipment, tools, software and instruments (only available from vendor, specific to a piece of equipment) required for testing equipment, according to these Contract Documents in the base bid price to the Contractor and left on site, except for standalone data logging equipment used by the CxA.
C. The CxA will provide data logging equipment and software required to test equipment.
D. Provide all testing equipment of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the Contract Documents. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: 1. Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year to an accuracy of 0.5°F and a resolution of + or - 0.1 °F. 2. Pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of + or - 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full range of meter) and have been calibrated within the last year.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems 15995 Page 15 of 21 SECTION 15995
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
E. Calibrate all equipment according to the manufacturer’s recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged. Affix calibration tags or have certificates readily available.
2.2 COMMISSIONING REPORTS A. Documentation - General: 1. The Commissioning Authority shall record and maintain detailed testing data. The data record shall be comprehensive and concise. 2. All data must be recorded as soon as possible during the course of the testing. 3. All documentation shall have the date, time, and names of persons participating in the inspection and testing. 4. All test instruments shall be documented for valid calibration. 5. The recording work sheets, inspection check lists, and performance testing plans must all be approved by the Engineer and Commissioning Authority prior to the start of Functional Performance Testing.
B. Daily Commissioning Report Logs: 1. The Commissioning Authority shall provide daily report logs to be included in the final report. 2. The daily logs shall record the commissioning Authority personnel and event summaries of meetings, conversations, tests, failures, solutions, procedures and successes.
C. Installation verification audit: Prior to start-up, the CxA shall maintain a report of installation verification audit activities. Identify equipment and components verified, deficiencies noted, corrective action taken, and the dates and initials of the persons making the entries.
D. Start-up deficiency report: Within five days following start-up of each system or equipment, the CxA shall maintain start-up deficiency report forms. Identify systems and/or equipment started up, deficiencies noted, corrective action taken, and the dates and initials of the persons making the entries.
E. Test, adjust and balance (TAB) progress reports: After TAB activities have begun, the TAB shall submit weekly TAB progress reports to the CxA. Identify: 1. Systems or subsystems for which preliminary balancing is complete. 2. Systems or subsystems for which final balancing is complete. 3. Status of deficiencies and balancing problems encountered, including corrective actions taken. 4. Updated schedule of remaining TAB activities.
F. Deficiencies and Issues Report: At the end of each day, in which functional performance tests are conducted, the CxA shall maintain a deficiencies and Issues (D&I) log for tests for which acceptable results were not achieved during the day. 1. Identify tests for which acceptable results were not obtained by test number and description, and equipment identification and location. Briefly describe Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems 15995 Page 16 of 21 SECTION 15995
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
observations about the performance that was associated with failure to achieve acceptable results. Identify the cause of failure if such is apparent. 2. When corrections have been completed, the CxA shall update the functional performance test deficiency report forms. Identify corrective action taken and the dates and initials of the persons making the entries. 3. Identify the schedule for re-testing.
G. Final Commissioning Report: The CxA shall prepare and submit a final report with the closeout package. The binding format shall be 8 ½ x 11 bound documents with 11 x 17 fold out. This report shall contain: 1. The report shall verify performance of HVAC equipment and systems. 2. Document any field modifications to the testing process and why these modifications were made. 3. The organization of the final commissioning report shall be as follows: a. Executive Summary of each mechanical system and problems encountered and resolved. b. System Overview summarizing the system design. c. Commissioning Plan d. Post Commissioned Controls Sequences and Points Lists. e. Pre-functional Testing Checklists f. Functional Testing Procedures and Results g. Deficiencies and Issues Logs h. Daily report logs. i. Appendix of letters, meeting minutes, memos and notes occurring during the commissioning process.
H. Hardcopy and Electronic Versions: 1. The Commissioning Plan provided prior to the on-site commissioning and the Final Commissioning Report provided at the conclusion shall be provided in hard copy (2 copies) and electronic on CD (6 copies). 2. The Commissioning Plan CD shall include files developed in the most current MS Word format. 3. The Final Commissioning Report CD shall contain scanned copies of all documentation developed and gathered during the Commissioning Process in Acrobat PDF format.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE
A. Sequence of testing: Commissioning shall proceed from lower to higher levels of complexity. For each discrete subsystem or system, testing at the lower level shall be
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems 15995 Page 17 of 21 SECTION 15995
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
completed prior to starting the next higher level of tests. In general, the order of testing from lowest to highest is: 1. Static tests (such as duct piping pressurization tests). 2. Component functional performance tests (of motors, actuators, sensors, etc.) and start-up. 3. Balancing. 4. System functional performance tests. 5. Intersystem functional performance tests.
B. Re-testing: The Contractor shall repeat, at no additional cost to Owner, the complete functional test procedure for each test for which acceptable results are not achieved. Repeat tests until acceptable results are achieved. The CxA shall track commissioning deficiencies until correction. Within each system, the CxA shall provide one recommissioning for any deficiencies. For systems with large quantities of identical equipment, a statistical recommissioning strategy shall be applied to retest 30% of the deficiencies. The tested systems will not be witnessed by the Owner until acceptable results are achieved, documented, reviewed and accepted. Additional testing beyond a single failure may be subject to back-charges by the CxA.
C. Correction of deficiencies: 1. Correct functional performance test deficiencies promptly and schedule retest. 2. Corrections during functional performance tests are generally prohibited to avoid consuming the time of personnel waiting for the test, but not involved in making the correction. Exceptions will be allowed if the cause of the failure is obvious and corrective action can be completed in less than five minutes. If corrections are made under this exception, the failure shall be noted on the functional performance test data form. A new functional performance test data form, marked “retest”, shall be initiated after the correction has been made. The entire functional performance test procedure shall be repeated.
D. Delegated witnesses: Witnesses may be designated by the Owner or A/E to observe the commissioning process. Witnesses shall provide no labor or materials in the commissioning process. The only function of the witnesses shall be to observe and comment on the progress and results of commissioning.
3.2 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED A. General: The systems to be commissioned shall generically include:
1. Division 15 Systems 2. Provide functional performance testing for all modes of operation for all mechanical equipment included in the design. The “as applicable” caveat is intended to exclude any generically listed pieces of equipment that are not included in the design.
B. Mechanical Systems: Provide functional performance testing for all modes of operation
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems 15995 Page 18 of 21 SECTION 15995
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
1. New & Existing Chillers and Chilled Water Systems including integrated sequences and functionality of all new and existing: a. Chillers b. Pumps c. Towers d. Heat exchangers e. VFD’s f. Makeup systems & expansion tanks g. Miscellaneous piping components 2. New Air Handling Systems: 3. Facility Control Honeywell System (Building Automation) including a. Analog sensor calibration verification b. Start/stop, status and alarm verification c. Analog output scaling and device operation verification. d. Sequence of operation testing for all modes of operation for all seasons including review of software. e. Verification of graphics, point display, point command, alarming and interface database verification, interoperability performance. f. Testing of the FCS shall occur in a timely manner to meet the construction schedule. If required, testing shall occur without the MSIP graphics to meet the construction schedule.
3.3 INSTALLATION VERIFICATION
A. During construction, assist the Contractor and coordinate the AE’s observation the work of the Contractor and subcontractors to ensure that all installations are being made in accordance with the intent of the contract documents.
B. Before system start-up begins, coordinate and attend a final installation verification audit with the AE. The audit shall include, but not be limited to, a check of: 1. Piping specialties including balance, control, and isolation valves. 2. Ductwork specialty items including turning devices; balance, fire, smoke, and control dampers; and access doors. 3. Control sensor types and locations. 4. Identification of piping, valves, starters, gauges, thermometers, etc. 5. Documentation of pre-start-up tests performed, including manufacturers’ factory tests. 6. Accessibility to equipment in 1-3 above.
C. If any work is found to be incomplete, inaccessible, incorrect, or non-functional, make note of deficiencies and correct the deficiencies before system start-up work proceeds.
3.4 SYSTEM START-UP
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems 15995 Page 19 of 21 SECTION 15995
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
A. Assist the Contractor in the development a start-up plan and deficiency list. Commence with system start-up after approval has been given to the start-up plan and the pre- functional checklists have been signed off by the Contractor and subcontractors. The CxA and/or delegated representative shall witness system start-up and list all system and equipment deficiencies noted during start-up. The Contractor shall take corrective action on all system deficiencies noted and demonstrate suitable system operation to the CxA.
B. Prepare start-up deficiency list forms to report deficiencies discovered in conjunction with system start-up. Start-up deficiency forms shall indicate the system being started up; the location and identification of the deficient equipment/material; date of observation; initials of the observer; observed deficiency; date of correction; initials of person making the correction; and corrective action taken.
C. Issue start-up deficiency report forms to the Contractor for corrective action. The Contractor shall advise the CxA when all start-up deficiency list items have been corrected.
3.5 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST PROCEDURES
A. The CxA shall develop as a part of the construction phase commissioning plan submittal, the functional performance test (FPT) commissioning procedures and documentation to be used. Personnel experienced in the technical aspects of each system to be commissioned shall be enlarged if necessary to augment the expertise of the CxA. Include functional performance test procedures and functional performance test data sheets for each system based upon actual system configuration. Emphasis shall be placed on testing procedures that will conclusively determine actual system performance and compliance with the design. 1. The test procedures shall fully describe system configuration and steps required for each test, appropriately documented so that another party can repeat the tests with virtually identical results.
B. The FPT procedures must confirm the performance of systems to the extent of the design intent/basis of design and applicable code under which the project was permitted. When a system is accepted, the Owner and A/E must be assured that the system is complete, works as intended, is correctly documented, and that the designated Owner staff is trained in the operation and maintenance of the system.
C. The majority of mechanical equipment requires integral safety devices to stop/prevent equipment operation unless minimum safety standards or conditions are met. This could include adequate oil pressure, proof-of-flow, non-freezing conditions, maximum head pressure, etc. Functional performance test procedures shall demonstrate the actual performance of safety shutoffs in real or closely simulated conditions of failure.
D. Systems may include safety devices and components that control a variety of equipment operating as a system. Interlocks may be hard-wired or installed via software. Functional performance test procedures shall demonstrate these interlocks. Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems 15995 Page 20 of 21 SECTION 15995
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
E. The CxA shall inform appropriate subcontractors and vendors before commissioning is started as to what the test and expected results will be. Whereas some test results and interpretations may not become evident until the actual tests are performed, all participants should have a reasonable understanding of the requirements. The commissioning plan must address the requirements and be distributed to all participants involved with that particular system.
3.6 REVIEW SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION A. The CxA shall review vendor/contractor/Owner-provided detailed FCS software documentation. This includes obtaining FCS program documentation, a review of the programming approach, interface with other systems (such as lighting, fire alarm, security, clock, emergency generator monitoring, sump pumps, and utility metering), and a review of the specific software routines as applied to this project. Discrepancies in programming approaches shall be resolved to provide Owner with the most appropriate, simple, and straightforward approach to software routines.
3.7 EXCLUSIONS
A. The Commissioning Authority shall not be responsible for construction means, methods, job safety, or any management function related to commissioning on the job site.
B. The Contractor shall provide all technician services requiring tools or the use of tools to test, adjust, or otherwise bring equipment into a full operational state.
C. The CxA shall not be responsible for any Civil or Structural testing required.
D. The Commissioning Authority shall not be responsible for Division 15 Test and Balance contractor tasks or Division 16 Electrical Acceptance Testing contractor tasks.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies the basic requirements for the electrical installations and includes requirements common to more than one section of Division 16. In addition, this section and Division 16 specifications apply to the raceway systems for the low voltage structural
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Commissioning of Mechanical Systems 15995 Page 21 of 21 SECTION 16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
cable plant. It expands and supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division 1.
B. Standards of the organizations listed below but referred to in the various sections by basic designation only, form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the reference thereto:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 4. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES). 5. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 6. Insulated Cable Engineers Association ICEA). 7. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 8. National Electrical Contractors' Association (NECA). 9. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 10. Factory Mutual (FM). 11. Federal Specifications (FS). 12. National Electrical Code (NEC) with SNEC Amendments. 13. ANSI TIA/EIA Telecommunication Building Wiring Standards.
C. References shall mean to the latest edition of the standard.
D. Conform to local ordinances and codes.
1.3 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. Contractor shall coordinate with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor regarding the exact and specific rough-in requirements for equipment supplied.
B. Conduits, junction boxes, wireway, etc. required for low voltage/telecommunications, cabling shall be coordinated with telecommunications cabling Contractor prior to rough-in.
1.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
A. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building components.
B. Verify all dimensions by field measurement. Do not scale drawings.
C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for electrical installations.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Electrical Requirements 16010 Page 1 of 6
SECTION 16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior closing-in the building.
F. Coordinate the access panel requirements with General Contractor to accommodate the installation of electrical equipment and materials.
G. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install electrical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
H. Install electrical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.
I. Coordinate the installation of electrical materials and equipment above ceilings with suspension system, mechanical equipment and systems, and structural components.
J. Contractor shall review Mechanical, Structural, Food Service, Low Voltage System and Architectural drawings prior to bid.
K. Final connections to equipment shall be per manufacturer's approved wiring diagrams, details and instructions. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide materials and equipment compatible with equipment actually supplied.
L. It is the intent of these drawings and specifications to establish a standard of quality.
M. Work shall be performed in a workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the Architect.
N. Contractor shall verify and coordinate exact location of equipment to be furnished by others prior to rough-in.
O. Contractor shall be responsible for replacing equipment which is damage due to incorrect field wiring provided under this section or factory wiring in equipment provided under this division.
P. Contractors shall visit site prior to bid and verify that conditions are as indicated. Contractor shall include in his bid, costs required to make his work meet existing conditions.
Q. Proposed substitutions of electrical equipment or request for "or equal" or approved equal" listing shall be submitted to architect not less than ten (10) working days prior to bid. Refer to specifications for additional information. Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Electrical Requirements 16010 Page 2 of 6
SECTION 16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
R. Wire termination provisions for panelboards, circuit breakers, safety switches and all other electrical apparatus shall be listed as suitable for 75 degree C.
S. Systems shall be complete, operable and ready for continuous operations. Lights, switches, receptacles, motors, etc., shall be connected and operable.
T. Electrical equipment shall be located to maintain clear and level clearances outlined in NEC 110-26. Panelboards, switchboards, transformers, disconnects, switches, breakers, etc. shall be located to comply with NEC 110-26(a). Where the clearances outlined in NEC 110-26 cannot be obtained, the Contractor shall notify the engineer prior to performing any rough-in.
U. Maintain separation between telecommunication conduits and electrical feeders, electronic ballasts, transformers, etc. to minimize electromagnetic compatibility issues.
V. Telecommunications horizontal cabling conduit runs that exceed 100 feet shall be provided with junction boxes for every 100 feet or fraction thereof in excess of 100 feet.
W. Contractor shall coordinate horizontal telecommunications cabling routing to ensure TIA/EIA distance standards are not exceeded; in effect, 90 meters/295 feet from TR termination to outlet termination.
X. Contractor shall not exceed two (2) 90 degree elbows in telecommunications conduit runs. If more than two (2) 90 degree turns are required, pull boxes shall be provided for every 180 degrees of bend.
Y. Contractor shall review telecommunications and other low voltage drawings and provide all raceway, conduit, cable tray, etc. as required. Ladder tray within the Telecommunications Room (TR)shall be furnished and installed by the low voltage cabling Contractor.
1.5 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary) and Division 1 Section: SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES for submittal definitions, requirements, and procedures.
B. Data shall be submitted at one time in three ring binders and indexed as scheduled below. Partial submittals will not be accepted.
1. 13100 – Lightning Protection 2. 13704 – Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) System Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Electrical Requirements 16010 Page 3 of 6
SECTION 16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
3. 16060 – Grounding and Bonding 4. 16073 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 5. 16074 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems 6. 16075 – Electrical Identification 7. 16120 – Conductors and Cables 8. 16124 - Medium Voltage Cables 9. 16130 – Raceways and Boxes 10. 16138 – Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems 11. 16139 – Cable Trays 12. 16140 – Wiring Devices 13. 16145 – Lighting Control Devices 14. 16215 – Electrical Power Monitoring and Control 15. 16231 – Packaged Engine Generator 16. 16264 – Static Uninterruptible Power Supply 17. 16271 – Medium Voltage Transformers 18. 16289 – Surge Protective Device 19. 16341 – Medium Voltage Switchgear 20. 16316 – Secondary Unit Substations 21. 16410 – Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 22. 16415 – Transfer Switches 23. 16420 – Enclosed Controllers 24. 16430 – Switchgear 25. 16441 – Switchboards 26. 16442 – Panelboards 27. 16443 – Motor Control Centers 28. 16450 – Enclosed Bus Assemblies 29. 16461 – Low Voltage Transformers 30. 16491 – Fuses 31. 16511 – Interior Lighting 32. 16521 – Exterior Lighting 33. 16561 – Obstruction Lighting 34. 16742 – Telecommunications Infrastructure
C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products and accessories in a single submittal.
D. Identify products requiring color selections.
E. Identify products for use on project.
1.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions will not be permitted.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Electrical Requirements 16010 Page 4 of 6
SECTION 16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.7 PRODUCT LISTING
A. Prepare listing of major electrical equipment and materials for the project.
B. Submit this listing as a part of the submittal requirement specified in the Division 1 Section: "SUBSTITUTION".
1.8 NAMEPLATE DATA
A. Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power operated equipment, indicating, manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, compliance labels and similar information needed for distinct identification; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage and handling.
B. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. Contractor shall protect stored equipment and materials from damage and theft.
C. Coordinate deliveries of electrical materials and equipment to minimize construction congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations.
1.10 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: "CONTRACT CLOSEOUT" for requirements. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.
B. Mark drawings to indicate revisions to conduit size and location both exterior and interior, actual equipment locations, dimensioned to column lines; concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangement support and hanger details; Change Orders; Addendums; concealed control system devices.
C. Mark specifications to indicate approved substitutions; Change Orders; Addendums and equipment and materials used.
1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Electrical Requirements 16010 Page 5 of 6
SECTION 16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to Division 1 Section: "CONTRACT CLOSEOUT" for procedures and requirements for preparation and submittal of maintenance manuals.
B. In addition to the information required by Division 1 for Maintenance Data, include the following information in English.
1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of all replaceable parts.
2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions and summer and winter operating instructions.
3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting, disassembly, repair and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.
4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
C. Contractor installed labels/equipment marking and instruction shall be in English.
1.12 WARRANTIES
A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: WARRANTIES and BONDS for procedures and submittal requirements for warranties. Refer to individual equipment specifications for warranty requirements.
B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 16, into a separated set of vinyl covered, three ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference.
C. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment to include date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.
1.13 CLEANING
A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: "CONTRACT CLOSEOUT" or "CLEANING" for general requirements for final cleaning.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Basic Electrical Requirements 16010 Page 6 of 6
SECTION 16047
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to work specified in this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The extent of general building demolition work is shown on the drawings. Coordinate the required electrical work with the general demolition.
B. Demolition includes complete wrecking of structures and removal and disposal of demolished materials, as shown on drawings and herein specified.
C. Interior demolition includes complete wrecking of interior partitions, work above ceilings, finishes, and structures and removal and disposal of demolished materials, as shown on drawings and herein specified.
D. The Owner shall have the option of retaining any items removed. The Contractor shall deliver these items to the Owner’s designated storage area. Any items not retained by the Owner shall be disposed of off-site by the Contractor.
1.3 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Condition of Structures: The Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of structures to be demolished.
B. Conditions of the structure existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner in so far as practicable. However, variations within structure may occur by Owner’s removal and salvage operations prior to start of demolition work. The drawings are schematic and provided as an aid in bidding. The Contractor shall visit the site and determine the actual conditions prior to bidding.
C. Partial Removal: Items of salvageable value to Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Savaged items must be transported from site as they are removed. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.
D. Traffic: Conduct demolition operations and removal of debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, occupied areas, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Electrical Demolition 16047 Page 1 of 3 SECTION 16047
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
E. Protections: Ensure safe passage of persons around or through area of demolition. Conduct operations to prevent injury to adjacent buildings, structures, other facilities, and persons.
F. Install temporary electrical services, lighting, etc. as required by the Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition operations at no cost to Owner.
H. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain, keep in service, and protect against damage during demolition operations. Allow no interruption in service unless coordinated with Owner at least 24 hours in advance.
I. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities.
J. Contractor will disconnect and seal utilities serving each structure to be demolished, or interior area to be demolished, prior to start of demolition work.
K. If Contractor is required to disconnect utility services or other services to an occupied area, the Contractor shall provide temporary or alternative service to that area.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Applicable
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DEMOLITION
A. Remove all branch and feeder conduit and wire back to panelboards.
B. Where walls, ceilings, or floors are to remain, remove devices and wire. Provide blank cover plate at outlet box.
C. All items shown to remain active shall be furnished with necessary accessible junction boxes and all conduit and wire as required to maintain circuit continuity.
D. All outlet boxes which must be removed due to demolition but which must remain active in order to maintain circuit continuity shall be relocated into ceilings or walls and shall be accessible.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Electrical Demolition 16047 Page 2 of 3 SECTION 16047
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
E. All material fixtures and equipment to be reused shall be removed and stored on site. Before reinstallation, all items are to be cleaned, tested, and prepared for re-use. Fixtures shall be re-lamped and new ballasts installed.
3.2 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIAL
A. General: Remove from site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations. Pay all fees related to removal and pumping.
B. Remove and dispose of interior demolition debris only.
C. Burning of removed materials from demolished structures will not be permitted on site.
D. Removal:
E. Transport materials removed from demolished structures and dispose of off-site.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Electrical Demolition 16047 Page 3 of 3 SECTION 16051
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Grout. 5. Common electrical installation requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:
1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.
2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.
3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Common Work Results for Electrical 16051 Page 1 of 4
SECTION 16051
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames." D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral water stop, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.
1. Minimum Metal Thickness:
a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side more than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm). b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).
2.2 SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Calpico, Inc. b. Metraflex Co. c. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
3. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
4. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Common Work Results for Electrical 16051 Page 2 of 4
SECTION 16051
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.3 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.
C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.
E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Common Work Results for Electrical 16051 Page 3 of 4
SECTION 16051
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise. H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry 1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.
I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using cast-iron pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.4 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Common Work Results for Electrical 16051 Page 4 of 4
SECTION 16073
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.
C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.
D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel slotted support systems.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 16073 Page 1 of 8
SECTION 16073
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
4. Equipment supports.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 16073 Page 2 of 8
SECTION 16073
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.
4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.
5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 16073 Page 3 of 8
SECTION 16073
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.
B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101 and manufacturer’s instructions for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 16073 Page 4 of 8
SECTION 16073
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps, single bolt conduit clamps or single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel.
D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 11/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
E. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. (90 kg).
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to pre-set concrete inserts or expansion anchors.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners or pre-set concrete inserts on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 16073 Page 5 of 8
SECTION 16073
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts, Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with MSS SP-69.
6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.
F. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
G. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch off wall.
H. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions.
I. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit.\
J. Do not use power-actuated anchors.
K. Obtain permission from Owner before drilling or cutting structural members.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site fabricated metal supports.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
D. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.
3.4 CONCRETE BASES
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 16073 Page 6 of 8
SECTION 16073
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.
B. Use 4500-psi (31.0-MPa) 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in Place Concrete.
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).
B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.6 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section “Firestopping”.
3.7 DEMOLITION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 16073 Page 7 of 8
SECTION 16073
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality, and functionality.
B. All abandoned wiring shall be removed in its entirety in accordance with the locally amended National Electrical Code, NFPA 70.
C. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be demolished, in their entirety.
D. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway, indicated to be abandoned in place, 2 inches below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to match existing finish.
E. Remove demolished material from Project site.
F. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for relocation.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 16073 Page 8 of 8
SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Identification for raceway and metal-clad cable. 2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable. 3. Underground-line warning tape. 4. Warning labels and signs. 5. Instruction signs. 6. Equipment identification labels. 7. Miscellaneous identification products.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Electrical Identification 16075 Page 1 of 9
SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
B. Color for Printed Legend:
1. Power Circuits: Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage, if applicable.
C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
D. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
F. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.
2.2 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.
B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Electrical Identification 16075 Page 2 of 9
SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
C. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels: Cut from 0.014-inch- (0.35-mm-) thick aluminum sheet, with stamped, embossed, or scribed legend, and fitted with tabs and matching slots for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors.
D. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking nylon tie fastener.
2.3 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
A. Description: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, polyethylene tape.
1. Not less than 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mils (0.102 mm) thick.
2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.
3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
4. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line.
2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Safety Signs: Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
C. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs for Exterior Use: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)."
2.5 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Electrical Identification 16075 Page 3 of 9
SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with white letters on black face for normal power. White letters on red face for emergency power.
2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on black face for normal power. White letters on red face for emergency power. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).
2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb (22.6 kg), minimum.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C).
4. Color: According to color-coding.
B. Paint: Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. Select primer and finish coats applicable to the materials to be painted.
C. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Raceways and Duct Banks More Than 600 V Concealed within Buildings: 4-inch- (100mm) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch (75-mm) high black letters on 20 inch (500-mm) centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces:
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Electrical Identification 16075 Page 4 of 9
SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches (300 mm) of a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.
2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
B. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables More Than 600 V: Identify with "DANGERHIGH VOLTAGE" in black letters at least 2 inches (50 mm) high, with self- adhesive vinyl labels or paint. Repeat legend at 10-foot (3-m) maximum intervals.
C. Accessible Raceways, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than: Identify with orange self-adhesive vinyl label, paint, or self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands.
D. Accessible Raceways of Auxiliary Systems: Identify the following systems with color- coded, self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands or paint:
1. Color coding for raceways shall be as follows:
Color Minimum Service Band Band Width Security Access Control System Purple 2” EMCS Navy Blue 2” Airlines Communication Light Blue 2” Telephone Black 2”
Power Yellow 2”
Emergency Power Red 2”
Life Safety/Fire Alarm White 2”
Fiber Optic Orange 2”
CCTV Dark Brown 2”
E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For primary and secondary conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use color-coding conductor tape and write-on tags. Identify source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above.
F. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use color-coding conductor tape. Identify each ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Electrical Identification 16075 Page 5 of 9
SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
G. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source and circuit number.
H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.
I. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.
J. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply baked-enamel warning signs. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.
2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.
K. Instruction Signs:
1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer load shedding.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Electrical Identification 16075 Page 6 of 9
SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
L. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. d. Transformers. e. Electrical substations. f. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. g. Motor-control centers. h. Disconnect switches. i. Enclosed circuit breakers. j. Motor starters. k. Push-button stations. l. Power transfer equipment. m. Contactors. n. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. o. Battery inverter units. p. Fire-alarm control panel and annunciators. q. Uninterruptible power supply equipment. r. Rectifiers. s. Battery racks. t. Power-generating units. u. Telephone switching equipment. v. Security-monitoring master station or control panel.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Electrical Identification 16075 Page 7 of 9
SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E. Attach no adhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate.
F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.
G. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.
1. Color shall be factory applied or, for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG, field applied].
2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. d. Neutral: White e. Ground: Green
3. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow. d. Neutral: Gray e. Ground: Green
4. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Electrical Identification 16075 Page 8 of 9
SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
H. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 12 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.
J. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 9 painting Sections.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Electrical Identification 16075 Page 9 of 9
SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Medium-Voltage Cables" for single-conductor and multiconductor cables, cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution systems with 2001 to 35,000 V.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Conductors and Cables 16120 Page 1 of 7
SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conductors shall be annealed copper with conductivity of no less than 98% pure copper.
B. Aluminum conductors are not permitted.
C. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
D. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN XHHW and SO.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.
2.3 SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and conduit.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway.
2. Pressure Plates: Plastic Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Conductors and Cables 16120 Page 2 of 7
SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger, except as indicated below.
1. Use standard conductors for control circuits.
2. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits.
3. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet (25 m).
4. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet (160 m).
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Minimum size #12 AWG; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway.
B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, below raised floors and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway
D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHNTHWN, single conductors in raceway.
E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN.
G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway
H. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Conductors and Cables 16120 Page 3 of 7
SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
I. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
J. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.
D. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."
E. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.
3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Conductors and Cables 16120 Page 4 of 7
SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:
1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).
E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.
F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.
G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and conduit unless sleeve seal is to be installed.
I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
M. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
N. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.6 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Conductors and Cables 16120 Page 5 of 7
SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 7 Section "Through Penetration Firestop Systems."
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors, for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.
a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Test procedures used.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Conductors and Cables 16120 Page 6 of 7
SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Conductors and Cables 16120 Page 7 of 7
SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 for exterior duct banks, manholes, and underground utility construction.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
D. LFMC: Liquid tight flexible metal conduit.
E. RGSC: Rigid galvanized steel conduit.
F. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Custom enclosures and cabinets.
2. For handholes and boxes for underground wiring, including the following:
a. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. b. Frame and cover design. c. Grounding details.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Raceways and Boxes 16130 Page 1 of 15
SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
d. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons. e. Joint details.
C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.
2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Alflex Inc.
3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.
4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
5. Electri-Flex Co.
6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
6. Maverick Tube Corporation.
8. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal.
9. Wheatland Tube Company.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Raceways and Boxes 16130 Page 2 of 15
SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C. IMC: ANSI C80.6.
D. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.
1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.
2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum.
E. EMT: ANSI C80.3.
F. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
H. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquid tight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.
1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886.
2. Fittings for EMT: Steel compression type.
3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
I. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
3. Arnco Corporation.
4. CANTEX Inc.
5. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Raceways and Boxes 16130 Page 3 of 15
SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
6. Condux International, Inc.
6. ElecSYS, Inc.
8. Electri-Flex Co.
9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
10. RACO; a Hubbell Company.
12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
2.3 METAL WIREWAYS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.
2. Hoffman.
3. Square D; Schneider Electric.
B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type or Flanged-and-gasketed type as required.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Raceways and Boxes 16130 Page 4 of 15
SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.
2. EGS/Appleton Electric.
2. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
4. Hoffman.
5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.
6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.
6. RACO; a Hubbell Company.
8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.
9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division.3
10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
10. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.
B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast or sheet metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.
E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
F. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.
G. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Raceways and Boxes 16130 Page 5 of 15
SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
H. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
2.5 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING
A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77.
1. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have closed bottom, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure.
3. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
4. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, for each service.
5. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.
6. Handholes 24 inches wide by 36 inches long (300 mm wide by 600 mm long) and larger shall have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.
B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Jensen Precast b. Armorcast Products Company c. Carson Industries LLC. d. CDR Systems Corporation
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Raceways and Boxes 16130 Page 6 of 15
SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
e. NewBasis
2.6 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral water stop, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138inch (1.3- or 3.5-mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.
D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
2.7 SLEEVE SEALS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
2. Calpico, Inc.
3. Metraflex Co
4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Raceways and Boxes 16130 Page 7 of 15
SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid galvanized steel conduit or IMC.
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid galvanized steel conduit, IMC, or EMT.
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40 PVC, direct buried.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
6. Application of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring:
a. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating. b. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer-concrete units SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating. c. Handholes and Pull Boxes Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf (13 345-N) vertical loading.
B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.
3. Exposed and Subject to Physical Damage: Rigid galvanized steel conduit. Includes raceways in the following locations:
a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet handling units.
4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Raceways and Boxes 16130 Page 8 of 15
SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid galvanized steel conduit, IMC.
7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel in damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (24-mm) trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.
E. All conduits larger than 1” shall be furnished with grounding type busing with equipment grounding conductor solidly connected at both ends.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter. Raceway and boxes located as shown on Drawings, and at other locations where required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway as required to complete wiring system. Sizes shall meet or exceed NEC requirements. Raceway routing is shown for reference only. Route as required for a complete raceway system.
B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."
E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run between boxes except for communications conduits. Provide no more than the equivalent of two (2) 90 degree bends between boxes.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Raceways and Boxes 16130 Page 9 of 15
SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated except as follows:
1. Mechanical, Electrical, Telecommunications and elevator machine rooms.
2. Any variance shall be obtained from the OWNER.
H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs above grade:
1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.
2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.
3. Change from Type EPC-40-PVC to rigid steel conduit, before the elbow and rising above the floor.
I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. K. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire.
L. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:
1. 3/4-Inch (19-mm) Trade Size: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet (15 m).
2. 1-Inch (25-mm) Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet (23 m).
3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.
4. Telecommunications conduit 90 degree elbows shall be provided with six (6) time outside diameter radius for 2-inch and smaller, 10 times outside diameter for greater than 2-inch trade sizes.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Raceways and Boxes 16130 Page 10 of 15
SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
M. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.
2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
N. Rout raceways, concealed or exposed parallel and perpendicular to walls and building structural components.
O. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semi recessed lighting fixtures, maximum 36 inches (915 mm) for connection to equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations.
P. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
Q. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation.
R. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.
S. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
T. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes.
U. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2-inch (50mm) trade size.
3.2 BOX APPLICATIONS
A. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.
B. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated. Comply with ADA where required.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Raceways and Boxes 16130 Page 11 of 15
SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
C. Adjust box location up to 10 feet (3m) prior to rough-in if required to accommodate intended purpose.
D. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 16140.
E. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
F. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches (150mm) from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
G. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
H. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches (150 mm) separation. Provide minimum 24 inches (600 mm) separation in acoustic and fire rated walls.
I. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.
J. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
K. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
L. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
M. Support boxes independently of conduit.
N. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. O. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
P. Do not use boxes smaller than 4-inches square.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct-Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for pipe less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter.
2. Install backfill as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Raceways and Boxes 16130 Page 12 of 15
SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
4. Install manufactured PVC coated rigid steel conduit elbows and risers for transitions from below grade or slab on grade to above grade.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES
A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.
C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.
D. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure.
E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.
3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Raceways and Boxes 16130 Page 13 of 15
SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).
E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.
F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.
I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply with Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.6 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Raceways and Boxes 16130 Page 14 of 15
SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
seals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.
B. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Raceways and Boxes 16130 Page 15 of 15
SECTION 16410
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches and circuit breakers:
1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Bolted-pressure contact switches. 4. Molded-case circuit breakers. 5. Molded-case switches. 6. Enclosures.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. GD: General duty.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. HD: Heavy duty.
D. RMS: Root mean square.
E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Current and voltage ratings.
3. Short-circuit current rating.
4. UL listing for series rating of installed devices.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 16410 Page 1 of 8 SECTION 16410
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field quality-control test reports including the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.
F. Manufacturer's field service report.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1. include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 16410 Page 2 of 8 SECTION 16410
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
D. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 140 deg F (60 deg C).
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 2500 feet (above sea level).
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.
2.2 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.
2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D/Group Schneider.
B. Fusible Switch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 16410 Page 3 of 8 SECTION 16410
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
C. Nonfusible Switch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
D. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded, and bonded; and labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Auxiliary set of contacts arranged to open before switch blades open.
2.3 FUSED POWER CIRCUIT DEVICES
A. Bolted-Pressure Contact Switch: 800A and larger UL 977; operating mechanism shall use a rotary-mechanical-bolting action to produce and maintain high-clamping pressure on the switch blade after it engages the stationary contacts.
Manufacturers:
a. Boltswitch, Inc. b. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. c. Pringle Electrical Mfg. Co. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. e. Square D/Group Schneider.
2.4 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.
2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D/Group Schneider.
B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 16410 Page 4 of 8 SECTION 16410
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic Trip-Unit Circuit Breakers: RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug; with the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
5. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door.
6. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 5 -mA trip sensitivity.
C. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories:
1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.
3. Application Listing: Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
4. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
5. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage.
6. Auxiliary Switch: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.
7. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 16410 Page 5 of 8 SECTION 16410
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
8. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground fault protection function.
D. Molded-Case Switches: Molded-case circuit breaker with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating.
E. Molded-Case Switch Accessories:
1. Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of conductors.
2. Application Listing: Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
3. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage. Provide "dummy" trip unit where required for proper operation.
4. Auxiliary Switch: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.
5. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit operation; key shall be removable only when switch is in off position.
2.5 ENCLOSURES
A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location.
1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
2. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
4. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7C.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 16410 Page 6 of 8 SECTION 16410
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA PB 2.1 for installation of enclosed switches and circuit breakers.
B. Mount individual wall-mounting switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor floor-mounting switches to concrete base.
C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."
D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Prepare for acceptance testing as follows:
1. Inspect mechanical and electrical connections.
2. Verify switch and relay type and labeling verification.
3. Verify rating of installed fuses.
4. Inspect proper installation of type, size, quantity, and arrangement of mounting or anchorage devices complying with manufacturer's certification.
C. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 16410 Page 7 of 8 SECTION 16410
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1. Test mounting and anchorage devices according to requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."
2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
4. Infrared Scanning:
a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Open or remove doors or panels so connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-Up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each unit 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. c. Instruments, Equipment and Reports: 1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 2) Prepare a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers included and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
3.6 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, vacuum dirt and debris from interiors; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
B. Inspect exposed surfaces and repair damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 16410 Page 8 of 8 SECTION 16443
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes motor-control centers for use on ac circuits rated 600 V and less.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for interfacing communication and metering requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of controller and each type of motor-control center. Include dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each motor-control center.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Nameplate legends. c. Short-circuit current ratings of buses and installed units. d. Vertical and horizontal bus capacities. e. UL listing for series rating of overcurrent protective devices in combination controllers. f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each motor- control center unit.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for class and type of motor- control center. Provide schematic wiring diagram for each type of controller.
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around motor-control centers where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show motor-control center layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS 16443 Page 1 of 10 SECTION 16443
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements. D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For motor-control centers, all installed devices, and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1, include the following: 1. Routine maintenance requirements for motor-control centers and all installed components.
2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain motor-control centers and controllers of a single type through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for motor- control centers, including clearances between motor-control centers, and for adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions and clearances.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver motor-control centers in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path as indicated.
B. Handle motor-control centers according to the following:
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS 16443 Page 2 of 10 SECTION 16443
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
1. NEMA ICS 2.3, "Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Motor Control Centers Rated Not More Than 600 Volts."
2. NECA 402, "Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Motor Control Centers."
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of motor-control centers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7.
D. Coordinate features of motor-control centers, installed units, and accessory devices with pilot devices and control circuits to which they connect.
E. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each motor-control center, each controller, and each installed unit with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor and load.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Spare Fuses: Furnish one spare set of three of each type and rating installed.
2. Indicating Lights: Two of each type installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.
2. General Electric Company; GE Industrial Systems.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS 16443 Page 3 of 10 SECTION 16443
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
3. Siemens/Furnas Controls.
4. Square D.
2.2 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
A. Wiring: NEMA ICS 3, Class II, Type B.
B. Enclosures: Flush- or surface-mounting cabinets as indicated. NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
2. Compartments: Modular; individual doors with concealed hinges and quick- captive screw fasteners. Interlocks on combination controller units requiring disconnecting means in off position before door can be opened or closed, except by operating a permissive release device.
3. Interchangeability: Compartments constructed to allow for removal of units without opening adjacent doors, disconnecting adjacent compartments, or disturbing operation of other units in motor-control center; same size compartments to permit interchangeability and ready rearrangement of units, such as replacing three single units with a unit requiring three spaces, without cutting or welding.
4. Wiring Spaces: Wiring channel in each vertical section for vertical and horizontal wiring to each unit compartment; supports to hold wiring in place.
C. Short-Circuit Current Rating for Each Section: Equal to or greater than indicated available fault current in symmetrical amperes at motor-control center location.
2.3 BUSES
A. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
B. Ampacity Ratings: As indicated for horizontal and vertical main buses.
C. Neutral Buses: Full size.
D. Equipment Ground Bus: Noninsulated, horizontal configuration; adequate for equipment ground conductors; bonded to enclosure.
E. Horizontal Bus Arrangement: Main phase, neutral and ground buses extended with same capacity the entire length of motor-control center, with provision for future extension at both ends by bolt holes and captive bus splice sections or equivalent.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS 16443 Page 4 of 10 SECTION 16443
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
F. Short-Circuit Withstand Rating: Same as short-circuit current rating of section.
2.4 FUNCTIONAL FEATURES
A. Description: Modular arrangement of controllers, control devices, overcurrent protective devices, transformers, panelboards, instruments, indicating panels, blank panels, and other items mounted in compartments of motor-control center.
B. Controller Units: Combination controller units of types and with features, ratings, and circuit assignments indicated.
1. Install units up to and including Size 3 on draw out mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with vertical-section buses while being racked into their normal, energized positions.
2. Provide units with short-circuit current ratings equal to or greater than short- circuit current rating of motor-control center section.
3. Equip units in Type B and Type C motor-control centers with pull-apart terminal strips or draw out terminal boards for external control connections.
4. Controller Disconnecting Means: Factory-assembled combination disconnect and controller.
a. Fusible Disconnecting Means: NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with rejection-type fuse clips rated for fuses. Select and size fuses to provide Type 2 protection according to IEC 947-4-1, as certified by an NRTL. b. Nonfusible Disconnecting Means: NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfusible switch. c. Circuit-Breaker Disconnecting Means: NEMA AB 1, motor-circuit protector with field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.
C. Overcurrent Protective Devices: Individual feeder-tap units through 225-A rating shall have draw out mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with vertical- section buses while being racked into their normal, energized positions.
D. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors: Connect to motor-control center bus.
E. Spaces and Blank Units: Compartments fully bused and equipped with guide rails or equivalent, ready for insertion of draw out units.
F. Spare Units: Type, sizes, and ratings indicated; installed in compartments indicated "spare."
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS 16443 Page 5 of 10 SECTION 16443
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
2.5 ACROSS-THE-LINE CONTROLLERS
A. Manual Controller: NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A, with toggle action and overload element.
B. Magnetic Controller: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, non-reversing, across the line, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Control Circuit: 120 V; obtained from [integral control power transformer 75 VA minimum size or of sufficient capacity to operate connected pilot, indicating and control devices, plus 100 percent spare capacity.
2. Adjustable Overload Relay: Dip switch selectable for motor running overload protection with NEMA ICS 2, Class 20 tripping characteristic unless otherwise required by the coordination study, and selected to protect motor against voltage and current unbalance and single phasing. Provide relay with Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent nuisance trip on starting.
2.6 FEEDER OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
A. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
1. Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers: RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug; with the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response. 2. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
3. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single and two-pole configurations with 5 -mA trip sensitivity.
B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
1. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of conductors.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS 16443 Page 6 of 10 SECTION 16443
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
3. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
4. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at [55] [75] percent of rated voltage.
5. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.
C. Fusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, clips to accommodate specified fuses with lockable handle.
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Push-Button Stations, LED Pilot Lights (red on, green off), and rotary type hand, off, auto selector switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type.
C. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed position with control circuit open.
D. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays.
E. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS, 2, 2 each normally open and normally closed contacts in addition to seal-in contact.
2.11 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested, motor- control centers before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive motor-control centers for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS 16443 Page 7 of 10 SECTION 16443
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Select features of each controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, controller, and load; and configuration of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller functions.
B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Anchor each motor-control center assembly to steel-channel sills arranged and sized according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and grout sills flush with motor-control center mounting surface.
B. Install motor-control centers on concrete bases.
C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Equipment”.
D. Controller Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Fuses."
3.4 CONCRETE BASES
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Verify structural requirements with structural engineer.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify motor-control center, motor-control center components, and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for motor-control centers, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of motor-control centers.
3.6 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between motor-control devices according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS 16443 Page 8 of 10 SECTION 16443
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices where applicable.
1. Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in hand position.
2. Connect selector switches with motor-control circuit in both hand and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Conduit installation requirements are specified in other Division 16 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each motor-control center element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following:
1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.
2. To assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of solid- state controllers.
3. Report results in writing.
C. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection, except for optional tests, stated in NETA ATS "Motor Control Centers." Certify compliance with test parameters.
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS 16443 Page 9 of 10 SECTION 16443
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3.9 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain components of motor-control centers including solid-state controllers. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."
B. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for energizing and de- energizing, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules. C. Review data in maintenance manuals.
D. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days notice.
END OF SECTION
Bid Document Contract No. IH-17-013 May 21, 2018 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS 16443 Page 10 of 10 McCARRAN INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT CLARK COUNTY, NEVADA
T1-BRIDGE/ROTUNDA HVAC AHU REPLACEMENT
McCARRAN INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT LAS VEGAS, NEVADA
EXHIBIT “F” - LIST OF DRAWINGS
NUMBER DESCRIPTION
COVER DOA COVER SHEET G1.0 ABBREVIATIONS, CODE ANALYSIS, DRAWING INDEX, GENERAL NOTES, PROJECT LOCATION, LEGENDS AND SYMBOLS G2.0 PAINTING AND FLOOR CLEANING PLAN S0.0 COVER SHEET AND GENERAL NOTES S1.0 STRUCTURAL FLOOR PLAN S2.0 STRUCTURAL DETAILS M0.1 INDEX, LEGEND, SCHEDULES AND GENERAL NOTES M0.2 DIAGRAMS & DDC CONTROLS M0.3 ASBESTOS REPORT MD3.0 DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN - MECHANICAL M3.0 FLOOR PLAN - MECHANICAL E1.0 ELECTRICAL PLAN
Contract No. IH-17-013 Bid Document Exhibit “F” – List of Drawings May 21, 2018 Page 1 of 1